Oracle Performance Management Architect Administrator's Guide

Chapter 13, “Working with Profitability and Cost Management Properties”

Restrictions” on page 350 and

Syntax

!Section=Dimensions

'Name;DimensionClass;Dimension_Property1;... ;Dimension_PropertyN

Parameter Description

Name

A dimension name, for example, Currency. This parameter is required.

Note: Dimension names cannot begin with an exclamation point (!).

DimensionClass

The dimension type. For example, Generic. This parameter is required for new dimensions.

Dimension_PropertyX

Dimension level property name.

Example

!Section=Dimensions

'Name;DimensionClass;DimensionAlias

MyCurrency;Currency;Currencies

MyScenario;Scenario;Scenarios

MyEntity;Entity;Entities

MyAccount;Account;Accounts

Example (Importing Dimension Readers and Dimension Writers Properties)

You can use the underscore character (_) to add line breaks when loading dimension writer and dimension reader properties, since the lines can be extremely long. Example of dimension reader properties:

Group1@Native Directory_

PowerUsers@Native Directory_

JSmith@EdenCorp

Note: Dimension names should follow standard naming practices. See

“Dimension Naming

“Naming Restrictions for Dimensions, Members, and

Aliases” on page 372

. In addition, Smart List dimension names cannot include special characters, hyphens, or spaces.

Creating Flat Files

Dimension Associations Section

This section contains information about the associations between dimensions, for example an association between the account dimension and the security class dimension.

Note: If member properties refer to another dimension, this section is required for new dimensions and for dimensions when using replace mode. It is optional for dimensions if using merge mode.

Syntax

!Section=DimensionAssociations

'BaseDimension;Property;TargetDimension

Parameter Description

BaseDimension

Name of the base dimension whose member property will be associated with another dimension. This is a required column.

The name of the associated property, for example 'Alias.' This is a required column.

Property

TargetDimension

Name of the dimension with which the associated property is associated. This is a required column.

Example

!Section=DimensionAssociations

'BaseDimension;Property;TargetDimension

Currency;SecurityClass;MySecurityClassDimension

Scenario;Alias;MyAliasDimension

Account;UDA;MyUDADimension

Members Section

This section defines dimension members and their member properties. Relationship member properties cannot be defined in this section since they require a parent child relationship. For example, 'AggregationWeight' cannot be defined in the Members section.

Dimension properties are defined in product-specific chapters: l l l

Chapter 11, “Working with Financial Management Dimensions”

Chapter 13, “Working with Profitability and Cost Management Properties”

additional information, see “Smart List Names” on page 110 .

Note: This section is optional. Member property values can also be defined in the Hierarchies and PropertyArray sections of the flat file.

Importing Metadata

Syntax

!Members=Dimension_Name

'Name;Member_Property1;…;Member_PropertyN

Parameter

Dimension_Name

Description

Name of dimension whose members are being defined.

A member name, for example Euro. This is a required column.

Name

Member_PropertyX

Member-level property name for the respective dimension type. See the product-specific chapters for property information.

Example

!Members=Currency

'Name;Scale;TranslationOperator;DisplayInICT

EURO;Whole;;y

GBR;Whole;;

USD;Whole;;

!Members=Scenario

'Name;DefaultFrequency;DefaultView;ZeroViewForNonAdj;_

ZeroViewForAdjConsolidateYTD;MaximumReviewLevel;UsesLineItems;_

Creating Flat Files 3

EnableProcessManagement;SecurityClass;EnableDataAudit;_

DefFreqForICTrans

Actual;MTD;Periodic;Periodic;Periodic;N;10;Y;N;;Y;MTD

Budget;MTD;Periodic;Periodic;Periodic;N;10;Y;Y;;Y;MTD

!Members=Entity

'Name;Currency;AllowAdjs;AllowAdjFromChildren;_

HoldingCompany;SecurityAsPartner;IsICP;SecurityClass

Entity_[None];[None];N;N;;;N;

Regional;USD;Y;N;;;N;CORPORATE

UnitedStates;USD;Y;Y;;;N;US

!Members=Account

'Name;ConsolidationAccountType;IsCalculated;_

IsConsolidated;PlugAccount;Custom1TopMember;Custom2TopMember;_

Custom3TopMember;Custom4TopMember;NumDecimalPlaces;_

EnableCustom1Aggr;EnableCustom2Aggr;EnableCustom3Aggr;_

EnableCustom4Aggr;XBRLTags;ICPTopMember;IsICP;UsesLineItems;_

SecurityClass;EnableDataAudit;CalcAttribute

Account_[None];Revenue;N;N;;;;;;0;Y;Y;Y;Y;;;N;N;;N;

ExchangeRates;GroupLabel;Y;Y;;;;;;0;Y;Y;Y;Y;;;N;N;;N;

Plug;Revenue;N;Y;;;;;;0;Y;Y;Y;Y;;;N;N;;N;

Example

Example of defining a member formula in the Members section. (Underscores (_) are used to escape line breaks.)

!Members=Planning_Account

'Name|BSOMemberFormula

SpecialAccount|[OpenInputValueBlock]_

Creating Flat Files

[TimeBalanceFormula("Spread_Average")]_

[CloseInputValueBlock]

Note: Smart List member names cannot contain special characters, hyphens, or spaces. For

Note: The

MemberFormula

property has been deprecated. If the flat file uses

MemberFormula

, a warning is displayed and the values are ignored. You should use the

ASOMemberFormula

BSOMemberFormula

property instead.

ASOMemberFormula

is valid for Essbase ASO and Profitability and Cost Management applications.

BSOMemberFormula

is valid for Essbase BSO, Profitability and Cost Management, and

Planning applications.

Hierarchies Section

This section defines the dimension members, their member and relationship properties, and hierarchical/parent-child relationships. This section: l l l is required for new dimensions and existing dimensions that use the replace method.

is optional for existing dimensions that use the merge method.

controls the order of members under a parent. Members of existing dimensions are reordered during replace-mode import execution if all members under a parent are present in the Hierarchies section.

Syntax

!Hierarchies=Dimension_Name

'Parent;Child;Member-Relationship_Property1;…;Member-Relationship_PropertyN

Parameter

Dimension_Name

Parent

Child

Member-Relationship_

PropertyX

IsPrimary

Description

Name of dimension whose members are being defined.

Name of parent member. This is a required column.

Name of child member. This is a required column.

Member-level property or member relationship property name for the respective dimension type. See the product-specific chapters for member property information.

Specifies whether an instance of a member under a parent is primary or shared. The IsPrimary parameter is optional; however, we strongly recommend that you use it. If left undefined, it defaults to “True”, which assumes that the member is primary. See

“Specifying Primary and Shared Instances of a Member using IsPrimary” on page 54

Example

!Hierarchies=Currency

'Parent;Child

#root;EURO

Importing Metadata

#root;GBR

#root;USD

!Hierarchies=Scenario

'Parent;Child

#root;Actual

#root;Budget

!Hierarchies=Entity

'Parent;Child

#root;Entity_[None]

#root;Regional

Regional;UnitedStates

UnitedStates;California

California;Sunnyvale

California;FosterCity

UnitedStates;Connecticut

Connecticut;Stamford

!Hierarchies=Account

'Parent;Child

#root;Account_[None]

#root;ExchangeRates

ExchangeRates;Rate1

ExchangeRates;Rate2

#root;Plug

Note: The token '#root' is used to refer to the top dimension member as the parent. Alternatively, the dimension name can also be used to refer to the top dimension member as the parent.

Tip: Properties containing multiple values, like Alias and UDA can be defined in the Hierarchies section.

Example

Example of defining the Alias property in the Hierarchies section:

!Hierarchies=Entity

'Parent;Child;DefaultParent;Currency;AllowAdjs;AllowAdjFromChildren;HoldingCompany;Alias

=English;Alias=French

#root;Entity_[None];Y;[None];N;N;;Entity None Alias;French None Alias

#root;Regional;Y;USD;Y;N;;Regional Operations;Operationes Regionale

Example

Example of defining the UDA property in the Hierarchies section:

!Hierarchies=Plan1Account

'Parent;Child;UDA1; UDA2;UDA3;

111092;HSP_NOLINK;Plan1;Plan3

111093;HSP_NOLINK;Plan3

Creating Flat Files

Specifying Primary and Shared Instances of a Member using IsPrimary

In import files, any two members in the same dimension, with the same name, are always treated as separate instances of the same member. If a member has multiple instances in a dimension, the IsPrimary column specifies which instance is primary and which instance(s) are shared. The

IsPrimary column is not required; however, we strongly recommend that you use it. If left undefined, it defaults to “True”, which assumes that the member is primary. If left undefined, a warning is displayed in the Import Results file.

Note: Older import files, that do not use the IsPrimary column, can still be run. However, if the import file does not have the IsPrimary column, it is not possible to create shared members or move members.

Property Array Section

This section can be used to define multi-value and single value properties for members of a dimension.

For information on product-specific member level properties, see

Chapter 11, “Working with

Financial Management Dimensions”

, Chapter 12, “Working with Planning Dimensions”

“Dimension and Member Properties” on page 383 , and

Chapter 14, “Working with Essbase

Properties.”

Note: This section is optional.

Syntax

!PropertyArray=Dimension_Name

'Property;Name;Key;Value;

Parameter Description

Dimension_Name

Name of dimension whose members are being defined.

Property

Name

Key

Name of the property that will be modified. This is a required column.

Name of the member whose property will be modified. This is a required column.

If Property is:

UDA—A UDA value. To clear UDA values, leave this field blank and enable the “Clear Before Importing” option for

UDA in the profile.

Alias—The alias table name or description name.

Other—Should always be blank.

Importing Metadata

Parameter

Value

Description

If Property is:

UDA—Should always be blank.

Alias—The alias or description corresponding to the value specified in Key. To clear the Alias value for this member and Key, leave this blank and specify the “Clear Before Importing” option for Alias in the import profile.

Other—Property value.

Examples

Defining Alias Property Values

!PropertyArray=Currency

'Property;Name;Key;Value

Alias;EURO;English;European Euro

Alias;EURO;French;

Alias;EURO;German;

Alias;EURO;Italian;

Alias;EURO;Japanese;

Alias;GBR;English;Great Britain Pounds

Alias;GBR;French;

Alias;GBR;German;

Alias;GBR;Italian;

Alias;GBR;Japanese;

Alias;USD;English;United Stated Dollars

Alias;USD;French;

Alias;USD;German;

Alias;USD;Italian;

Alias;USD;Japanese;

Deleting an Alias Value (Value is left blank)

!PropertyArray=Currency

'Property;Name;Key;Value

Alias;EURO;English;

Deleting all Alias Values for a Member (Key and Value are left blank)

!PropertyArray=Currency

'Property;Name;Key;Value

Alias;EURO;;

Defining UDA Property Values

!PropertyArray=Account

'Property;Name;Key;Value

UDA;ExchangeRates;UDA1;

UDA;ExchangeRates;UDA2;

UDA;Plug;UDA1;

UDA;Plug;UDA2;

Deleting all UDA values for a member (Key and Value are left blank)

!PropertyArray=Account

'Property;Name;Key;Value

UDA;ExchangeRates;;

Creating Flat Files

Defining Single-Value Property Values

!PropertyArray=Account

'Property|Name|Key|Value

ACCOUNTTYPE|MemberRev||Revenue

ACCOUNTTYPE|MemberExp||Expense

Performance Management Architect supports single value member properties for dimension imports. It allows a member, property, and value to be entered without a key in either the flat file !PropertyArray section or any of the Property Array interface tables and it is treated as a single-value member property assignment as opposed to an array property. In the interface table, the data would look like:

Load ID

Property

ACCOUNTTYPE

Name

MemberRev

MemberExp

Key Value

Revenue

Expense

In the flat file, the !PropertyArray section would look like:

!PropertyArray=Account

'Property|Name|Key|Value

ACCOUNTTYPE|MemberRev||Revenue

ACCOUNTTYPE|MemberExp||Expense

The benefit is that if the ACCOUNTTYPE property was not currently part of your imported data, and you want to start assigning it, is not necessary to add an ACCOUNTTYPE column to your HS_*Member or HS_*Hierarchy tables. In the case of flat file imports, it is not necessary to add an ACCOUNTTYPE column to your generated !Members and !Hierarchies sections.

Using Interface Tables

Interface tables allow you to import data and metadata from external systems into Performance

Management Architect through a relational database.

Importing Metadata

Importing metadata from interface tables is a two-part process. The first part, which occurs outside of Performance Management Architect, is denoted in the diagram by a dashed line. The second part occurs within Performance Management Architect.

1. Move information from an ERP system or general ledger system into ERP Integrator.

2. Move information from ERP Integrator into Performance Management Architect interface tables.

3. Import metadata from the interface tables into Performance Management Architect.

4. Create Financial Management, Profitability and Cost Management, Planning, and Essbase applications that use the imported metadata.

You can configure multiple Performance Management Architect interface table definitions. The database types of Performance Management Architect and the interface tables can differ. For example, the Performance Management Architect database can use SQL Server and the

Performance Management Architect interfaces can use Oracle. As a best practice, interface tables should not be configured in the same database tablespace as Performance Management

Architect.

Configuring Interface Data Sources

This procedure is required if you want to use interface tables in Performance Management

Architect. Interface tables consist of a set of tables and or views that enable the import of metadata and data from external systems into Performance Management Architect. Before importing metadata and data from interface tables, you must configure interface tables in Performance

Using Interface Tables

Management Architect. You configure the tables by creating data source links that can be used during profile creation and data synchronization.

See

Chapter 3, “Importing Metadata”

and

Chapter 8, “Synchronizing Data.”

If you plan to use Performance Management Architect with ERP Integrator, the interface data source must be in the ERP Integrator database schema. In addition, if using Oracle Hyperion

Financial Data Quality Management ERP Integration Adapter for Oracle Applications, you should deselect the option to create interface tables in the procedure below.

To create an interface data source:

In EPM Workspace, select Navigate, Administer, Configure Interface Data Source.

When the Interface Data Source tab is displayed, click Create a New Data Source or select File, New,

Interface Data Source.

In the Interface Data Source Wizard, for Database Details, select a database type (Oracle, Microsoft

SQL Server, or IBM DB2), and enter the following details about it: a. Enter the name and the port number of the server hosting the database. (The defaults display based on the database type.) b. Enter the Service Name/SID of the database. This is the name of the database on the server.

c. Enter the database username and password.

d. Optional: Enter the Connection URL for the database.

If you want to test the connection to the database, click Test.

For Data Source Details, enter the database name to use as an interface data source. You may also enter a description of the data source.

Select Create Tables, and click Finish to create the tables.

After you finish the wizard, the properties of the new data source (for example, its name, description database type, and database server) are displayed on the Interface Data Source tab.

After you complete the configuration, a set of sample tables is created in the database. For a complete list of the sample tables, see

“Defining Interface Tables” on page 60

Note: You can review the configuration log (

EPM_ORACLE_INSTANCE/diagnostics/ logs/config

), correct errors, and rerun the wizard.

Editing Interface Data Sources

You can edit any of the properties of an interface data source, including the name and description of the data source and the database name, server, and user name.

To edit an interface data source:

Select Navigate, Administer, Configure Interface Data Source.

Importing Metadata

When the Interface Data Source tab is displayed, right-click the data source you want to edit, and select Edit.

In the Interface Data Source Wizard, for Database Details, edit any of the following properties of the data source: a. Edit the name and/or port number of the server hosting the database. (The defaults display based on the database type.) b. Edit the Service Name/SID of the database. This is the name of the database on the server.

c. Edit the database username and/or password.

d. Edit the Connection URL for the database.

If you want to test the connection to the database, click Test.

For Data Source Details, edit the description of the data source.

Note: While editing a data source, the name you gave to the data source when you created it is displayed in read only; you cannot edit the data source name.

Select Create Tables, and click Finish to update the tables with your changes.

Note: If you do not select the Create interface tables check box, no tables are created. If you select the check box to create the interface tables, both IM_ (internal) and HS_

(sample) tables will be created. If the tables already exist, you are prompted to delete the existing IM_ and HS_ tables. If you click Yes to delete the existing tables, the new tables are created. However, if you select No, the existing IM_ and HS_ tables are left unchanged.

Note: You may review the configuration log (

EPM_ORACLE_INSTANCE/diagnostics/logs/ config

), correct errors, and rerun the wizard.

After you finish the wizard, the properties of the edited data source (for example, its name, description database type, and database server) are displayed on the Interface Data Source tab.

After you complete the configuration, a set of sample tables is created in the database. For a complete list of the sample tables, see

“Defining Interface Tables” on page 60

Deleting Interface Data Sources

Deleting interface data source tables deletes the tables from the database that is configured to the interface datasource.

To delete an interface data source:

Select Navigate, Administer, Configure Interface Data Source.

When the Interface Data Source tab is displayed, right-click the data source you want to delete, and select Delete.

Using Interface Tables

In the Delete Tables dialog, select Delete Tables, and click Yes to delete the tables or No to return to the Interface Data Source tab.

Defining Interface Tables

Interface tables in Performance Management Architect are grouped into two categories: system tables and user-defined tables.

System tables are created when the interface tables are configured. They contain information used by the import module during profile creation and execution.

System Table Description

IM_Load_Info The use of this table is optional. It allows for grouping subsets of the records in the IM_ tables. For example, metadata from different sources can be staged into the same interface tables instance, but each source could be identified with its own Load_ID. The IM_Load_Info table can be used to keep track of the different Load_IDs and their corresponding sources.

Note: During import execution, you can choose to only import metadata tagged with a specific set of Load_IDs. See

“Entering Load ID Information When Importing Dimensions” on page 74 .

Columns are: l l l l i_Load_ID—Number representing the Load_ID.

c_Source_System—Source system this Load_ID represents. This field is optional.

c_User_Last_Updated—This field is optional.

c_Date_Last_Updated—This field is optional.

c_Last_Update_Login—This field is optional.

IM_

Dimension

Contains information about the dimensions to be processed, their types, and references to all the tables/views containing metadata for those dimensions.

Note: This table is pre-populated with the names of sample dimensions, sample dimension classes, and HS_ sample tables. (1 row per c_Dimension_Name)

Columns are: l l l l l l l i_Load_ID—Load_ID tag for this dimension.

c_Dimension_Name—Name of the dimension.

c_Dimension_Class_Name—Dimension type.

c_Member_Table_Name—Name of the table or view that contains the Members information for this dimension. See

“Members Section” on page 50 . Populating and specifying this table/view is optional.

c_Hierarchy_Table_Name—Name of the table or view that contains the Hierarchy information for this dimension. See

“Hierarchies Section” on page 52

. This table/view needs to be specified and defined when performing a replace mode import.

c_Property_Array_Table_Name—Name of the table or view that contains the PropertyArray information for this dimension. See

“Property Array Section” on page 54

. Populating and specifying this table/view is optional.

c_Dim_Property_Table_Name—This table partly corresponds to the !Dimensions section of the flat file, except that the dimension properties are not defined here. See

“Dimensions Section” on page 48

Importing Metadata

System Table Description

IM_

Dimension_

Association

This table directly corresponds to the !DimensionAssociation section of the flat file. See on page 50

Note: The sample table is not pre-populated.

“Dimension Associations Section”

Columns are: l l l l i_Load_ID—Load_ID tag for this dimension.

c_Base_Dimension—Name of the base dimension whose member property will be associated with another dimension.

This is a required column.

c_Property—The name of the associated property, for example 'Alias.' This is a required column.

c_Target_Dimension—Name of the dimension with which the associated property is associated. This is a required column.

User-defined tables or views can be used to represent the Members, Hierarchies, PropertyArray, and dimension property content for a dimension. Both tables and views can be used as long as they are correctly referenced in the IM_Dimension table. The sample tables follow the naming convention,

HS_Dimension_Section

, where

Dimension

represents the dimension name, such as

HS_Accounts_Hierarchy

Note: The table names in the following table are samples and any names can be used for userdefined tables or views.

HS_Dimension_

Member

This table directly corresponds to the !Member section of the flat file. See “Members Section” on page 50

Using Interface Tables

HS_Dimension_

Hierarchy

HS_Dimension_

PropertyArray

HS_Dimension_

Property

This table directly corresponds to the !Hierarchies section of the flat file. See

“Hierarchies Section” on page 52

You can specify an optional SortOrder column. If present, Performance Management Architect uses the values defined to determine the row order when it retrieves the children of a parent.

Both Alias and UDA properties can be specified in the HS_Dimension_Hierarchy table even though the sample tables do not have columns for these properties. You can add columns for the Alias and UDA properties in the sample tables if desired.

For example:

For an Oracle database:

ALTER TABLE HS_Account_Hierarchy

ADD "Alias=English" NVARCHAR2(255);/

ALTER TABLE HS_Account_Hierarchy

ADD "Alias=French" NVARCHAR2(255);/

For a SQL Server database:

ALTER TABLE HS_Account_Hierarchy

ADD "Alias=English" nvarchar(255)GO

ALTER TABLE HS_Account_Hierarchy

ADD "Alias=French" nvarchar(255)GO

For an IBM DB2 database:

ALTER TABLE HS_Account_Hierarchy

ADD "Alias=English" VARCHAR(255);

ALTER TABLE HS_Account_Hierarchy

ADD "Alias=French" VARCHAR(255);

An equal sign [=] the column name can be used to represent each Alias dimension member as a separate column.

This table directly corresponds to the !PropertyArray section of the flat file. See

“Property Array Section” on page

54 .

This table directly corresponds to the !Dimension section of the flat file. See

“Dimensions Section” on page 48

Note: The following sample tables are created when creating the interface table instance. They can be replaced with user-created tables. These tables are not pre-populated with actual data.

If any import interface data table (dimension, hierarchy, member, or property array data) contains a

SortOrder

column, the data in that table will be loaded into the import engine in that order. The SortOrder column must be an integer data type and the data will be loaded in ascending order. If the SortOrder column data type is not an integer, the import engine ignores the column, does not add an ORDER BY clause to query, and generates a warning in the import results.

Importing Metadata

Sample Tables

HS_Account_Member

HS_Account_Hierarchy

HS_Account_Property

HS_Account_PropertyArray

HS_Alias_Hierarchy

HS_Alias_Member

HS_Alias_Property

HS_Attribute_Hierarchy

HS_Attribute_Member

HS_Attribute_Property

HS_Attribute_PropertyArray

HS_ConsolidationMethod_Hierarchy

HS_ConsolidationMethod_Member

HS_ConsolidationMethod_Property

HS_ConsolidationMethod_PropertyArray

HS_Country_Hierarchy

HS_Country_Member

HS_Country_Property

HS_Country_PropertyArray

HS_Currency_Hierarchy

HS_Currency_Member

HS_Currency_Property

HS_Currency_PropertyArray

HS_Data_CapExTemplate

HS_Data_Consolidation

HS_Data_Sales

HS_Entity_Hierarchy

HS_Entity_Member

HS_Entity_Property

HS_Entity_PropertyArray

HS_Generic_Hierarchy

HS_Generic_Member

HS_Generic_Property

HS_Generic_PropertyArray

HS_ICP_Hierarchy

HS_ICP_Member

HS_ICP_Property

HS_ICP_PropertyArray

HS_Period_Hierarchy

HS_Period_Member

HS_Period_Property

HS_Period_PropertyArray

HS_Scenario_Hierarchy

HS_Scenario_Member

HS_Scenario_Property

HS_Scenario_PropertyArray

HS_SecurityClass_Hierarchy

HS_SecurityClass_Member

HS_SecurityClass_Property

HS_SecurityClass_PropertyArray

HS_SmartList_Hierarchy

HS_SmartList_Member

HS_SmartList_Property

HS_SmartList_PropertyArray

HS_Time_Hierarchy

HS_Time_Member

HS_Time_Property

HS_Time_PropertyArray

HS_UDA_Hierarchy

HS_UDA_Member

HS_UDA_Property

HS_Value_Hierarchy

HS_Value_Member

HS_Value_Property

HS_Value_PropertyArray

HS_Version_Hierarchy

HS_Version_Member

HS_Version_Property

HS_Version_PropertyArray

HS_View_Hierarchy

HS_View_Member

HS_View_Property

HS_View_PropertyArray

HS_Year_Hierarchy

HS_Year_Member

HS_Year_Property

HS_Year_PropertyArray

In addition to the dimension interface tables created by the template script, you can add interface tables for additional dimensions. For example, the template script contains one set of tables for the Entity dimension. You can add more Entity dimensions as needed. For each dimension added to the interface tables, you must also include the dimension in the IM_Dimension system table so that the dimension is available during profile creation. You can find the scripts for creating sample tables in

<EPM_ORACLE_INSTANCE>\Products\Foundation\BPMA\Server\Conf

The scripts are named for each database type:

Oracle_Create_Interface_Tables.sql

DB2_Create_Interface_Tables.sql

, and

SQL_Server_Create_Interface_Tables.sql

Using Interface Tables

l l l l

Clearing Interface Tables

Options for the interface tables area:

All

Load ID

Older Than—You can select the number of years, months, weeks, and days.

Date Range

To clear interface tables:

In the Dimension Library, select File, Import, Clear Interface Area.

Select the data source.

Select one of the options for the type of data source load information to clear.

You can enter multiple Load IDs separated by comma or can search for load IDs by clicking

Click Clear.

Click Yes to confirm.

Click OK at the success message.

Creating Import Profiles

Before importing dimensions into the Dimension Library or an application, you must create an import profile. Profiles include important information about the dimensions to be imported such as new dimensions, whether to merge or replace existing dimensions, and dimension properties.

Importing Metadata

You can import, edit, view, and delete import profiles. See

“Managing Import Profiles” on page

73 .

To create an import profile:

From the Dimension Library, select File, Import, Create Profile.

Enter a profile name.

From Import Type, select one of these import types: l l

Flat File: to import a text file

Interface tables: to import data from a database l

Data Relationship Management: to import dimensions from Data Relationship

Management. For information on preparing metadata for export from Data

Relationship Management, see the Oracle Hyperion Data Relationship Management

Administrator's Guide

Optional: Enter a description for the profile.

If you want to import into the Dimension Library, select Shared Library, otherwise select an existing application.

The Application list includes Shared Library and all existing applications that you have security access to in the Application Library.

If you selected Flat File or Interface Tables as the Import Type, do one of the following: l

If you selected Flat File in Step 3, click Browse, browse to find the file, and click

Upload.

Note: Performance Management Architect import supports text files in the ADS format with the following encodings: UTF-8, UTF-16LE, UTF-16BE, UTF-32LE,

UTF-32BE. In addition, ASCII encoded files can also be read but are limited to

English characters.

Creating Import Profiles

If you selected Interface Table in Step 3, from Data Source, select the database to use for this profile.

Click OK.

Click Next.

If you are importing from a flat file or from a Data Relationship Management application, now you will enter the file or application properties, respectively, as described in

“Entering Properties” on page 66

If you are importing from an interface table, now you will map dimensions, as described

in “Mapping Dimensions” on page 67

Entering Properties

To enter properties:

Do one of the following, depending on whether you are entering properties for a flat file or for a Data

Relationship Management application.

If you are entering properties for a flat file: a. In File Properties, select a column delimiter.

You can select semicolon (;), comma (,), pipeline (|), space, or tab. Semicolon is the default.

Note: The delimiter you select must be found in the file.

b. Optional: To remove double quotes from a string, select Remove Double Quotes on

Strings.

If the flat file contains member formulas, deselect Remove Double Quotes on Strings to prevent quotation marks from being removed.

c. Optional: To remove spaces in the load file, select Remove White Space.

Importing Metadata

l d. Optional: If you do not want transaction logs to be created, select Suppress

Transaction Logs.

If you are entering properties for a Data Relationship Management application: a. Select the Data Relationship Management application from which to import dimensions. (All Data Relationship Management applications that are registered in

Shared Services are listed.) b. Select the Data Relationship Management version from which to import metadata.

(All versions you have access to in the Data Relationship Management application are listed.) c. Select the Data Relationship Management export profile. (All export profiles for the selected application are listed.)

Optional: If you do not want transaction logs to be created, select Suppress Transaction Logs.

Click Next.

Now you will map the dimensions, as described in

“Mapping Dimensions” on page 67 .

Mapping Dimensions

In the Map Dimensions section, use the following methods to specify how to import dimensions from the flat file, interface table or Data Relationship Management application. You can map dimensions by performing an automatic mapping or manual mapping.

To map dimensions:

To create new dimensions from the source, select Create Dimensions for the non-mapped dimensions with the source dimension name. For any dimension that is unmapped (that is, any dimension that is not automatically or manually mapped), the name of the dimension in the flat file, interface table, or

Data Relationship Management application is the name used to create the new dimension.

When you select “Create dimensions for the non-mapped dimensions...”, the Shared Library or application column is automatically populated.

If a dimension in the flat file, interface table, or Data Relationship Management application exists in the Shared Library or application, automatically map the dimensions and select to merge the imported dimensions into the target dimension or replace the target dimensions with the imported dimension.

To manually map the dimensions, in the Shared Library column, create a new dimension or map the imported dimension to another dimension. If mapping to another dimension, merge the imported dimension into the Shared Library dimension or replace the Shared Library dimension with the imported dimension. Perform one of these actions: l l

Select the Shared Library dimension to map to the imported dimension.

Create a dimension: a. From the Shared Library or application, select New Dimension.

b. In the Add New Dimension dialog box, enter the dimension name and optional description, and click OK.

Creating Import Profiles

Optional: Select the Process Type.

Note: If the target application contains the shared dimensions, then the Process Type does not display any options.

Merge as Primary—Merge as Primary processes all sections and adds new dimensions, members, relationships, properties and associations that exist in the source, but do not exist in the Shared Library or target application. No dimensions,

members, relationships, properties, or associations are removed. If a dimension, relationship, member, or property specified in the source exists in the Shared Library or target application it is overwritten with the value specified in the source.

(Members are not moved, but overwritten.) Properties not included in the source are unchanged in the Shared Library or target application.

m m

Note: If a member has multiple instances in a dimension, the IsPrimary column specifies which instance is primary and which instance(s) are shared. The

IsPrimary parameter is optional; however, we strongly recommend that you use it. If left undefined, it defaults to “True”, which assumes that the member is primary. If you do not define the IsPrimary parameter or if there are duplicate members defined as primary, a warning is displayed in the Import

Results file.

Merge as Move—This mode only processes members with IsPrimary set to true, and ignores any others. During processing, the first line specifying a primary location for a member is executed, any subsequent lines specifying a different primary location are ignored, and a warning message is displayed.

Replace—All new elements are added and all property updates are made. Then, any members or member relationships that are not specified in the source are deleted from the Shared Library or target application. You can also use replace mode to reorder members under a parent. Properties not included in the source are unchanged in the Shared Library or target application.

This mode does not create new Shared members unless they are defined in the import file (IsPrimary=false). This mode can detect a primary member under a new parent and process it as a move.

Note: The Replace option does not display the Reorder Type and Reorder Existing

Members options.

Select the Reorder Type.

Merge to Top—Places new imported child members at the beginning of the child list under their parent.

Merge to Bottom—Places new imported child members at the end of the child list under their parent.

Select Reorder Existing Members.

Importing Metadata

Select Reorder Existing Members to resort existing child members under a parent even when those members are not present in the import source. If “Merge to Top” is selected, the

first child member in the import source becomes the first child under the parent, all imported child members are sorted to match the order in the import source, and any existing members not in the import source will be pushed to the end of the child list in their existing order. If

“Merge to Bottom” is selected, the last child member in the import source becomes the last child under the parent, all imported child members are sorted to match the order in the import source, and any existing members not in the import source will be pushed to the

beginning of the child list in their existing order. For detailed examples, see “Reordering

Existing Member Examples” on page 69

Click Next.

The Dimension Mapping screen is displayed. Now, define the property mapping options, as described in

“Dimension Mapping—Property Mapping Options” on page 70

Reordering Existing Member Examples

Creating an import that uses “Merge as Primary” or “Merge as Move” mode can affect the ordering of children, depending on the Reorder Type setting. Consider the Entity hierarchy as an example:

Importing the following flat file information in “Merge as Primary” or “Merge as Move” mode can affect the ordering of California's children, depending on the Reorder Type setting and whether the Reorder Existing Members setting is enabled.

!Hierarchies=Entity

'Parent;Child;IsPrimary

#root;Regional;Y

Regional;UnitedStates;Y

Creating Import Profiles

UnitedStates;California;Y

California;Foster City;Y

California;Redwood Shores;Y

California;Sunnyvale;Y

Notice that the member Santa Clara is not included in the flat file and that a new member

Redwood Shores has been added.

If the Reorder Type is set to

MergeToTop

and Reorder Existing is set to

False

, California's children are Redwood Shores, Sunnyvale, Foster City, and Santa Clara, in that order.

If the Reorder Type is set to

MergeToTop

and Reorder Existing is set to

True

, California's children are Foster City, Redwood Shores, Sunnyvale, and Santa Clara, in that order.

If the Reorder Type is set to

MergeToBottom

and Reorder Existing is set to

False

, California's children are Sunnyvale, Foster City, Santa Clara, Redwood Shores, in that order.

If the Reorder Type is set to

MergeToBottom

and Reorder Existing is set to

True

, California's children are Santa Clara, Foster City, Redwood Shores, and Sunnyvale, in that order.

Dimension Mapping—Property Mapping Options

To define the dimension property mapping options:

To import dimension properties from the flat file, interface table, or Oracle Hyperion Data Relationship

Management application, select the properties to import in the Shared Library column. You can doubleclick on a cell in the Shared Library or application column for a drop-down list of available properties.

Some cells may not display a default property, in this case, you can use the Property Selector dialog box to choose a property.

Optional: Right-click an empty cell and select Find Property.

The Property Selector dialog box is displayed.

Select the property, then click OK.

Optional: Select Clear Before Importing or Allow Overwrites with Blank.

Importing Metadata

If “Clear Before Importing” is selected, values are cleared and match the import source exactly. If not selected, values are merged with existing values, and all existing values remain.

If “Allow Overwrites with Blank” is selected, the value is overwritten even if the source value is empty.

Click Finish.

Click Yes to import the profile into the Dimension Library.

Note: For interface table import profiles, a Load ID Input dialog box is displayed. You can enter the load IDs, separated by a comma. See

“Entering Interface Table Load IDs for

Import Profiles” on page 72 .

If you click the link to view the job in the Jobs Console, you can view the import results after the job completes. You can click to refresh the import status.

When the import is completed, view the import results for warnings or errors.

If you imported dimensions into an application, the attachments area includes a link to a log file, otherwise the link displays the Import Results screen. For information on viewing

job attachments, see “Viewing Job Attachments” on page 301 . For information on viewing

the import results, see

“Viewing Import Results” on page 302 .

Note: The ImportErrorThreshold setting in the BPMA_server_config.xml file defines the maximum number of combined errors and warnings that can occur before a running import shuts down. The default value is 1000, however you can change the

ImportErrorThreshold setting and increase the import error threshold. See

Appendix D, “Configuration Settings in BPMA_Server_Config.xml.”

Creating Import Profiles

If you imported dimensions into an application, after the import is complete you can view and edit the dimensions in the application. Otherwise, you can view the dimensions in the

Shared Library.

Entering Interface Table Load IDs for Import Profiles

When importing dimensions and members from interface tables, all dimensions and members are automatically imported. However, there is a i_Load_ID column in the interface tables that can act as a filter when running the import profile. Your database administrator can populate the i_Load_ID column in the database to enable you to filter the dimensions and members imported. In Performance Management Architect, you can enter a load ID when you create an import profile or import dimensions to filter artifacts from the interface tables so you do not load erroneous metadata.

To enter load IDs:

After you create an interface table import profile and click Yes to import the dimensions.

In the Load ID Input dialog box, enter the load IDs, separated by a comma or click to select the load IDs.

Note: The i_Load_ID column must be populated in the interface table by the database administrator before you can select them in Performance Management Architect.

Click OK.

Importing Metadata

Managing Import Profiles

After you create import profiles, you can import dimensions into the Dimension library, view profile details, and edit and delete profiles.

See the following sections: l l l

“Importing Dimensions” on page 73

“Editing Import Profiles” on page 74

“Viewing Import Profile Details” on page 75

“Deleting Import Profiles” on page 75

Importing Dimensions

To import dimensions:

From the Dimension Library, select File, Import, Import Dimensions.

Select an import profile.

Select the type of import: Flat File, Interface Tables, or Data Relationship Management.

Note:

If you select Interface Tables and want to enter a Load ID, see “Entering Load ID

Information When Importing Dimensions” on page 74

Perform an action: l l

If you selected Flat File, click Browse to find the file, then click Upload.

If you selected Interface Tables, enter the Interface Load IDs or click Select Interface

LoadID.

If you selected Data Relationship Management, proceed to the next step.

Managing Import Profiles

Tip: You can create a new profile or delete a profile using the buttons in the upper right corner of the Import Dimensions dialog box.

Click Import.

Entering Load ID Information When Importing Dimensions

When importing dimensions and members from interface tables, all dimensions and members are automatically imported. However, there is an i_Load_ID column in the interface tables that can act as a filter when importing dimensions. Your database administrator can populate the i_Load_ID column in the database to enable you to filter the dimensions and members imported.

In Performance Management Architect, you can enter a load ID when you create an import profile or import dimensions to filter artifacts from the interface tables so you do not load erroneous metadata.

Note: The i_Load_ID column must be populated in the interface table by the database administrator before you can select them in Performance Management Architect.

To enter loadID information:

In the Import Dimensions, Interface Load ID field, enter the load ID or click .

Tip: To enter multiple Load IDs separate each entry with a comma (,).

The Load ID Selection dialog box is displayed.

In the list of available load IDs on the left, select a load ID to add and click .

To deselect a load ID from the list of selections, click .

Tip: To select all load IDs, click . To deselect all load IDs from the list of selections, click

Click OK.

Editing Import Profiles

To edit import profiles:

Select File, Import, Import Dimensions.

Select the type of import: Flat File, Interface Tables, or Data Relationship Management. (Flat File is displayed by default.)

Perform an action:

Importing Metadata

If you selected Flat File, click Browse, browse to find the file, and click Upload.

If you selected Interface Tables or Data Relationship Management, proceed to the next step.

Right-click a profile, and select Edit Profile.

Note: You must upload a flat file to activate the Edit Profile option.

Edit the import profile.

Follow the steps in

“Creating Import Profiles” on page 64 .

Viewing Import Profile Details

To view import profile details:

Select File, Import, Import Dimensions.

Select the type of import: Flat File, Interface Tables, or Data Relationship Management. (Flat File is displayed by default.)

Right-click a profile, and select View Details.

Click the tabs to view profile information, dimensions, or properties.

Click Close.

Deleting Import Profiles

To delete import profiles:

Select File, Import, Import Dimensions.

Select the type of import: Flat File, Interface Tables, or Data Relationship Management. (Flat File is displayed by default.)

Right-click a profile, and select Delete Profile.

Click Yes to confirm deletion of the profile.

Managing Import Profiles

Importing Metadata

Working with Dimensions

In This Chapter

Creating Dimensions.......................................................................................77

Understanding Shared and Local Dimensions ..........................................................78

Modifying Properties .......................................................................................79

Considerations for Working with Planning Dimensions .................................................81

Alias Dimensions...........................................................................................82

User-Defined Attribute Dimensions.......................................................................85

Custom Dimensions .......................................................................................85

Dimension Associations ...................................................................................86

Copying Dimensions .......................................................................................88

Viewing Application Membership.........................................................................88

Working with Named Generations (Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) Only).......................88

Working with Named Levels (Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) Only)..............................90

Organizing Dimensions ....................................................................................91

Filtering Dimensions .......................................................................................94

Sorting Dimensions and Folders..........................................................................95

Deleting Dimensions.......................................................................................95

Using the Grid Editor.......................................................................................96

Working with Smart Lists (Planning Only).............................................................. 109

Viewing Transaction Logs................................................................................ 112

Purging Transaction History ............................................................................. 118

Creating Dimensions

You can manually create dimensions and edit existing dimensions. You can create dimensions in several ways, but only in the Dimension Library.

Note: When creating dimensions in the Dimension Library, you may be able to deviate from product naming rules. However, within product applications, naming rules must be followed. For Planning dimensions, see

“Naming Restrictions for Dimensions, Members, and Aliases” on page 372

, for Financial Management dimensions, see Chapter 11,

“Working with Financial Management Dimensions” , and for Essbase dimensions, see

Chapter 14, “Working with Essbase Properties.”

Creating Dimensions

To create a dimension:

Select File, New, Dimension.

Enter a name and optional description for the dimension.

Select the dimension type.

See

Table 11, “Dimension Types,” on page 46

Note:

Dimension names cannot begin with an exclamation point (!). You may be able to enter different characters when creating a dimension in the Dimension Library, but when the dimension is brought into an application, the application's naming rules are applied.

Click OK.

The dimension is added to the Dimension Library. You can add members to the dimension by

right-clicking on the dimension and selecting to create, add, or insert members. See “Creating

Members” on page 127 .

Each dimension type is represented in the Shared Library with an icon. For a list of Performance

Management Architect dimension types, see Table 11, “Dimension Types,” on page 46 .

Note:

You cannot rename dimensions later. If you need to rename a dimension, you must copy the dimension and give the dimension a new name. Then, you can add the new dimension to applications and remove any associations for the old dimension. Then, if necessary you can delete the old unused dimension. However, in Consolidation and Planning applications, you can change the alias, or dimension name, in order to see a different name in the deployed application. See

“Setting the Dimension Alias” on page 214

Understanding Shared and Local Dimensions

Performance Management Architect applications can contain dimensions of two different states: shared and local.

Working with Dimensions

Shared Dimensions are created in an area of the Dimension Library called the Shared Library.

These dimensions are available to all applications and can be individually linked to one or more applications when included in each application as a shared dimension. Changes made to the dimension in the Shared Library are automatically inherited to every application sharing that dimension. All types of modifications can be made to the dimension within the

Shared Library but only certain types of changes can be made to the shared dimension within the application.

Once a dimension has been included in an application as a shared dimension, changes can be applied to the shared dimension within the application to handle exceptions that may only be relevant to that application. These types of changes include: m

Member filters

Property value overrides m l

Structural changes for shared dimensions, such as adding or moving members, can only be performed within the Shared Library.

Local Dimensions originate within a single application and can be created directly within the application or as a copy of a dimension from the Shared Library or another dimension in the application. Local dimensions are separate dimensions and do not inherit any changes made to the dimension in the Shared Library.

The initial copy of the dimension from the Shared Library copies the entire dimension.

Any subsequent actions, such as adding new members, are performed within the application.

If you make changes to the shared dimension that was used to create the local dimension, you have the option to explicitly merge any further changes to the dimension at the

application level. See “Converting Local Dimensions to Shared” on page 211 .

l l l

Modifying Properties

From the Dimension Library, you can edit these properties:

Applications

Dimensions

Members

Properties are organized into categories: l l l l

System—used to identify characteristics of a member, such as name, description, and if the member is inactive.

Statistical—used to provide statistical information about a member such as number of children and number of siblings.

Essbase (ASO)—Essbase Aggregate Storage Option (ASO) applications

Planning—used for Planning applications

Essbase (BSO)—Essbase Block Storage Option (BSO) applications l

Modifying Properties

l l

Consolidation—Financial Management applications

Profitability—Profitability and Cost Management applications

Dimension property categories are defined in product-specific chapters: l l l l

Chapter 11, “Working with Financial Management Dimensions”

Chapter 13, “Working with Profitability and Cost Management Properties”

Chapter 15, “Working with Statistical and System Properties”

Each chapter describes these properties, their possible and default values, as well as other characteristics that determine how they should be used. Properties can be global or relationship: l l

Global Property—The value of global properties is static for all instances of the member in the hierarchy, including shared instances and orphan instances. For example, the Currency value for Entity member “Kansas” is “USD” for both instances of the member “Kansas”, under “United States” and also under “Management”. The value of global properties can be changed at any instance of the member and the change will be reflected for all instances of the member.

Relationship Property—The value of relationship properties applies to a particular instance of a member in the hierarchy. For example, the value of “Aggregation for Plan 1” for the

Entity member “Washington” can be set to “+” when the member is under the parent

“United States”, but can be set to “Never” when “Washington” is under “Management”.

Properties for members of dimensions can also be inherited. There are two types of inheritance: relationship inheritance or application inheritance.

l l

Relationship Inheritance—The default value is obtained from the value of the property for the parent of the member in the dimension. An inherited property can be global or vary by relationship. A global inherited property inherits from the parent of the primary member in the dimension. A relationship inherited property inherits from the parent for each instance of a member since the property value can differ by relationship. An inherited value is only a default value and can be overridden by a stored value for a member. In this situation, a change to the parent for this property would no longer affect the member because the inheritance was overridden.

Application Inheritance—The default value of a property for a member in a shared dimension in an application is inherited from value of that member in the Shared Library.

At the application level, you can override the Shared Library inherited property value with a value local to the application. The inherited values are only default values for the members in the application, so they can also be overridden within the application. Any changes to the dimension in the Shared Library would no longer affect the property for the member once overridden.

Working with Dimensions

Considerations for Working with Planning Dimensions

You create hierarchical relationships within dimensions by creating and organizing members, which are components of dimensions. You can add dimension members individually or using

Import Profiles. Dimension names must use the conventions detailed in “Naming Restrictions for Dimensions, Members, and Aliases” on page 372 .

Sparse dimensions lack data values for the majority of member combinations, and have a low percentage of available data positions filled. Dense dimensions have a high probability that one or more data points are occupied in every combination of dimensions.

To optimize database performance, designate dimensions as sparse or dense. If a dimension is sparse, Planning calculates only data values that are occupied in each dimension combination.

This optimizes performance by decreasing calculation time and lowering disk usage. By default,

Planning designates the Account and Period dimensions as dense and other dimensions as sparse.

Dimension hierarchies define structural and mathematical relationships, and consolidations between members in the database. Members of the same level that belong to the same dimension or member are called siblings. Members that belong to a dimension are called children of the dimension. Members that belong to a member are called children of that member.

For important information about applications, see “Properties Applicable to All Planning

Dimensions” on page 352 and

“Properties Common to Multiple Planning Dimensions” on page

354 . Additional considerations include:

l l l l

New dimensions created in the Dimension Library do not have any default associations.

For dimensions loaded from a flat file, the association must be specified in the flat file.

For applications transformed from Planning to Performance Management Architect, the associations may be assigned.

It is not necessary to associate a Smart List with a dimension (such as Account or Entity), but Smart Lists are associated in the Smart List property field. Smart Lists should be associated with members in the Shared Library. Any member associated with a Smart List should have its Data Type set to Smart List.

l l

Additional Planning Dimension Features

Additional Essbase features are now supported for Planning dimensions. You can add children and siblings to Scenario, Version, and Period dimensions, and you can use cut, paste, expand, and collapse members in the dimension hierarchies. You can also use shared members for these dimensions, and can set two pass calculations at the root level for all dimensions. For example, you can:

In Scenario and Version dimensions, create hierarchies and use shared members. If you assign children to bottom-up versions, these versions display as read-only parents on data forms.

In the Period dimension, create alternate hierarchies and use shared descendants. Data

Storage for all time periods can be set to any valid Data Storage value. The consolidation

Considerations for Working with Planning Dimensions

l l operator for all scenarios, versions, and time periods (including BegBalance) can be set to any valid consolidation operator. For example, it can be set to + instead of ~ (ignore).

For attributes, create hierarchies and assign aliases.

Turn on two pass calculation at the root level, for example, for Account.

Caution!

Two pass calculation is ignored on any non-Account member not set to dynamic calc. When using this setting, consider the impact on currency conversion scripts.

Note:

For multi-currency applications, the pre-built currency conversion calc scripts do not function properly if you change data storage to dynamic for any Scenario, Version, Period, or Year member, or for certain dimension roots (such as Entity, Version, Currency, and custom dimensions). When changing data storage, consider the impact on currency conversion scripts.

Alias Dimensions

Aliases are alternate names, descriptions, languages, or other items that help to define dimensions. You can assign one or more aliases to Planning accounts, currencies, entities, scenarios, periods, versions, years, attribute values, and user-defined dimension members. You can assign aliases to any Financial Management dimension.

There are three elements to an Alias dimension: l l

Alias dimension

Alias members

Alias property l

You create an Alias dimension and add members to it. Enter a description, alternate name, and so on, in the Alias property value field for members of associated dimensions. For example, you create an Alias dimension with members: English, French, and Italian. In Planning, these members are considered Alias tables. In the Currency dimension that is associated with this Alias dimension, there are the members AUD, JPY, and USD. Double-click the alias property value for each member and enter a description for English, French, and Italian. For example, the

English descriptions might be Australian Dollar, Japanese Yen, and United States Dollar.

You can set up how you want members and their aliases to display in the Dimension Library.

You can display just the member name, just the alias, or both. For example, if you have a currency member named AUD with an alias of Australian Dollar, in the Dimension Library you can display just AUD, just Australian Dollar, or AUD-Australian Dollar.

Aliases enable you to create unique identifiers for dimensions and members. For example, Cost

Center dimension members may be identified by a number (100, 200, 210, and so on) or by a descriptive alias (Human Resources, Engineering, Sales, and so on). Members may also have aliases for different languages.

Working with Dimensions

The name of the Alias dimension must follow naming requirements of the Hyperion product.

For Planning dimensions, see “Naming Restrictions for Dimensions, Members, and Aliases” on page 372 . For Financial Management dimensions, see

Chapter 11, “Working with Financial

Management Dimensions” .

Note:

You may be able to enter different characters when creating an Alias dimension in the

Dimension Library, but when the Alias dimension is brought into an application, the application's naming rules are applied.

To set up an Alias dimension:

In the Dimension Library, create an Alias dimension, and add members to it.

Note: When applications are deployed to Planning, child members of the Alias dimension become Alias Tables.

Associate the main dimension, such as Account or Entity, with the Alias dimension. See “Creating

Dimension Associations” on page 86 .

Drag the Alias dimension to an application. (You also need to drag the main dimensions that have associations with the Alias dimension if they do not exist in the application.)

Activate the associations in the application. See “Viewing Dimension Associations” on page 213 .

In the application, select a main dimension member, for example CashFlow, and double-click in the

Alias field of the Property Grid.

Alias Dimensions

Click and enter alias names in the alias tables for the member.

Click OK.

Working with Dimensions

To view the alias for a member:

Select the Alias dimension for the application.

In the Property Grid, select the System category.

Double-click Default Member, select an Alias table, then click Save.

In the Property Grid, select the Planning category.

If a base dimension, such as Entity, has an active association with the Alias dimension, and an entity member has an alias defined for the selected alias table, the alias is displayed in the

Alias field in the Planning category.

Tip: In the Dimension Library, select View, Member, Display, Both to display aliases for an application.

User-Defined Attribute Dimensions

User-defined attribute (UDA) dimensions enable you to reuse UDAs that you create for members in multiple dimensions. UDAs are words or phrases used to describe characteristics of members—within calculation scripts, member formulas, and reports so that they return lists of members associated with the specified UDA. For example, if you have a Product dimension with various product members, you could create a UDA dimension called New Products and base certain calculations only on new products.

To create UDA dimensions:

In the Dimension Library, select File, New, Dimension.

Enter the dimension name and description.

Select UDA.

Add members to the UDA dimension.

Members are the UDAs that you can choose from when assigning UDAs to a member using the Property Grid. For additional information, see

“Working with User-Defined Attributes” on page 144

Custom Dimensions

When using custom dimensions, you must follow the naming conventions in “Naming

Restrictions for Dimensions, Members, and Aliases” on page 372

. Ensure that dimension names and aliases are unique. They can contain up to 80 characters, including spaces. Descriptions have up to 255 characters.

You can assign access permissions to members, rearrange the dimension member hierarchy, and share members of the Entity, Account, and custom dimensions. For information about assigning access permissions, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide.

User-Defined Attribute Dimensions

Dimension Associations

Subtopics

Creating Dimension Associations

Viewing and Deleting Dimension Associations

Any dimension that references other dimensions requires associations. For example, any dimension which references dimensions such as security class and currency require associations.

Because Oracle's Hyperion products allow for configuration of the application (which dimensions have security applied), dimensions that require associations depend on an application's configuration.

Creating Dimension Associations

You create dimension associations to assign security classes, currency, and attributes to dimensions and their members. For example, if you associate an entity dimension with the security class and currency dimensions, the associations are inherited by all members of the entity dimension.

You can also create dimension associations in a flat file. See “Dimension Associations Section” on page 50

. Existing associations are automatically created and activated when you transform an application from Classic to Performance Management Architect.

Note: It is impossible to create an association from a shared dimension to a local dimension. If you attempt to create this association, this would result in errors in the downstream products.

To create dimension associations:

Right-click a dimension, and select Create Association.

Note: Security Class and Alias dimensions can only be associated with Attribute dimensions.

Select Existing Property or New Property.

If you selected Existing Property, from the Property drop-down list, select the property.

If you selected New Property, enter the name of the new property.

Note: When you select New Property, you can only create associations with Attribute dimensions.

Optional: Enter a description for the association.

From Dimension, select the associated dimension.

Click OK.

Working with Dimensions

Note: Associations created in the Dimension Library must be activated in the application. See

“Viewing Dimension Associations” on page 213 .

Viewing and Deleting Dimension Associations

To view and delete dimension associations:

In the Dimension Library, right-click a dimension and select View Associations.

Optional: To sort columns in the View Dimension Association dialog box, click the column header.

Tip: To view a list of applications that use the dimension association, right-click the row of the association and select Search.

To delete an association, select the association row and click Delete.

Tip: You can select multiple dimension associations using the [Ctrl] or [Shift] keys.

Click Yes to confirm.

Click OK.

Dimension Associations

l l l l

Copying Dimensions

You can copy dimensions to create a new dimension of the same type. When a dimension is copied, all members and property values are also copied to the new dimension. There is no link defined between the original dimension and the new copied dimension.

You can copy dimensions:

Within the Shared Library

Within an application as a local dimension

From the Shared Library to an application creating a new local dimension

From an application to the Shared Library for sharing with other applications

To copy dimensions to the Shared Library:

Right-click a dimension in the Shared Library and select Copy Dimension To, Shared Library.

Change the default dimension name and enter a description.

Click OK.

The dimension is added to the Shared Library.

To copy a dimension to an application:

Right-click a dimension and select Copy Dimension To, Application.

Modify the dimension name and enter a description.

Select the application and click OK.

Viewing Application Membership

Application membership indicates which members or dimensions are used in which application.

You can use this information to determine the impact of dimension changes.

To view application membership:

In the Dimension Library, right-click a dimension or member and select Application Membership.

Click Close.

Working with Named Generations (Essbase (ASO) and

Essbase (BSO) Only)

Generations and levels are layers in a hierarchical tree structure that defines database member relationships. Generations are ordered incrementally from the top member of the dimension

(generation 1) down to the child members. Levels are ordered from the bottom dimension member (level 0) up to the parent members.

Working with Dimensions

Note: In a dimension that allows duplicate member names, use the unique generation name to identify a layer in the hierarchical tree structure.

You can create your own names for generations and levels in an outline. The name is a word or phrase that describes the generation or level. For example, you might create a generation name called Cities for all cities in the outline. You can define only one name for each generation or level. Once defined, you can view generation and level names in the Property grid for the selected dimension,

Use generation and level names in calculation scripts and report scripts wherever you need to specify either a list of member names or a list of generation or level numbers. For example, you can limit a calculation in a calculation script to the members of a specific generation.

Example

Year

2006 m

Q1 o l l l

Jan

Feb

March o

You number generations starting at 1 for the highest level (dimension) and down to the lowest member. In the above example, the named generations are numbered as follows: l l l

1 (Year)

2 (2006)

3 (Q1 and Q2)

4 (Jan, Feb, and March).

You number levels starting at 0 for the leaf level, the bottom member in the hierarchy, and up to the dimension level. In the above example, the named levels are numbered as follows: l l l

3 (Year)

2 (2006)

1 (Q1 and Q2)

0 (Jan, Feb, and March) l

You can create, modify, or delete named generations in Essbase (ASO) and (BSO) applications.

To create, modify, or delete named generations:

In the Dimension Library, right-click a dimension or the application name and select Named

Generations.

Working with Named Generations (Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) Only)

The Named Generations dialog box is displayed.

Click to add a named generation. Then, double-click the cell under Generation Name and enter a descriptive name.

For example, to later publish sales data generated in all North American regions, create a generation called Region.

In the Number column, double-click the cell to modify the number automatically provided.

Note: You cannot change numbers that are associated with DTS members.

Perform any of these optional tasks: l

Click to remove changes and revert to saved data.

Click , to remove a selected generation.

to save changes and continue to add named generations.

Click

Click OK.

Working with Named Levels (Essbase (ASO) and

Essbase (BSO) Only)

You can define named levels for logically-related named generations, such as the named level,

Month, to apply to all generations containing months. Like named generations, named levels enable you to identify the members to use in calculation or report scripts. The numbers you assign to named levels start at 0 for the lowest member in the dimension and increase to the highest level of the dimension. In the sample shown, levels are numbered as: 0 (Jan, Feb, March),

1 (Q1 and Q2), 2 (2006), and 3 (Year).

Sample

Year

2006 m

Q1 o l l l

Jan

Feb

March o

You can create, modify, or delete named generations in Essbase (ASO) and (BSO) applications.

Working with Dimensions

To create, modify, or delete named levels:

In the Dimension Library, right-click a dimension or the application name and select Named Levels.

The Named Levels dialog box is displayed.

Click , to add a level. Then, double-click the cell under Level Name, and enter a descriptive name.

For example, enter Human Resources Office to later assign this to all levels for human resource offices.

Note: The name must be unique and not shared with members, generations, aliases, and shared aliases.

In the Number column, double-click the cell to modify the number automatically provided.

Note: You cannot change numbers associated with DTS members.

Perform any of these optional tasks:

Double-click a cell to modify the level name or number.

l l

Click to remove any changes and revert to saved data.

Click to remove selected levels.

to save changes and continue to add levels.

Click

Click OK.

l l l l

Organizing Dimensions

You can organize dimensions by creating folders and copying or moving the dimensions into the folders. The following sections provide detailed information on organizing dimensions.

“Creating Folders” on page 91

“Adding Dimensions to Folders” on page 92

“Renaming Folders” on page 93

“Deleting Folders” on page 93

Creating Folders

To create folders:

In the Dimension Library, select File, New, Folder.

The Create New Folder dialog box is displayed.

Enter the name and description, then click OK.

Organizing Dimensions

Add dimensions to the new folder. See “Adding Dimensions to Folders” on page 92 .

Adding Dimensions to Folders

Subtopics

Copying Dimensions

Moving Dimensions

Dimensions can exist in more than one location. For example, you can organize dimensions and have the Accounts dimension exist in multiple folders or have the Accounts dimension exist at the highest level and also within a folder. You can use several methods to copy or move dimensions into folders.

Copying Dimensions

To copy dimensions into folders:

In the Shared Library, right-click the folder and select Add Dimensions.

The Add Dimensions to Folder dialog box is displayed.

Tip:

When you use the Add Dimensions to Folder dialog box, the dimensions are copied to the new location. In this instance, dimensions exist in multiple locations.

Using the [Ctrl] key, select one or more dimensions in the list.

Note:

If a dimension already exists in a folder, you cannot add a dimension with the same name into the folder.

Click OK.

Moving Dimensions

Dragging dimensions moves them from their original location into a folder.

To move dimensions, drag the dimensions in the Shared Library to a folder.

Tip: You can use the [Ctrl] key to select multiple dimensions to move.

To move dimensions out of a folder and back to the root of the Shared Library, right-click a dimension in the folder and select Remove from Folder. If the dimension exists only in the

Working with Dimensions

folder and not in the Shared Library root folder, a confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Click Yes to confirm.

Renaming Folders

To rename folders:

Right-click a folder, and select Rename.

The Rename Folder dialog box is displayed.

Enter the folder name, then click OK.

Deleting Folders

Subtopics

Deleting Folders Only

Deleting Folders with Content

You can delete folders that you create in the Shared Library. When deleting folders, you have two options: 1) delete only the folder, or 2) delete the folder and content.

Deleting Folders Only

When deleting folders, keep in mind these guidelines: l l l

Only the folder is deleted

Dimensions and sub-folders are not deleted and are moved to the root of the Shared Library

If deleting a sub-folder, only the sub-folder is deleted—dimensions are not deleted, rather they are moved to the root folder

To delete only folders:

Right-click a folder and select Delete, Only Folder.

A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Click Yes.

Click OK.

Deleting Folders with Content

When deleting folders with content, keep in mind these guidelines: l

The entire contents are deleted.

The folder, including any sub-folders and dimensions are deleted l

Organizing Dimensions

If deleting a sub-folder, the sub-folder, including any folders and dimensions are deleted

To delete folders and contents:

Right-click a folder and select Delete, Folder with Content.

A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Click Yes.

Click OK.

The folder and all dimensions in the folder are deleted.

Filtering Dimensions

You can filter the dimensions you see in the Dimension Library. Filtering only applies to dimensions, and not folders.

Note: If you create a dimension and have a filter applied that does not include the new dimension, the dimension will not display in the Shared Library until you remove the filter.

To filter dimensions:

Click or select View, Filter Dimensions.

The Dimension Filtering dialog box is displayed.

Enter the name, select the type, or enter the name of the user or group that owns the dimensions.

You can use wildcard characters to filter dimensions. The Dimension Server supports these wildcard characters:

$^{[(|)+.*?!

Working with Dimensions

Click OK.

Tip: To remove filter criteria, select Edit, Clear Filter Criteria.

When dimensions are filtered, a filter icon is displayed in the Shared Library pane.

Sorting Dimensions and Folders

You can sort dimensions and folders in ascending or descending order.

To sort dimensions and folders:

Click .

The Dimension Sorting dialog box is displayed.

Select the artifact to sort by (Dimension Class, Name, Description, Owner).

Select the sort order (Ascending or Descending).

Click OK.

Tip: To remove the sort, click Edit, Clear Sort Criteria.

When dimensions are sorted, a sort icon is displayed in the Shared Library pane.

Deleting Dimensions

When you delete a dimension, the dimension and all members of the dimension are deleted from the Shared Library. The dimension and members are also deleted from applications using the dimension. Associations for the dimension are also deleted.

Caution!

Before deleting a dimension, right-click the dimension and select Application

Membership, to view what applications are using the dimension. If an application contains the dimension, you cannot delete the dimension.

For important information on deleting Planning dimensions, see

“Excluding and Deleting

Planning Members” on page 137

To delete dimensions:

In the Dimension Library (Shared Library or Application pane), right-click a dimension and select Delete

Dimension.

Sorting Dimensions and Folders

Click Yes.

Using the Grid Editor

Subtopics

l l l l

Launching the Grid Editor

Searching for Members

Selecting Members

Selecting Properties

Working with the Grid Editor

You can use the Grid Editor to view and maintain dimensions within a tabular, grid-based interface. You can also: l l

View properties for multiple members simultaneously

Perform bulk updates to multiple members

Identify changed values and easily assign values l

The following example shows the Grid Editor, enabling you to edit members and properties for the Accounts dimension.

Working with Dimensions

Launching the Grid Editor

To launch the Grid Editor:

In the Shared Library or Application pane, right-click a dimension and select Grid Editor.

Note: The Grid Editor option is not available if you right-click a member. You must rightclick a dimension.

The Grid Editor Wizard is displayed.

Using the Grid Editor

The Grid Editor Wizard enables you to display up to 2000 members within a dimension.

You can expand and collapse members within a dimension using the [+] and [-].

The Grid Editor Wizard has two panes—all members in the dimension on the left and selections in the Grid Editor on the right. The left pane has two tabs—Members and Search.

The Members tab displays all members available in the dimension, including the member name and a short description, if available. You can use the Search tab to find members. The right pane shows selections for the Grid Editor and displays the member name and the selection type.

You can use the Menu button above each pane to change the columns in the Grid Editor

Wizard.

If you are selecting members for a Shared Library dimension, the Grid Editor displays

“Shared Library Dimensions,” above the Members and Search tab. However, if you are selecting members in an application, the application name appears above the Members and

Search tab. For example, “NewApp Dimensions.”

While displaying the Members tab, to collapse all members in a dimension, click , and select

Collapse All.

Note: When you select Collapse All, all members under the dimension or member that you selected are collapsed. When a dimension or member is collapsed, rest the mouse pointer over the artifact to display a ToolTip indicating the number of descendants.

Perform one of these actions: a. In the left pane, click , Show, Count.

Working with Dimensions

The Count column displays in addition to Name and Description. The Count column displays the number of child members under the current dimension. This can be a helpful indicator of how long it might take to expand down a branch of the tree.

b. To remove the Count column, click , and select Show, Count.

Perform one of these actions: a. To display the Alias column, click , and select Show, Alias.

The Alias column displays in addition to the Name and Description. The Alias column displays the alias, which is an alternate description for dimension members.

b. To remove the Alias column, click , and select Show, Alias.

To modify the columns in the Selections pane, in the Selections pane, click , Show, Selection

Type.

Name automatically displays in the Selections pane, however you can decide if you want the

Selection Type to display.

Searching for Members

You can search for members by selecting the Search tab and entering the name in the text box.

The search finds all members in the selected dimension based on the text you enter. For example, you can enter c*, to select the first member that starts with ”c”.

To search for members:

Select the Search tab.

To search for a member name, select Name or to search by member description, select Description.

Enter the text you want to search on.

You can also select the Search tab to search for members and use wildcards in your phrase.

For example, if you are searching a customer dimension and select to search by Name and type Ba** in the text box, and click , only customer names that start with Ba display. You can also type ! in the text box to act as a wildcard. For example, you might not know how to spell a customer name, such as Bassica, Inc., since it could be Bassico, Bassiko, or Bassica.

In this case, you could type Bass to find this customer.

Note: The maximum number of children that can be displayed is 2000.

Next, select the members to display in the Grid Editor. See

“Selecting Members” on page 99 .

Selecting Members

The first step in using the Grid Editor wizard is to select the members that you want to edit using the Grid Editor.

Using the Grid Editor

To select members:

Select a dimension.

Note: By default, the dimension you selected when you right-clicked and selected Grid

Editor is displayed. If you want to choose a different dimension, click the Dimension drop-down arrow.

You can use the Grid Editor for any dimension within the Shared Library or application, however, you can only work with one dimension at a time. For information on shared dimensions in applications, see

“Including Dimensions in Applications” on page 209

Note: The maximum number of children that can be displayed in a dimension is 2000. If you do not see the member you are looking for, trying searching for a specific member.

Select the members on the left and click .

To add special options for the member, click . Choose an option: l l l l l l l

Member

Children

IChildren

Descendants

IDescendants

Siblings

ISiblings

Parent l

100

Working with Dimensions

l l l

IParent

Ancestors

IAncestors

In the above options, “I” indicates inclusive. For example, “IChildren” adds all children for the member, including the selected member, and “IDescendants” adds all the descendants including the selected member. If you select “Children,” the selected member is not included and only it's children are included.

The member is moved to the right and displays the option you selected in the Selection Type column. For example, “Descendants” displays in the Selection Type column.

Repeat the steps above until you select all members you want to view in the Grid Editor.

Tip: To deselect all members from the list of selections, click .

If necessary, select new dimensions and members to edit.

When finished, click Next .

The Select Properties tab is displayed. See

“Selecting Properties” on page 101

Selecting Properties

You can select the properties that you want to modify using the Grid Editor. When selecting properties using the Grid Editor Wizard, make sure to select the appropriate category.

To select properties:

Since properties can differ by category, select the category that includes the properties you want to edit.

Using the Grid Editor

101

Select the properties on the left and click .

Repeat the steps above until you select all properties you want to edit in the Grid Editor.

Click Finish.

The Grid Editor is displayed.

102

Working with Dimensions

Grid cells that represent read-only properties are dimmed and disabled. Properties utilizing special controls such as check boxes within the Dimension Library Property Grid also use the same controls within the Grid Editor.

If you are editing a Shared Library dimension, the Grid Editor shows the dimension name after “Shared Library,” such as “Shared Library: Account.” However, if you are editing a dimension in an application, the name of the application appears before the dimension name. For example, “NewApp: Account”. In addition, each property category name is displayed above the property columns. For example, Consolidation displays above the properties you selected in the Consolidation category.

Using the Grid Editor

103

Working with the Grid Editor

Subtopics

l l l l l l l l l l

Saving Member and Property Changes

Removing and Deleting Members

Sorting Members and Properties

Copying and Pasting Cell Data

Adding and Removing Properties

Finding Properties

Closing the Grid Editor

The Grid Editor displays the members and properties you selected in the wizard. Since members and properties can differ, depending on the category, you can select a specific category to display at the top of the Grid Editor. Members appear as rows, displaying member names on the left.

Properties appear as columns, showing the name as the second row in the column heading. Each corresponding property value displays as cell data.

Saving Member and Property Changes

When you make changes to members and properties, you can set the changes to occur immediately or wait until you use the Save button. The Grid Editor Auto Commit feature saves each change, individually. Keep in mind these guidelines when using the Auto Commit feature:

Save button—

Auto Commit—

If the Auto Commit feature is unchecked: l l

The data is saved only when you click the Save button.

If you modify members or properties, the cells are shaded with a new color. Colors include: m

Yellow—A cell that is yellow indicates that the value has been updated. Upon saving the value, it is updated in Dimension Library and the cell color reverts to the default color.

Red—A row that is red indicates that it is marked for deletion. After a row is marked for deletion, the cells cannot be edited. Upon saving, the members are deleted from the

Dimension Library, removed from the application, and the rows are deleted from the current page of the grid.

If you navigate from one page of the grid to another, a confirmation dialog box is displayed, asking you to save any changes.

All changes are saved when you click the Save button.

104

Working with Dimensions

If you try to change the auto commit to checked, you will be prompted to save the data.

If the Auto Commit feature is checked: l l

The data is saved on the individual action performed.

Property values are saved when you change the row or press the [Enter] key

Members are deleted immediately when you right-click and select Delete Member l

Note:

You can click to remove the changes made to the grid and refresh the grid with last saved data.

Changing Dimensions

You can change the dimension that is displayed in the Grid Editor.

To change the dimension:

Right-click the dimension name in the upper left corner of the Grid Editor.

Select Change Dimension.

The Grid Editor Wizard is displayed.

Select a dimension using the Dimensions drop-down arrow.

Select the members to show in the grid and click Next.

A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Click Yes.

Select the properties and click Finish.

The Grid Editor is displayed.

Viewing Ancestors

You can view ancestors for a member using the Grid Editor to identify where a member resides in the dimension hierarchy.

To view member ancestors:

Right-click a member (row) and select Show Ancestors.

The Show Ancestors dialog box is displayed.

Click OK.

Creating Members

You can create children or sibling members using the Grid Editor.

Using the Grid Editor

105

Creating a member as a child to the selected member appends the property values row of the new child member to the current page of the grid. Creating a sibling to the selected member creates a new member as a sibling at the same level of the selected member and appends the property values row of the new sibling member to the current page of the grid.

To create members:

Right-click a row and select Create Member. Select As Child or As Sibling.

The New Member dialog box is displayed.

Enter the member name and click OK.

The member is displayed in the Grid Editor. When you create new members, the Grid Editor automatically saves the action.

Adding Members

To add existing members to the grid:

Right-click a row and select Add Member to Grid.

The Add Member to Grid dialog box is displayed.

If you are adding a member to a Shared Library dimension, the Grid Editor displays “Shared

Library Dimensions,” above the Members and Search tab. However, if you are adding a member to an application, the name of the application appears above the Members and

Search tab. For example, “NewApp Dimensions.”

Select the member(s) to add and click .

Tip: You can search for members using the Search tab in the Add Member to Grid dialog box.

Click OK.

The new member is added as a row to the Grid Editor.

Removing and Deleting Members

You can use the Grid Editor to remove or delete members. Removing a member removes the selected member from grid. Deleting a member deletes the selected member by marking it as red in color. Deleting a member physically deletes it from the Dimension Server when you click the Save button.

To remove members from the Grid Editor display:

Click before you attempt to remove a member.

Right-click the member row and select Remove Member from Grid.

The member is removed from the dimension.

106

Working with Dimensions

To delete members from the Dimension Server:

Right-click a member and select Delete Member.

A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Caution!

Click Yes.

Deleting a member deletes it from all views. Be extremely careful.

Tip: If you delete a member, you can reverse the deletion before you save changes. Rightclick the member and select Undo Delete Member.

Click .

The member is deleted.

Sorting Members and Properties

You can sort members and properties in the Grid Editor.

To sort artifacts in the Grid Editor:

Click .

The GridEditor Sort Dialog is displayed.

Select to sort on Members or Properties.

If you selected Members, select the artifact to sort by (Name, Alias, or Property).

Select the sort order (Ascending or Descending).

Click OK.

Tip: You can also sort a Property column by double-clicking the column header. When you sort properties, a sort indicator appears in the column header.

Copying and Pasting Cell Data

If you are adding content to a cell that you will use in other cells, you can copy and paste the cell data to save time.

Note:

You can copy and paste information from one cell to another within the same column.

You cannot copy and paste information across columns.

To copy and paste cell data:

To copy information, perform one of these actions:

Select the cell you want to copy, then right-click and select Copy.

Using the Grid Editor

107

Select the cell you want to copy, then press [Ctrl + C].

To paste information, perform one of these actions: l

Select the cell or column you want to paste the information into, then right-click and select Paste.

Select the cell or column you want to paste the information into, then press [Ctrl + V].

Tip: You can copy a value from one cell and then paste the values in all of the cells in the column. Simply copy the value, then right-click the column header and select Paste.

Adding and Removing Properties

You can add or remove properties for a member using the Grid Editor.

To add properties:

Right-click a column, then select Add Property.

The Property List Selector is displayed.

Select the property to add, then click .

Click OK.

The Grid Editor is displayed.

To remove properties from the grid, right-click the column of the property you want to remove, then select Remove Property.

Finding Properties

If you are editing numerous members and properties in the Grid Editor, you can search for a property that you want to edit.

To find properties:

Right-click a column and select Find Property.

The Property Selector dialog box is displayed.

Select the property, then click OK.

The Grid Editor displays with the property column highlighted.

Closing the Grid Editor

To close the Grid Editor:

Click to save all changes in the Grid Editor.

108

Working with Dimensions

Perform one of these actions: l

Right-click the Grid Editor tab and select Close.

Select File, Close, Current.

Working with Smart Lists (Planning Only)

Subtopics

l l l

Creating Smart Lists

Smart List Names

Modifying Smart List Dimension Properties

Displaying #Missing with Smart Lists

Smart Lists are custom drop-down lists that users access from data form cells in Planning applications. When clicking into data form cells, users select items from drop-down lists instead of entering data. Users cannot type in cells that contain Smart Lists. Smart Lists display in cells as down arrows that expand when users click into the cells.

For example, you can create a drop-down Smart List called Justification that provides selections for Research, Customer Feedback, and Expansion. When users click into an Account named

Reason (which is associated with the Justification Smart List), they click the down arrow, which expands into a drop-down list with these selections: Research, Customer Feedback, and

Expansion. Users select a Smart List option as a value for the cell.

Administrators use the Dimension Library to create Smart List dimensions and members, and assign properties. Perform these tasks to create and administer Smart Lists: l l l l

Create a new dimension with Smart List selected as the Dimension Type.

Create members in the dimension. (The members are the items that display in the dropdown, data form, or grid.)

Assign properties to the Smart List dimension and members. Assign a Label to the Smart

List and Smart List members.

Optionally: m m m

Enable Smart Lists for data forms. See the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's

Guide.

Use Smart List values in member formulas and business rules.

Set how #Missing cells associated with Smart Lists display on data forms and within drop-down lists.

Smart List Dimensions do not need to be associated with the member's dimension. Smart List is a default member property. To remove the association of a Smart List with a member, doubleclick the Smart List property and delete the Smart List name. To remove a Smart List from a member, right-click the Smart List property field and remove the value.

Working with Smart Lists (Planning Only)

109

Creating Smart Lists

To create Smart Lists:

In the Dimension Library, select File, then New, then Dimension.

The Add New Dimension dialog box is displayed.

Type the Name, Description, and select the type, SmartList.

Note: Enter a unique name containing alphanumeric and underscore characters (for example: Position) and no special characters, hyphens, or spaces. Smart Lists cannot match dimension names. Smart List names can be referenced in formula expressions.

The Smart List dimension is displayed in the Shared Library.

Data cells can display only one Smart List. If multiple Smart Lists intersect at cells, set which one takes precedence by setting the data type evaluation order.

Next, create the members that will display as items in the drop-down list.

In the Shared Library, right-click the Smart List dimension and select Create Member, then As Child.

The New Member dialog box is displayed.

Type the member name and click OK.

Note: Enter a unique member name containing alphanumeric and underscore characters and no special characters, hyphens, or spaces.

Create additional members, as necessary, for the dimension.

l l

Smart List Names

When using Smart Lists, note these considerations. Smart List names and aliases:

Must begin with a letter, and can contain letters, numbers, _ (underscore), and $ (dollar sign) characters. They cannot include spaces, or be Java reserved words, such as: abstract, assert, boolean, break, byte, case, catch, char, class, const, continue, default, do, double, else, enum, extends, false, final, finally, float, for, if, goto, implements, import, instanceof, int, interface, long, native, new, null, private, protected, public, return, short, static, strictfp, super, switch, synchronized, this, throw, throws, transient, true, try, void, volatile, while

Cannot have the same name as the Smart List dimension, another dimension, or a dimension member.

110

Working with Dimensions

When Smart List dimensions are transformed from Classic to Performance Management

Architect, they are appended with the prefix sl_

, to ensure that names are unique. (This does not occur when upgrading Smart List member names.)

Modifying Smart List Dimension Properties

Use the Property Grid to set Smart List properties.

To set Smart List properties:

Select a Smart List dimension.

Select the category, Planning. Define the Smart List properties for the dimension:

Table 12

Smart List Dimension Properties

Property Description

Label

Auto Generate

Start Value

Enter the text to display when the Smart List is selected. Smart Lists and Smart List members must have a Label assigned. Spaces and special characters are allowed. Smart List labels can reference a resource, which can be translated into different languages. See the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide.

Generate a numeric ID for each Smart List entry. If you do not select this option, you can customize Smart List ID values.

Increment

Populates the

Value

property of the first member in the Smart List. For example, if the Smart List dimension is

Justification

with

Start Value

set to

, the first member added to this list has a value of 10.

This value is appended to the value of the last member in the list to determine the value for the selected member.

For example:

Justification (Start Value=0, Increment=10)

Research (Value=0)

Customer Feedback (Value=10)

Survey (Value=20)

Display Order How Smart Lists are sorted in the drop-down list: by ID, Name, or Label l l

ID—Unique number that sets the order for the displayed entry.

Name—Unique alphanumeric name containing alphanumeric and underscore characters (for example:

Customer_Feedback) and no special characters or spaces

Label—Displayed text for the Smart List entry on the drop-down list (for example: Customer Feedback).

#Missing Data

Form Label

Determines how #Missing values are represented in cells associated with Smart Lists. Options: l l

DropDown—Displays the label set in #Missing Drop-Down Label.

Grid—Displays #Missing or leaves cells blank, depending on the Display Missing Values As Blank selection for the data form (see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide).

This selection determines what is displayed in the cell when it is not the focus. When the cell is in focus, the

Smart List item that is selected from the drop-down is displayed.

Working with Smart Lists (Planning Only)

111

Property Description

#Missing Drop

Down Label

Enter a label (for example,

No Justification

) to be displayed as an entry in the Smart List whose value is

#Missing. Notes: l l

This displays as the first selection in the Smart List drop-down, allowing #Missing as a selection in the data form.

When the cell is not in focus, this label displays only if the drop-down list is selected. Otherwise, #Missing or a blank cell is displayed, depending on the Display Missing Values As Blank selection for the data form.

#Missing labels determine only the display of cells with #Missing data; #Missing remains the stored value.

Displaying #Missing with Smart Lists

Administrators set the values that are displayed in Smart Lists and data cells, including what is displayed when there is no data in the cell. When there is no data in a cell, the cell can display no value (that is, the cell is blank), #Missing, or—for cells associated with Smart Lists—another value that you specify.

Use these options to control the display of #Missing in such cells when they are not in focus:

Option

Blank

#missing

A custom label, such as

“No Change”

Description

When designing the data form, select Display Missing Values as Blank.

When setting Smart List properties, select Grid.

When designing the data form, do not select Display Missing Values as Blank.

When setting Smart List properties, select Grid.

When setting Smart List properties, enter the custom label in the #Missing Drop-Down Label field (for example,

No Change

). Select DropDown.

Viewing Transaction Logs

All operations performed in the Dimension Library are recorded in transaction logs. You can filter logs by date, application, dimension, and property and restrict logs to operations performed in the current session. Each operation is recorded with a time stamp, the user name, the type of action performed, and other relevant information.

Action

AddApplication

AddDimension

AddDimensionAssociation

AddLibrary

AddMember

Description

Adds an application to a library

Adds a dimension to a library

Adds a dimension association between two dimensions

Adds a library to the system

Adds the specified member to the specified dimension

112

Working with Dimensions

Action

AddOrphanMember

AddView

AddViewFilter

AddViewTopMember

AddViewFilterTopMember

AutomatorRun

ClearApplication

ClearDimension

Description

Adds an orphan member to a dimension

Adds a view object to an application

Adds a view filter to a view

Adds the top member for a specified view

Adds a top member to a view filter

Logged action for an Automator run

Clears an existing application; deletes data artifacts for the application but does not delete the application record

Clears an existing dimension; deletes data artifacts for the dimension but does not delete the dimension record

Logged action for closing a library

Logged action for a Compare job

Copies an existing application

CloseLibrary

CompareRun

CopyApplication

CopyDimension

CopyLibrary

DeleteApplication

DeleteBranch

DeleteDimension

DeleteLibrary

DeleteMember

DeleteView

Copies an existing dimension

Copies an existing library

Deletes an existing application

Deletes a member and its descendants

Deletes a dimension from a library

Deletes an existing library

Deletes the specified member from the library

Deletes a view within an application

ExportRun

ImportRun

InsertMember

MemberPropertyDataLoss

MigrateApplication

MoveMember

Logged action for a export job

Logged action for a import job

Inserts the specified member into the specified dimension

Loss action for a member property data loss

Migrate application to another server

Moves the specified member within the dimension

OpenLibrary Logged action for opening a library

RemoveApplicationArrayPropertyValue Removes (clears) the array value of the specified property of the specified application

Viewing Transaction Logs

113

Action

RemoveApplicationPropertyValue

Description

Removes (clears) the value of the specified property of the specified application

RemoveDescendantValues

RemoveDimensionArrayPropertyValue Removes (clears) the array value of the specified property of the specified dimension. The property itself is not deleted, because other dimensions may be using it.

RemoveDimensionAssociation

RemoveDimensionPropertyValue

Removes property value for a member’s descendants

Removes a dimension association between two dimensions

Removes (clears) the value of the specified property of the specified dimension. The property itself is not deleted, because other dimensions may be using it.

RemoveDuplicates Removes (clears) duplicate properties for the specified member

RemoveLibraryPropertyValue

RemoveMember

RemoveMemberArrayPropertyValue

RemoveMemberPropertyValue

Removes (clears) the value of the specified property of the specified library. The property itself is not deleted, because other libraries may be using it.

Removes the specified member from the dimension

Removes (clears) the array value of the specified property of the specified member. The property itself is not deleted, because other members may be using it.

Removes (clears) the value of the specified property of the specified member. The property itself is not deleted, because other members may be using it.

RemoveViewFilter

RemoveViewFilterTopMember

TransactionExportRun

Removes a view filter from an existing application

Remove the top member from the view filter

Logged action for a transaction query

UpdateApplicationArrayPropertyValue Updates the array value of the specified property of the specified application

UpdateApplicationPropertyValue Updates the value of the specified property of the specified application

UpdateDimensionArrayPropertyValue Updates the array value of the specified property of the specified dimension

UpdateDimensionPropertyValue Updates the value of the specified property of the specified dimension

UpdateLibraryPropertyValue Updates the value of the specified property of the specified library

UpdateMemberArrayPropertyValue

UpdateMemberPropertyValue

Updates the array value of the specified property of the specified member

Updates the value of the specified property of the specified member

To view a transaction log:

From the Dimension Library, select View, and then Download Transaction Logs or click .

114

Working with Dimensions

Select an application or select Shared Library to view all dimensions in the Shared Library.

Note:

You must at least select an application or Shared Library to filter the transaction logs.

Optional: Select a dimension.

Note:

Only dimensions for the selected application or Shared Library are displayed in the drop-down list, and you can select only one dimension.

Optional: Click to select one or more members to include in the log, and click OK.

Viewing Transaction Logs

115

Optional: Click to select one or more properties to include in the log and click OK.

Optional: Use the date drop-down lists to select a date range.

Optional: Select Filter to current session.

Click OK.

After the job is submitted, click the link in the message box to go to the exported transaction log.

In the Attachments area, click Transaction Export.

116

Working with Dimensions

Select to open or save the transaction log.

Note: Transaction logs use the CSV file extension and can be opened in Microsoft Excel.

The transaction log consists of multiple columns of information. The column display varies, depending upon the criteria that you selected.

Column Name

TransactionID

DetailID

Action

ApplicationID

ApplicationName

ClassID

CreatedDateTime

Description

DimensionID

DimensionName

Description

Transaction ID associated with one or more transaction actions

Order in which actions are processed within a transaction

Operation that is logged

Generated ID associated with the application artifact

Application name

Classification of the artifact being added

Timestamp of the action

Description of the action

Generated ID of the dimension artifact

Dimension name, in which the action is performed

Viewing Transaction Logs

117

Column Name

FromOrigin

FromValue

Level

MemberDescription

MemberID

MemberName

Description

For property updates, the origin of the property value before an update occurs.

For property updates, the value of the property before an update occurs.

A designation given to a transaction action: Core, Logged, Loss, Result, or Admin.

If the action is related to a member, the name of the member is logged in this column.

Generated ID of a member

Member name, in which the action is performed

NewMemberOrder

NewParentID

Order in which the member is inserted under a parent

ID of a parent under which a member is inserted

OriginalMemberOrder Original position of a child order for a parent member

OriginalParentID

OriginatingDetailID

ID of the original parent prior to a move member operation

For actions that initiate other actions, this is the detail ID of the initiating action.

OriginatingID

PropertyID

PropertyName

ToOrigin

ToValue

UserName

LibraryID

LibraryName

For actions that initiate other actions, this is the ID of the initiating action.

Generated ID of the property definition.

Name of the property definition

The origin of the property value

The new value for a property value

The username that performed the action

The Library ID, which defaults to 1.

The Library name on which the action is performed

Purging Transaction History

Subtopics

l l l

Launching the Transaction History Purge Utility

Viewing the Transaction History Purge Logs

Working with the Transaction History Purge Utility

Native Database Log Considerations

Performance Management Architect creates transactions in the Performance Management

Architect database. This database is automatically created during installation and configuration.

Since Performance Management Architect does not delete these artifacts, the database size can

118

Working with Dimensions

increase over time. The Performance Management Architect Transaction History Purge Utility enables you to remove transactions from the database to reduce database size.

The Transaction History Purge removes transactions to reduce database size. If you use the utility, you should make a full backup of the Performance Management Architect database before running the utility to keep an audit trail for Sarbanes-Oxley compliance.

Note:

You must have the LCM Administrator or EPMA Administrator security role to purge the transaction history. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management

System User and Role Security Guide.

Launching the Transaction History Purge Utility

You can run the Transaction History Purge Utility using a command line or by using the

Windows Start Menu shortcut, EPMA Transaction History Purge.

Note: You must start the Hyperion EPMA Server before running the Transaction History Purge

Utility. In Windows, from the Services panel, select Hyperion EPMA Server, right-click and select Start or on a command line, enter: net start EPMA_Server.exe

Caution!

This utility deletes transactions from the database. You must be extremely careful and ensure that you have performed a full backup of the Performance Management

Architect database before running the Transaction History Purge Utility.

The utility automatically retrieves database connection information (database name, location, login information, and so on) from the Shared Services database so that the cleanup affects the same database that is used by Performance Management Architect. Keep in mind that you cannot run this utility on a remote client. You must run the utility on the Dimension Server Application

Server.

To launch the utility:

To launch the utility in a graphical user interface, perform one of these actions: l l

Select Start, Programs, Oracle EPM System, Foundation Services, Performance

Management Architect, EPMA Transaction History Purge.

Navigate to

<EPM_ORACLE_INSTANCE>products\Foundation\BPMA\AppServer

\DimensionServer\ServerEngine\bin

. Then, double-click

EPMA_database_cleanup_utility.exe

The EPMA Transaction History Purge Utility dialog box is displayed.

Purging Transaction History

119

Enter your user name and password that you use to login to Performance Management Architect, then click Log On.

Note: You must have the LCM Administrator or EPMA Administrator security role to purge the transaction history. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management

System User and Role Security Guide.

To launch the utility on a command line, open a command prompt, change the directory location to the location of the dimension_server.exe file. For example, C:\EPM_ORACLE_INSTANCE

\BPMA\AppServer\DimensionServer\ServerEngine\bin

, then type: database_cleanup_utility -h

120

Working with Dimensions

“Working with the Transaction History Purge Utility” on page 122 describes how to use

the graphical user interface and also includes important information about the utility.

Command line parameters are described in

“Using the Transaction History Purge Utility in a Command Window” on page 123 .

Enter database_cleanup_utility -u<user> -p<password>, where <user> is your user name and

<password> is your password.

Viewing the Transaction History Purge Logs

The Transaction History Purge Utility generates a log file in

EPM_ORACLE_INSTANCE/ diagnostics/logs/epma

. The following shows an excerpt of the

Database_Cleanup_Utility_Log.log

file.

2009-04-03 17:27:28,468

2009-04-03 17:27:28,484 EPMA Transaction History Purge Utility

2009-04-03 17:27:28,484

2009-04-03 17:27:28,484 Connecting to database...

2009-04-03 17:27:31,734 Connected successfully

2009-04-03 17:27:31,750 Only items dated April 3, 2009 or earlier will be deleted.

2009-04-03 17:27:31,750

2009-04-03 17:27:31,750 Deleting transactions...

2009-04-03 17:27:36,234

2009-04-03 17:27:36,234 The purge has completed. 129 transactions were deleted.

Tip: You can also click the Open file button in the EPMA Transaction History Purge Utility dialog box to access the log file after the process runs.

Purging Transaction History

121

Working with the Transaction History Purge Utility

Subtopics

l l

Deleting Transactions

Using the Transaction History Purge Utility in a Command Window

Scheduling Database Cleanup Tasks

The following section describes how to delete transactions using the graphical user interface.

Deleting Transactions

Caution!

This utility deletes transactions from the database. You must be extremely careful and ensure that you have performed a full backup of the Performance Management

Architect database before running the Transaction History Purge Utility. You cannot reverse the deletion of transactions. Be certain before deleting any transactions.

To delete transactions:

In the EPMA Transaction History Purge Utility dialog box, select the criteria to delete the transactions.

Perform one of these actions: l

Select Dated on or before, then select the date.

Select Older than and select the number of days. The maximum setting is 100 days. If you change the value to a number greater than 100, an error message is displayed.

Click Start.

A Warning dialog box is displayed.

Caution!

Before you click Yes, keep in mind that you cannot cancel the deletion of transactions while in progress.

Click Yes.

When you click the Start button, the utility determines which transactions to delete, and then when you click Yes in the Warning dialog box, it begins to delete all transactions. When you click Yes, the deletion process begins. The controls in the dialog box are inaccessible until the process completes. A summary of the transactions deleted is provided at the end of the process and is included in the log file referenced at the bottom of the dialog box. When the deletion is complete, the dialog box controls are re-enabled.

Note:

If you attempt to close the application while the deletion is in-progress, an error message is displayed indicating that if you close the application the current deletion process to be rolled back.

122

Working with Dimensions

Note: If you experience problems with the Transaction History Purge Utility timing out, you can increase the value of the CommandTimeout setting. The default timeout is 900 seconds or 15 minutes. You can modify the timeout setting in the

BPMA_Server_Config.xml file. See the Data_Access_Layer setting in Appendix D,

“Configuration Settings in BPMA_Server_Config.xml.”

Using the Transaction History Purge Utility in a Command Window

When you launch the utility from a command prompt with the -h parameter, a list of valid parameters are listed in the command window. Keep in mind these guidelines: l l

Each parameter must be separated by a space.

If a parameter takes a value, it should not be separated by a space. For example, -d05/08 passes a date.

Commands are not case sensitive.

To launch the utility in a command window, see

“Using the Transaction History Purge Utility in a Command Window” on page 123

The following table describes each parameter available in the command window:

-u

-p

-np

-h

Parameter Description

-a<n>

-d<d>

Specifies a minimum age to delete, where <n> is an integer number of days.

The maximum value allowed is 100. If you enter a value greater than 100, an error is logged.

Specifies a maximum date, where <d> represents the date. The date format should follow the format in the Regional Settings in the Control Panel. The year is not necessary if it is the same as the current year. However, you must specify the month and day. For example, if the current year is 2008, then 9/8 and 09/08 would represent September 8, 2008.

Suppresses all prompts.

Displays parameters help.

Specifies the user name.

Specifies the password.

You can use multiple parameters to complete the process. Examples of commands are listed below:

Command Description database_cleanup_utility -u<user> -p<password> Specifies the user name and password. Every command line execution of the utility requires a user name and password, except the -h command to access the utility help text.

database_cleanup_utility -np database_cleanup_utility -d04/08

Deletes all applicable transaction with no prompts.

Deletes applicable transactions dated on or before April 8th of the current year.

Purging Transaction History

123

Command database_cleanup_utility -d04/08/2005 database_cleanup_utility -a50 database_cleanup_utility -h

Description

Deletes applicable transactions dated on or before April 8th of 2005 (the year must be specified if the date does not fall within the current year).

Deletes applicable transactions older than 50 days.

Displays the help text.

Note: When running the utility on a command line, any errors that occur will display an Exit

Code message.

The following exit codes can be displayed in the command line. The following table lists the exit code, the associated number that displays for the code in the command line, and a description.

Exit Code

Connection Failure

Hyperion EPMA Server

Not Running

Associated Number Description

Success

Input Errors

Configuration File Error 2

Unknown Error

SQL Error

The command ran successfully.

The command line parameter that you used is invalid.

Problem with the

BPMA_Server_Config.xml

file. For example,

BPMA_Server_

Config.xml

must be in the same directory as this utility, otherwise an error occurs.

Though this file is not needed for database connection information, it still must be present.

Connection problem accessing the database.

You must start the Hyperion EPMA Server before launching the Transaction History Purge

Utility. See

“Using the Transaction History Purge Utility in a Command Window” on page

123

for information on starting the Hyperion EPMA Server using a command line.

Contact Oracle Support.

An error occurred while attempting to run the purge against the database.

Note: If you experience problems with the Transaction History Purge Utility timing out, you can increase the value of the CommandTimeout setting. The default timeout is 900 seconds. You can modify the timeout setting in the BPMA_Server_Config.xml file. See the Data_Access_Layer setting in

Appendix D, “Configuration Settings in

BPMA_Server_Config.xml.”

Scheduling Database Cleanup Tasks

You can schedule the Transaction History Purge Utility to run using the Windows Control Panel.

124

Working with Dimensions

To schedule tasks, use the Control Panel to open Scheduled Tasks. Then add a scheduled task for the Transaction History Purge Utility and follow the instructions in the Scheduled

Task Wizard. Make sure to view advanced properties on the last screen of the wizard.

When you view the properties for the scheduled task, you can add parameters at the end of the

Run text box. For example, if you add parameters to the end of the string in the Run text box, it may show: database_cleanup_utility.exe -u<user> -p<password> -a20 -np

, which deletes all applicable transactions older than 20 days without any prompts.

The exit codes and logging capabilities are useful when using Windows Scheduler, since you do not need to be logged in when it runs, and if it fails you can view a log to determine the cause.

You can find the log file,

Database_Cleanup_Utility_Log.txt

, in

<EPM_ORACLE_INSTANCE>\logs\epma

Native Database Log Considerations

Using this utility can generate a large number of native database log entries. A large number of these entries can significantly increase the storage used by your database. You can use a variety of methods to manage transaction logging space, depending on your database type (Oracle, SQL

Server, or DB2).

Note: Reclaiming logging space is a task that should be performed by a database administrator.

The following examples show how to reclaim transaction logging space in Oracle and SQL Server.

l l

Oracle—The following command attempts to resize the Redo log file, "EPMARedo.log," to

600k.

ALTER DATABASE DATAFILE 'F:\oradata\live\EPMARedo.log' RESIZE 600k;

SQL Server—The following command decreases the size of the data and log files in a database called "EPMA," with the goal of creating 5 percent free space within each file.

DBCC SHRINKDATABASE (EPMA, 5);

Note: In DB2, log file size is generally not an issue since it is overwritten if "circular logging" is enabled. If "non-circular logging" is enabled, it can be deleted when DB2 begins to use the next log file in sequence. For additional information, see your DB2 documentation.

Purging Transaction History

125

126

Working with Dimensions

Working with Members

In This Chapter

Creating Members ....................................................................................... 127

Working with Shared Members ......................................................................... 128

Setting up Dynamic Time Series Members ............................................................ 133

Renaming Members ..................................................................................... 135

Removing and Deleting Members ...................................................................... 136

Finding Members......................................................................................... 138

Sorting Members......................................................................................... 140

Collapsing the Parent.................................................................................... 141

Reordering Children Members .......................................................................... 141

Managing Orphan Members ............................................................................ 141

Editing Property Values .................................................................................. 142

Finding Properties........................................................................................ 143

Working with User-Defined Attributes .................................................................. 144

Working with Member Formulas ........................................................................ 146

Working with Members in Applications ................................................................ 150

Creating Members

You can create members as siblings or children of the selected member. You can create members only in the Dimension Library. If you want to add members to applications, you must first create the members in the Shared Library and then add them to the applications.

Member names must follow product naming requirements. For Planning dimensions, see

“Naming Restrictions for Dimensions, Members, and Aliases” on page 372 .

For Financial Management dimensions, see Chapter 11, “Working with Financial Management

Dimensions” . For additional information on creating Profitability and Cost Management

members, see the Oracle Hyperion Profitability and Cost Management Administrator's Guide.

Note: You may be able to enter different characters when creating members in the Dimension

Library, but when the member is brought into an application, the application's naming rules are applied.

Creating Members

127

Performance Management Architect supports large member domains. For information on collapsing the parent of a large member domain, see

“Collapsing the Parent” on page 141

To create members:

Right-click a member, select Create Member, and then select As Child or As Sibling.

Note: If you right-click on a top member for a dimension, you do not have the option to create a sibling.

Enter the member name and click OK.

Working with Shared Members

Subtopics

l l l l

Creating Shared Members by Copying and Pasting

Creating Shared Members Using the Member Selector

Selecting Members

Searching for Members Using the Member Selector

Shared Members within Planning Applications

Sharing members allows alternate hierarchical structures within the Dimension Library. Base members must exist before creating shared members. You can create multiple shared members for a member.

The second instance of any member is tagged as a shared member, with “Shared” in parentheses.

In the following example, the entity Washington is a member of the UnitedStates hierarchy and a member of the Management-Gates hierarchy.

128

Working with Members

You can create shared members in two ways: l l

Copy and paste the shared member as a child or sibling. See

“Creating Shared Members by

Copying and Pasting” on page 129

Insert the shared member using the member selector, which enables you to select members from a different portion of the dimension without losing your position in the Shared Library

tree view. See “Creating Shared Members Using the Member Selector” on page 129

Note: You can modify global properties for shared instances of members. For information on

global and relationship properties, see “Modifying Properties” on page 79 .

Creating Shared Members by Copying and Pasting

To create shared members:

Right-click a member and select Copy.

Locate the position in the hierarchy where you want the new member to be, right-click a member and select Paste, As Child or As Sibling.

Creating Shared Members Using the Member Selector

You can use the member selector to choose a member from a different portion of the dimension without losing your position in the Shared Library tree view.

To create shared members:

Right-click a member and select Insert Shared Member.

Select As Child or As Sibling.

The Insert Shared Member dialog box is displayed.

Working with Shared Members

129

Select the member(s) to insert. See “Selecting Members” on page 130

Selecting Members

You can use the member selector to view and select members within a dimension. To find the member(s) you want to select, you can expand and collapse members within a dimension using the [+] and [-].

The Insert Shared Member dialog box has two panes—all members in the dimension on the left and selections on the right. The left pane, showing all members available in the dimension, displays the member name and a short description, if available. The right pane, showing selections, displays the member name and the selection type.

To use the member selector:

Optional: Use the Menu button above each pane to change the columns in the member selector. For example: l

In the left pane, click , Show, Count.

The Count column displays in addition to Name and Description. The count column displays the number of child members under the current dimension. This can be a helpful indicator of how long it might take to expand down a branch of the tree.

130

Working with Members

To remove the Count column, click , and select Show, Count.

To collapse a dimension, click , and select Collapse All.

In the list of available dimensions and members on the left, select a member to add as shared and click

Tip: If you cannot find a member, you can search for members in the member selector. See

“Searching for Members Using the Member Selector” on page 131 .

To deselect a member from the list of shared members, click .

To deselect all members from the list of selections, click .

Click OK.

l l

Searching for Members Using the Member Selector

You have two options to search for members in the member selector.

Members tab—You can enter the member name or partial member name in the Find a

Member text box and then click the Search button. Then, you can use the Next and Previous buttons to navigate to the next or previous occurrence. You can also click the Advanced

Search button to search by Name, Alias, or Property.

Search tab—You can use the Search tab to enter the member name or partial member name and view a list of members that are returned in the search.

You can use wildcard characters, such as * or %, when searching for members. For example, if you are searching for a customer dimension, you can enter Ba** to search for customer names that start with Ba.

To search for members using the Members tab:

In the member selector Find a member text box, enter the member name or partial member name with wildcard characters.

Click .

The member is automatically selected in the list of members in the left pane.

Click the Next or Previous buttons to navigate through the members until you find the member you want to select.

Optional: Click in the Find a member area. Perform these tasks:

Working with Shared Members

131

a. Select Name, Alias, or Property.

b. Enter a value.

Tip: You can use wildcard characters to enter a value in the Find Member dialog box.

c. Click OK.

The member is selected in the list of members in the left pane.

d. Click the Next or Previous buttons to navigate through the members until you find the member you want to select.

When you find the member, click the Select button to move to member to the selections area.

Click OK.

To search for members using the Search tab:

In the member selector select the Search tab.

Find text box, enter the member name or partial member name with wildcard characters, and then click

The member is automatically selected in the Results list.

Optional: Click . Perform these tasks: a. Select Name, Alias, or Property.

b. Enter a value.

Tip: You can use wildcard characters to enter a value in the Find Member dialog box.

c. Click OK.

When you find the member, click the Select button to move to member to the selections area.

Click OK.

Shared Members within Planning Applications

Sharing members allows alternate rollup structures within Planning applications. A base member must exist before you can create a shared member. You can create multiple shared members for the base member. A base member must display before its shared members in position from top to bottom.

Shared members are allowed for Account, Entity, Scenario, Version, Period, and custom dimensions. Shared members share some property definitions with base members, such as member name, alias name, base currency, and plan types for which members are valid. The Data

Storage property for shared members must be Shared or ShareData. Custom properties, custom property values, and member formulas are not allowed for shared members.

Shared members cannot be moved to other parent members. You must delete shared members and re-create them under different parent members. Shared members must be at the lowest level

132

Working with Members

(level zero) in the hierarchy, and cannot have children. (The base member need not be level zero.) You can enter data in shared members; values are stored with base members. With shared members: l l l

A base member cannot be the parent of the shared member. The shared member can be anywhere else in the dimension hierarchy.

A shared member and its base member must have the same name.

You must set data storage for shared members to ShareData in Performance Management

Architect. Otherwise, shared members are not added when the application is deployed to

Planning.

In dimension hierarchies for member selection in Oracle Hyperion Business Rules and Oracle

Hyperion Smart View for Office, shared members are displayed similarly to base members. For

Oracle Hyperion Business Rules, there is no labeling distinction, so you might not be able to select shared members for actions such as Copy Data.

Setting up Dynamic Time Series Members

You can use Dynamic Time Series (DTS) members to create reports that show period-to-date data, such as quarter-to-date expenses. DTS members are used with members of the Period dimension. For example, to calculate quarter-to-date values, you can enable the Q-T-D member and associate it with generation number 2. You can then use the Q-T-D DTS member to calculate monthly values up to the current month in the quarter.

Predefined DTS members: l l l l l l l

Y-T-D: Year-to-date

H-T-D: History-to-date

S-T-D: Season-to-date

Q-T-D: Quarter-to-date

P-T-D: Period-to-date

M-T-D: Month-to-date

W-T-D: Week-to-date

D-T-D: Day-to-date l

Caution!

If you are using the Y-T-D or P-T-D member, you must rename the Year or Period dimension so it does not conflict with the reserved Dynamic Time Series generation names, Year and Period. Before using Y-T-D, rename the Year dimension; before using P-T-D, rename Period. After doing so, you must update all application artifacts affected by these changes, such as member formulas and business rules, and any reports that reference the dimension by name.

Setting up Dynamic Time Series Members

133

The DTS members provide up to eight levels of period-to-date reporting. Your data and database outline determine which members you can use. For example, if the database contains hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, and yearly data, you can report day-to date (D-T-D), weekto-date (W-T-D), month-to-date (M-T-D), quarter-to-date (Q-T-D), and year-to-date (Y-T-

D) information. If the database contains monthly data for the past 5 years, you can report yearto-date (Y-T-D) and history-to-date (H-T-D) information, up to a specific year. If the database tracks data for seasonal time periods, you can report period-to-date (P-T-D) or season-to-date

(S-T-D) information.

Avoid assigning time balance properties (such as First and Average) to members set for dynamic calculations if you plan to use the members in Dynamic Time Series calculations. Doing so may retrieve incorrect values for parent members in your accounts dimension. For detailed information, see the Oracle Essbase Database Administrator's Guide.

You can use the DTS Manager dialog box to set up DTS members with these options:

DTSEnabled, DTS Generation, and Alias. (Setting the DTS properties for non-DTS members has no effect.) Additional Period properties are not applicable to DTS members.

Considerations for using DTS members with Performance Management Architect:

DTS members must be level 0 members and children of the root member (such as Period).

l l l l l l

The Period Type property for DTS members is Dynamic Time Period.

For members enabled as DTS, a DTS Generation must be selected.

If you are using Y-T-D, the Year dimension cannot be named Year.

If you are using P-T-D, the Period dimension cannot be named Period.

DTS members do not display as actual members in the Period dimension hierarchy. For

Planning, DTS members are enabled in Planning and Essbase after the application is deployed.

To set up DTS members:

From the Dimension Library, right-click the Period dimension. Then, select DTS Manager.

In the DTS Manager dialog box, select Enabled for the DTS series to use: Y-T-D, H-T-D, S-T-D, Q-T-D,

P-T-D, M-T-D, W-T-D, or D-T-D.

134

Working with Members

Select a generation.

You cannot associate DTS members with the highest generation (the dimension root).

Optional: If the dimension is associated with an alias, select an alias.

Click Save.

Renaming Members

You can rename members in the Dimension Library. Keep in mind these guidelines (organized by the application type):

All Applications

You cannot rename system members—members with names displayed in brackets [] l

Consolidation (Financial Management) l l l

For Financial Management applications, renaming only applies to Performance

Management Architect, not Classic Administration features. After a rename, these artifacts are not updated automatically in Financial Management: m

Rules

Member Lists m m m m m

Web Data Entry Forms

Data Grids

Reports

POVs

Period, Year, and View members should not be renamed after the first successful deployment of the application

If the default currency member is renamed, the application property, Default Currency, must be manually updated for existing Financial Management applications

Planning

You cannot rename Currency members

You cannot rename Year members l

For Profitability applications, if you rename members after the initial deployment, you must redeploy the application.

Note: When you deploy applications, the log file notes all renamed members and all items that are not automatically updated.

To rename members:

Right-click a member and select Rename Member.

Renaming Members

135

The Rename Member dialog box is displayed.

Enter the name, then click OK.

Removing and Deleting Members

Subtopics

l l

Removing Members

Deleting Members

Excluding and Deleting Planning Members

You can remove and delete members, including shared members, from the Shared Library hierarchy.

Removing Members

You can remove members, including shared members, from the Shared Library hierarchy. When you remove local members, the member becomes an orphan. When you remove local members, the member and all of its descendants are removed from the hierarchy and are moved to the orphan area as individual members without a hierarchical structure. When you remove a shared member, the member is removed from the alternate hierarchy and does not become an orphan.

The same member in other hierarchy structures is not removed.

To remove members:

In the Dimension Library, right-click a member and select Remove Member.

Note: You can use the [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys to select multiple members.

Click Yes to confirm.

Deleting Members

You can remove members, including shared members, from the Shared Library hierarchy and reuse them later. Orphan members are created when you remove members from the hierarchy.

When you remove members, the member and all of its descendants are removed from the hierarchy and are moved to the orphan area as individual members without a hierarchy structure.

When you remove a shared member, only that member is moved to the orphan area. The same member in other hierarchy structures is not removed.

You can delete members, including shared members, from the Shared Library hierarchy. When you delete a member, the member and all of its descendants are deleted from the hierarchy and from all views. When you delete a shared member, only that member is deleted. The same member in other hierarchy structures is not deleted.

136

Working with Members

To delete members:

In the Dimension Library, right-click a member and select Delete Member.

Note: You can use the [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys to select multiple members to delete.

Click Yes to confirm.

Excluding and Deleting Planning Members

Each data value in Planning is identified by a set of dimension members and a plan type.

Excluding dimension members from Performance Management Architect applications can translate to a delete action on deployment. Hence, excluding dimension members can result in data loss when redeploying.

On redeployment, a Planning application is refreshed from Performance Management

Architect, and all dimensions used in the application are refreshed with their current structure in Performance Management Architect. Redeployment refreshes all dimensions and their members, whether or not changes have occurred.

When excluded members are used elsewhere (such as a selection in a data form), their associations are removed. Before excluding members from an application, use the Planning

Show Usage feature within Planning to determine where members are used in the application and review the implications of excluding dimension members. For information about the Show

Usage feature, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide.

When a member is excluded from a dimension in an Performance Management Architect application and the application is deployed to Planning, the member is deleted from that dimension in Planning. This also deletes any associated supporting detail, data, and references to the member. For example: l l l l

Excluding a Scenario, Version, or Entity dimension member deletes a planning unit and all of its history (data) and annotations.

Excluding a member referenced by data forms changes the data form definition so it uses only the root dimension member. This may result in loss of access permission or cause no data to be displayed in a data form.

Excluding a currency dimension member that is referenced by an entity changes the entity dimension so it uses the default currency for the application in Performance Management

Architect.

Excluding a currency member that is referenced as a triangulation currency removes the triangulation.

Custom dimensions and attribute dimensions that are excluded from an application in

Performance Management Architect are not deleted from Planning during deployment.

However, when members for these dimensions are excluded from an application in Performance

Management Architect, they are deleted from Planning during deployment.

Removing and Deleting Members

137

To improve performance when deleting entities, first exclude planning units for the subtree (by excluding the root member) for all scenarios and versions. After deleting entity members, you must update and validate business rules, reports, and data forms.

Note: When you delete a member that is used in a data validation rule, the member is not deleted from Planning. When you deploy the application to Planning, the job console shows that deployment completes with errors and the Messages log shows that the member was not deleted.

Finding Members

You can search for members in the Dimension Library.

To find members:

Perform one of these actions to display the Find Members dialog box: l l

Click .

Right-click a dimension and click Find Members.

Select Edit, Search.

Select to search by the member: Name, Alias, or Property.

Enter the value.

Note: Enter alpha-numeric characters only. You can also enter wildcard characters, however other special characters are not supported.

Select an option to view the results: l l

List View—replaces the Property Grid and lists all members in the Member Find pane.

Navigation Button—displays the first member in the Shared Library pane (selected).

You can use navigation buttons on the Standard toolbar to move to the next or previous member.

For example, if you searched for the member, “Budget,” using the Navigation Button option, the first member found is automatically selected in the Shared Library, then you can click to search for the next occurrence of “Budget,” continuing to click Next to search for the next occurrence. If you want to navigate to the previous occurrence, you can click .

Click OK.

If you selected List View, the search results replace the Property Grid. You can double-click the member in the Member Find pane to locate the member in the hierarchy. When you double-click the member, the dimension that contains the member automatically expands in the Shared Library.

138

Working with Members

If you selected the Navigation Button option, the dimension that contains the member automatically expands in the Shared Library. You can select the member to view the properties in the Property Grid.

Finding Members

139

Optional: To reapply a search, click . The information you entered previously is saved in the Search

Members dialog box.

Optional: To clear a search, click .

Optional: To refresh the artifacts displayed in a search, click .

Click to close the Member Find.

Sorting Members

You can sort members in the Dimension Library (Shared Library and Application pane).

To sort members:

Right-click a dimension. Then, select Sort Members.

Select the sort order (Ascending or Descending).

140

Working with Members

Collapsing the Parent

Performance Management Architect supports large member domains. If you have expanded a dimension with a large number of members, you can collapse the parent instead of manually scrolling up to find the parent and click [-].

To collapse the parent, right-click a member and select Collapse Parent.

Reordering Children Members

You can reorder children in the Dimension Library.

To reorder children:

In the Shared Library or Application pane, drag a member up or down the tree to change the order, or right-click the dimension where you want to reorder the children, and then select Reorder Children.

Note: For Profitability and Cost Management models, you must reorder the list of members for all business dimensions in the model to display

NoMember

as the last member; otherwise, validation of the model fails. This step is not required for systems dimensions, such as Alias, AllocationType, Measures, Periods, Scenarios, or Years.

If you want to reorder children in a local dimension, you can modify the order in the

Application pane of the Dimension Library. However, if the dimension is shared, you must modify the order in the Shared Library pane versus in the Application pane.

Perform an action to change the order: l l

Double-click the sort order, and enter a new number.

Select the row, then press F2 and enter a new number.

Select the row and use the arrows to change the order.

To preview the new order, click Preview.

Click Save.

Managing Orphan Members

Subtopics

Viewing Orphan Members

Deleting Orphan Members

You can remove members, including shared members, from the Shared Library hierarchy and reuse them later. Orphan members are created when you remove members from the hierarchy.

When you remove members, the member and all of its descendants are removed from the

Collapsing the Parent

141

hierarchy and are moved to the orphan area as individual members without a hierarchy structure.

When you remove a shared member, only that member is moved to the orphan area. The same member in other hierarchy structures is not removed.

You can view orphan members and also permanently delete orphan members.

Viewing Orphan Members

To view orphan members, right-click a dimension and select Orphan Members.

The list of orphan members replaces the Property Grid.

Deleting Orphan Members

To delete orphan members, right-click the member in the Orphan Members list and select

Delete Orphan Member.

The orphan member is permanently deleted.

Tip: To re-display the Property Grid, select View, Show Property Grid.

Editing Property Values

When a dimension member is created, it takes on a default set of properties and property values.

Properties are organized by category.

For example, the following properties are displayed for the New Account dimension when the category is set to Planning:

Both global and relationship properties can be edited for all instances of a member. See

“Modifying Properties” on page 79 . Properties, valid property values, and default values are

defined in the following chapters:

142

Working with Members

l l l l l

Chapter 11, “Working with Financial Management Dimensions”

Chapter 13, “Working with Profitability and Cost Management Properties”

Chapter 15, “Working with Statistical and System Properties”

Property values are in the following forms: l l

String and Memo—Enter text.

Integer—Enter a number.

Boolean—Select True or deselect for False.

l l l

Member—Click and select a member.

Drop-down list—Select an item.

String Map—Map an Alias property to an Alias dimension.

To edit property values:

Double-click a cell in the Value column of the property to edit.

Modify the value for the property.

Note: When you modify a value, the cell changes color.

Click .

The property editor displays an icon to the right of each property. Each icon indicates a type of property: l l l

Default

User-defined

Derived

Inherited l

Finding Properties

Some cells may not display a default property, in this case, you can use the Property Selector dialog box to choose a property.

To find a property:

In the Property Grid, right-click an empty cell and select Find Property.

The Property Selector dialog box is displayed.

Finding Properties

143

Select the property, then click OK.

Working with User-Defined Attributes

Subtopics

l l

Creating Associations

Creating User-Defined Attributes

Deleting User-Defined Attributes

You can use user-defined attributes (UDAs)—words or phrases describing a characteristic of members—within calculation scripts, member formulas, and reports so that they return lists of members associated with the specified UDA. For example, if you have a Product dimension with various product members, you could create a UDA called New Products and base certain calculations only on new products. For information on creating and using UDAs, see the Oracle

Hyperion Essbase Database Administrator’s Guide and Online Help.

Creating UDAs is a three-step process:

1. Create one or more UDA dimensions. See “User-Defined Attribute Dimensions” on page

85 .

2. Create a dimension association between the UDA property and the UDA dimension.

3. Create UDA members.

144

Working with Members

Creating Associations

Before you create user-defined attributes, you must associate the dimension in which you want to create UDAs in to a UDA dimension. Creating an association with the UDA dimension enables you to reuse the UDAs in multiple dimensions.

Note: If you have previously associated this dimension to a UDA dimension, it is not necessary to follow these steps prior to creating UDAs.

To create a dimension association:

Expand the dimension and select the member for which you want to create a user-defined attribute.

In the Property Grid, double-click UDA, then click .

Note: If you do not have the dimension associated with a UDA dimension, the Create

Association - Warning dialog box is displayed. To add user-defined attributes for this member, you must first create a dimension association.

Click Yes to create an association.

The Create New Association dialog box is displayed.

Select the UDA property, optionally add a description, then select a UDA dimension.

l l

Creating User-Defined Attributes

You can create UDAs using one of these options:

Add members to a UDA dimension. See

“Creating Members” on page 127 .

Add members using the UDA Selection dialog box, accessed via the Property Grid.

To create UDA members via the Property Grid:

In the Property Grid, double-click UDA, then click

The UDA Selection dialog box is displayed.

To create a UDA, click Add.

The Add New UDA Members dialog box is displayed.

Enter the UDA name.

Optional: To add multiple UDAs, perform these actions: l

Select Create Multiple Members l

Enter the UDA names, separated by a comma. For example, Spring Collection, Summer

Collection, Fall Collection, Winter Collection. In this example, four new UDAs are created.

Click OK.

Working with User-Defined Attributes

145

The UDA Selection dialog box is displayed.

Perform one of these actions:

Select one or more UDA members on the left and click .

l l l

To add all UDA members, click .

To remove one or more members from the Select UDA members list, select the members and click .

To remove all members from the Select UDA members list, click .

Click Save.

The UDAs are displayed in the UDA property and as members in the UDA dimension in which you created the association with for the UDA property.

Deleting User-Defined Attributes

To delete UDAs, perform one of these actions:

In the UDA Selection dialog box: l l

1. Select one or more members in the UDA Selection dialog box.

2. Right-click and select Delete Members.

In the Dimension Library:

1. Expand the UDA dimension that includes the member(s) you want to remove.

2. Right-click the member, select Delete Member.

3. Click Yes.

You cannot delete UDAs referenced by another member. You must first remove the

UDA from the referenced member using the UDA Selection dialog box that you access in the Property Grid.

Working with Member Formulas

Subtopics

Validating Formulas

Working with Formula Expressions

You can define member formulas in the Property Grid for Planning, Profitability, Essbase (ASO), and Essbase (BSO) categories. Member formulas can combine operators, calculation functions, dimension and member names, and numeric constants to perform calculations on members.

Member formulas can also include:

146

Working with Members

l l

Operator type, function, value, member name, UDA, and so on that are allowed in Essbase formulas (see the Oracle Essbase Database Administrator’s Guide and Online Help)

Predefined formula expressions—including Smart List values—that expand into a formula or value upon database refresh

To define member formulas:

Select the dimension member to add or change a formula.

Note: The Member Formula property displays in the following categories: Planning, Essbase

(ASO), and Essbase (BSO).

In the Property Grid, double-click Member Formula.

Click .

The Memo Editor dialog box is displayed.

See the Oracle Essbase Database Administrator’s Guide for syntax, rules, and usage on Essbase formulas.

To wrap the formula text, click Word Wrap.

Click OK.

Validating Formulas

You can only validate member formulas after you deploy an application.

To validate member formulas:

Double-click the member formula to validate.

Click .

The Memo Editor dialog box is displayed.

Click Validate.

If necessary, edit the formula. When finished, click OK.

Working with Formula Expressions

Member formulas support Essbase native formulas and formula expressions that are evaluated and expanded into Essbase code blocks when the database is refreshed. In these expressions, you can address Smart Lists by name, which are replaced with their numerical values in calculations.

You can include predefined formula expressions in member formulas, and test them after you deploy an application using the Validate button in the Memo Editor. You can also load them using Oracle Hyperion Application Link or Shared Services.

You can update the dimension outline without updating all the business rules and calc scripts that depend on the outline. Calculations become more independent of specifics in the outline.

Working with Member Formulas

147

Performance is not decreased when you use formula expressions because they are run only when you refresh the database.

To use a formula expression in a member formula:

Select the dimension member to add or change a formula.

Double-click Member Formula, then click .

In the Memo Editor dialog box, define formulas for the member.

You can include formula expressions and Essbase native formulas in the member formula.

See the Oracle Essbase Database Administrator’s Guide for syntax, rules, and usage on Essbase native formulas.

Planning provides predefined formula expressions that you can use in member formulas.

You cannot edit or create your own formula expressions. See “Formula Expressions” on page 148 .

Click OK.

Prerequisites

Before using formula expressions in member formulas, you should understand Essbase formulas and calculation and the application outline. See the Oracle Essbase Database Administrator’s

Guide.

Formula Expressions

Formula expressions can include these predefined variables and functions.

Table 13

Variables in Formula Expressions

Variable Description

OpenInputValueBlock

CloseInputValueBlock

Generates an IF statement if the application is a multi-currency application, or an empty string if it is one currency application. Used with CloseInputValueBlock.

Generates an End IF statement if the application is a multi-currency application, or an empty string if it is one currency application. Used with OpenInputValueBlock.

NumberOfPeriodsInYear Returns the number of time periods in the year

NumberOfYears Returns the number of years in the application

148

Working with Members

Table 14 Functions in Formula Expressions

Function Description

Dimension(dimTag)

Period(periodName)

Returns the name of a predefined dimension. The dimtags are: l l l l l l

DIM_NAME_PERIOD

DIM_NAME_YEAR

DIM_NAME_ACCOUNT

DIM_NAME_ENTITY

DIM_NAME_SCENARIO

DIM_NAME_VERSION

DIM_NAME_CURRENCY l

Returns the specified period. The periodName options are: l l l l l

FIRST_QTR_PERIOD

SECOND_QTR_PERIOD

THIRD_QTR_PERIOD

FOURTH_QTR_PERIOD

FIRST_PERIOD

LAST_PERIOD l

CrossRef(accountName)

CrossRef(accountName, prefix) getCalendarTPIndex() getFiscalTPIndex()

CYTD(memberName)

CYTD(memberName, calTpIndexName, fiscalTpIndexName)

Generates a cross reference for the account

Generates a cross-reference for the account. The account name contains a prefix that you define. The default prefix is No, followed by a blank space and the account name, for example, No Salary.

Generates a member formula that returns an index for the time period; the index is based on the calendar year.

Generates a member formula that returns an index for the time period; the index is based on the fiscal year.

Generates a calendar year-to-date formula for the member

Generates a calendar year-to-date formula for the member, and the time period index based on the calendar year and fiscal year. Use when members are renamed. The default member names are “Cal

TP-Index” and “Fiscal TP-Index”

Syntax

Formula expressions support functions and variables. Follow these syntax rules for functions and variables when you create formula expressions: l l l

Enclose variables or properties with square brackets, [ ]. If you omit square brackets, the variable is treated as a native variable.

Enclose member names with quotation marks (for example, “Account 200”).

Characters in variables are case-insensitive, but cannot have extra spaces or characters such as the underscore ( _ ).

You can include subcalls to other functions within an expression.

Working with Member Formulas

149

l l

Do not enter text where a number is required.

The order of the outline is important in a member formula. For example, do not reference a value that has not been calculated yet.

Including Smart List Values as Variables

You can include a Smart List as a variable in a formula expression, such as the formula expression,

“Status”= [Status.Departed]

“Status” is the member name, Status is the Smart List dimension name, and Departed is a Smart

List member name. If the Smart List value for Departed is 2, Essbase replaces Status.Departed

with 2 in the member formula (Planning treats Smart Lists as text and Essbase treats Smart Lists as numbers). If the Smart List value for Departed is 2, Essbase replaces Status.Departed with 2 in the calculation and stores 2 in the database.

Write Smart Lists in this format: [SmartListDimensionName.SmartListMemberName]

Understanding Common Errors

Follow the rules of syntax carefully. If formula expression syntax contains errors, error messages are returned when you deploy an application. To get information about error messages, view your Planning Application Server log. The most common error message is “Failed to execute.”

This occurs when you use parameters in the expression incorrectly. These actions cause “Failed to execute” error messages: l l l

Entering the wrong number of parameters in the formula expression

Misspelling member names, functions, or variable names

Not surrounding member names with quotation marks

Including numbers where strings are required l

See the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide.

Working with Members in Applications

As you create applications, you can add only certain members to applications, exclude members, and set the base member. For information on creating applications, see

Chapter 6, “Building

Applications.”

Adding Members to Applications

You can narrow the results that display in an application by using a subset of a dimension. For example, you may want to show only specific members in an application, such as a product or region. When you add only certain members, the application results are narrowed to these members. This is extremely helpful if you have dimensions containing numerous members and you only need to show data for a few members.

150

Working with Members

To add members to an application:

In the Shared Library, right-click a dimension and select Add to App View.

The Add to App View dialog box is displayed.

The member selector enables you to filter members within a dimension. You can expand and collapse members within a dimension using the [+] and [-].

The Add to App View dialog box has two panes——all members in the dimension on the left and selections on the right. The left pane, showing all members available in the dimension, displays the member name and a short description, if available. The right pane, showing selections, displays the member name and the selection type. In new applications, all members display in the selections pane by default.

Optional: Use the Menu button above each pane to change the columns in the member selector. For example: l

In the left pane, click , Show, Count.

To remove the Count column, click , and select Show, Count.

To collapse expanded members, click , and select Collapse All.

Working with Members in Applications

151

In the list of available members on the left, select a member to filter by and click .

Tip: If you cannot find a member, you can search for members in the member selector. See

“Searching for Members Using the Member Selector” on page 131 .

To deselect a member from the list of members to filter by, click .

Continue to add members to the filter. (Members that the application will be filtered by appear on the right.)

Tip: To deselect all members from the list of selections, click .

When finished, click OK.

Selecting Top Members

The Select Top Members feature is similar to the Add to App View feature. Adding members to

the application, as described in “Adding Members to Applications” on page 150 , pushes only

the members you want into the application from the Shared Library. Whereas selecting top members pushes the entire dimension into the application, then you can exclude members by picking one or more "top" members. For example, if you have an Entity dimension with a geographical hierarchy with all geographies and you want an application to contain only a country–specific structure. For the shared dimension in the application you can select a country such as Germany, as a top–level member. Similarly you can select other top members from a functional hierarchy. When you select a top member you can also specify if you want just the member, with children, or all the descendants.

Note: A top member does not need to be at the highest level. You can select a child member as a top member and then if you add children in the Shared Library, or change them, it is reflected in the application.

To select a top member:

In an application, right-click a shared dimension and choose Select Top Members.

The Member Selector dialog box is displayed.

Select a member on the left, then click to move the member to the Selections area.

Click OK.

Tip: To change your selections, right-click a shared dimension and choose Select Top

Members again.

152

Working with Members

Excluding Members

In an application, you can exclude members from a dimension if the dimension is shared.

Members can be excluded if you previously included them in selections when defining the member filter for the dimension.

When you exclude a member, a property is automatically set to ensure that the member no longer appears in the application. Excluding a member does not remove existing property values set for the member or its descendants. If you later add the member to the application, the property values are retained, just as they were before you excluded it.

If you have a Planning and Financial Management product installation, and create a Planning application, you may need to exclude unnecessary Financial Management system members. You should select all the Financial Management system members, displayed with square brackets, such as [None] and [Active], and exclude them. For example, in the Accounts dimension, when creating a Planning application, you would exclude all items under Account except Liabilities and Intangible Assets.

To exclude a member, in the application, right-click the member to exclude and select

Exclude Member.

Showing Excluded Members

To show excluded members:

In the application, right-click the dimension and select Show Excluded Members.

The Exclusions dialog box is displayed.

To show the excluded members in the application, select the member and select Include Member.

Otherwise, click Cancel.

The excluded member is displayed in the application.

Setting the Base Member

Setting the base member enables you to exclude any of the children under the parent in a shared dimension. For example, in the Entity roll up, Europe has the children of Italy and United

Working with Members in Applications

153

Kingdom, if you make Europe the base for this roll up, then Italy and United Kingdom are no longer visible.

Note: The Set Base Member feature is not related to shared members.

To set the base member, in the application, right-click the member in a shared dimension, select Set as base member.

To remove the base member setting, right-click the base member and select Enable

Descendants.

154

Working with Members

Building Applications

In This Chapter

About Applications....................................................................................... 155

Workflow for Creating Applications ..................................................................... 155

Prerequisites.............................................................................................. 157

Creating Consolidation Applications ................................................................... 157

Creating Planning Applications ......................................................................... 164

Creating Standard Profitability and Cost Management Applications................................ 179

Creating Detailed Profitability and Cost Management Applications................................. 189

Creating Essbase Applications.......................................................................... 201

Creating Generic Applications .......................................................................... 208

Common Application Tasks ............................................................................. 209

About Applications

The Application Library enables you to view, create, validate, and deploy Performance

Management Architect applications to Hyperion financial applications. Applications contain dimensions and dimension attributes that are designed to meet financial management and planning needs. Each application contains accounts, entities, scenarios, and other dimension elements.

As the application creator, you can create unlimited numbers of applications. For example, you can create applications for the following purposes: l l l by cost center, to budget operating expenses by product line, to plan revenues to report on tax data to report on Security and Exchange Commission data l

To open the Application Library, select Navigate, Administer, Application Library.

Workflow for Creating Applications

The following sections provide information on creating different types of applications:

Consolidation—See “Creating Consolidation Applications” on page 157

About Applications

155

l l l l

Planning—See

“Creating Planning Applications” on page 164 .

Profitability—See “Creating Standard Profitability and Cost Management Applications” on page 179 .

Essbase—See “Creating Essbase Applications” on page 201

Generic—See

“Creating Generic Applications” on page 208

For information on prerequisites, see

“Prerequisites” on page 157 .

Manual Workflow

Using the manual method, you can create blank applications and define the application in seven steps:

1. In the application wizard select an application type, then select Create Blank Application.

2. Drag dimensions (or dimension hierarchy subsets) from the Shared Library to the application or create local dimensions in the application.

3. Activate all dimension associations.

4. Modify dimension, application, and member properties (only if the application properties differ from the Shared Library properties).

5. Validate the application.

6. Deploy the application to the Hyperion product environment.

7. Define access permissions. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management

System User and Role Security Guide.

l l l

Application Wizard Workflow

The application wizard makes it easy to create applications and guides you through the following screens:

Application Type—enables you to enter the name, select the type, and enter a description.

See

“Selecting the Application Type” on page 157 . Depending on the application type,

additional options display.

Dimension Selection—enables you to select or create dimensions. See

“Selecting

Dimensions” on page 158 .

Application Settings—enables you to associate dimensions, set the dimension alias, and

modify other application properties. See “Modifying the Application Settings” on page

162 .

You can access the application wizard by selecting File, New, Application in the Dimension

Library or Application Library.

156

Building Applications

Prerequisites

To create applications, you must have the Application Creator global role for your Hyperion product (Financial Management, Profitability and Cost Management, Planning, Essbase (ASO), or Essbase (BSO)). In addition, to create applications that use shared dimensions you also must have the Dimension Editor role. For information on Performance Management Architect roles, see

“Security” on page 27

. For information on creating or assigning global roles, see the Oracle

Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System User and Role Security Guide.

Before you create applications, complete the following tasks: l l l

Install and configure Shared Services.

Configure the product in which you plan to deploy applications. (Configuration includes creating the product instance and the data source.)

Optional: In Performance Management Architect, create a profile and load dimensions into the Shared Library. See

Chapter 3, “Importing Metadata.”

Note:

For all application types, you cannot name an application “Master.” The application name, “Master,” is a reserved name in Performance Management Architect. If you inadvertently name an application “Master,” an error message will display indicating that the application exists.

l l l l

Creating Consolidation Applications

You can create Consolidation applications using the application wizard. The following sections provide step-by-step information on creating Consolidation applications:

“Selecting the Application Type” on page 157

“Selecting Dimensions” on page 158

“Modifying the Application Settings” on page 162

“Validating and Deploying” on page 164

Selecting the Application Type

The following steps describe creating a Consolidation application.

To create Consolidation applications:

Select File, then New, and then Application.

Enter the application name.

Names must not contain any special characters and no more than 10 characters, no spaces, and cannot begin with HFM, HSV, HSX, or a number. However, if a Consolidation application is named with non-ASCI characters between 6 and 10 characters in length, an error will occur when deployed. Consolidation application names can have up to 10 bytes in length.

Prerequisites

157

Select Consolidation.

Enter a description.

Descriptions cannot contain special characters, including “&” (ampersands), and more than

255 characters.

Optional: Select Create Blank Application to create an empty application and use the Dimension Library to drag dimensions into the application. See

“Manually Adding Dimensions” on page 161 .

Optional: Select Auto Create Local Dimensions.

Selecting Auto Create Local Dimensions automatically creates new dimensions for all dimensions that are required in the application. The dimension name for each new dimension is identical to the dimension type with (New) in parentheses. Automatically creating local dimensions helps save time since it populates the required dimensions necessary to create the application.

Perform one of these actions:

If using the application wizard, click Next.

l l

The Dimension Selection screen is displayed. See “Selecting Dimensions” on page

158 .

If creating the application manually, click Finish.

The Dimension Library is displayed. See

“Manually Adding Dimensions” on page

161 .

l l l l l l l l l l l l

Selecting Dimensions

The next step in creating an application is to add dimensions to the application. Consolidation applications must contain the following dimension instances:

1 Scenario

1 Year

1 View

1 Period

1 Entity

1 Value

1 Account

1 ICP

2 Generic (There must be one dimension with a value of 'To' for the Use For Currency property, and one dimension with a value of 'From' for the Use For Currency property.)

1 Security Class (Optional)

1 Alias (Optional)

The alias dimension should contain no more than 10 members.

1 Currency

158

Building Applications

1 Consolidation Method

Tip: If you use the application wizard to create an application, all required dimensions are automatically shown on the Dimension Selection screen.

If you are using the application wizard, see

“Adding Dimensions Using the Wizard” on page

159 . If you created a blank application, see

“Manually Adding Dimensions” on page 161

Adding Dimensions Using the Wizard

When you use the application wizard, all required dimensions are automatically displayed. If there is an exact match, it automatically populates the dimension column for the dimension type. Dimension types are automatically categorized and displayed with a shaded heading. For example, Primary Dimensions, Custom Dimensions, and Other Dimensions. Primary dimensions are required.

If you selected Auto Create Local Dimensions, new local dimensions are created for each required dimension. The name of each new dimension is the same as the dimension type, with (New) in parentheses. For example, Account (New).

To define dimensions:

To map a dimension type to a dimension, click [Select] in the Dimension column.

If a required dimension type matches to a dimension in the Dimension Library, the dimension name displays in the Dimension column.

Select a dimension.

The dimensions that display in the drop-down list map to the type of dimension. For example, if you are mapping a dimension to the Account dimension type, only account dimensions display in the list.

Creating Consolidation Applications

159

In some cases, you may want to create a new dimension.

Optional: Create a new dimension. To create a new dimension: a. Using the Dimension drop-down arrow, select Create New Dimension.

The Add New Dimension dialog box is displayed.

b. Enter the dimension name and description. The type is automatically selected according to the dimension type you are mapping the dimension to in the Dimension Type column.

c. Click OK.

Note: When you create a dimension in the application wizard, it is always a local dimension and cannot be shared in the application wizard. If you want to share

a dimension, you must use the Dimension Library. See “Understanding Shared and Local Dimensions” on page 78

Continue to select or create new dimensions for all primary, custom, and other dimensions.

If you want the dimension to be local, select the local check box at the end of each row.

Note: If you automatically created new local dimensions on the first screen of the wizard, you cannot change the dimensions to be shared.

For information on shared and local dimensions, see

For information on loading dimensions into the Shared Library, see Chapter 3, “Importing

160

Building Applications

Note: All dimensions must be mapped to a dimension or [None] before you can move to the next screen.

Click Next.

The Application Settings screen is displayed.

Manually Adding Dimensions

When you create blank applications, you use the Dimension Library to select dimensions. The

Dimension Library has three panes: l

Shared Library—Displays on the left and displays all dimensions currently available in the

Shared Library.

l l

Metadata.”

Application—Appears in the middle and when expanded, lists the names of all dimensions in the current application.

Property Grid—Displays on the right and displays the properties of the selected dimension or member.

For information on editing properties, see “Editing Property Values” on page 142

To add dimensions to applications:

Drag the dimensions from the Shared Library to the application.

The Copy Dimension dialog box is displayed.

Select Local Dimension or Shared Dimension.

Tip: To add only members to an application, in the Shared Library, right-click the dimension and select Add to App View. See

“Adding Members to Applications” on page 150

For information on shared and local dimensions, see

Set the dimension alias—See “Setting the Dimension Alias” on page 214 .

The expanded application lists all dimensions.

Creating Consolidation Applications

161

Tip: If you add a member to the Shared Library and include the dimension in the application, you can click and the new member will display in the application.

Modifying the Application Settings

The next step in creating applications is to modify application properties and other application settings. If you are creating the application manually, you use these options, plus additional options in the Shared Library.

If you are creating the application manually, the Dimension Library is displayed, with the Shared

Library, Application, and Property Grid. You can use the right-click menu to modify the application dimensions or the application at the highest level.

Modifying Application Settings Using the Dimension Library

If you created a blank application and are modifying application settings in the Dimension

Library, you can perform these actions:

162

Building Applications

l l l l l l l l

Associate dimensions and view existing dimension associations—See “Viewing Dimension

View application membership—See

Create dimensions—See “Creating Dimensions” on page 77

Remove dimensions—See

Copy dimensions—See

Detach dimensions—See “Converting Local Dimensions to Shared” on page 211

Modify property values—See “Editing Property Values” on page 142

Add members, exclude members, and set the base member—See “Working with Members in Applications” on page 150 .

Modifying Application Settings Using the Application Wizard

If you are creating the application using the wizard, the application dimensions and members display on the left, the Property Grid displays on the right, and the validation and deployment options display at the bottom.

For wizard applications, use the right-click menu to modify the application dimensions or members. You can perform these actions:

Set the dimension alias—See “Setting the Dimension Alias” on page 214 .

Creating Consolidation Applications

163

l l l l l l l l

View application membership—See

View dimension associations—See “Viewing Dimension Associations” on page 213

Synchronize dimensions—See

“Synchronizing Dimensions with the Shared Library” on page 212

Insert shared members—See “Working with Shared Members” on page 128

Reorder children—See “Reordering Children Members” on page 141

Manage orphan members—See

“Excluding Members” on page 153 .

Exclude members—See

Validating and Deploying

If you are using the application wizard, when you finish modifying the application dimensions and members, you can validate the application and correct any errors before finalizing the creation of the application. You can also bypass the validation and deployment options in the wizard and later use the deployment option in the Application Library.

If you are creating the application manually, you validate and deploy the application using options in the Application Library. For detailed information on validation and deployment, see

“Validating and Deploying Applications” on page 230 .

To validate and deploy an application using the wizard:

In the application wizard, Application Settings screen, select Validate.

All errors display in the grid, showing the error type and error message.

If validation errors occur, correct any problems before you deploy the application.

To deploy an application, on the Application Settings screen, select Deploy when finished.

Click Finish.

If you selected Deploy when finished, the Deploy dialog box is displayed.

Note: After you deploy a Consolidation application, you cannot change the Year, Period, Alias, or View dimensions. In addition, you cannot add languages after deployment.

l l l

Creating Planning Applications

You can create Planning applications manually or using the application wizard. Planning applications must meet these requirements:

The application must have a name, and it must be assigned to at least one plan type.

The Default Currency property must be defined.

The Fiscal Year Start Date property must be defined. The year must be four digits long, such as 2010.

164

Building Applications

l l l l l l

The first year member in the Year dimension and the Fiscal Year Start Date property must describe the same year. For example, if the Fiscal Start Year is 2010, the first year in the Year dimension must be FY10.

Year members must start with FY, followed by a two-digit year, such as FY10.

The Fiscal Year First Month property must be defined.

The Default Alias Table property must be defined. For information, see

“Alias Dimensions” on page 82

The application must include the Planning required dimensions. Single-currency applications require Scenario, Version, Entity, Account, Period, and Year. Multiplecurrency applications require Scenario, Version, Entity, Account, Period, Year, and

Currency.

The application must meet the qualifications specified in

Chapter 12, “Working with

Planning Dimensions.”

For information on requirements specific to Planning modules, see the appropriate guide. For

Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting, see the Oracle Hyperion Public Sector

Planning and Budgeting User’s Guide. For Oracle Hyperion Workforce Planning and Oracle

Hyperion Capital Asset Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Workforce Planning Administrator's

Guide and Oracle Hyperion Capital Asset Planning Administrator's Guide.

Selecting the Application Type

Use these steps to create Planning applications. When specifying application information, ensure that: l l l l l

The application has a name, and it is assigned to at least one plan type.

The Default Currency property is defined.

The Fiscal Year Start Date property is defined. The year must be four digits long, such as

2010.

The first year member in the Year dimension and the Fiscal Start Year property describe the same year. For example, if the Fiscal Start Year is 2010, the first year in the Year dimension is FY10.

Year members start with FY, followed by a two-digit year, such as FY10.

The Fiscal Year First Month property is defined.

To create Planning applications:

Select File, then New, and then Application.

The first screen of the wizard displays.

Enter the application name.

Names must not contain any special characters and must contain no more than eight characters.

Creating Planning Applications

165

For Application Type, select Planning.

Enter an optional description.

Optional: Select Create Blank Application to create an empty application and use the Dimension Library

to drag and drop dimensions into the application. Optionally, click Finish. See “Manually Adding

Dimensions” on page 161 .

If you are creating a blank application, define the plan types, default currency, and enable multiple currencies. See

“Defining Plan Types” on page 167

and

“Specifying the Default

Currency” on page 168

Optional: Select Auto Create Local Dimensions if you want to create a local application, creating all required dimensions locally using the default name of the dimension class.

For example, this creates an Entity dimension named Entity, an Account dimension named

Account, and so on. With this setting, dimensions are selected as local dimensions on the

Dimension Selection screen, and you can add dimensions under Custom Dimensions and

Other Dimensions, if necessary.

Perform these actions: l l l l

For Application Type, select General.

Define the plan types: see

“Defining Plan Types” on page 167

Specify the default currency: see “Specifying the Default Currency” on page 168

Set calendar options for the base time period. If you select 12 Months, enter the fiscal

start month and weekly distribution. See “Defining Calendar Ranges” on page 173

166

Building Applications

Optional: Perform these actions:

If the application supports multiple currencies, select Use Multiple Currencies.

l l

See

“Specifying the Default Currency” on page 168

Select Create New Local Period Dimension.

If you want to create a local Period dimension, enter the period name for the new dimension in the Calendar area. If you select Custom for Base Time Period, enter the period name, prefix, and periods per year.

Select Create New Local Year Dimension.

If you want to create a local Year dimension, enter the appropriate information for the new dimension in the Calendar area, including the year name, first fiscal year, and total number of years.

Click Next.

The Dimension Selection screen is displayed. See “Selecting Dimensions” on page 168 .

Defining Plan Types

In an application, you must configure at least one plan type. An Essbase database is created for each plan type. You can have up to three plan types for Planning applications, and two for separate modules. You cannot change the name or number of plan types after creating an application.

As you create accounts, entities, and other elements of the application, you associate them with plan types, so the database for each plan type contains only application dimensions, members, and data values relevant to the plan type. This optimizes application design, size, and performance.

The number of plan types depends on the needs of your organization. For example, if the sales department has a yearly revenue plan, and the finance department has a P&L plan, you can define two plan types, Revenue and P&L.

Data can be shared between plan types. For example, the Revenue plan may include several sales detail accounts that roll up into a Total Product Sales account. You can configure the P&L plan to include the Total Product Sales account. This configuration enables you to bring the data value for Total Product Sales into the P&L plan, without account details. Thus, the database for your P&L plan is smaller and more efficient.

Plan type names can have up to eight characters. You can enter more than eight bytes, including single-byte and double-byte characters, but an error message displays when the Essbase database is created. If Essbase is installed on a UNIX server, the plan type name cannot contain underscore characters.

For information on Public Sector Planning and Budgeting, see the Oracle Hyperion Public Sector

Planning and Budgeting User’s Guide.

To define plan types, perform one of these actions:

If using the application wizard, select the plan types and enter the plan type names.

Creating Planning Applications

167

If creating the application manually, double-click the Plan 1 Name property and enter the name of the plan type. Repeat the process for additional plan types.

Specifying the Default Currency

You must specify the default currency for the entities of an application and establish whether the application supports currency conversions. Multiple currency support (also known as currency overrides) is available for level 0 members, regardless of their base currency.

These examples show several supported currency codes: l l

USD: US dollar

EUR: European Union Euro

AUD: Australian dollar l

For a list of currency codes, see the ISO 4217 currency code list for banking and business. You can use a predefined three-letter currency code, or add your own. Performance Management

Architect does not require adherence to the ISO standard.

If you support multiple currencies, two dimensions are created in the deployed application:

Currency and HSP_Rates. The multiple currency setting cannot be changed later.

To set the default currency:

If using the application wizard, select a currency to use for the Default Currency. If the application has multiple currencies, select Multiple Currencies.

If creating the application manually, select the application at the highest level. Double-click the Default

Currency property and enter the currency code. If you support multiple currencies, select the application at the highest level and select Multiple Currencies in the Property Grid.

l l l

Selecting Dimensions

The next step in creating an application is to add dimensions to the application. Planning applications must meet these requirements:

Single-currency applications require these dimensions: m

Entity

Version m m m m m

Scenario

Account

Year

Period

Multiple-currency applications require the above dimensions as well as Currency.

The Default Alias Table property must be defined. For information, see

“Alias Dimensions” on page 82

168

Building Applications

The application must meet the requirements specified in Chapter 12, “Working with

Planning Dimensions.”

Tip: If you use the wizard to create an application, all required dimensions are automatically marked on the Dimension Selection screen.

If you are using the wizard, see “Defining Dimensions Using the Wizard” on page 169

. If you created a blank application, see

“Manually Adding Dimensions” on page 171

Defining Dimensions Using the Wizard

When you use the application wizard, all required dimensions are displayed in bold. Dimension types are categorized and displayed with a heading, for example, All Plan Types, Custom

Dimensions, and Other Dimensions. Dimensions under All Plan Types are required.

To define dimensions:

To map a dimension type to a dimension, click [Select] in the Dimension column.

If a required dimension type matches to a dimension in the Dimension Library, the dimension name displays in the Dimension column.

Select a dimension.

Creating Planning Applications

169

The dimensions that display in the drop-down list map to the type of dimension. For example, if you are mapping a dimension to the Account dimension type, only Account dimensions display in the list.

In some cases, you may want to create a new dimension.

Optional: Create a new dimension. To create a new dimension: a. Using the Dimension drop-down arrow, select Create New Dimension.

The Add New Dimension dialog box displays.

b. Enter the dimension name and description. The type is automatically selected according to the dimension type you are mapping the dimension to in the Dimension Type column.

c. Click OK.

Note: When you create a dimension in the application wizard, it is always a local dimension and cannot be shared in the application wizard. If you want to share

a dimension, you must use the Dimension Library. See “Understanding Shared and Local Dimensions” on page 78

Continue to select or create new dimensions for all required, custom, and other dimensions.

To add an attribute dimension, identify its base dimension. Attribute dimensions must be associated with a base dimension.

To create a dimension as local to the application, select Local Dimension at the end of each row.

Note: If you automatically created new local dimensions on the first screen of the wizard, you cannot change the dimensions to be shared.

You cannot have a Shared Base dimension, such as Entity, with a local associated dimension,

such as Alias. For information on shared and local dimensions, see “Understanding Shared and Local Dimensions” on page 78 .

Note: All required dimensions must be mapped to a dimension before you can move to the next screen. It is not necessary for any non-required dimensions to be mapped.

Review the application settings to ensure that they meet the requirements described in “Selecting

Dimensions” on page 168

. For example, you must make a selection for all of the required dimensions.

(Single-currency applications require Scenario, Version, Entity, Account, Period, and Year. Multiplecurrency applications require these dimensions in addition to Currency.)

When you have resolved any issues, click Next.

If errors display, ensure that the application meets the requirements described in “Selecting

Dimensions” on page 168

. You can click Show Details to view information about the error, then click Hide Details. Then click OK. After resolving any errors, click Next again.

The Application Settings screen is displayed. See “Modifying the Application Settings” on page 171 .

170

Building Applications

Manually Adding Dimensions

When you create applications manually, you use the Dimension Library to select dimensions.

The Dimension Library has three panes: l l l

Shared Library—Displays on the left and displays all dimensions currently available in the

Shared Library.

For information on loading dimensions into the Dimension Library, see

Chapter 3,

For information on editing properties, see “Editing Property Values” on page 142

Application—Appears in the middle, and, when expanded, lists the names of all dimensions in the current application.

Property Grid—Displays on the right with the properties of the selected dimension or member.

For information on filtering dimensions for applications, see “Adding Members to Applications” on page 150

To add dimensions to applications:

Drag the dimensions from the Shared Library to the application.

The Copy Dimension dialog box is displayed.

Select Local Dimension or Shared Dimension.

Tip:

To add only members to an application, see “Adding Members to Applications” on page

“Understanding Shared and Local Dimensions” on page 78

The expanded application lists all dimensions. For information on shared and local dimensions, see

You can modify application properties. Depending on the application type, requirements and

properties vary. See “Modifying the Application Settings” on page 171

Modifying the Application Settings

If you are creating the application manually, the Dimension Library is displayed, with the Shared

Library, Application, and Property Grid. You can use the right-click menu to modify the application dimensions or the application at the highest level.

Modifying Application Settings Using the Dimension Library

If you created a blank application and are modifying application settings in the Dimension

Library, you can perform these actions:

Creating Planning Applications

171

l l l l l l l l l l

Optimize application performance. See “Modifying Performance Settings” on page 175

Set the data type evaluation order. See “Setting Data Type Evaluation Order” on page 177

Set the dimension alias—See “Setting the Dimension Alias” on page 214 .

Associate dimensions and view existing dimension associations—See “Viewing Dimension

Create dimensions—See “Creating Dimensions” on page 77

Remove dimensions—See

Copy dimensions—See

Detach dimensions—See “Converting Local Dimensions to Shared” on page 211

Modify property values—See “Editing Property Values” on page 142

Add members, exclude members, and set the base member—See “Working with Members in Applications” on page 150 .

Modifying Application Settings Using the Application Wizard

For wizard applications, use the right-click menu to modify the application dimensions or members. You can perform these actions:

Optimize application performance. See “Modifying Performance Settings” on page 175

172

Building Applications

l l l l l l l l l

Set the default alias table. The Default Alias Table property is set to default at the application level. If you create another alias table (another member of the Alias dimension, such as

English) and want this to be the default alias table used by the application, you must set this manually. See

“Setting the Dimension Alias” on page 214

View application membership—See

View dimension associations—See “Viewing Dimension Associations” on page 213

Synchronize dimensions—See

“Synchronizing Dimensions with the Shared Library” on page 212

Insert shared members—See “Working with Shared Members” on page 128

Reorder children—See “Reordering Children Members” on page 141

Manage orphan members—See

“Working with Members in Applications” on page 150

Exclude members—See

Defining Base Time Periods and Monthly Distribution Spread

You can select a base time period and a monthly distribution pattern, based on the number of fiscal weeks in a month. Base time periods are the bottom-level time periods in an application.

Predefined options are quarters or months. You can create a custom base time period, such as weeks or days.

You use monthly distribution patterns to determine how data entered into a summary time period is distributed (spread) among the base time periods. During data entry, users can enter data into summary time periods, such as years or quarters. Planning distributes the entered values over the base time periods that constitute the summary time period.

If you select a weekly distribution pattern other than Even Distribution, Planning treats quarterly values as if they were divided into 13 weeks and distributes weeks according to the pattern that you selected. For example, if you select the 5-4-4 pattern, Planning treats the first month of a quarter as if it has five weeks and the last two months of the quarter as if they have four weeks.

The options for the weekly distribution pattern are available only if you select the base time period option “12 Months.”

To define base time periods and weekly distribution patterns:

Select the application (at the highest level), then double-click the Base Time Period property, select

12 Months, Quarters, or Custom.

Double-click the Weeks Distribution property, select a weekly distribution pattern. (Options include:

Even, 445, 454, and 544.)

Defining Calendar Ranges

For applications, you can specify the fiscal start year and start month. When specifying the fiscal start year, consider how much historical data your organization needs and wants in the application. You can add years to the calendar, but you cannot change the fiscal start year.

Creating Planning Applications

173

January

July

February

December

For the fiscal year, you can set the fiscal year first month and specify whether the fiscal year starts from the same calendar year or the previous calendar year. You can later set up calculations based on the calendar year, for example, using formula expressions. When setting up formulas for Planning applications, keep in mind that formula expressions such as [TPDate] and

[FirstDate] produce different results if the application starts in the same calendar year or previous calendar year.

The following table provides examples of how the Fiscal Year First Month and the Fiscal Start

Year options affect the calendar for the application, assuming the Fiscal Start Year is 2010.

Table 15

Examples of Fiscal Year First Month and Fiscal Start Year Calendar Options

Fiscal Year First Month Fiscal Start Year Year - Period Year Dimension

Same Calendar Year

Previous Calendar Year

Same Calendar Year

Previous Calendar Year

Same Calendar Year

Previous Calendar Year

Jan-10 to Dec-10

Jul-10 to Jun-11

Jul-09 to Jun-10

Feb-10 to Jan-11

Feb-09 to Jan-10

Dec-10 to Nov-11

Dec-09 to Nov-10

FY10

To set up the calendar:

In the Calendar tab of the Classic Application Wizard, click Calendar.

See the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide for additional information on how to use the Classic Application Wizard.

Select a Base Period option to set how calendars roll up: l l l

12 Months: Four quarters per year; months roll up into parent quarters and quarters into years.

Quarters: Quarters roll up into years.

Custom: A custom time period, such as weeks or days.

Select the First Fiscal Year while creating the new local year dimension.

This selection defines the starting fiscal year for the application. You cannot change it after creating the application. Before specifying the first fiscal year, consider how much historical data your organization needs and wants in the application.

Select the Number of Fiscal Years for the application.

This defines the number of years in the calendar. You can add more years to the calendar after the application is created.

Select the Fiscal Year First Month for a new local period dimension.

174

Building Applications

This is the first month in the fiscal year for the application, which depends on the First Fiscal

Year option.

Select the Fiscal Year Start Date: l l

Same Calendar Year. Set the fiscal year to start with the current calendar year. For example, selecting the year 2010 with a starting period of Jun creates the starting year as FY10, defined as July-10 to Jun-11.

Previous Calendar Year. Set the year to start with the previous calendar year. For example, selecting the year 2010 with a starting period of Jun creates the starting year as FY10, defined as Jul-09 to Jun-10.

If you set the base time period as 12 Months, select a Weekly Distribution option: Even, 445, 454, or

544.

Weekly distribution sets the monthly distribution pattern, based on the number of fiscal weeks in a month. This determines how data in summary time periods spreads within the base time period. When users enter data into summary time periods, such as quarters, the value is distributed over base time periods in the summary time period.

If you select a weekly distribution pattern other than Even, Planning treats quarterly values as if they were divided into 13 weeks and distributes weeks according to the selected pattern.

For example, if you select 5-4-4, the first month in a quarter is considered to have five weeks, and the last two months in the quarter have four weeks.

Click Next.

To define the calendar range:

Select the application (at the highest level), and then click Fiscal Start Year. Enter the year.

Double-click Fiscal Year First Month, and then select the month.

Double-click Fiscal Year Start Date, and then select SameCalendarYear or PreviousCalendarYear.

Modifying Performance Settings

Use these methods to optimize application performance: l

Assign dimensions as dense or sparse.

You can accelerate data retrieval and minimize memory and disk space requirements by assigning dimensions to one of two types: dense or sparse.

If a dimension lacks data values for the majority of member combinations, define it as sparse.

If a dimension has data values for the majority of member combinations, define it as dense.

Often, dense dimensions are Period and Account. Usually, Period is highly populated with data, whereas Account is dense due to intensive calculations.

Essbase requires that at least one dimension be set to dense. Custom attributes cannot be assigned to dense dimensions. See the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide.

Change dimension order.

Creating Planning Applications

175

Allocate memory for the supporting detail cache. See the Oracle Hyperion Planning

Administrator's Guide.

To improve performance for Planning applications:

Right-click the application (at the highest level) and select Performance Settings.

The Plan Type Performance Settings dialog box is displayed.

Select plan type.

Dimensions belonging to the plan type are displayed with the number of dimensions for the plan type. Applications can have up to five plan types.

If applications are created with a single currency, the HSP_Rates dimension is not displayed.

Double-click a cell in the Density column and select: l l

Sparse—Lack data values for the majority of member combinations. A sparse dimension is a dimension with a low percentage of available data positions filled.

Dense—A dimension with a high probability that one or more data points is occupied in every combination of dimensions.

Caution!

Deployment of an application fails if you do not assign at least one dimension in a cube to be dense.

You can speed calculation time by changing the order for calculating dimensions. The order of dimensions is critical in the structure and performance of Essbase databases. Dense dimensions calculate faster than sparse dimensions, so dimensions should be in order of most to least dense. Aggregating dimensions aggregate children into the parent to create new data; non-aggregating dimensions do not create new data by the hierarchies (for example, a Scenario or Version dimension).

176

Building Applications

Separate sparse dimensions into aggregating and non-aggregating dimensions, with aggregating dimensions before non-aggregating dimensions.

Optimize performance by ordering dimensions according to these guidelines: l l

Make Period and Account dense.

Order dense dimensions from the most to least dense. The most dense is usually Period, followed by Account.

Separate sparse dimensions into aggregating and non-aggregating dimensions. Place aggregating dimensions before non-aggregating dimensions. Order sparse dimensions from most to least dense.

Select a dimension:

Click to move the dimension up in the list.

l l

Click to move the dimension down in the list.

Click OK.

Setting Data Type Evaluation Order

Data types are a property that are defined for all dimension members. Data types can have conflicting results on the face of a data form depending upon the cell intersections defined for the data form. For example, the intersection of a "percent" data type and a "currency" data type need to be resolved based upon a defined order set by a Power User. The Data Type Evaluation

Order is the defined order. You set a dimension order by plan type to determine the precedence when multiple data types intersect. Data types associated with the first dimension in the list take precedence over data types associated with subsequent dimensions.

To modify the evaluation order:

Right-click the application (at the highest level) and select Data Type Evaluation Order(s).

The Evaluation Order dialog box is displayed.

Creating Planning Applications

177

Note: If you want to allow users to enter dates or text into data form cells having Date and

Text data types in Planning applications, select those members' dimensions and move them to Selected Dimensions.

Select a Plan Type.

Applications can have up to five plan types.

Select a dimension and perform one action: l

Click to move the dimension up in the list.

Click to move the dimension down in the list.

Click OK.

Validating and Deploying

If you are using the application wizard, when you finish modifying the application dimensions and members, you can validate the application and correct any errors prior to finalizing the creation of the application. You can also bypass the validation and deployment options in the wizard and later use the deployment option in the Application Library.

If you are creating the application manually, you validate and deploy the application using options in the Application Library. For detailed information on validation and deployment, see

“Validating and Deploying Applications” on page 230 .

To validate and deploy an application using the wizard:

In the application wizard, Application Settings screen, select Validate to view and resolve any issues before deploying.

Any errors display in the grid, showing the error type and error message. Use the scroll bars as necessary to view the messages.

To save a copy of one or all of the messages, right-click a message, and select Copy Selected to Clipboard or Copy All to Clipboard. You can paste the information into a text editor and save or print the messages. To clear the list of messages, click Clear.

If validation errors or warnings display, correct them before you deploy the application.

To deploy after creating the application, on the Application Settings screen, select Deploy when finished.

Click Finish.

If you selected Deploy when finished, the Deploy dialog box is displayed.

For information on Public Sector Planning and Budgeting, see the Oracle Hyperion Public Sector

Planning and Budgeting User's Guide.

178

Building Applications

l l l

Creating Standard Profitability and Cost Management

Applications

You can create Standard Profitability and Cost Management applications using the application wizard. The following sections provide step-by-step information on creating Profitability and

Cost Management applications:

“Selecting the Application Type” on page 179

“Selecting Dimension Types” on page 180

“Modifying the Application Settings” on page 185

Selecting the Application Type

The following steps describe creating Profitability and Cost Management applications.

To create Profitability and Cost Management applications:

Populate the new shared library in Performance Management Architect using a flat file import or a

Performance Management Architect interface table import.

Caution!

Add any business dimensions to be included in the application, for example,

Generic, Account, Entity, Time, or Country, to the Dimension Library before creating the application; otherwise, the dimensions will not be available for the

Application Wizard to select. See “Creating Dimensions.”

Select Navigate, Administer, Application Library.

The Application Library is displayed.

Select File, New, Application.

The first screen of the wizard is displayed - Application Type.

Creating Standard Profitability and Cost Management Applications

179

Enter the application name.

Names must be 7 characters or less, and must not contain any special characters, including

“&” (ampersands).

From the Type drop-down list, select Profitability.

Optional: Enter a description.

Optional: To manually add dimensions to the blank application, select Create Blank Application, and then click Finish. See

Dimensions” on page 158“Selecting Dimension Types” on page 180

Optional: To automatically create all required dimensions, select Auto Create Local Dimensions.

Click Next.

The second screen of the wizard is displayed - Dimension Selection. See

“Selecting

Selecting Dimension Types

After creating the application, you must select the dimension types that are to be included in the application. For a complete description of dimension types and their associated members, see the Oracle Hyperion Profitability and Cost Management Administrator's Guide.

180

Building Applications

The following dimension types are required for Profitability and Cost Management applications: l l l

Measures dimension type contains the members required to build, validate and calculate a model, including driver measures, reporting measures, and allocation measures. Users may add any user-defined driver measures (or sub-hierarchies) to the hierarchy under the member 'UserDefinedDriverMeasures'.

AllocationType dimension is used to store direct allocations and allocation genealogy.

At least one Point of View (POV) dimension type must be defined by the user. The model

POV provides a specific view of your model information for a selected point of view or period. For example, POV dimension types may include some of the following dimensions:

Year m m m m m

Time

Period

Scenario

Months m m

Financial Quarters

Seasons

Alias dimension is optional, and only required if you want to use aliases in your model.

l l

Caution!

Duplicate member names or aliases are not allowed.

At least one Business Dimension type must be defined by the user. Business dimensions are created to describe the business elements within the model, such as business-specific departments, general ledger accounts, activities, locations, customers, or products.

Generic business dimensions may include some of the following examples, and may apply to one or more stages or models: m m m

Accounting dimensions may contain chart of account-type information, such as Net

Income and Sales, in applications.

Organizational dimensions may outline departments, task forces, or other internal or external groups, such as Human Resources, Information Technology, and so on.

National or country dimensions may be used to track business activities in multiple countries, states, provinces or locations.

Note: Although these business dimensions can be included as part of a Profitability and

Cost Management application, when the Essbase outlines are deployed, they are created as basic or generic dimensions, with no type.

Attribute dimensions are a special type of dimension that are associated with a business dimension, and contain members that can be used to classify members of another, associated dimension. Attribute dimensions describe characteristics of data, such as the size and color of products

There are two Attribute dimension types in Performance Management Architect:

Creating Standard Profitability and Cost Management Applications

181

m m

Attribute dimensions: o o o

The attribute can be created using different structures, such as Boolean, Date,

Numeric and Text.

An attribute has a hierarchy, and the hierarchies can be rolled up for aggregate values.

Only one attribute from a given attribute dimension can be associated with one member.

User-defined attribute dimensions (UDAs):

The attribute can only be created using Text.

o o

A UDA does not have a hierarchy, and cannot be easily used in reports to generate sums.

Multiple UDAs can be associated with a member.

Each type of attribute dimension offers different advantages, depending on the requirements for your model and reporting needs.

Note: Model stages are not dimensions, and are therefore not available in Performance

Management Architect. Stages are added to a model in Profitability and Cost

Management, and are used to organize dimensions into logical steps or stages.

After creating the application, select the dimensions to be added to the application using the appropriate procedure: l

If you are using the wizard, see “Adding Dimensions Using the Wizard” on page 182 .

If you created a blank application, see

Adding Dimensions Using the Wizard

When you use the application wizard, all required dimensions are automatically displayed. If there is an exact match, it automatically populates the dimension column for the dimension type. The required dimension types for Profitability and Cost Management are automatically categorized and displayed with a shaded heading: l l l l l

Measures Dimension

AllocationType Dimension

POV Dimension

Alias Dimension (Optional)

Business Dimension

Attribute Dimension (Optional) l

182

Building Applications

If you selected Auto Create Local Dimensions when selecting the application type, new local dimensions are created for each required dimension. The name of each new dimension is the same as the dimension type, with (New) in parentheses. For example, Account (New).

Caution!

Any business dimensions you want to include in the application, for example,

Account, Entity, Time, or Country, must be added to the Dimension Library before creating the application; otherwise, the dimensions will not be available for the

Application Wizard to select. See “Creating Dimensions.”

To select dimensions:

On the Dimension Selection tab (Step 2 of the Application Wizard), under Dimension Type, review the required dimension types.

For each existing dimension to be added for the application, under the Dimension column, click

[Select] to display the drop-down list of available dimensions for that dimension type.

Only the dimensions for the associated dimension type are displayed. For example, if you are mapping a dimension to the Measures dimension type, only measure dimensions display in the list.

Select a dimension from the drop-down list.

Optional: Create a new dimension, as follows: a. In the Dimension column, click [Select] to display the drop-down list of available dimensions for that dimension type.

b. From the drop-down list, select [Create New Dimension].

Creating Standard Profitability and Cost Management Applications

183

The Add New Dimension dialog box is displayed.

c. Enter the Name and Description of the new dimension. The Type is automatically selected, based on the dimension type selected in the Dimension Type column.

d. Click OK.

Note: When you create a dimension in the application wizard, it is always a local dimension and cannot be shared in the application wizard. If you want to share a dimension, you must use the Dimension Library.

Repeat step 3 and step 4

to select or create new dimensions as necessary.

Note: All required dimensions must be mapped to a dimension or [None] before you can move to the next screen.

Optional: To set the dimension as a local dimension, select the Local Dimension check box at the end of each row.

Click Next.

The Application Settings screen is displayed.

Adding Dimensions Manually

When you create blank applications, you use the Dimension Library to select dimensions. The

Dimension Library has three panes: l l l

Shared Library - Displays on the left and displays all dimensions currently available in the

Shared Library.

For information on loading dimensions into the Dimension Library, see

Chapter 3,

For information on editing properties, see “Editing Property Values” on page 142

Application - Appears in the middle and when expanded, lists the names of all dimensions in the current application.

Property Grid - Displays on the right and displays the properties of the selected dimension or member.

184

Building Applications

After you create a blank application, you can add dimensions.

To add dimensions to blank applications:

In the Dimension Library, drag the dimensions from the Shared Library to the application.

The Copy Dimension dialog box is displayed.

Tip: To create new local dimensions, right-click the application name in the Application

View, and select Create Dimension. The Add New Dimension dialog box is displayed.

Select Local Dimension or Shared Dimension for each dimension.

Tip: To add only members to an application, in the Shared Library, right-click the dimension and select Add to App View. See

“Adding Members to Applications” on page 150

For information on shared and local dimensions, see

Add all required dimensions to the application. (Measures, AllocationType, POV, and so on.)

The expanded application lists all dimensions.

Tip: If you add a member to the Shared Library and include the dimension in the application, you can click the Refresh button , and the new member will display in the application.

Reorder the dimensions so that NoMember is moved to the last Gen2 position. See

Members in Profitability and Cost Management Models” on page 187

Modify the application settings, as required. See “Modifying the Application Settings” on page 185 .

Modifying the Application Settings

The next step in creating an application is to modify application properties, associations, and other application settings. If you are creating a blank application and using the Dimension

Library to modify the application settings, you have similar options, except that you are using the Dimension Library instead of the wizard to make the modifications.

Use the appropriate options to modify the application settings: l l

Use the Dimension Library for blank applications. See “Modifying Application Settings

Using the Dimension Library” on page 186

Use the Application Wizard for auto-generated applications. See

“Modifying Application

Settings Using the Application Wizard” on page 186

Note:

Dimension associations are required for shared hierarchies, and may not be required in all models.

Creating Standard Profitability and Cost Management Applications

185

Modifying Application Settings Using the Dimension Library

In the Dimension Library, the Shared Library, Application and Property Grid are displayed. You can use the right-click menu to modify the application dimensions and perform these actions: l l l l l l l l l l l

Set the properties for the POV dimensions. See

“Setting the Properties for POV Dimensions” on page 187

Set the POV Display Order for multiple POV dimensions. See

Members in Profitability and Cost Management Models” on page 187

Set the dimension alias—See “Setting the Dimension Alias” on page 214 .

Associate dimensions and view existing dimension associations—See “Viewing Dimension

View application membership—See

Create dimensions—See “Creating Dimensions” on page 77

Remove dimensions—See

Copy dimensions—See

Detach dimensions—See “Converting Local Dimensions to Shared” on page 211

Modify property values—See “Editing Property Values” on page 142

Find members, exclude members, and set the base member—See

“Common Application

Tasks” on page 209

Modifying Application Settings Using the Application Wizard

l l l l l l l l l l

Set the properties for the POV dimensions. See

“Setting the Properties for POV Dimensions” on page 187

Set the POV Display Order for multiple POV dimensions. See

Members in Profitability and Cost Management Models” on page 187

Set the dimension alias—See “Setting the Dimension Alias” on page 214 .

View application membership—See

View dimension associations—See “Viewing Dimension Associations” on page 213

Synchronize dimensions—See

“Synchronizing Dimensions with the Shared Library” on page 212

Insert shared members—See “Working with Shared Members” on page 128

Reorder children—See “Reordering Children Members in Profitability and Cost

Management Models” on page 187

Modify dimension performance settings—See

“Setting the Dimension Sort Order and

Dimension Density” on page 214

186

Building Applications

Manage orphan members—See

step 3 to select other POV dimensions, such as Period or Scenario.

Setting the Properties for POV Dimensions

At least one POV, or Point of View, dimension must be set for every Profitability and Cost

Management model. The POV dimension may be set to any custom value, but usually denotes time periods, such as Year, Period, or Scenario.

If more than one POV dimension is designated, a POV Display Order must also be set to control the order for display and staging tables. The POV Display Order that is set in Performance

Management Architect is automatically picked up in Profitability and Cost Management.

To set POV dimension properties:

In the Dimension Library, select the first POV dimension, such as Year.

In the Property Grid under Category, select Profitability.

For a POV dimension in your application, select the property, POV Dimension.

Optional: Repeat step 1

Optional: If more than one POV Dimension was selected, set the POV Display Order for each POV

Dimension.

Double-click the POV Display Order cell and type the sequence number for the selected

POV dimension. For example, if Year, Period and Scenario are set as POV Dimensions, set the POV Display Order for Year to 1, Period to 2, and Scenario as 3 as the display order.

Reordering Children Members in Profitability and Cost Management Models

For all business dimensions in the model, you must reorder the list of members to display

NoMember

as the last member; otherwise, validation of the model will fail.

You can also reorder members to suit your particular requirements as long as

NoMember

is moved to the last position.

Creating Standard Profitability and Cost Management Applications

187

Note: This step is not required for systems dimensions, such as Alias, AllocationType, Measures,

Periods, Scenarios or Years.

To reorder children:

From EPM Workspace, select Navigate, then Administer, and then Dimension Library to display the

Shared Library.

In the Shared Library, right-click the dimension that you want to reorder, and select Reorder Children.

The Reorder Children dialog box is displayed.

Select the member to be moved, and use the up and down arrows to change the order of the children.

Note: Ensure the

NoMember

dimension is moved to the end of the list; otherwise, the deployment will fail.

Repeat step 3

to order all members.

To preview the changes, click Preview.

Click Save.

Validating and Deploying

If you are creating the application manually, you validate and deploy the application using options in the Application Library. For detailed information on validation and deployment, see

To validate and deploy an application using the wizard:

In the application wizard, Application Settings screen, select Validate to view and resolve any issues before deploying.

All errors display in the grid, showing the error type and error message.

If validation errors occur, correct any problems before you deploy the application.

To deploy after creating the application, on the Application Settings screen, select Deploy when finished.

Click Finish.

If you selected Deploy when finished, the Deploy dialog box is displayed; otherwise, the application is displayed in the Dimension Library.

188

Building Applications

l l l

Creating Detailed Profitability and Cost Management

Applications

You can create Detailed Profitability and Cost Management applications using the application wizard. The following sections provide step-by-step information on creating Profitability and

Cost Management applications:

“Selecting the Application Type” on page 179

“Selecting Dimension Types” on page 180

“Modifying the Application Settings” on page 185

Selecting the Application Type

To create Detailed Profitability and Cost Management applications:

Populate the new shared library in Performance Management Architect using a flat file import or a

Performance Management Architect interface table import.

Caution!

Add any business dimensions to be included in the application, for example,

Generic, Account, Entity, Time, or Country, to the Dimension Library before creating the application; otherwise, the dimensions will not be available for the

Application Wizard to select. See “Creating Dimensions.”

Select Navigate, Administer, Application Library.

The Application Library is displayed.

Select File, New, Application.

The first screen of the wizard is displayed - Application Type.

Creating Detailed Profitability and Cost Management Applications

189

Enter the application name.

Names must be 7 characters or less, and must not contain any special characters, including

“&” (ampersands).

From the Type drop-down list, select Profitability.

Optional: Enter a description.

Optional: To manually add dimensions to the blank application, select Create Blank Application, and then click Finish. See

Dimensions” on page 158“Selecting Dimension Types” on page 180

Optional: To automatically create all required dimensions, select Auto Create Local Dimensions.

Under Profitability, click Create as Detailed Application.

Click Next.

The second screen of the wizard is displayed - Dimension Selection. See

“Selecting

Selecting Dimension Types

190

Building Applications

The following dimension types are required for Detailed Profitability and Cost Management applications: l

MeasuresDetailed dimension is a reserved dimension that is required for calculation and stage balancing. It contains AllocationMeasures, but does not include Driver Measures.

l l

Caution!

Do not edit this dimension, as modifications may result in the loss of data or the corruption of your model.

At least one Point of View (POV) dimension type must be defined by the user. The model

POV provides a specific view of your model information for a selected point of view or period. For example, POV dimension types may include some of the following dimensions: m

Year

Time m m m m m

Period

Scenario

Months

Financial Quarters m

Seasons

Alias dimension is optional, and only required if you want to use aliases in your model.

l l

Caution!

Duplicate member names or aliases are not allowed.

Generic business dimensions may include some of the following examples, and may apply to one or more stages or models: m m

Accounting dimensions may contain chart of account-type information, such as Net

Income and Sales, in applications.

Organizational dimensions may outline departments, task forces, or other internal or external groups, such as Human Resources, Information Technology, and so on.

National or country dimensions may be used to track business activities in multiple countries, states, provinces or locations.

There are two Attribute dimension types in Performance Management Architect:

Attribute dimensions: m

Creating Detailed Profitability and Cost Management Applications

191

m o o

The attribute can be created using different structures, such as Boolean, Date,

Numeric and Text.

An attribute has a hierarchy, and the hierarchies can be rolled up for aggregate values.

Only one attribute from a given attribute dimension can be associated with one member.

User-defined attribute dimensions (UDAs): o o

The attribute can only be created using Text.

A UDA does not have a hierarchy, and cannot be easily used in reports to generate sums.

Multiple UDAs can be associated with a member.

Each type of attribute dimension offers different advantages, depending on the requirements for your model and reporting needs.

Note:

Model stages are not dimensions, and are therefore not available in Performance

Management Architect. Stages are added to a model in Profitability and Cost

Management, and are used to organize dimensions into logical steps or stages.

After creating the application, select the dimensions to be added to the application using the appropriate procedure: l

If you are using the wizard, see “Adding Dimensions Using the Wizard” on page 182 .

If you created a blank application, see

Adding Dimensions Using the Wizard

When you use the application wizard, all required dimensions are automatically displayed. If there is an exact match, it automatically populates the dimension column for the dimension type. The required dimension types for Profitability and Cost Management are automatically categorized and displayed with a shaded heading: l

MeasuresDetailed Dimension is a reserved dimension that must be in place to handle calculations. This dimension contains the Allocation members required to support stage balancing and other verification activities, such as contribution, reconciliation, and so on.

The MeasuresDetailed dimension does not contain Driver measures.

Caution!

Do not edit members in this dimension, as modifications may result in the loss of data or the corruption of your model.

At least one Point of View (POV) dimension type must be defined by the user. The model

POV provides a specific view of your model information for a selected point of view or period. For example, POV dimension types may include some of the following dimensions:

Year m

192

Building Applications

l m m m m

Time

Period

Scenario

Months m m

Financial Quarters

Seasons

Alias Dimension (Optional) l l

Caution!

Duplicate member names or aliases are not allowed.

Generic business dimensions may include some of the following examples, and may apply to one or more stages or models: m m m

Accounting dimensions may contain chart of account-type information, such as Net

Income and Sales, in applications.

Organizational dimensions may outline departments, task forces, or other internal or external groups, such as Human Resources, Information Technology, and so on.

National or country dimensions may be used to track business activities in multiple countries, states, provinces or locations.

Attribute dimensions are optional, and define a special type of dimension that are associated with a business dimension, and contain members that can be used to classify members of another, associated dimension. Attribute dimensions describe characteristics of data, such as the size and color of products

There are two Attribute dimension types in Performance Management Architect: m m

Attribute dimensions: o

The attribute can be created using different structures, such as Boolean, Date,

Numeric and Text.

o o

An attribute has a hierarchy, and the hierarchies can be rolled up for aggregate values.

Only one attribute from a given attribute dimension can be associated with one member.

User-defined attribute dimensions (UDAs):

The attribute can only be created using Text.

o o

A UDA does not have a hierarchy, and cannot be easily used in reports to generate sums.

Multiple UDAs can be associated with a member.

Creating Detailed Profitability and Cost Management Applications

193

Each type of attribute dimension offers different advantages, depending on the requirements for your model and reporting needs.

Caution!

Any business dimensions you want to include in the application, for example,

Account, Entity, Time, or Country, must be added to the Dimension Library before creating the application; otherwise, the dimensions will not be available for the

Application Wizard to select. See “Creating Dimensions.”

To select dimensions:

On the Dimension Selection tab (Step 2 of the Application Wizard), under Dimension Type, review the required dimension types.

Select MeasuresDetailed.

Caution!

This is a required dimension for Detailed Profitability applications, but it must

NOT be modified.

For each existing dimension to be added for the application, under the Dimension column, click

[Select] to display the drop-down list of available dimensions for that dimension type.

194

Building Applications

Only the dimensions for the associated dimension type are displayed. For example, if you are mapping a dimension to the POV dimension type, only POV dimensions display in the list.

Select a dimension from the drop-down list.

Optional: Create a new dimension, as follows: a. In the Dimension column, click [Select] to display the drop-down list of available dimensions for that dimension type.

b. From the drop-down list, select [Create New Dimension].

The Add New Dimension dialog box is displayed.

c. Enter the Name and Description of the new dimension. The Type is automatically selected, based on the dimension type selected in the Dimension Type column.

d. Click OK.

Optional: To set the dimension as a local dimension, select the Local Dimension check box at the end of each row.

Click Next.

All required dimensions must be mapped to a dimension or [None] before you can move to the next screen.

The Application Settings screen is displayed.

Adding Dimensions Manually

When you create blank applications, you use the Dimension Library to select dimensions. The

Dimension Library has three panes: l

Shared Library - Displays on the left and displays all dimensions currently available in the

Shared Library.

Creating Detailed Profitability and Cost Management Applications

195

l l

For information on loading dimensions into the Dimension Library, see

Chapter 3,

For information on editing properties, see “Editing Property Values” on page 142

Application - Appears in the middle and when expanded, lists the names of all dimensions in the current application.

Property Grid - Displays on the right and displays the properties of the selected dimension or member.

After you create a blank application, you can add dimensions.

To add dimensions to blank applications:

In the Dimension Library, drag the dimensions from the Shared Library to the application.

The Copy Dimension dialog box is displayed.

Tip: To create new local dimensions, right-click the application name in the Application

View, and select Create Dimension. The Add New Dimension dialog box is displayed.

Select Local Dimension or Shared Dimension for each dimension.

Tip: To add only members to an application, in the Shared Library, right-click the dimension and select Add to App View. See

“Adding Members to Applications” on page 150

For information on shared and local dimensions, see

Add all required dimensions to the application. (MeasuresDetailed, AllocationType, POV, and so on.)

The expanded application lists all dimensions.

Tip: If you add a member to the Shared Library and include the dimension in the application, you can click the Refresh button , and the new member will display in the application.

Reorder the dimensions so that NoMember is moved to the last Gen2 position. See

Members in Profitability and Cost Management Models” on page 187

Modify the application settings, as required. See “Modifying the Application Settings” on page 185 .

Modifying the Application Settings

The next step in creating an application is to modify application properties, associations, and other application settings. If you are creating a blank application and using the Dimension

Library to modify the application settings, you have similar options, except that you are using the Dimension Library instead of the wizard to make the modifications.

Use the appropriate options to modify the application settings:

196

Building Applications

l l

Use the Dimension Library for blank applications. See “Modifying Application Settings

Using the Dimension Library” on page 186

Use the Application Wizard for auto-generated applications. See

“Modifying Application

Settings Using the Application Wizard” on page 186

Note: Dimension associations are required for shared hierarchies, and may not be required in all models.

Modifying Application Settings Using the Dimension Library

Set the properties for the POV dimensions. See

“Setting the Properties for POV Dimensions” on page 187

Set the POV Display Order for multiple POV dimensions. See

Members in Profitability and Cost Management Models” on page 187

Set the dimension alias—See “Setting the Dimension Alias” on page 214 .

Associate dimensions and view existing dimension associations—See “Viewing Dimension

View application membership—See

Create dimensions—See “Creating Dimensions” on page 77

Remove dimensions—See

Copy dimensions—See

Detach dimensions—See “Converting Local Dimensions to Shared” on page 211

Modify property values—See “Editing Property Values” on page 142

Find members, exclude members, and set the base member—See

“Common Application

Tasks” on page 209

Modifying Application Settings Using the Application Wizard

Creating Detailed Profitability and Cost Management Applications

197

See the following procedures: l l l l l l l l l

Set the POV Display Order for multiple POV dimensions. See

“Setting the Properties for

POV Dimensions” on page 187

Set the dimension alias—See “Setting the Dimension Alias” on page 214 .

View application membership—See

View dimension associations—See “Viewing Dimension Associations” on page 213

Synchronize dimensions—See

“Synchronizing Dimensions with the Shared Library” on page 212

Insert shared members—See “Working with Shared Members” on page 128

Reorder children—See “Reordering Children Members in Profitability and Cost

Management Models” on page 187

Modify dimension performance settings—See

“Setting the Dimension Sort Order and

Dimension Density” on page 214

Manage orphan members—See

Optional: Repeat step 1 to step 5 to select other POV dimensions, such as Period or Scenario, and set

198

Building Applications

Setting the Display Sort Order for POV Dimensions

At least one POV, or Point of View, dimension must be set for every Profitability and Cost

Management model. The POV dimension may be set to any custom value, but usually denotes time periods, such as Year, Period, or Scenario.

If more than one POV dimension is designated, a POV Display Order must also be set to control the order for display and staging tables. The POV Display Order that is set in Performance

Management Architect is automatically picked up in Profitability and Cost Management.

To set POV dimension properties:

On the Application Settings tab of the Application Creation Wizard, select the first POV dimension, such as Year.

In the Property Grid under Category, select Profitability.

For a POV dimension in your application, select the property, POV Dimension.

Optional: If more than one POV Dimension was selected, set the POV Display Order for each POV

Dimension.

Double-click the POV Display Order cell and type the sequence number for the selected

POV dimension. For example, if Year, Period and Scenario are set as POV Dimensions, set the POV Display Order for Year to 1, Period to 2, and Scenario as 3 as the display order.

Creating Detailed Profitability and Cost Management Applications

199

the POV Display Order for each one.

Reordering Children Members in Detailed Profitability and Cost

Management Models

For all business dimensions in the model, you must reorder the list of members to display

NoMember

as the last member; otherwise, validation of the model will fail.

You can also reorder members to suit your particular requirements as long as

NoMember

is moved to the last position.

Note: This step is not required for systems dimensions, such as Alias, Measures, Periods,

Scenarios or Years.

To reorder children:

From EPM Workspace, select Navigate, then Administer, and then Dimension Library to display the

Shared Library.

In the Shared Library, right-click the dimension that you want to reorder, and select Reorder Children.

The Reorder Children dialog box is displayed.

Select the member to be moved, and use the up and down arrows to change the order of the children.

Note:

Ensure the

NoMember

dimension is moved to the end of the list; otherwise, the deployment will fail.

Repeat step 3

to order all members.

To preview the changes, click Preview.

Click Save.

200

Building Applications

Validating and Deploying

If you are creating the application manually, you validate and deploy the application using options in the Application Library. For detailed information on validation and deployment, see

Appendix B, “Application Validations”

To validate and deploy an application using the wizard:

In the application wizard, on the Application Settings screen, select Validate to view and resolve any issues before deploying.

Any errors display in the grid, showing the error or warning type and message.

If validation errors occur, correct any problems before you deploy the application.

To deploy after creating the application, on the Application Settings screen, select Deploy when finished.

Click Finish.

If you selected Deploy when finished, the Deploy dialog box is displayed; otherwise, the application is displayed in the Dimension Library.

l l l l

Creating Essbase Applications

You can create Essbase applications using the application wizard. The following sections provide step-by-step information on creating Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) applications.

“Selecting the Application Type” on page 202

“Selecting Dimensions” on page 203

“Modifying the Application Settings” on page 205

“Validating and Deploying” on page 207

It is important to review the application requirements when you create an Essbase ASO or BSO application. See

“Application Requirements” on page 202 .

Note these limitations with Performance Management Architect and Essbase.

You cannot: l l

Use Performance Management Architect to create Hybrid Analysis or Advanced Relational

Access cubes.

Transform existing Essbase applications with more than one cube to Performance

Management Architect. (Note: Performance Management Architect supports transformations with one (non-currency) cube only.) See

“Transforming Classic

Applications into Performance Management Architect” on page 36

Creating Essbase Applications

201

Validate formulas within Performance Management Architect

Performance Management Architect does not support: l l l

Varying attributes

Database administration features including partition management, drill-through definitions, and security

The concept of multiple databases. Performance Management Architect allows a 1-to-1 relationship between an Essbase application and an Essbase database.

l l l l

Application Requirements

Keep in mind the following guidelines and requirements when creating Essbase applications:

Essbase applications do not require a fixed set of dimensions. For example, you can create and deploy an Essbase application containing just one generic dimension and one member.

When adding an alias member, you must create a dimension of “Alias” type to associate

with this member. See “Creating Dimension Associations” on page 86

for information on creating dimension associations.

The alias dimension can contain up to 10 members. At a minimum, a member named

“Default” is required in this dimension.

When adding an attribute member, you associate the member to a base dimension. See

“Creating Dimension Associations” on page 86

for information on creating dimension associations.

Performance Management Architect only supports the attribute type, “Text.”

Note:

In some cases, if you make changes to the “Auto Configure” property in Performance

Management Architect, it does not overwrite in Essbase. If you set the “Dimension Storage

Type” property in Essbase applications, you must set the "Auto Configure" property value to False before you deploy or redeploy the application to Essbase.

Properties for Essbase applications, dimensions and members are described in

Chapter 14,

“Working with Essbase Properties.”

Information on Essbase requirements for applications and databases are available in the Oracle

Essbase Database Administrator’s Guide and the Oracle Essbase Administration Services Online

Help.

Selecting the Application Type

The following steps describe creating an Essbase application.

To create Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) applications:

Select File, and then New, Application.

202

Building Applications

Enter the application name.

Names are limited to 8 characters. In addition, names must not contain any special characters.

Select Essbase (ASO) or Essbase (BSO).

Optional: Enter a description.

Descriptions can include up to 255 characters.

Optional: Select Create Blank Application to create an empty application and use the Dimension Library to drag and drop dimensions into the application. See

“Manually Adding Dimensions” on page 205

Note: The Auto Create Local Dimensions feature is not available since it automatically creates new dimensions for all dimensions that are required in the application. Essbase applications do not have any specific required dimensions.

Enter the Essbase Database Name.

When you create an Essbase application, an Essbase database is also created. The database name is required for all Essbase applications. Database names can include no more than 8 characters. For specific database naming conventions, see the Oracle Essbase Database

Administrator's Guide.

Optional: Select Unicode.

If you choose the Unicode option, members of the dimensions are stored in Unicode format and all characters are available. For additional information, see the Oracle Essbase Database

Administrator's Guide.

Perform one of these actions: l l

If using the application wizard, click Next.

The Dimension Selection screen is displayed. See

“Adding Dimensions Using the Wizard” on page 204

If creating the application manually, click Finish.

The Dimension Library is displayed. See

“Manually Adding Dimensions” on page 205

Selecting Dimensions

The next step in creating an application is to add dimensions to the application.

Tip: If you use the wizard to create an application, all required dimensions are automatically shown on the Dimension Selection screen. For Essbase, no dimensions are required, however you must choose at least one dimension.

If you are using the application wizard, see

“Adding Dimensions Using the Wizard” on page

204 . If you created a blank application, see

“Manually Adding Dimensions” on page 205

Creating Essbase Applications

203

Adding Dimensions Using the Wizard

When you use the application wizard to add dimensions, dimension types are automatically categorized and displayed with a shaded heading. For example, Account dimensions, Period dimensions, Entity dimensions, Currency dimensions, and Other dimensions, such as Scenario or Version.

To define dimensions:

To map a dimension type to a dimension, click [Select] in the Dimension column.

If a required dimension type matches to a dimension in the Dimension Library, the dimension name displays in the Dimension column.

Select a dimension.

The dimensions that display in the drop-down list map to the type of dimension. For example, if you are mapping a dimension to the Account dimension type, only account dimensions display in the list.

In some cases, you may want to create a new dimension.

Optional: Create a new dimension. To create a new dimension: a. Using the Dimension drop-down arrow, select Create New Dimension.

The Add New Dimension dialog box is displayed.

Note:

When you create a dimension in the application wizard, it is always a local dimension and cannot be shared in the application wizard. If you want to share a dimension, you must use the Dimension Library. See

“Understanding Shared and

Local Dimensions” on page 78

b. Enter the dimension name and description. The type is automatically selected according to the dimension type you are mapping the dimension to in the Dimension Type column.

c. Click OK.

Continue to select or create new dimensions as necessary.

For existing dimensions: If you want the dimension to be local, select the local check box at the end of each row.

Note: If you created a new dimension, you cannot change a dimension to be shared.

For information on shared and local dimensions, see

The Application Settings screen is displayed. See “Modifying the Application Settings” on page 205 .

Note: You must map at least one dimension to a dimension before you can move to the next screen.

Click Next.

204

Building Applications

Manually Adding Dimensions

When you create blank applications, you use the Dimension Library to select dimensions. The

Dimension Library has three panes: l

Shared Library—Displays on the left and displays all dimensions currently available in the

Shared Library.

l l

For information on loading dimensions into the Dimension Library, see Chapter 3,

For information on editing properties, see “Editing Property Values” on page 142

Application—Appears in the middle and when expanded, lists the names of all dimensions in the current application.

Property Grid—Displays on the right and displays the properties of the selected dimension or member.

To add dimensions to applications:

Drag the dimensions from the Shared Library to the application.

The Copy Dimension dialog box is displayed.

Tip: To create new local dimensions, right-click the application name in the Application

View, and select Create Dimension. The Add New Dimension dialog box is displayed.

Select Local Dimension or Shared Dimension.

Tip:

To add only members to an application, in the Shared Library, right-click the dimension

and select Add to App View. See “Adding Members to Applications” on page 150 .

For information on shared and local dimensions, see

“Setting the Dimension Sort Order and

The expanded application lists all dimensions.

Tip:

If you add a member to the Shared Library and include the dimension in the application, you can click and the new member will display in the application.

Modifying the Application Settings

Creating Essbase Applications

205

If you are creating the application manually, the Dimension Library is displayed, with the Shared

Library, Application, and Property Grid. You can use the right-click menu to modify the application dimensions or the application at the highest level.

Modifying Application Settings Using the Dimension Library

If you created a blank application and are modifying application settings in the Dimension

Library, you can perform these actions: l l l l l l l l l l l

Modify dimension performance settings—See

Dimension Density” on page 214

Create, modify, and delete named levels—See

“Working with Named Levels (Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) Only)” on page 90 .

Create, modify, and delete named generations—See “Working with Named Generations

(Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) Only)” on page 88 .

Associate dimensions and view existing dimension associations—See “Viewing Dimension

View application membership—See

Create dimensions—See “Creating Dimensions” on page 77

Remove dimensions—See

Copy dimensions—See

Detach dimensions—See “Converting Local Dimensions to Shared” on page 211

Modify property values—See “Editing Property Values” on page 142

Add members, select top members, exclude members, and set the base member—See

“Working with Members in Applications” on page 150 .

Modifying Application Settings Using the Application Wizard

206

Building Applications

For wizard applications, use the right-click menu to modify the application dimensions or members. You can perform these actions: l

View application membership—See

“Excluding Members” on page 153 .

Exclude members—See

If you are using the application wizard, when you finish modifying the application dimensions and members, you can validate the application and correct any errors before finalizing the

creation of the application. See “Validating and Deploying” on page 207

Validating and Deploying

If you are creating the application manually, you validate and deploy the application using options in the Application Library. For detailed information on validation and deployment, see

“Validating and Deploying Applications” on page 230 .

Creating Essbase Applications

207

To validate and deploy an application using the wizard:

In the application wizard, Application Settings screen, select Validate.

All errors display in the grid, showing the error type and error message.

If validation errors occur, correct any problems before you deploy the application.

To deploy and application, on the Application Settings screen, select Deploy when finished.

Click Finish.

If you selected Deploy when finished, the Deploy dialog box is displayed. Otherwise, the application is displayed in the Dimension Library.

l l l

Creating Generic Applications

You can create generic applications if you want to:

Create a template application that can be duplicated to create deployable applications of different types

Model local dimensions in your own work area until you are ready to include them in the

Shared Library or a deployable application

Use them as a source for producing an ADS file from the Performance Management

Architect File Generator. See

“Performance Management Architect Utilities” on page 24

When you create Generic applications, you create blank applications using the application wizard. Then, you can use the Dimension Library to add dimensions.

To create generic applications:

Select File, New, Application.

The first screen of the wizard is displayed—Application Type.

Enter the application name.

Names must not contain any special characters or spaces. In addition, names must contain no more than 10 characters.

Select Generic.

Enter a description.

Click Finish.

The Dimension Library is displayed.

Add dimensions from the Shared Library to the application. See

“Common Application Tasks” on page

209

208

Building Applications

l l l l l

Common Application Tasks

This section describes common tasks for all application types. For tasks specific to an application type, see:

“Creating Consolidation Applications” on page 157

“Creating Planning Applications” on page 164

“Creating Standard Profitability and Cost Management Applications” on page 179

“Creating Essbase Applications” on page 201

“Creating Generic Applications” on page 208

Including Dimensions in Applications

Performance Management Architect enables you to manage and share dimensions across applications as well as use independent dimensions that are unique to your application. You can also change a dimension within an application from shared to local or vice versa. This capability provides a deployed application the flexibility to modify its dimension sharing requirements with other applications over time without having to define them at the time of application creation.

You can create local dimensions and maintain the dimensions locally in the application. At a subsequent time, you can decide to share these local dimensions (converting from local to shared) or copy them to the Shared Library as separate dimensions for independent use by other applications. Once a dimension is in the Shared Library, you can distribute updates to other applications that use the dimension in several ways (inherited using a shared dimension or explicitly using dimension synchronization to move changes between the Shared Library and an application).

Detaching dimensions (converting from shared to local) enables you to break the shared link between the dimension in the Shared Library and its counterpart in an application while allowing you to retain the same dimension structure and property values in the application. Any changes made to the dimension in the Shared Library are then no longer automatically inherited to the application.

To add dimensions to an application:

Drag the dimensions from the Shared Library to the application.

The Dimension Status Selection dialog box is displayed.

Select Local Dimension or Shared Dimension.

Click OK.

Dimensions that are shared in an application display (Shared) after the dimension name.

Dimensions that are local in an application display (local) after the dimension name.

Common Application Tasks

209

Converting Shared Dimensions to Local

There may be cases where you have a shared dimension that you want to change to a local dimension in the application. After you convert a shared to dimension to local, all subsequent changes you make in the Shared Library will not be consumed by the local dimension in the application.

You can convert a shared dimension to local by detaching the dimension in the application.

The Detach Dimension feature is only available if the dimension is shared in the application.

Detaching a dimension converts the shared dimension to a local dimension by making a copy.

After the dimension is copied, the dimension is no longer shared, but rather a local dimension where you can make structure changes without effecting the Shared Library or vice versa.

In a case where you want to make the dimension shared again, you can reconnect it with the same dimension in the Shared Library that previously was included in the application. See

“Converting Local Dimensions to Shared” on page 211 .

When a dimension is converted from shared to local, the dimension is not synchronized since the dimension is copied to the application. Property overrides and filters are applied to the local dimension so the resulting dimension has the same structure and property values as the shared version.

To detach a dimension:

Right-click a shared dimension in the application.

Select Detach Dimension.

The Detach Dimension dialog box is displayed.

Select Retain Filtered Structure and/or Retain Property Overrides.

To retain the same filtered structure and overridden property values in the local dimension that you had in the shared dimension, select both options. To discard any application level filtering and overrides you may have created in the shared dimension and to create a local dimension with the same structure as the source dimension in the shared library, using inherited property values of the source dimension, do not select either option.

Click OK.

Note:

If you change the property value in the application, that property value becomes an application level overridden value. In this case, it is "detached" from the property value of the same member in the Shared Library, even if the Shared Library's version is changed.

To revert the application-level property back to inheriting the Shared Library's version, right-click and remove the value in the application.

210

Building Applications

Converting Local Dimensions to Shared

Local dimensions consist of two types: l

Dimensions that are sourced from the Shared Library but are not linked to the Shared Library dimension

Dimensions that are sourced from outside the shared library l

You can convert local dimensions in an application to shared. Upon conversion, the local dimension becomes shared and reconnects with the same shared dimension that was originally included in the application. When you convert local dimensions, you can determine whether to merge the changes or simply replace the dimension in the Shared Library.

Merging Changes—If you make changes to the original shared dimension, a merge operation merges any structure changes that were made to the dimension in the application. You can select an existing dimension from the Shared Library and the merge adds members from the dimension in the Shared Library to the dimension in the application. Property value differences for existing members are retained as local property values within the application. You also have the option to create a new shared dimension to merge.

Replacing Changes—If you make changes to the local dimension in an application, and then convert to a shared dimension, a replace operation replaces the dimension in the Shared Library with the structure and property values from the dimension in the application.

A local dimension can be pushed into the Shared Library for use by other applications.

Note: You cannot update the following Consolidation dimensions after application deployment: Period, View, ICP, Year, Value, Currency.

To convert a local dimension to shared:

Right-click a local dimension in the application.

Select Share Dimension.

The Share Dimension dialog box is displayed.

Perform one of these actions: l

To make a copy of the dimension and create a new copy, select Create a new shared

Dimension.

Common Application Tasks

211

Note: A dimension is created with the same name in the Shared Library, if one already exists, an error displays indicating that you cannot create a new shared dimension.

Dimension names must be the same since the 'share' action results in the local dimension moving to the Shared Library and it being shared into the application, as if it were dragged there from the beginning of the process when adding dimensions to the application. Shared dimensions in an application always have the same name as their source dimension in the Shared Library.

Select the existing dimension to merge or replace.

Select Merge As Shared or Replace.

Click OK.

Synchronizing Dimensions with the Shared Library

You have two options to synchronize local dimensions in applications: 1) synchronize changes from a dimension in the Shared Library to a local dimension in an application 2) synchronize changes from a local dimension in an application to a dimension in the Shared Library.

To synchronize dimensions:

Right-click a local dimension in the application.

Select Synchronize.

Select either:

To Shared Library l

From Shared Library l

Select the target dimension to synchronize (to or from).

The list of available target dimensions from the Shared Library are filtered to only those of the same dimension type as the selected application dimension. If a copy of the local dimension exists in the Shared Library, it is automatically selected by default.

Select Merge As Shared or Replace, then click OK.

You can use the Merge As Shared option to merge similar dimensions from two different applications. For example, if you transform two applications that have similar dimensionality (such as, a similar Products dimension) that are transformed to Performance

Management Architect. In this case, you can copy one of the dimensions to the Shared

Library and then merge the second dimension into this dimension. This allows for retaining the structures in the individual applications while also creating a master dimension.

212

Building Applications

Importing Dimensions into Applications

You can import dimensions directly into Performance Management Architect applications. See

“Creating Import Profiles” on page 64

and “Managing Import Profiles” on page 73

for detailed information.

Removing Dimensions

To remove a dimension from an application, right-click the dimension, and select Remove

Dimension.

Viewing Dimension Associations

Dimension associations enable you to assign security classes and currency to dimensions and dimension members. For example, for an entity dimension, you can create associations to the security classes and currency dimensions. Associations are created at the dimension level and associations are inherited by all members under the dimension. Dimension associations are created in the Dimension Library. See

“Creating Dimension Associations” on page 86 .

Dimension associations are used to denote the inter-relationships between the dimensions within the Shared Library and applications. For example, within Consolidation applications there are Account dimension properties that reference security class, custom dimension intersections (<DimensionAliasName>TopMember), and so on, which directly relate to other dimensions. Dimension Associations enable you to define the relationships between these properties and the other dimensions which then enables you to pick the value directly from the referenced dimension.

An example of associating dimensions for Planning applications, is the Start Period and End

Period properties of the Scenario dimension would have a dimension association with the Period dimension. The Start Year and End Year property of the Scenario dimension would have a dimension association with the Year dimension.

A dimension association is created for all properties where the property value refers to a member of another dimension. Once you create the association, you need to activate it in the application.

Activating Dimension Associations

To activate all dimension associations, right-click the application (at the highest level) and select Activate all associations.

Note: If you have a multi-currency application, the Currency dimension must be associated with the base Entity dimension. If you activate all dimension associations, it will automatically activate the association for you.

Common Application Tasks

213

For information on creating an association for one or more dimensions, see

“Creating

Dimension Associations” on page 86

Viewing Dimension Associations

Dimension associations are not automatic, so you must activate all associations before you can view associations.

To view dimension associations:

In the application, right-click a dimension, and select View Associations.

The View Dimension Association dialog box is displayed.

Tip: To delete an association, select the association you want to delete, then click Delete.

Click OK.

Setting the Dimension Alias

In Consolidation and Planning applications, you can change the alias, or dimension name, in order to see a different name in the deployed application. The Dimension Alias property is useful in cases where you want to view a different name for a dimension in the deployed application versus what is displayed in the Shared Library or application.

To set the Dimension Alias property:

Select the dimension in the Shared Library.

In the Property Grid, change the category to System.

Double-click the Dimension Alias property and enter a new dimension name (alias).

Setting the Dimension Sort Order and Dimension Density

You can modify the dimension performance settings for Profitability and Cost Management and

Essbase applications. Performance settings include modifying the dimension sort order and dimension density.

To set the dimension sort order:

In the Dimension Library, right-click the application name and select Dimension Performance

Settings.

Under Dimensions(Type), select a dimension, then use and to set the dimension sort order described in the following sections.

Profitability and Cost Management

A dimension sort order must be set for every Profitability and Cost Management dimension in the model, except Alias and UDA dimensions. The dimension sort order should be

214

Building Applications

sequential, unique, and greater than or equal to 1; otherwise, validation of the model will fail. See

Table 16

for the recommended dimension sort order settings.

Table 16

Recommended Profitability and Cost Management Dimension Sort Order Settings

Dimension Type Setting

Measure

AllocationType

POV and Business

Dimensions

Attribute Dimensions

1 (Default)

3 or higher

Sort as the last dimensions.

For example, if you have four attribute dimensions in a sequence of 12 dimensions, the attribute dimensions must be set as 9, 10, 11, and 12.

Essbase

In Essbase, dimension sort order determines the order dimensions appear in the outline and, in turn, impacts the order that dimensions are calculated. Calculation order for ASO and BSO databases should be determined in advance, when designing the database. Note that dimension order can affect performance, especially for BSO databases. Calculation of

ASO and BSO databases is described in the Oracle Essbase Database Administrator's Guide.

However, keep in mind the following: l

ASO—The dimension solve order is used by ASO databases and should be taken into account when setting the dimension sort order. If no dimension solve order or sort order is set, aggregations are performed in outline order. Attributes are calculated last.

BSO—Dimension sort order is based on the calculation order, which is intrinsic in

Essbase. Dense dimensions (for example, the time or measures dimensions) are calculated first, sparse dimensions are calculated next, and attribute dimensions are calculated last.

Optional: For Essbase BSO and Profitability and Cost Management, under Density, select the required density for the dimension.

Click OK.

Setting the Dimension Sort Order in the Property Grid

You can set the processing order for a model dimension in the Dimension Sort Order property in the Property Grid.

A dimension sort order must be set for every dimension in the model, except Alias and UDA dimensions. The dimension sort order should be sequential, unique, and greater than or equal to 1.

Note: The Alias dimension is ignored for Dimension Sort Order, as it does not exist as a dimension in Profitability and Cost Management and Essbase.

Common Application Tasks

215

For Profitability and Cost Management, the dimensions must be sorted sequentially in the

sequence specified in Table 16, “Recommended Profitability and Cost Management Dimension

Sort Order Settings,” on page 215

; otherwise, validation of the model will fail:

To set the Dimension Sort Order in the Property Grid:

Select Navigate, Administer, Dimension Library.

Edit a Profitability and Cost Management or Essbase application.

Select a dimension.

In the Property Grid, select one of the following categories, based on the type of application you are editing: Profitability, Essbase (BSO), or Essbase (ASO).

For Profitability applications only, perform these tasks:

a. Set the dimension sort order. For the recommended order, see “Setting the Dimension

Sort Order and Dimension Density” on page 214

b. Validate the model. See “Validating and Deploying” on page 188

Note: For Essbase applications, if you change the dimension sort order after you deploy an application, you should redeploy and select “Clear Metadata” and “Full Deploy.”

Viewing Application Membership

Application membership provides a view of where specific members or dimensions are used in the list of available applications. This information helps you understand the impact of changes.

For example, a division is being reorganized, and you are planning to update the Entity dimension. You use the Application Membership feature to determine which applications may be impacted and to determine the scope of the change.

To view application membership:

Right-click a dimension or member and select Application Membership.

The Applications List dialog box lists all applications of which the dimension is a member and a description of each application.

Click OK.

216

Building Applications

Managing Applications

In This Chapter

Navigating the Application Library...................................................................... 217

Editing Applications...................................................................................... 221

Opening Applications .................................................................................... 221

Closing Applications ..................................................................................... 221

Deleting Applications .................................................................................... 222

Duplicating Applications ................................................................................ 222

Finding Applications ..................................................................................... 224

Reregistering Applications............................................................................... 225

Comparing Applications ................................................................................. 225

Viewing the Data Flow ................................................................................... 228

Validating and Deploying Applications................................................................. 230

Viewing the Application Deployment History .......................................................... 247

Troubleshooting Application Problems................................................................. 247

Managing Planning Data Sources ...................................................................... 255

To open the Application Library, select Navigate, Administer, Application Library.

l l l l l l

Navigating the Application Library

The Application Library shows all of your applications. You can select an application in the top pane and view summary information in the lower pane. The lower pane displays:

Summary—Name, type, date created, date last deployed, and the associated data synchronizations

Description—The information you provided in the Description field of the New Application dialog box or application wizard

Dimensions—The dimensions available in the application

Properties—The status, default currency, and specific properties set for the application

Synchronizations—The data synchronizations for this application

Rules / Rule Set—Rules and Rule Sets defined in Calculation Manager for this application

Navigating the Application Library

217

Modifying the Application Library View

To modify the Application Library view:

Choose View, Details.

Perform one or more actions: l

To sort by a column, click the column heading. For example, if you want to sort by name, click Name.

To move a column, drag the column heading to a new location.

To change the view to icon view, select View, Icons.

Organizing Applications

You can create folders in the Application Library and move applications into the folders to help organize applications.

Creating Folders

To create folders:

In the Application Library, select File, New, Folder.

218

Managing Applications

The Create New Folder dialog box is displayed.

Folder names can include spaces, but cannot include any special characters.

Enter the folder name and description, then click OK.

The folder is created.

Adding Applications to Folders

After you create folders in the Application Library, you can add applications to the folders.

To add applications to the folder:

In the Application Library, drag the applications to the folder or right-click the folder and select Add

Applications.

The Applications List dialog box is displayed.

Select one or more applications to add to the folder.

Tip:

You can press the [Shift] or [Ctrl] keys to select multiple applications in the

Applications List dialog box.

Click OK.

The applications are moved to the folder you created.

To open the folder, double-click the folder or right-click the folder and select Open.

When you open a folder in the Application Library the name of the folder is displayed near the top of the Application Library window.

Tip: If you have a folder open, and then create a new application, the application is automatically stored in the folder. Keep this in mind, since when you create a new folder and return to the Application Library the root of the library displays, and not the folder.

If you do not see the newly created application, make sure to check the folders.

If you want to remove an application from the folder, see

“Removing Applications From

Folders” on page 219 .

To return to the Application Library (root) and close the current folder, click .

Removing Applications From Folders

To remove applications from folders:

Open the folder.

Right-click the application and select Remove From Folder.

The application is removed from the folder and moved back to the Application Library root.

Navigating the Application Library

219

Renaming Folders

To rename a folder:

Right-click the folder, then select Rename.

The Rename Folder dialog box is displayed.

Enter the new folder name and click OK.

Deleting Folders

You can delete folders without removing the applications that reside in the folder. When you delete a folder, all applications are automatically moved to the Application Library root.

To delete folders:

Right-click the folder, then select Delete.

The Application Library – Warning dialog box is displayed.

Click Yes.

The folder is removed and applications are moved to the Application Library root.

Creating Application Filters

You can create filters that allow you to see only specific applications in the Application Library.

Note: The Application Library does not filter the applications based on security. All applications are shown. For example, a user will see 20 applications in the Application Library even if he only has access to one of them.

To create application filters:

Select View, Filter.

Deselect the types that you do not want to see.

Under Status, deselect the status that you do not want see. For example, you might want to see applications that are not deployed.

Click OK.

220

Managing Applications

Refreshing the Application Library

To ensure the most current display of application information, you can refresh the Application

Library.

To refresh the Application Library, select View, Refresh.

Editing Applications

To edit applications, in the Application Library, double-click an application or right-click and select Edit.

The Dimension Library displays the Shared Library, application, and Property Grid.

Opening Applications

After you deploy an application, you can open it in the Hyperion application to which it was deployed, such as Financial Management.

To open deployed applications, in the Application Library, right-click a deployed application and select Open.

Tip: You can also click Navigate, Applications, then choose the Application type, such as

Planning, and select the application.

The application displays in Financial Management, Profitability and Cost Management, or

Planning.

Note: The Open option in the right-click menu is not available if the application has not been deployed.

Closing Applications

To close applications perform one of these actions: l l

In the upper right corner of the view, click

Right-click the Dimension Library tab that displays the open application and select Close.

Select File, Close, Current.

Editing Applications

221

Deleting Applications

In the Application Library, you can delete application with Deployed or Not Deployed status.

If the status is Deployment Pending, you cannot delete the application.

To delete applications in the Application Library, right-click an application and select

Delete.

An authorization check for the deletion is performed, then a request is passed to the Hyperion product server for a completion status. The application status is updated to “Delete Pending” so that no other operation can access it. After an application is deleted, it is removed from the

Application Library.

Note: Before deleting a Planning application, back up the application and the application databases as described in the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System

Backup and Recovery Guide. After backing up, use the standard procedure for deleting applications. After deleting, ensure that the application is deleted from Essbase, and that the Planning relational tables are deleted from the relational database.

l l

Duplicating Applications

Within the Application Library, you can copy applications to create new applications. If you modify artifacts in the Shared Library the changes are automatically reflected in both nondeployed applications. When you duplicate applications you have two options:

Duplicate applications as new applications

Duplicate applications as deployed applications

Duplicating Applications as New Applications

To duplicate applications:

In the Application Library, right-click an application and select Duplicate, As New Application.

The Duplicate Application dialog box is displayed.

Enter the name, description (optional), and select the type. Then click OK.

Note: If you select a different application type, such as Consolidation to Planning, only the like dimension properties are copied. After you duplicate the application, you should update the new application type properties.

It may be necessary to refresh the Application Library to see the new application created by duplicating the existing application.

222

Managing Applications

Select View, Refresh or click .

As necessary, double-click the application and use the Dimension Library to modify the properties.

Duplicating Consolidation Applications as Deployed

Applications

You can copy deployed Consolidation applications and duplicate from one server to another.

Consolidation applications cannot be copied across types of databases. For example,

Consolidation applications created using a SQL Server database must be copied to another SQL

Server database.

Follow these guidelines: l l

The source and destination computers must be registered to the same Shared Services server.

Applications cannot be duplicated from one Performance Management Architect server to another Performance Management Architect server.

To duplicate deployed applications:

In the Application Library, right-click an application and select Duplicate, Deployed Application.

Note: The Copy Data and Copy Audit Data options are available for Consolidation applications only.

Enter the name of the new application.

Duplicating Applications

223

Optionally enter a description.

Select the instance name, application server, and Shared Services project.

Optionally enter notes in the Notes field.

The notes you enter here are appended to the job description in the Job Console. This text field allows for 150 characters (because it is appended to the description), and can contain any characters.

Optionally select Copy Data and/or Copy Audit Data.

You can select Copy Data to copy the data along with the metadata/application structure information. Select Copy Audit Data to copy the data and task audit information that has been generated with the application up to the point of migration.

Click OK.

Note:

To view the status of a duplication, select Navigate, Administer, Library Job Console.

After you duplicate a deployed application, it is automatically registered in Shared Services.

For information on assigning user roles, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance

Management System User and Role Security Guide.

l l l

Finding Applications

You can search for applications in the Application Library. Searching for applications searches the Application Library root and all folders. You can enter the following criteria for a search:

Application name

Application type

Status

To find applications:

Click or select View, and then Search.

The Find Applications dialog box is displayed.

Perform one or more actions:

Optional: Enter the application name.

l l

Select the application type.

Select the status. Options include: Not Deployed, Deployed, Deployment Pending, and

Deployed with Errors.

Click OK.

224

Managing Applications

Reregistering Applications

Reregistering is for Shared Services only and is used in the case where Shared Services is unavailable and the applications need to be reregistered.

To reregister applications:

Right-click the application and select Reregister.

Select the options for your application, then click Reregister.

Note: The Reregister dialog box displays different options, depending on the type of application.

Comparing Applications

Comparing applications is an integral part of the application flow. The Compare report shows all excluded members and property differences.

You can compare applications in these ways: l

Compare to Shared Library—Compares the dimensions and members in an application to the dimensions and members in the Shared Library.

Compare to Deployed Application—Compares an application to a deployed application.

To compare applications:

Right-click an application, select Compare, then perform an action:

Compare to Shared Library l

Compare to Deployed Application l

The Compare dialog box is displayed.

Click View Results.

The Dimension Compare Results is displayed.

Reregistering Applications

225

Note: Activations and inactivations are not currently supported.

l l l

Navigating the Compare Results

The Compare View has three panes:

“Dimension Compare Results” on page 226

“Application Compare Summary” on page 227

“Property Compare Results” on page 228

Dimension Compare Results

Dimension Compare Results, on the left, displays dimensions and members that have been added or deleted. Initially, the Compare Results displays the application collapsed, with the total number of differences in parentheses. When you expand the application, each dimension displays the number of differences in parentheses when it is collapsed, and upon expansion, artifacts that have been removed from the application display with a strike through. Artifacts with property differences display in bold.

When you select artifacts the value updates in the Compare Summary and Property Compare

Results. (Depending on your selection, the Compare Summary heading displays: Application

226

Managing Applications

Compare Summary, Dimension Compare Summary, or Member Compare Summary.) If you select the: l l l l

Application—The Application Compare Summary displays the total number of differences for the entire application.

Dimension—The total differences for the entire dimension.

Removed member (with strike through)—The Member Compare Summary Total

Differences and Removes update to reflect the values of the selected member.

Member with property differences (in bold)—The Member Compare Summary updates and the Property Compare Results displays the Property Name that differs in the applications being compared.

To change the dimension compare results view:

Click Show Side-by-Side Tree to display a side-by-side tree.

The Dimension Compare Results displays the compared views side by side.

Click Show Single Compare Tree to display a single tree (default view).

Application Compare Summary

Compare Summary, in the upper right, displays a summary of all changes between the application and Shared Library. The Compare Summary updates, depending on your selection.

For example, if you select a dimension in the Dimension Compare Results, the Compare

Summary heading displays Dimension Compare Summary. The Compare Summary values are based on the selected artifact in the Dimension Compare Results. It displays: l l l l l l l l l

Total Differences—total number of differences between the application and Shared Library.

Property Differences—total number of property differences

Additions—total number of artifacts added to the application.

Deletes—total number of deleted artifacts.

Renames—total number of renamed members. (The number that displays for renamed members are counted in addition to the Total Differences. For example, you may see 6 total differences and 2 renames, therefore you have a grand total of 8 differences.)

Removes—total number of removed artifacts.

Moves—A member was moved from one location to another in dimension.

Shares—A shared member was inserted into the dimension.

Includes—A shared dimension was added to the application.

Excludes—A member was filtered out of a dimension.

Each summary displays a radio button. The radio buttons are filters. You can select the Additions,

Removes, or Property Differences radio buttons to update the Dimension Compare Results. For example, if you select Additions, the display is updated to show only additions. In addition, any members without additions are not displayed, unless it has a child that needs to be shown.

Comparing Applications

227

Property Compare Results

Property Compare Results, in the lower right, displays changed member properties for the selected member in the Dimension Compare Results. The Property Compare Results displays three columns: Property Name, Shared Library, and the application name.

Excluding Members in the Compare Results

To exclude members:

Right-click a member in the Dimension Compare Results and select Add to Exclude Filter.

The number of 'Removes' is updated in the Application Compare Summary.

When finished, click in the upper right corner of the view.

Viewing the Data Flow

You can access the data flow from the Application Library. The Data Flow shows how data is moved between applications using synchronizations created with the Data Synchronizer. Data

Flow takes data synchronizations and graphically depicts the relationships of data movement between applications.

Note:

To view the data flow, you must have applications that are synchronized. See Chapter 8,

“Synchronizing Data.”

To view the data flow, in the Application Library, right-click an application and select Data

Flow.

The data flow is displayed. The data flow map shows data flowing in and out of a focal application.

The focal application is the application in the center of the data flow.

228

Managing Applications

When you select an application in the data flow, properties are displayed in the lower pane. The

Application Properties include, Name, Description, and Synchronizations.

Changing the Focal Application in the Data Flow

To change the focal application, right-click the application, and select Center.

The focal application changes according to the application you selected.

Viewing Synchronizations

To view a synchronization, right-click the application, select Synchronizations and select the synchronization name.

You can select a synchronization to edit, validate, or execute. See

“Editing Synchronizations” on page 230

and

“Validating and Executing Synchronizations” on page 230

Viewing the Data Flow

229

Editing Synchronizations

To edit a synchronization:

Perform a task: l

In the data flow, select the synchronization in the Application Properties area. In the

Synchronization Execution dialog box, select the synchronization, select the Action,

Edit and click OK.

Access the Data Synchronizer (Navigate, Administer, Data Synchronization), rightclick the synchronization and select Edit.

Modify the data mappings as necessary.

See

Chapter 8, “Synchronizing Data.”

Validating and Executing Synchronizations

You can execute synchronizations from the Data Flow.

To validate and execute synchronizations:

In the Data Flow, select an application.

In the Application Properties, select the synchronization to execute.

The Synchronization Execution dialog box is displayed.

Select the Action, Validate or Execute, and click OK.

If you validate the synchronization, the Data Sync Validation Options dialog box is displayed. If you execute the synchronization from the data flow, the Data Sync Execute

Options dialog box is displayed.

Editing Applications

You can edit applications that display in the Data Flow.

To edit an application, in the Data Flow, right-click the application and select Edit.

Validating and Deploying Applications

In Performance Management Architect, you create applications which describe the dimensionality and other information about an application. When you create applications, you can then validate and deploy the applications to Oracle's Hyperion products. The deployment process creates an application in the desired product, such as Financial Management,

Profitability and Cost Management, Essbase, or Planning.

230

Managing Applications

To deploy applications, you must be provisioned in Shared Services with the user role of

Application Creator for the specific product type. See

“Security” on page 27 for additional

information.

The deployment process involves: l l l l

Validating the Application—The application is validated for a product, such as Financial

Management, Profitability and Cost Management, Essbase, or Planning.

If the application is missing dimensions or other required information, the deployment is aborted. Also, if another deployment for the application is in progress, the request is cancelled.

Selecting the Environment Information for Deployment—Select the environment to which you are deploying the application.

Export and Deploy the application—When you deploy an application, the deployment job begins and the application is exported from Performance Management Architect to a specific

Hyperion product. When you initiate deployment, the status of the application displays

“Deployment Pending” in the Application Library.

Product Application Creation—In new deployments, the Hyperion product creates the application and the Hyperion product server attempts to load the metadata. After deployment is complete, the status and deployment timestamp is updated in the Application

Library. Then, the deployment job is marked as “Completed.” For information on viewing

deployment jobs, see Chapter 9, “Managing Jobs.”

Validating Applications

To validate an application:

Right-click the application and select Validate, Application.

The Job Task dialog box is displayed.

Click the link to navigate to the Library Job Console.

Click the validation log link in the Attachments area.

Click Open to open the log file in a text editor.

Below is an excerpt from a validation log:

Validation Log

==============

Job Id: 191

Created : 3/4/2008 8:08:30 PM

Application : Consol

Validation Summary

==================

Result : Success

Validating and Deploying Applications

231

Summary : There were 0 errors and 0 warnings during the validation process. For details refer the error and warning section of this log.

For detailed information on application validations, see

Appendix B, “Application Validations.”

Reviewing Deployment Logs for Errors

After you deploy applications, you can view the Summary area and the deployment log (if available) in the Library Job Console. See

Chapter 9, “Managing Jobs.”

For Consolidation applications, the deployment log (displaying in the Library Job Console) includes the Financial Management metadata load file. In most cases, invalid members and errors appear in the log and it is not necessary to access Financial Management logs to access additional information. However, in rare cases, where the metadata log does not provide enough information, you can check for more detail in the Financial Management application server log.

For Planning, Essbase, and Profitability applications, the Library Job Console displays the deployment log. If there are errors, click the Validation Log link in the Attachments area to view a complete listing of all validation errors or messages.

Deploying Planning Applications

Planning requires certain dimensions, depending on how the application is set up. To avoid validation errors, ensure that the application includes all required dimensions. For Planning dimension requirements, see

Chapter 12, “Working with Planning Dimensions.”

The deploy process creates: l l l

Tables and values in the Planning database.

An application and outline in Essbase without the need to refresh the cube from the Planning

Web user interface.

HSP_Rates, for multi-currency applications, upon deployment (it is not a dimension that you create manually).

Note: Be sure that the Planning application server is running before deploying any Planning applications. Deployment of applications from Performance Management Architect to

Planning is a long-running operation. The initial deployment may take more time than subsequent re-deployments.

Before deploying Planning applications, be sure that all the properties are correct and meet your needs. If you need to update any settings, do so before deploying. If applications are not set up correctly, deployment fails and error messages are displayed. To deploy correctly, Planning

applications must meet the qualifications specified in this chapter, Chapter 3, “Importing

Metadata,”

and

Chapter 12, “Working with Planning Dimensions.”

For example: l

The Fiscal Start Year property must be defined. The year must be four digits long, such as

2010.

232

Managing Applications

l l l l l l l

Year dimensions must start with FY, followed by a two-digit year, such as FY10.

The first year member in the Year dimension and the Fiscal Start Year property must describe the same year. For example, if the Fiscal Start Year is 2010, the first year in the Year dimension must be FY10.

For 12 Month Base Time Period applications only, the Start Month property must be defined.

The Default Alias Table property must be defined. For information, see

“Alias Dimensions” on page 82

The Default Currency property must be defined.

Applications must include predefined dimensions of the following types: Scenario, Version,

Entity, Account, Period and Year. Multi-currency applications also require a dimension of type Currency.

The application must meet the qualifications specified in

Chapter 12, “Working with

Planning Dimensions.”

Note:

These requirements are specific to Planning applications that use the Plan1, Plan2, or

Plan3 plan type. For Planning modules that use other plan types, requirements may differ.

For information on Public Sector Planning and Budgeting, see the Oracle Hyperion Public

Sector Planning and Budgeting User's Guide. For information on Workforce Planning and

Capital Asset Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Workforce Planning Administrator's

Guide and Oracle Hyperion Capital Asset Planning Administrator's Guide.

Some information cannot be changed after the application is deployed, such as the application name and data source. When the application is deployed, any unreferenced UDAs are removed from the application. See

“Working with User-Defined Attributes” on page 144 .

Caution!

Each data value in Planning is identified by a set of dimension members and a plan type. Excluding dimension members from an application can translate to a delete action on redeployment. If excluded members are used elsewhere (such as a selection

in a data form), those associations are removed. For information, see “Excluding and Deleting Planning Members” on page 137

Before excluding members from an application, use the Show Usage feature within Planning to determine where members are used in the application and the implications of excluding dimension members from an application during deployment. For information about the Show

Usage feature, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide.

To deploy Planning applications:

Click Navigate, then Administer, and then Application Library.

Right-click the Planning application, then select Deploy, and then Application.

Validating and Deploying Applications

233

You can also select Rules to deploy only rules, or All to deploy the application with its business rules. For information on deploying business rules, see the Oracle Hyperion Calculation

Manager Designer’s Guide.

Applications are validated before they are deployed. Any validation errors display in the Job

Console. You will need to correct all validation errors before deploying. For information on resolving business rule errors, see the Oracle Hyperion Calculation Manager Designer’s

Guide.

The Deploy dialog box displays.

Perform these tasks:

If you are redeploying, some options are not available, such as instance name, application server, and data source.

a. Optional: Include notes about the deployment in the Notes field. The notes you enter here are appended to the job description in the Job Console. This text field allows for

150 characters (because it is appended to the description), and can contain any characters. The text field will be scrollable vertically if the text exceeds the length on screen.

b. Select the Instance Name.

c. Select the Application Server.

d. Select the Shared Services Project.

e. Select the Data Source used by the application.

234

Managing Applications

Optional: If you want to create a data source, click the icon next to Data Source. For

detailed instructions, see “Entering Data Source Information” on page 255 .

g. Optional: If you are deploying the application for the first time, select Create Outline to update the Essbase databases that store application data.

h. Optional: To refresh the application database after changing the application structure, select Refresh Outline.

Optional: Select Create Security Filters to store access permissions in an encrypted data file (

Essbase.sec

). To generate security filters for all users in the application, select

Create Security Filters but do not select Validate Security Filter Limit.

Optional: Select Shared Members Security Filters to apply access permissions to shared members.

k. Optional: Validate Security Filter Limit to identify security filters that exceed the Essbase security filter limit of 64 KB per row. This validates filter size to ensure it does not exceed the size limit before building Essbase security filters.

The Full Deploy option is available when you redeploy applications. For additional information, see

“Considerations for Redeploying Planning Applications” on page

242 .

m. If you are deploying business rules, you can also select Deploy Rules or Continue Deploy

Rules Even if Rules Validation Fails. For information on deploying business rules, see the

Oracle Hyperion Calculation Manager Designer’s Guide.

Click Deploy.

Note: When you deploy a single-currency application, the Entity member Currency property is set to the application default property.

The Planning application is automatically registered with Shared Services during Planning application creation. To view progress and error messages, open the Planning application server.

To access a Planning application created after deployment, you must perform a refresh of

Planning applications in EPM Workspace and then choose the application. If prompted, enter your logon information. See the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide

Note: If a deployment is interrupted or deleted, the status may show “deploy pending” and the deployment may time out. The default timeout value is 480 minutes (8 hours).

You can change the default in awbconfig.properties

(in

EPM_ORACLE_INSTANCE\config\EPMA\WebTier

). If a deployment times out, you should deploy the application again. Even though the status may indicate that it is in sync with deployment, which it may not be, because of the timeout.

Validating and Deploying Applications

235

Deploying Consolidation Applications

Financial Management requires certain dimensions, depending on how the application is set up.

To avoid validation errors, ensure that the application includes all required dimensions.

Note: For information on deploying business rules, see the Oracle Hyperion Calculation Manager

Designer’s Guide.

To deploy Consolidation applications:

Click Navigate, Administer, Application Library.

Right-click the Consolidation application, select Deploy, Application.

You can also select Rules to deploy only rules, or All to deploy the application with its business rules. For information on deploying business rules, see the Oracle Hyperion

Calculation Manager Designer’s Guide.

If the Application Validation Errors dialog box is displayed, fix the errors and then try to deploy again.

The Deploy dialog box is displayed.

If you are redeploying, some options are not available, such as instance name, application server, and data source.

Perform these tasks: a. Optional: Add notes pertaining to the deployment of this application. These notes are appended to the job description in the Job Console. This text field allows up to 150 characters and contain any characters.

236

Managing Applications

b. Select the Instance Name (Cluster name).

c. Select the Application Server.

d. Select the Shared Services Project.

e. Optional: Select Clear All Metadata and Data—all dimension members in the application database are deleted as well as any corresponding data, journals, and intercompany transactions.

See the Oracle Hyperion Financial Management Administrator's Guide for information on clearing data from removed dimension members.

Optional: Select Check Referential Integrity—checks the metadata against the data to ensure integrity. For example, if you rename members and select Check Referential

Integrity, the deployment log lists all artifacts affected by the rename. See the Oracle

Hyperion Financial Management Administrator's Guide.

Note: After you deploy an application, you cannot change the Year, Period or View dimensions.

If you are deploying business rules, you can also select Deploy Rules or Continue Deploy Rules Even if Rules Validation Fails. For information on deploying business rules, see the Oracle Hyperion

Calculation Manager Designer’s Guide.

Note: The “Full Deploy” option is available when you redeploy applications. For additional

information, see “Redeploying Applications” on page 241

Click Deploy.

Note: If a deployment is interrupted or deleted, the status may show “deploy pending” and the deployment may time out. The default time out is 480 minutes (8 hours). You can change the default in awbconfig.properties

. If a deployment times out you should deploy the application again, even though the status may indicate that it is in sync with deployment, it may not be because of the time out.

Deploying Profitability Applications

To deploy a Profitability and Cost Management application in Performance Management

Architect:

Select Navigate, then Administer, and then Application Library.

Right-click the name of the application to be deployed, and select Deploy from the drop-down list.

Applications are validated before they are deployed, and any validation errors display in the

Job Console. You must correct all validation errors before deploying. When the validation is complete, the Deploy dialog box is displayed, showing the Application Name.

Validating and Deploying Applications

237

Optional: In Description, enter a brief description for the application.

Optional: Under Notes, add notes pertaining to the deployment of this application. These notes are appended to the job description in the Job Console. This text field allows up to 150 characters and contain any characters.

Under Instance Name, select the name of the Profitability and Cost Management installation to which you want to deploy the application.

A Profitability and Cost Management application may be installed on a single machine, or on more than one machine as part of a cluster. Each installation, or instance, is displayed on the Instance Name drop-down list. Default is the name of the instance used by the

Configurator Tool for the first installation.

Select the Application Server.

Under Shared Services Project, select the Profitability and Cost Management application group to which this application is to be assigned.

Optional: Decide whether Full Deploy should be selected, as follows: l

If this is the first deployment of the application, the Full Deploy check box is disabled because Performance Management Architect automatically sends all dimensions to

Profitability and Cost Management.

If Full Deploy is checked for any subsequent deployment, then Performance

Management Architect sends all dimensions to Profitability and Cost Management.

If Full Deploy is not checked, then Performance Management Architect sends only modified dimensions to Profitability and Cost Management. If no changes were made to a dimension, then that dimension is not included in the deployment.

Click Deploy.

The Job Task window opens, to confirm the Validation Job has been submitted, and display the Job ID.

On the Job Task window, click the link to display the job status.

238

Managing Applications

When the job is complete, a message is displayed under Detail to indicate the new application has been created and deployed to Profitability and Cost Management. The new application is available for selection.

Deploying Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) Applications

This topic covers deployment of Essbase ASO and BSO application. If you are redeploying an

Essbase (ASO) or Essbase (BSO) application, see

“Redeploying Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO)

Applications” on page 244 .

Before deploying Essbase applications, you must complete the following: l l

You must have successfully configured Performance Management Architect, Essbase, and

Oracle Essbase Studio using the EPM System Configurator. See EPM System Installation and

Configuration Guide for information on configuration.

You must be provisioned in Shared Services with the user role of Essbase Application Creator

(in the User Management Console, Hyperion Shared Services, Global Roles, Application

Creator, Essbase Application Creator). Refer to the Shared Services documentation for information on provisioning.

The following are guidelines to consider when deploying or redeploying Essbase applications: l l l l l

Essbase applications do not require a fixed set of dimensions. For example, you can create and deploy an Essbase application containing just one generic dimension and one member.

Empty dimensions are allowed.

You cannot use Performance Management Architect to create Hybrid Analysis or Advanced

Relational Access cubes.

A common validation error is that an invalid character exists in a member name. This often occurs when member names contain square brackets (

[]

) or other invalid characters. To work around this, you can do one of the following: m

If the members are in a shared dimension, clear the members using the Exclude Member

command, described in “Excluding Members” on page 153

If the members are local members, clear the members using the Remove Members

command described in “Removing Members” on page 136 , or the Delete Members command, described in “Deleting Members” on page 136

If you want to allow duplicate member names, you must set the Allow Duplicates property flag at the application level. Once the application has been deployed with this property set, the Allow Duplicates property is permanently set for the application; you cannot later clear the property. Essbase Studio does not allow updates to the Allow Duplicates property when you redeploy an application.

Validating and Deploying Applications

239

Note: After a successful initial deployment of an Essbase ASO or BSO application, the user performing the deployment is not automatically provisioned as an application administrator. To redeploy an Essbase ASO or BSO application, you need to be provisioned as an Application Administrator for the Essbase application in Shared

Services.

Note:

There is no difference in the deployment process for Essbase (ASO) or Essbase (BSO) applications.

Properties for Essbase applications, dimensions and members are described in

Chapter 14,

“Working with Essbase Properties.”

Information on Essbase requirements for applications and databases is available in the Oracle

Essbase Database Administrator’s Guide and the Oracle Essbase Administration Services Online

Help.

Note:

For information on deploying business rules, see the Oracle Hyperion Calculation Manager

Designer’s Guide.

To deploy an Essbase (ASO) or Essbase (BSO) application:

Click Navigate, then Administer, and then Application Library.

Right-click an Essbase (ASO) or Essbase (BSO) application, and select Deploy.

The Deploy dialog box is displayed.

If there are errors, the Job Task dialog box is displayed. Perform these steps:

240

Managing Applications

a. Click the link in the Job Task dialog box to access the Job Console.

b. In the Job Console, under Attachments, click the link to the error report.

The error report is in text file format.

c. Open or save the error report, review the errors and correct them, and then begin the deployment process again.

Optional: In the Deploy dialog box, add notes about this deployment in the Notes box.

The notes you enter are appended to the application description in the Job Console. There is a 150 character limit (because it is appended to the description), and can contain any characters.

Select the Instance Name of the Essbase Studio Server instance which you want to use to deploy the application.

This is the name of a machine where an Essbase Studio Server instance is installed and configured. See the EPM System Installation and Configuration Guide for configuration information.

Note: You can only deploy Essbase applications using Essbase Studio Server.

Select the Application Server.

This is the name of a machine where an Essbase Server instance or cluster is installed and configured. See the EPM System Installation and Configuration Guide for configuration information.

Click Deploy.

The Full Deploy, Clear Metadata, and Clear Data check boxes do not apply to a first-time

deployment. These options apply to redeployments only. See “Redeploying Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) Applications” on page 244

for information on using these check boxes during redeployment.

. If a deployment times out, you should deploy the application again. Even though the status may indicate that it is in sync with deployment; it may not be because of the time out.

View and edit the deployed application outline in Essbase Administration Services Console; query the application database using either Smart View or Oracle Essbase Spreadsheet Add-in.

Redeploying Applications

Redeploying performs a merge or a replace of the application metadata based on the types of changes made since the last deployment. For example, if any members have been moved or deleted in any hierarchies in the application, then the redeployment of the metadata is performed using a replace mode. If only property updates were made to the application since the last deployment, then the redeployment of the metadata will be performed using a merge mode.

Validating and Deploying Applications

241

To redeploy applications:

Right-click the application and select Deploy.

Optional: Select the Shared Services project.

Note: When you redeploy Consolidation, Essbase (ASO), or Essbase (BSO) applications, if

Performance Management Architect cannot find the application server previously specified, you can select a different application server.

Optional: Select Full Deploy.

Selecting “Full Deploy” ensures that Performance Management Architect includes all dimensions and members in the application in the deployment. If you do not select “Full

Deploy,” only dimensions that have been modified since the last deployment are included.

Select this option in cases where your Performance Management Architect metadata may be out of sync or your product database or Performance Management Architect database has been restored. (This option can only be selected when redeploying applications.)

Considerations for Redeploying Planning Applications

Before redeploying, be sure the properties are correct and meet your needs. If applications are not set up correctly, deployment fails and error messages are displayed. After a Planning application is deployed, you cannot change these properties: l l l l l l l l

Whether the application uses a single currency or multiple currencies. For example, after you deploy with Multiple Currency selected, you cannot later clear Multiple Currency to use a single currency. Likewise, with a single-currency application, you cannot later select

Multiple Currency.

The default application currency. For example, if you use USD, you cannot later change it to EUR.

The type of calendar. For example, if you set Base Time Period to 12 Months, you cannot later change it to Quarters.

The fiscal start month. After you set the Start Month, you cannot change it.

The start year. For example, if you set the Start Year to 2010, you cannot change it to 2009.

You can, however, add years after the first year.

Any years added. After years are added, you cannot remove them. For example, if the deployed application includes FY09, you cannot remove this year.

The Weeks Distribution pattern. For example, if you set Weeks Distribution to 445, you cannot later change it to 544 or Even.

The plan types that are contained in the application. For example, if you deploy an application with plan types Plan1 and Plan2 selected, you cannot later add Plan3 or remove

Plan2 from this application. You can change the Valid for Plan type for dimension members at any time. However, you cannot change the plan types contained in the application after deployment.

242

Managing Applications

l l

Dimensions added. You can add dimensions up to a total of twenty, including the predefined dimensions. You can rename dimensions, by changing the dimension alias, but you cannot

delete them. See “Setting the Dimension Alias” on page 214 .

Predefined dimensions. You cannot delete the predefined dimensions. Single-currency applications require these dimensions: Scenario, Version, Entity, Account, Period, and Year.

Multiple-currency applications require these dimensions: Scenario, Version, Entity,

Account, Period, Year, and Currency.

Caution!

Each data value in Planning is identified by a set of dimension members and a plan type. Excluding dimension members from an application can translate to a delete

action on deployment. For information, see “Excluding and Deleting Planning

Members” on page 137

Note: For information on applications enabled for Workforce Planning and Capital Asset

Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Workforce Planning Administrator's Guide and Oracle

Hyperion Capital Asset Planning Administrator's Guide. For information on Public Sector

Planning and Budgeting, see the Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting

User's Guide.

Before excluding members from an application or deploying to Planning, use the Show Usage feature within Planning to determine where members are used in the application and the implications of excluding dimension members from the application on deployment. For information about the Show Usage feature, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's

Guide.

Redeploying Planning Applications

To redeploy Planning applications:

Right-click a Planning application and select Deploy.

Select the Shared Services Project.

Applications are automatically registered under the selected Shared Services Project upon deployment in Performance Management Architect.

Optional: Select Refresh Outline and select additional security options, as necessary. See

“Deploying

Planning Applications” on page 232 .

Click OK.

The application is deployed to Planning. To view progress and error messages, open the

Planning Application Server.

Note: When you redeploy a single currency application, the Entity member Currency property will be set to the application default property.

Validating and Deploying Applications

243

Redeploying Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) Applications

Before you begin, be sure to review the guidelines listed in “Deploying Essbase (ASO) and Essbase

(BSO) Applications” on page 239 .

Note: For information on deploying business rules, see the Oracle Hyperion Calculation Manager

Designer’s Guide.

To redeploy an Essbase (ASO) or Essbase (BSO) application:

Follow the procedure in

“Deploying Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) Applications” on page 239

step 1 through

step 5

Note: When you redeploy an application, if Performance Management Architect cannot find the application server previously specified, you can select a different application server.

Select the Clear Metadata, Clear Data, and Full Deploy check boxes according to your requirements; in summary: l

When the Full Deploy check box is selected Performance Management Architect will export complete metadata.

Note: If you modified the dimension sort order after you originally deployed the application, you must select the Full Deploy option when you redeploy in order to modify the outline in the Essbase deployed application. For information on

modifying the sort order settings, see “Setting the Dimension Sort Order and

Dimension Density” on page 214 .

When Full Deploy is not selected, Performance Management Architect will export only those dimensions which have been modified. Essbase Studio drops only the modified dimensions and members, and rebuilds them according to the selections you make in the Clear Metadata and Clear Data check boxes.

See

Table 17 for complete details of the results of selecting the check boxes in the Deploy

dialog box.

Table 17

Result of Selecting and Clearing the Deployment Check Boxes

“Full Deploy” Check Box

State

“Clear Metadata” Check Box

State

“Clear Data” Check Box State Result

Selected Selected Selected Essbase Studio will delete all outline members, then add all members to the outline.

Outline restructure will clear all data.

244

Managing Applications

“Full Deploy” Check Box

State

Selected

Deselected

“Clear Metadata” Check Box

State

Selected

“Clear Data” Check Box State Result

Deselected

Deselected Selected

Essbase Studio will delete all outline members, then add all members to the outline.

Outline restructure will keep data.

Essbase Studio will add outline members without deleting existing members.

Outline restructure will clear all data.

Deselected

Selected

Deselected

Selected

Essbase Studio will add outline members without deleting existing members.

Outline restructure will keep data.

Essbase Studio will drop the outline dimensions, then rebuild the dimensions.

Outline restructure will clear all data.

Selected

Deselected

Selected

Deselected

Essbase Studio will drop the outline dimensions, then rebuild the dimensions.

Outline restructure will keep data.

Essbase Studio will add members without dropping any dimensions. Outline restructure will clear data.

Oracle Essbase Studio will add members without dropping any dimensions.

Outline restructure will keep data.

Click Deploy.

. If a deployment times out, you should deploy the application again. Even though the status may indicate that it is in sync with deployment; it may not be because of the time out.

View and edit the deployed application outline in Essbase Administration Services Console; query the application database using either Oracle Hyperion Smart View for Office or Oracle Essbase Spreadsheet

Add-in.

Validating and Deploying Applications

245

Redeploying Detail Profitability Applications

Redeploying performs a merge or a replace of the application metadata based on the types of changes made since the last deployment.

For Detailed Profitability applications, you may be prevented from redeploying if either of the following conditions exist: l l

A user-defined Measures Detailed dimension has been deleted. To continue with the redeploy, you must restore the deleted dimension using one of the following methods: m

Import the correct version of the application

Recreate the dimension m m

Copy the dimension from the Shared Library in the Dimension Library screen

A dimension that is not used in the model has been deleted. All Model Data Registration

Column Mappings to that dimension are also deleted. The list of deleted mappings is displayed in the

EPMA log

and the hpcm.log.

Note: If users try to delete the dimensions in either case, a warning is generated during deployment and displayed in the

EPMA.log

on the Job Console screen in EPM

Workspace.

To redeploy a Profitability and Cost Management application in Performance Management

Architect:

Optional: Correct any validation conditions that may exist, and save the application.

From EPM Workspace, select Navigate, then Administer, and then Application Library.

Right-click the name of the application to be deployed, and select Deploy from the drop-down list.

Applications are validated before they are deployed, and any validation errors display in the

Job Console. You must correct all validation errors before deploying. When the validation is complete, the Deploy dialog box is displayed, showing the Application Name.

Select Full Deploy to have Performance Management Architect send all dimensions sent to Profitability and Cost Management.

Click Deploy.

The Job Task window opens, to confirm the Validation Job has been submitted, and display the Job ID.

On the Job Task window, click the link to display the job status.

When the job is complete, a message is displayed under Detail to indicate the application has been deployed to Profitability and Cost Management. The application is available for selection.

246

Managing Applications

l l

Viewing the Application Deployment History

You can view an application's deployment history to troubleshoot problems with deployment.

You must have specific roles assigned in Shared Services to view application deployment history:

For applications that have not been deployed, you must have Performance Management

Architect Application Creator rights to view the deployment history.

For deployed applications, you must have Shared Services Application Administrator rights to view the deployment history.

Note: The default number of application deployment history entries is 10. To override this setting, add the MaxDeploymentHistoryEntries entry to the BPMA_Server_Config.xml

file. See

Appendix D, “Configuration Settings in BPMA_Server_Config.xml.”

To view the deployment history:

Navigate to the Application Library.

Right-click a deployed application, and then select Deployment History.

The Job Console is displayed. The Job Console view is filtered by the source application and these job types: Export, Transform Classic to EPM Architect, Application Migration, and

Application Deployment. (Application Deployment jobs include deployment, redeployment, and deploy business rules only.)

For information on using the Job Console, see “Working with the Job Console” on page

295 .

l l

Troubleshooting Application Problems

In some cases, the state of Performance Management Architect applications may become out of sync with the Dimension Server, object repository, Shared Services, or target Hyperion product.

This may occur if your database becomes corrupted or has had a restoration or migration failure.

You have two options to troubleshoot application problems:

View orphaned applications. See “Viewing Orphaned Applications” on page 248

Orphaned applications are applications that exist in the Dimension Server, but are corrupted or missing in the object repository. Although orphaned applications exist in the Dimension

Server, they do not display in the Performance Management Architect Application Library user interface.

Run tests on applications that exist in the Application Library. See

“Running Application

Diagnostics” on page 248 .

The application diagnostics tool enables you to run tests on applications that are visible in the Application Library. Orphaned applications cannot be accessed in the application diagnostics tool.

Viewing the Application Deployment History

247

Viewing Orphaned Applications

Orphaned applications are applications that are missing from the Application Library but have not been deleted from the Performance Management Architect Dimension Server.

To view orphaned applications:

In the Application Library, select View, and then Orphaned Applications.

If orphaned applications are displayed, select a solution: Resolve or Delete.

You can use the “Choose Option” column to resolve the orphaned application problem or delete the application.

Resolve—Brings the application back into the Application Library. When the orphaned application is brought back, it is in a “Not Deployed” state. In some cases, this state can cause inconsistencies with the Dimension Server. However, because you can view the application, you can resolve any inconsistencies by running application diagnostics. See

“Running Application Diagnostics” on page 248 .

Delete—Removes the application from the Dimension Server.

Click Apply.

After resolving the problem, click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Running Application Diagnostics

You can run application diagnostics, and if a diagnostics test fails, Performance Management

Architect provides an automated solution or manual steps to resolve the problem.

Some tests are dependent on others. There are three test categories (listed in the order in which they run):

1. Performance Management Architect inconsistencies

2. Shared Services tests

3. Hyperion product tests

If a Performance Management Architect test fails, the other dependent tests are not run and show “Not Applicable”. To run a dependent test, you should deselect the dependent tests.

Note: You must have the EPMA Administrator security role to run application diagnostics on any Performance Management Architect application. For information on Performance

Management Architect security roles, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance

Management System User and Role Security Guide.

To diagnose application problems:

In the Application Library, right-click an application and select Diagnostics.

248

Managing Applications

The Application Diagnostics dialog box shows the application name and an overall status of the testing below the application name. For example, before you run selected tests, the status is “Not Tested.” After you run the tests, the status may show “Completed With Failure” if some tests failed, “Completed With Errors” if errors occurred, or “Completed

Successfully” if all tests passed.

Review the tests available to run in application diagnostics. See

“Application Tests” on page 249

Select the tests you want to run, and then click Run Selected Tests.

Only Performance Management Architect tests are selected by default. You can use the Select

All toggle to select or clear all tests.

The status column for each test displays “Passed,” “Failed,” or “Error” for each individual test. If it is unnecessary to run the test for the application, or the application type does not support the test, the status “Not Applicable” is displayed. Deselected tests display a status of

“Not Tested.”

If a test fails, select the failed test to display details and choose a solution. Then, click Apply.

For a failed test example, see “Example: Test Failed—Deployed but Missing from Shared

Services” on page 254 .

Click Yes to confirm the changes.

Click Close.

l l l

Application Tests

The following tests are available to run on applications:

Partially deleted—The application partially resides in the Dimension Server database and not in the object repository database. This problem can occur in cases where a database restoration was interrupted or a database has become corrupted. If this test fails, delete the application in Performance Management Architect and recreate the application.

This solution deletes the application from Performance Management Architect only. If this application has been deployed, manually delete the application from Shared Services and from the appropriate Hyperion product.

Inconsistent status—The status of the application is not consistent throughout the database.

This scenario can occur if the application status is not consistent in the object repository database. This problem can also occur in cases where a database restoration was interrupted or a database has become corrupted. To resolve the problem: Synchronize the status information in the database.

This solution synchronizes all the status information in the database to ensure consistency.

Incomplete pending deployment—The application is in an incomplete deployment state.

To resolve the problem:

Update the application to reflect a deployed state.

Troubleshooting Application Problems

249

l l l l m

This solution is available if the application has been successfully deployed at least once.

This reverts the state of the application to the previous successful deployed state— enabling you to redeploy.

Update the application to reflect a not deployed state.

This solution is available if the application has never been successfully deployed. This reverts the application to a not-deployed state—enabling you to deploy the application again.

Incomplete deployment—The application state reflects a partially completed deployment.

This scenario can occur when the application is in a “deploy pending” state in the Dimension

Server database and in a “deployed” state in the object repository database. This problem can also occur in cases where a database restoration was interrupted or a database has become corrupted. To resolve the problem: Redeploy the application.

This solution completes the deployment in the Dimension Server database and synchronizes the status between the Dimension Server and the object repository.

Partially deployed—The application is currently in a partially deployed state. This scenario can occur when the application is not deployed in the Dimension Server database and is deployed in the object repository database. This problem can also occur in cases where a database restoration was interrupted or a database has become corrupted. To resolve the problem:

Update the application to reflect a “not deployed” state.

m m

You should manually delete the application, if it exists, from any Hyperion products.

Delete the application from Performance Management Architect only.

You should manually delete the application, if it exists, from any Hyperion products.

Partially deploy pending—The application is currently in a partial deploy pending state.

This scenario is similar to the “incomplete deployment” scenario, yet there are further inconsistencies. If the application is in a partially deploy pending state, the pending deployment may not be the current deployment; therefore, it is deployment pending from a previously attempted deployment. This scenario can occur if there was a system failure when the application was deployed, followed by a correction to the application (a restoration to a deployed state), followed by another failure to deploy to the Hyperion product. Database corruption can also cause this problem. To resolve the problem:

Update the application to reflect a deployed state.

m m

This solution is available if the application has been successfully deployed at least once.

Update the application to reflect a “not deployed” state.

This solution is available if the application has never been successfully deployed.

Inconsistent deployment state (deploy pending vs. not deployed)—The application is in both a not deployed and deploy pending state. This scenario can occur when the application is not deployed in the Dimension Server database and in a “deploy pending” state in the object repository database. This problem can also occur in cases where a database restoration was interrupted or a database has become corrupted. To resolve the problem: Update the application to reflect a “not deployed” state.

250

Managing Applications

This solution reverts the application to its initial “not deployed” state.

Deploy pending—The application is currently in a “deploy pending” state. This problem can occur in instances where the Hyperion product that the application was deployed to became unresponsive. To resolve the problem:

Update the application to reflect a deployed state.

This solution is available if the application has been successfully deployed at least once.

This reverts the state of the application to the previous successful deployed state— enabling you to redeploy.

l l l m

Note: If an application has not been deployed, you can resolve the problem by returning the application to a “not deployed” state or you can promote the application to a “deployed state”.

Update the application to reflect a not deployed state.

This solution is available if the application has never been successfully deployed. This reverts the application to a not-deployed state—enabling you to deploy the application again.

Delete pending—The application is in a “delete pending” state. This scenario can only occur with a deployed application. Since the application is deployed, an application may be in a

“delete pending” state when you attempt to delete the application from the Hyperion product, such as Planning, and the product becomes unresponsive. To resolve the problem:

Delete from Performance Management Architect only.

m m

If the application resides in the Hyperion product, such as Financial Management or

Shared Services, manually delete it.

Update the application to reflect a deployed state.

This solution reverts the application to “deployed” and removes the “deploy pending” state information, enabling you to attempt to delete the application in the Hyperion product to which it was deployed.

Application reserved for delete—The application has been reserved for deletion by the user but has not been deleted. This scenario can occur if an application is in the update process from a “delete pending” state. For example, if an attempt to delete the application failed, and the Dimension Server database was not updated to reflect that the application is not in a delete pending state. This problem can occur in cases where a database restoration was interrupted or a database has become corrupted. To resolve the problem: Remove the deletion reservation for the user and reset the application as valid.

This solution allows you to delete the application again.

Deployed but missing from Shared Services—The application does not exist in Shared

Services but appears in Performance Management Architect. This problem can occur in cases where Shared Services stopped working. To resolve the problem:

Delete from Performance Management Architect only.

Use this solution only if you know that the application has not been deployed to a

Hyperion product and currently exists in that product.

Troubleshooting Application Problems

251

l l l l m m

Change status in Performance Management Architect to “Not Deployed” and perform necessary cleanup.

Changing the status of the application reverts the application to a “not deployed” state in Performance Management Architect, enabling you to redeploy the application.

Reregister the application with Shared Services.

This solution synchronizes the application in Performance Management Architect and

Shared Services.

Not deployed but in Shared Services—The application exists in Shared Services but shows as “not deployed” in Performance Management Architect. This problem can occur in cases where a database restoration was interrupted or a database has become corrupted. To resolve the problem:

Delete the application from Performance Management Architect.

m m

This solution deletes the application from Performance Management Architect only. If the application resides in Shared Services or in the Hyperion product, such as Financial

Management, manually delete it.

Manually delete the application from Shared Services.

To delete the application from Shared Services, log in to Shared Services, locate the project that the application was deployed to, and then delete the application.

Inconsistent deployment state (deployed vs. deploy pending)—The application is in both a “deployed” and a “deploy pending” state. This scenario can occur when the Dimension

Server database shows that the application is deployed and the object repository database shows that the application is deploy pending. This problem can also occur in cases where a database restoration was interrupted or a database has become corrupted. To resolve the problem: Update the application to reflect a deployed state.

This solution synchronizes the object repository database with the Dimension Server database and places the application into a deployed state.

Inconsistent deployment state (deployed vs. not deployed)—The application is in both a deployed and not deployed state. This problem can occur when the Dimension Server database shows that the application is deployed and the object repository database shows that the application is not deployed. This problem can also occur in cases where a database restoration was interrupted or a database has become corrupted. To resolve the problem:

Delete from Performance Management Architect only.

m m

Available if the application is registered in Shared Services. This solution deletes the application from Performance Management Architect. You should manually delete the application from Shared Services.

Update the application to reflect a not deployed state.

Available if the application has not been registered in Shared Services. This solution reverts the application to a not deployed state.

Invalid deployment information—The application is deployed to an invalid location. To resolve the problem is a two-step process:

252

Managing Applications

l l

1. Retrieve the instance name and cluster for potential deployed locations.

2. Select the correct deployment location and synchronize the deployment data with the new location.

Deployed but Classic Application in product—The application is deployed in the web application server and Dimension Server but is a Classic application in Planning or Financial

Management. (This test is not applicable for Essbase or Profitability and Cost Management applications.) To resolve the problem: m

Delete from Performance Management Architect only. After the application is deleted, you can run the Transform Classic to EPM Architect wizard to move the application to

Performance Management Architect. See “Transforming Classic Applications into

Performance Management Architect” on page 36

Manually delete the application from Planning or Financial Management.

Deployed status but not in product—The application has been deployed in Performance

Management Architect but has not been deployed to the appropriate product (This test is not applicable for Essbase applications.) To resolve the problem: m m

Change the status in Performance Management Architect to a “not deployed” status and clean up the application as necessary.

Retrieve the instance name, Web Server, cluster, data source (for Planning applications) and Shared Services ID to view the current deployment location.

If you run this test and the status displays “Error,” no solution is displayed. To resolve the problem, follow the instructions in the error message displayed in the Test Details area.

Not deployed status in EPMA, but in product—The application has not been deployed in

Performance Management Architect but appears in the product, such as Planning,

Profitability and Cost Management, or Financial Management. (This test is not applicable for Essbase applications.) To resolve the problem:

For Consolidation and Planning applications:

Delete from Performance Management Architect only. After the application is deleted, you can run the Transform Classic to EPM Architect wizard to move the application to

Performance Management Architect. See “Transforming Classic Applications into

Performance Management Architect” on page 36

Manually delete the application from Planning or Financial Management.

For Profitability applications:

Clean up the application in Profitability and Cost Management. (Select “Clean up application,” and then select the appropriate instance name for Profitability and Cost

Management.) If you choose to clean up the application it is deleted in Profitability and

Cost Management.

Troubleshooting Application Problems

253

Example: Test Failed—Deployed but Missing from Shared

Services

If the “Deployed but missing from Shared Services” test fails, the application exists in

Performance Management Architect but is missing from Shared Services. In this case, several solutions are displayed. For example, you can select the option to change the status in

Performance Management Architect to “Not Deployed” and perform the necessary cleanup, and then click Apply.

After you click Apply, a confirmation dialog box is displayed.

After you click Yes in the Warning dialog box, the “Deployed but missing from Shared Services” test displays the “Passed” status.

In some cases, even though this test has passed, another test may fail. Consider this scenario:

1. You run the application diagnostics tool on an application and the “Deployed but missing from Shared Services” fails.

2. You apply the “Change status in EPMA to 'Not Deployed' and perform necessary cleanup” solution.

The first test passes; however, now the “Not Deployed status in EPMA, but in product” test fails.

The application diagnostics tool automatically detects this new problem. In this case, the deployment status changed in Performance Management Architect when you applied the first solution. Now, the application is not deployed in Performance Management Architect, but still exists in the product.

254

Managing Applications

3. To correct this problem, you select the “Not Deployed status in EPMA, but in product” and select the appropriate solution.

All tests now pass.

Managing Planning Data Sources

Data sources link the relational database and the Essbase server. For Planning, each application must be associated with a data source. You can view summary details for a data source, including name, description, Unicode support, use, database type, name, server, and user name, and

Essbase server information.

Note:

If you use the EPM System Configurator to change the Essbase server, update the server name within Performance Management Architect.

To create and update data sources, see

“Entering Data Source Information” on page 255 . To

delete data sources, see

“Deleting Data Sources” on page 257

Note:

Each application must also be associated with an instance. You work with instances in the

EPM System Configurator. For more information, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise

Performance Management System Installation and Configuration Guide.

Starting the Data Source Wizard

You can create and update data sources for Planning applications using the Data Source wizard.

Data sources link the relational database and the Essbase Server. Ensure that the Essbase Server is running before completing this task.

To delete data sources, see “Deleting Data Sources” on page 257 .

To start the Data Source wizard:

In the Application Library, select Tools, then select Manage Planning Data Source.

Perform one action: l

To create a data source, select File, then New, then Data Source.

To update a data source, right-click the data source and select Edit.

Continue with

“Entering Data Source Information” on page 255

Entering Data Source Information

To enter data source information:

In the Data Source wizard navigation frame, click 1. Data Source Details.

Managing Planning Data Sources

255

To start the wizard, see

“Selecting the Database” on page 256 .

Enter the data source name.

After the data source is created, you cannot update the name.

Optional: Enter a description of the data source.

Optional: Select Supports Unicode to set the application to Unicode mode. Unicode-mode applications support multiple character sets.

Click Next, and continue with

Selecting the Database

The database must be connected, and must be a supported database type. For information on supported databases, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Management System Installation Start

Here guide.

Note: Ensure that Planning is registered with Shared Services and is deployed to an application server before configuring the database. If you are configuring a database for Planning and a previously configured database is detected, you are prompted to create a new database or reuse the existing database. If you are configuring a product upgrade, the fields on this page are read-only except for the password.

You can select an option to set the application to Unicode mode. Unicode-mode applications support multiple character sets, and Essbase uses UTF-8 encoding to interpret and store character text. Character-based artifacts in Unicode-mode applications, such as member and alias names, can include characters from different languages. For more information, see the

Oracle Essbase Database Administrator's Online Help.

To select the database:

In the Data Source wizard navigation frame, click 2. Database Details.

To start the wizard, see

“Configuring the Essbase Server” on page 257

If the Database Type field is activated, select MS SQL Server, Oracle, or IBM DB2.

Add or update the database configuration details:

Server: The server that hosts the database.

l l l l l

Port: A port number. For information about default ports, see the Oracle Hyperion

Enterprise Performance Management System Installation Start Here guide.

Database: The name of the database.

User Name: The database user name.

Password: The database password.

Optional: Click Test Connection to test the connection to the data source.

Click Next, and continue with

256

Managing Applications

Configuring the Essbase Server

To configure the Essbase Server:

In the Data Source wizard navigation frame, click 3. Essbase Server Details.

To start the wizard, see

Click Next and continue with “Viewing Summary Details” on page 257

Update the server details:

Essbase server name l l

You can list the Essbase server name along with the part number, for example, localhost:1423

Essbase user name l

Essbase password

Optional: Click Test Connection to test the connection to the Essbase server.

Viewing Summary Details

After viewing details, you can create or update the data source.

Note: After creating the data source, you can use Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance

Management System Configurator to update instances as necessary. For more information, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System

Installation and Configuration Guide.

To view summary details:

In the Data Source wizard navigation frame, click 4. Summary Details.

To start the wizard, see

Understanding Data Synchronization .................................................................. 261

If you are satisfied with the settings, click Finish.

To update any settings, click Back, make the changes, then return to this tab and click

Finish.

Deleting Data Sources

You can delete data sources that are not associated with applications.

To delete data sources:

In the Application Library, select Tools, then select Manage Planning Data Source.

Right-click a data source that is not associated with an application, then select Delete.

If the data source is associated with an application, this option is not available.

Managing Planning Data Sources

257

At the prompt, click OK to delete the data source.

258

Managing Applications

P a r t I I I

Managing Application Data Loads

In Managing Application Data Loads: l

Synchronizing Data

Managing Application Data Loads

259

260

Managing Application Data Loads

Synchronizing Data

In This Chapter

Synchronizing Data in the Application Library......................................................... 262

Synchronizing Data in the Data Synchronizer ......................................................... 262

Synchronizing Multiple Currency Planning Applications .............................................. 264

Using Hyperion Data Interface Tables as Sources .................................................... 265

Using External Files as Sources......................................................................... 267

Mapping Dimensions .................................................................................... 269

Working with Mappings.................................................................................. 279

Working with the Data Synchronizer.................................................................... 285

Troubleshooting Data Synchronizations................................................................ 290

Understanding Data Synchronization

Data synchronization enables you to synchronize and map data between Hyperion applications, interface tables, and external files.

Tasks enabled by the Data Synchronization module: l l l l l

Create and modify synchronizations

Select source and destination applications or files (external sources for source only)

Define mappings between sources and destinations

Validate synchronizations

Execute synchronizations

View logs of synchronization activities l

The Data Synchronization module enables you to create synchronizations between Financial

Management, Planning, Profitability and Cost Management, Essbase (ASO), and Essbase (BSO) as destinations, and the following sources: l l l

Financial Management

Planning

Profitability and Cost Management

Essbase ASO l

Understanding Data Synchronization

261

l l l

Essbase BSO

External source (flat file)

Interface table

Performance Management Architect enables you to synchronize data in three locations: l l

Application Library (

“Synchronizing Data in the Application Library” on page 262

)

Data Flow (

“Viewing the Data Flow” on page 228

)

Data Synchronizer (

“Synchronizing Data in the Data Synchronizer” on page 262 )

Synchronizing Data in the Application Library

You can synchronize applications in the Application Library if two applications are selected and your user name is assigned the Create Integrations access role. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise

Performance Management System User and Role Security Guide.

To synchronize data in the Application Library:

Select Navigate, Administer, Application Library.

Select the source application.

Press [Ctrl] and select the destination application.

Right-click and select Synchronize.

Note: If you are synchronizing a Planning application, you are prompted to select the plan type.

The dimension mapping is displayed. See “Mapping Dimensions” on page 269

Synchronizing Data in the Data Synchronizer

You can synchronize applications in the Data Synchronizer.

To synchronize data in the Data Synchronizer:

Select Navigate, Administer, Data Synchronization.

Select File, New, Synchronization.

The New Synchronization wizard is displayed.

Select Hyperion Application, and click Next.

Select the source application, and click Next.

Perform an action: l

If you synchronize two Financial Management applications, click Finish and omit steps

6–8.

262

Synchronizing Data

If you synchronize a Planning source or destination application, click Next.

The Select Plan Types dialog box is displayed.

Data can be shared between plan types. For example, the Revenue plan may include sales detail accounts that rollup into a Total Product Sales account. You can set up the

P & L plan to include the Total Product Sales account, and omit the sales detail accounts.

Thus, you can bring the data value for Total Product Sales into your P & L plan, without the account detail and make the database for your P & L plan smaller and more efficient.

For information on synchronizing multiple currency Planning applications, see

“Synchronizing Multiple Currency Planning Applications” on page 264

Select a plan type and click Finish.

The Dimension Mapping is displayed.

Synchronizing Data in the Data Synchronizer

263

Click .

The Save Data Synchronization dialog box is displayed.

Enter a Name and Description and click OK.

After you save the synchronization, you can map dimensions. See

“Mapping Dimensions” on page 269

Synchronizing Multiple Currency Planning Applications

You can synchronize multiple currency Planning applications.

For example, you may want to link a Financial Management Value (source) to HSP_Rates

(destination). For every row that Financial Management generates, two rows are returned to

Planning.

In this instance, the Financial Management row

Account,Entity,Period,Scenario,Year,Value"NetProfit","UnitedStates.Massachusetts","Janua ry","Actual","2006","USD",10.0

is transformed into

264

Synchronizing Data

Account,Entity,Period,Scenario,Year,Currency,

HSP_Rates"NetProfit","UnitedStates.Massachusetts","January","Actual","2006",”Local”,"HSP

_InputValue",10.

0"NetProfit","UnitedStates.Massachusetts","January","Actual","2006",”Local”,"HSP_InputCu rrency",USD

The reverse scenario works similarly. If you synchronize from Planning to Consolidation applications and you map HSP_Rates to Consolidation Value, the two rows are merged into one row (reverse of the example). Otherwise, the rows are unchanged, and every row from the source is sent to the destination (after metadata and data translation).

Note: The generation of the new rows or merging of the original rows occurs immediately, before data is sent to the destination. All metadata and data transformations occur before the auto-generation or merging of the rows.

To synchronize multi-currency applications, right-click the HSP_Rates dimension and select Generate Currency Members.

Note: The Generate Currency Members option is available when you are synchronizing from

Financial Management to Planning. For example, you can right-click to map the Value dimension in a Consolidation application to the HSP_Rates dimension in a Planning application. If your synchronization is between two Planning applications, this option is not available.

If you synchronize an application with a multi-currency Planning application and the HSP_Rates dimension is linked, the HSP_Rates dimension the right-click menu displays “Generate

Currency Members.”

Note: Synchronizing multi-currency applications is available for one-to-one mappings and not available if HSP_Rates is linked to multiple dimensions.

When mapping Financial Management to Planning, it is expected that the Value dimension in

Financial Management be mapped to HSP_Rates in Planning and a Default member “Local” should be assigned to the Currency dimension.

Using Hyperion Data Interface Tables as Sources

Interface tables enable you to bring information into the Hyperion schema through database operations (SQL loads or leveraging Hyperion data integration products). After information is stored in interface tables, the standard mapping and load mechanisms provided within data synchronization can be used to bring the information into the respective Hyperion product.

Interface tables are useful in situations where you do not want to pre-format text files for flat file loads and want the power and flexibility of a relational database for staging information into

Using Hyperion Data Interface Tables as Sources

265

the Hyperion product suite. The following sections provide additional detail on using data interface tables as sources: l

“Defining Interface Areas” on page 266

“Creating Synchronizations” on page 267

Defining Interface Areas

Before you create synchronizations using an interface area as the source, you must create

interface data sources. See “Configuring Interface Data Sources” on page 57

To create interface areas:

Select File, New, Data Interface Area Definition.

Select the interface table source, database table that contains the data to import, and the column that contains the data values for each row, and click Next.

Define the dimension by selecting a column on the left and entering the dimension name on the right.

Then, click to add more columns.

For example, if the column name is SCENARIO_DIMENSION_NAME, you can change the name displayed to “Scenario.”

Tip: Click to remove a column.

Click Next.

Enter the interface table name, optional description, and then click Finish.

266

Synchronizing Data

Creating Synchronizations

After you create an interface area, you can create a synchronization that uses an interface table as the source.

Note: You must define the interface table before creating a synchronization using an interface table as the source. See

“Defining Interface Areas” on page 266

To create synchronizations:

From the Data Synchronizer, select File, New, Synchronization.

Select Hyperion Data Interface Area.

Click Next.

Select a source, and then click Next.

Select a destination application, and then click Next.

If the destination application is a Planning application, select the plan type.

Click Finish.

Click .

The Save Data Synchronization dialog box is displayed.

Enter a Name and Description and click OK.

Using External Files as Sources

You can define external files to use as sources in data synchronizations. Data Synchronization supports a delimited file with data in the last column, and does not support fixed length fields.

You must enter all mapping rules and filters pertaining to the flat file source.

Using External Files as Sources

267

Before you create a synchronization that uses an external file as the source, you must define the external file.

To define external files:

Select File, New, External File Definition.

The External File Mapping Wizard is displayed.

Perform all actions: l l

Select the Delimiter—the character that separates the fields of external files. You can use a comma ( , ), semicolon ( ; ), tab, or space as the file delimiter. You can also specify a delimiter using the “Other” field.

Select the Quote character—the character that identifies text values. For example, if the quote character is " (double quotation mark), the parser expects all members to be enclosed in double quotation marks. If the parser finds text values that are not enclosed in the double quotation marks the parser returns an error.

Note: If the delimiter appears in the member name or data value, you must specify the quote character. The delimiter and quote character cannot be the same.

Enter the number of Header lines to skip. For example, an external file may have headings such as Name, Address, City, State, and ZipCode to skip.

Enter the Line number of dimension fields. The following example shows an external file where the total number of header lines to skip is 4 and the line number with dimension names is line 3.

#first Row of the header

#Second Row of the header

Account,Time,Data

#fourth Row of the header

Sales,FY10,34.123

Click Next.

Perform an action to preview a file: l

Click , click Browse, select the file, and click Upload.

Select Specify a file URL to preview and enter a URL; for example, file:///c:/data/ previewfile.csv

Because you specify the format of the external file, you are not constrained to a rigid format.

However, remember the following rules: l l

Every line must contain the same number of columns.

Every line must have a member value for each dimension (no blank values).

The last column of every line is the value for the intersection (text or numeric value).

Click Preview Sample File.

268

Synchronizing Data

When you preview a file, the options specified in the wizard are applied so you can see how the options affect the data.

Click Next.

Enter the number of dimensions in the file, and then click Update.

Enter the field label, which corresponds to the dimensions in the target, and then click Next.

Enter the external file name, optionally enter a description, and then click Finish.

Mapping Dimensions

After you create a synchronization, you must map the dimensions that comprise each source and destination so that the synchronization can recognize all relevant elements. When defining a detailed synchronization, you can create links, leverage a predefined mapping table, or assign default values to dimensions that are not required to be mapped.

To map dimensions:

If you created a new synchronization, the Dimension Mapping is automatically displayed. Otherwise, to access the Dimension Mapping, in the Data Synchronizer, right-click a synchronization and click Edit.

The Dimension Mapping is displayed.

Mapping Dimensions

269

You can use the Dimension Mapping to create, modify, or delete links between source and destination dimensions. Data Synchronization automatically links common dimensions between applications. You can drag and drop to create or change links between source and destination dimensions dynamically.

Create a link between a source and destination dimension by performing an action: l

Drag the dimensions that you want to map. For example, you can drag the Accounts dimension of the source application to the Accounts dimension of the destination application.

Right-click the source dimension, and select Start New Link. Right-click the destination dimension, and select End Link.

Note: You can create one-to-one, one-to-many, or many-to-one relationships between source and destination dimensions.

A link can be static or you can apply a mapping table to a link to further define the relationship between the two dimensions. See

“Creating Mapping Tables in the Dimension

Mapping” on page 280

The line types represent relationships between the source and destination dimensions: l

Solid line—No mapping table is assigned. A solid line is valid for one-to-one mappings and one-to-many mappings.

270

Synchronizing Data

Dotted line—A mapping table is associated with the relationship. See

“Creating

Mapping Tables in the Dimension Mapping” on page 280

The links are interactive, in that you can select a link to see a summary of the relationship defined between the linked dimensions. The summary includes: l l l l

Source Dimension

Destination Dimension

Relationship Type (member relationship—for example, one-to-one or mapping table defined)

Filter Summary l

Default Member Selection

Optional: To remove a link, right-click a link and select Remove Link.

After you define mappings you can optionally filter dimensions, define mappings, and assign default members. Then, when finished, you must save the synchronization. See

“Filtering

Dimensions” on page 271 ,

“Creating Mapping Tables in the Dimension Mapping” on page

280 ,

“Assigning Default Members” on page 278

, and

“Saving Synchronizations” on page 279

Filtering Dimensions

When you create relationships between dimensions, you can also restrict the set of members available from the source application. The filter is applied at synchronization execution against the source dimension members. Some instances require filtering. For example if you move data from Entity_1 in the source to Entity_2 in the destination with a January to February Period mapping, a filter on the source is required to extract only from Period—January; otherwise, results may be unpredictable.

Filtering constraints: l l

Filters are not supported for flat files.

Function filters are not supported for interface tables; however, EQUAL and LIKE are supported.

After you create and save a filter, it is available from the Data Synchronization tab. You can share the filter across different data synchronization objects.

To filter dimensions:

Right-click a dimension, and select Create Filter.

The Filter Criteria box is displayed.

Select a filter. (EQUAL, LIKE, or FUNCTION).

Note:

You can create multiple filter selections, by delimiting each entry with a semicolon; for example, Actual; Budget.

Mapping Dimensions

271

l l

EQUAL—any valid member, such as Actual for the Scenario dimension.

LIKE—use wild cards in the filter:

* for multiple characters (Only use * wildcard characters at the end of a string) m

? for single character m

For example:

Actua? or Act* returns Actual

J?? or J* returns Jan, Jun, and Jul l

FUNCTION—use any valid member selection function, such as BottomOfHierarchy() retrieves the base level members for the dimension. See

Appendix C, “Member Query

Functions Used by the Data Synchronizer” for a list of functions that Performance

Management Architect supports.

Enter the member to filter by.

The Filter Criteria box is displayed.

Select multiple members to filter by and click . Then, click OK.

Note: You can insert multiple members, separated by a semi-colon (;). For example,

“Descendents(NetProfit);Children(Sales);NoMember”.

Tip: If you cannot find a member, you can search for members in the member selector.

Click OK.

When a filter is applied in the dimension mapping, a funnel is displayed next to the dimension.

Adding Reusable Filters

There are several rules for reusable filters: l l l l

You can add reusable filters to existing filter criteria on a source dimension. Existing filter criteria is combined with reusable filter criteria.

Deleting the dimension associated with a reusable filter object invalidates the object, but it is not deleted.

If you edit a reusable filter object, the changes are applied to all instances of the filter that you included in Data Synchronization objects.

If you edit the reusable filter criteria associated with a source dimension, the change only applies locally and does not impact the reusable filter object.

To create a reusable dimension filter:

Select Navigate, Administer, Data Synchronization.

When the Data Synchronizer tab is displayed, select File, New, Filter Definition.

272

Synchronizing Data

The Filter Definition Wizard is displayed.

For the Filter Definition, do the following tasks: a. Select the application for which you want to create the reusable filter.

b. Select the dimension type.

c. Select the dimension for which you want to create the reusable filter.

Note: You can select a shared dimension if you select the shared library from the

Application drop-down list.

d. Select the filter type (EQUAL, LIKE, or FUNCTION).

Note: You can create multiple filter selections, by delimiting each entry with a semicolon; for example, Actual; Budget.

l l l

EQUAL—any valid member, such as Actual for the Scenario dimension.

LIKE—use wild cards in the filter:

* for multiple characters (Only use * wildcard characters at the end of a string) m

? for single character m

For example:

Actua?

Act*

returns

Actual

J??

returns

Jan

Jun

, and

Jul

FUNCTION—use any valid member selection function, such as

BottomOfHierarchy() retrieves the base level members for the dimension. See

Appendix C, “Member Query Functions Used by the Data Synchronizer” for a list

of functions that Performance Management Architect supports.

e. In Filter Criteria, enter the member to filter by or click .

The Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed.

Select multiple members to filter by and click . Then, click OK.

Note: You can insert multiple members, separated by a semi-colon (;). For example,

“Descendents(NetProfit);Children(Sales);NoMember”.

Tip: If you cannot find a member, you can search for members in the member selector.

See

“Searching for Members Using the Member Selector” on page 131 .

Click Next.

For the Filter Properties, do the following tasks: a. Enter a name for the reusable filter.

Mapping Dimensions

273

b. Enter a description of the reusable filter.

Click Finish.

After you create the reusable filter, an icon of it is displayed on the Data Synchronizer tab.

A summary of the filter's properties (such as the filter name, description, and creator, as well as the application and dimension for which the filter was created) is displayed below the icon.

Editing a Reusable Dimension Filter

You can edit a reusable dimension filter from within the Data Synchronizer tab. You use the

Filter Definition Wizard to create and edit reusable filters. When you make changes to a filter, the changes affect every dimension to which the filter is applied.

To edit a reusable dimension filter:

Select Navigate, Administer, Data Synchronization.

When the Data Synchronizer tab is displayed, right-click the reusable filter you want to edit, and select

Edit.

The Filter Definition Wizard is displayed.

Make changes to the filter definition and properties. See step 3 on page 273

through

step 6 on page

274

Click Finish.

Inserting a Reusable Dimension Filter

After you create a reusable dimension filter, you can insert it into a source dimension from within

Dimension Mapping.

To insert a reusable dimension filter:

The Dimension Mapping is displayed.

Note: If you insert the filter definition within the data sync definition, you can edit only the

Filter Criteria field.

Right-click a source dimension, and select Insert Filter Definition to insert a reusable dimension filter for the dimension.

Note: If the dimension has a reusable filter associated with it, the Add Filter menu is replaced with an Edit Filter menu.

In Insert Filter Definition, do either of these tasks:

274

Synchronizing Data

To create a new filter definition to insert, do these tasks:.

a. Click Create Filter Definition.

b. Use the Filter Definition Wizard to create the filter. See “Filtering Dimensions” on page 271 .

After you create the filter, it displays in the Insert Filter Definition dialog.

c. Select the new filter definition in the Insert Filter Definition dialog.

To insert an existing filter definition, select it.

Click OK.

When a filter is applied in the dimension mapping, a funnel is displayed next to the dimension name.

Copying a Reusable Dimension Filter

After you create a reusable dimension filter, an icon of the filter is displayed on the Data

Synchronizer tab. From the Data Synchronizer tab, you can edit, delete, and copy the reusable filter.

To copy a reusable dimension filter:

Select Navigate, Administer, Data Synchronization.

When the Data Synchronizer tab is displayed, right-click the reusable filter you want to copy, and select

Duplicate.

The Duplicate dialog is displayed.

Enter a name and an optional description for the filter, and click OK.

A copy of the filter is displayed on the Data Synchronizer tab.

Removing a Reusable Dimension Filter

You can remove a reusable filter from a dimension with which it is associated in Dimension

Mapping. When you remove a reusable filter, it is removed only from the dimension with which you remove it; it is not removed from other dimensions with which it is associated. If you want to remove a filter from all of the dimensions with it is associated, you need to delete the filter.

See

“Deleting a Reusable Dimension Filter” on page 276 .

To remove a reusable dimension filter:

The Dimension Mapping is displayed.

Right-click the dimension from which you want to remove the filter, and select Remove Filter.

Mapping Dimensions

275

If there are reusable filters associated with the dimension, the Remove Filter dialog box displayed; it lists the filters associated with the dimension.

Select one or more filters to remove, and click OK.

The selected filters are removed from the dimension.

To remove all of the associated reusable filters from a dimension, right click on the dimension and select

Remove All Filters.

If any or all filters are removed, the funnel icon that represents a filter is removed from the dimension name.

Deleting a Reusable Dimension Filter

You can delete a reusable dimension filter from the Data Synchronizer tab. When you delete a reusable dimension filter, it is deleted from all of the Source Dimension Mapping with which it is associated.

You cannot delete a filter definition if it is associated with source dimensions in Dimension

Mapping. If you try to do this, you receive the error: "Unable to delete the definition. It is referenced by one of the Data synchronization definitions." Before deleting any filter definition, you must remove its reference from other data sync definitions where it is used. If there is no reference, it deletes successfully.

To delete a reusable dimension filter:

Select Navigate, Administer, Data Synchronization.

When the Data Synchronizer tab is displayed, right-click the reusable filter you want to delete, and select Delete.

Click Yes to confirm you want to delete the filter or No to return to the Data Synchronizer tab.

After you delete a filter, its icon is removed from the Data Synchronizer tab.

Adding and Editing Filter Criteria

You can add and edit filter criteria for reusable dimension filters.

To add or edit filter criteria:

The Dimension Mapping is displayed.

Right-click a dimension, and do either of these tasks, depending on whether you want to add or edit filter criteria:

To add filter criteria, select Add Filter Criteria.

To edit filter criteria, select Edit Filter Criteria.

276

Synchronizing Data

The Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed.

Select a filter. (EQUAL, LIKE, or FUNCTION).

Note: You can create multiple filter selections, by delimiting each entry with a semicolon; for example, Actual; Budget.

l l l

EQUAL—any valid member, such as Actual for the Scenario dimension.

LIKE—use wild cards in the filter:

* for multiple characters (Only use * wildcard characters at the end of a string) m

? for single character m

For example:

Actua?

Act*

returns

Actual

J??

returns

Jan

Jun

, and

Jul

FUNCTION—use any valid member selection function, such as BottomOfHierarchy() retrieves the base level members for the dimension. See

Appendix C, “Member Query

Functions Used by the Data Synchronizer” for a list of functions that Performance

Management Architect supports.

Enter the member to filter by or click .

The Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed.

Select multiple members to filter by and click . Then, click OK.

Note: You can insert multiple members, separated by a semi-colon (;). For example,

“Descendents(NetProfit);Children(Sales);NoMember”.

Tip: If you cannot find a member, you can search for members in the member selector. See

“Searching for Members Using the Member Selector” on page 131 .

Click OK.

When a filter is applied in the dimension mapping, a funnel is displayed next to the dimension name.

Note: You can use Save As to save a copy of the reusable filter.

Mapping Dimensions

277

Assigning Default Members

If a relationship is not defined for a dimension on the destination application, one member needs to be identified to complete the linking process. This member is used to complete each data point intersection at synchronization execution time.

To assign default members:

In the Destination application in which you want to assign a default member, right-click a dimension that has not been mapped.

Select Assign Default Member.

The Pick Member dialog box is displayed.

Select the member to assign as the default, and click OK.

A green check mark is displayed next to the dimension of the default member.

Note: To remove a default member, right-click the dimension that contains the default member, and select Remove Default Member. If you cannot find a member, you can search for members in the Pick Member dialog box. For information on searching

for members, see “Searching for Members Using the Member Selector” on page

131 .

Inserting Mapping Tables

Mapping tables are mappings that you can reuse in data synchronizations. If you have created mapping tables, you can insert them into a synchronization. For information on creating mapping tables, see

“Working with Mappings” on page 279 .

To insert mapping tables:

Click .

The Insert Mapping Table dialog box is displayed.

Select a mapping table to insert, and click OK.

When a mapping table is used in a dimension mapping, the link is a dotted line.

278

Synchronizing Data

Editing Mappings

If you are editing an existing mapping table, the Mapping Table Designer displays the source application, destination application, and the mapped dimensions relationship.

To edit mappings:

Right-click a mapping (dotted line link).

Select Edit Mapping.

The Mapping Table Designer is displayed.

Edit the mapping. Click Next to move through the screens, and click Finish.

Saving Synchronizations

You must save synchronizations before validating and executing them.

To save a synchronization:

In the Dimension Mapping, click .

The Save Data Synchronization dialog box is displayed.

Enter the name and description, and click OK.

Working with Mappings

You can use mapping tables to define relationships between dimensions. Mappings are used in scenarios where you can define the mapping once and reuse it in multiple synchronizations.

When you create mapping tables, you can select multiple source application dimensions, but only one destination application dimension. The relationship displayed signifies that source dimension(s) members are used as members in the destination dimension. You can define oneto-one, one-to-many, and many-to-one relationships. Data synchronization leverages: l

Mapping tables, to perform simple or complex transformations, and

A transformation engine to map from external sources or from application to application.

You use the Mapping Table Designer to create mapping tables. See

“Creating Mapping Tables in the Dimension Mapping” on page 280 and

“Creating Mapping Tables in the Data

Synchronizer” on page 283 .

You can edit mapping tables in the Data Synchronizer, see “Editing Mapping Tables” on page

287 .

Working with Mappings

279

Creating Mapping Tables in the Dimension Mapping

The following procedure provides step-by-step information on defining mappings while linking dimensions in the Dimension Mapping. The source and destination applications are automatically selected, so the first screen of the Mapping Table Designer is skipped.

To create a mapping table while mapping dimensions:

In the Dimension Mapping, right-click a link, and select Define Mapping.

The Mapping Table Designer (Map Data) is displayed.

Each row represents a mapping rule between the source and destination application dimensions. You double-click a cell to enter values directly into the cells or click a cell and select Pick Member to select a member.

When entering source values directly into a cell, you can use symbols as wild cards and indicators.

Table 18

Source Dimension Rule Syntax

Symbol Usage

* Matches on one or more characters. For example, Acc* matches Acc100, Acc101, and so on.

Matches on one character. For example, Acc??? matches Acc100 but not Acc1000.

Matches on a range of characters. For example, Acc100~Acc200 matches on Acc100, Acc101, and so on up to Acc200.

If both fields are numeric, the range is evaluated numerically. If either field is alphanumeric, the range is evaluated lexicographically.

Indicates that the next character is interpreted literally. For example, Acc\* matches only and precisely Acc*.

Indicates a space.

Required—for leading and trailing spaces.

Optional—for spaces displayed in the middle of inputs.

{NULL} Matches on an empty field.

Destination dimensions use different rule syntax. The source rule syntax defines which intersections match the rule. When a row is passed through the translation engine, each source rule is checked to see if the member fits within the rules defined. If a match is found, the destination rule is applied to that member. The destination rules define the modifications to be made to the members that match the source rules. The rule syntax in destination dimensions accepts the following entries: l l

Member names

Source member names in combination with literal strings

Contents of wild cards l

280

Synchronizing Data

Table 19 Destination Dimension Rule Syntax

Symbol Usage

[]

[field#]

Destination values which can be concatenated.

Transfer value of the indicated input field in its entirety. An input field is identified by its sequence number based on the order of definition for the input field. For example, [1] indicates that the value of the first input is the output. FY[1]

[2] indicates that the output value is the string FY concatenated with the value of input 1 and the value of input 2, so if input 1 is Years, and input 2 is Months, the result is FYYearMonths.

[field#,* ] The value of * from the input field. For example, if Output1 is defined as [1,*] and Input1 is defined as 123*, if Input1

= 123456, Output1 = 456.

[field#,*#] Required format if the referenced * is not the first instance of * in the input.

# is the position of the * in the input field.

[1, *1] is equivalent to [1, *].

For example, if Input3 = *123* and Output1 = abc[3, *2], Input3 = 91234 and Output1 = abc4.

[field#,?] The value of ? from the input field. For example, if Output1 is defined as [1,?] and Input1 is defined as 123?, if Input1

= 123456, Output1 = 4.

[field#,?#] Required format if the referenced ? is not the first one in the input.

# is the position of the ? in the input field.

[2, ?1] is equivalent to [2, ?].

For example, if Input1 = 123?, Input2 = 4??, and Output1 = abcd[2, ?2] and Input1 = 1237, and Input2 = 498,

Output1 = abcd8.

{NULL}

Indicator that the next character is interpreted literally. A \ is necessary when the [ or ] character is used in an output.

In an output, the use of \ within a [] definition is not allowed.

A space indicator.

Required—for leading and trailing spaces.

Optional—for spaces displayed in the middle of inputs.

Value used to output an empty field.

Perform an action: l l

For the source, double-click a cell, and enter a rule. Use the syntax described in

Table 18,

“Source Dimension Rule Syntax,” on page 280

. (You can also select a cell and select Pick

Member, then in the Pick Member dialog box, select a member, and click OK.) For

information on searching for members in the Pick Member dialog box, see “Searching for Members Using the Member Selector” on page 131

For the destination, double-click a cell and enter a rule. Use the syntax described in

Table 19, “Destination Dimension Rule Syntax,” on page 281

. (You can also select a cell and select Pick Member, then in the Pick Member dialog box, select a member, and click

OK.)

Working with Mappings

281

If you select Pick Member, the member selector enables you to view and select members within a dimension. You can expand and collapse members within a dimension using the

[+] and [-].

If you cannot find a member, you can search for members in the member selector Pick

Member dialog box. See

“Searching for Members Using the Member Selector” on page

131 .

If necessary, modify the mapping: l l l l

To insert a row at the end of the table, click Add.

To copy a row, select a row, and click Duplicate.

Duplicate rows are inserted at the end of the table.

To delete a row, select multiple rows, and click Remove.

To move rows up or down in the table, select the rows, and click Move Up or Move

Down.

The rules are processed in order. When a match occurs, the rule is applied to the member and processing completes (no other rules are applied to that member). In some cases, members may match multiple rules so you can control the order of the rules.

To edit a cell, double-click the cell or press [F2].

Tip: You can navigate the table using the [Tab] key.

Click Next to validate the mapping tables.

The Validate Mappings screen contains a table with mapping rules in each row. Only rule syntax, not member information is validated. Each rule is marked as passed or failed.

Click Validate.

Tip: You can click View All to view all rules or View Exceptions Only to view only rules that do not pass validation. If View All is selected, the failed rule is highlighted in red.

If a rule did not pass validation, click Back to return to the Map Data page, fix the errors, and click

Next to re-validate.

Click Next.

The Mapping Properties screen is displayed, enabling you to provide a name and description for the mapping table. It is helpful to provide a prefix, such as MAP_.

Enter a name and description, and click Finish.

There are no restrictions for names and descriptions.

A dotted line indicates that a mapping is defined.

The mapping also displays in the Data Synchronizer. See “Working with the Data

Synchronizer” on page 285 .

282

Synchronizing Data

Creating Mapping Tables in the Data Synchronizer

The following procedure provides step-by-step information on defining mapping tables in the

Data Synchronizer, including selecting the source and destination applications.

Before you create a mapping table, you must create at least one application.

To create mapping tables in the Data Synchronizer:

Select File, New, Mapping Table.

The Mapping Table Designer is displayed.

Click to select a source application.

The Source Application dialog box is displayed.

Select a Source Application. If the application is a Planning application, select the Plan Type. Then, click OK.

Click to select a destination application.

Select a Destination Application. If the application is a Planning application, select the Plan Type.

Then, click OK.

The dimensions change depending on the plan type.

Choose the Source and Destination Dimensions, and click Next.

Perform an action: l l

For the source, double-click a cell, and enter a rule. Use the syntax described in

Table 18,

“Source Dimension Rule Syntax,” on page 280

. (You can also select a cell and select Pick

Member, then in the Pick Member dialog box, select a member, and click OK.)

For the destination, double-click a cell and enter a rule. Use the syntax described in

Table 19, “Destination Dimension Rule Syntax,” on page 281

. (You can also select a cell and select Pick Member, then in the Pick Member dialog box, select a member, and click

OK.)

If you select Pick Member, the member selector enables you to view and select members within a dimension. You can expand and collapse members within a dimension using the

[+] and [-].

If you cannot find a member, you can search for members in the member selector. See

“Searching for Members Using the Member Selector” on page 131 .

If necessary, modify the mapping: l l

To insert a row at the end of the table, click Add.

To copy a row, select a row, and click Duplicate.

Duplicate rows are inserted at the end of the table.

To delete a row, select multiple rows, and click Remove.

Working with Mappings

283

l l

To move rows up or down in the table, select the rows, and click Move Up or Move

Down.

To edit a cell, double-click the cell or press [F2].

Tip:

You can navigate the table using the [Tab] key.

Click Next to validate the mapping tables.

The Validate Mappings screen contains a table with mapping rules in each row. Only rule syntax, not member information is validated. Each rule is marked as passed or failed.

Click Validate.

Tip: You can click View All to view all rules or View Exceptions Only to view only rules that do not pass validation.

If a rule did not pass validation, click Back to return to the Map Data page, fix the errors, and click

Next to re-validate.

Click Next.

The Mapping Properties screen is displayed, enabling you to provide a name and description for the mapping table. It is helpful to provide a prefix, such as MAP_.

Enter a name and description, and click Finish.

You can view all defined mapping tables in the Data Synchronizer. See

“Working with the

Data Synchronizer” on page 285

284

Synchronizing Data

Working with the Data Synchronizer

To access data synchronizations and mapping tables, click Navigate, Administer, Data

Synchronization.

l l l l l

Navigating the Data Synchronizer

The Data Synchronizer identifies all synchronizations and mapping tables. If you select a synchronization, the lower pane displays the following information:

Summary—Name, date created, date last modified, and the user that created the synchronization

Description—The information that you provided in the Description text box when you created a new synchronization

Properties—The status and the date last synchronized

Applications—The source and destination applications in the synchronization

Mapping Tables—The mapping tables used in the synchronization

If you select a mapping table, the lower pane displays the following information:

Working with the Data Synchronizer

285

l l l l l

Summary—Name, date created, date last modified, and the user that created the synchronization

Description—The information that you provided in the Description text box when you created the mapping table

Source Dimensions—The source dimensions used in the mapping table

Destination Dimensions—The destination dimensions used in the mapping table

Synchronizations—The synchronizations that use the mapping table

Changing the Data Synchronizer View

To change the Data Synchronization view:

Select View, Details.

Viewing details shows the synchronization name, description, type, the user that created the synchronization, and the date created.

To sort by a column, click the column heading. For example, if you want to sort by name, click Name.

To move a column, click and drag the column heading to a new location.

To change the view to icon view, click View, Icons.

Filtering Synchronizations

You use filters to hide synchronizations or mappings from view.

To create data synchronization filters:

Select View, Filter.

Select the types that you want to view.

Select the status that you want to view, for example, you may want to see synchronizations that are out of sync.

Click OK.

286

Synchronizing Data

Editing Synchronizations

To edit synchronizations:

Right-click a synchronization, and select Edit.

The Dimension Mapping is displayed.

As necessary, modify the mappings and click .

Editing Mapping Tables

To edit mapping tables:

Double-click a mapping or right-click a mapping and select Edit.

The Mapping Table Designer is displayed.

Modify the values to be mapped, then click Next.

Validate the mappings, then click Next.

Modify the mapping properties, then click Finish.

Duplicating Synchronizations and Mappings

To duplicate synchronizations and mappings:

In the Data Synchronization module, right-click a synchronization or mapping, and select Duplicate.

If you duplicate a synchronization and are using a mapping table, the mapping table is used for the original and duplicated synchronization.

In the Duplicate dialog box, enter the name and description, then click OK.

Deleting Synchronizations and Mappings

To delete synchronizations and mappings:

In the Data Synchronization module, right-click a synchronization or mapping, and select Delete.

Note: If a mapping table, external file definition, or data interface table definition is referenced by the data synchronization, it cannot be deleted.

If necessary, select View, Refresh.

The synchronization or mapping is removed.

Working with the Data Synchronizer

287

Validating and Executing Synchronizations

When you execute a synchronization, data is retrieved from the source application, transformed according to mapping rules, and pushed to the destination application where it is committed to the application. When you validate a synchronization, the same process is followed but the data is not committed to the destination application. This enables the source and destination to process the request and resulting data to generate errors that might occur without writing the data. You can quickly identify if issues exist with the synchronization.

If your destination is an Essbase application, the Data Synchronizer uses the default values for: l l abortOnError—Determines whether this operation should be aborted if there is error. Valid values are true or false.

DryRun—Determines whether it is a dry run with no actual data update. Valid values are true or false.

delimiter—Indicates the delimiter for the data stream.

Note:

If a shared location is used for an external file, this data file needs to be accessible by the server validating or executing the synchronization.

To validate and execute synchronizations:

Perform an action:

To validate a synchronization: l

In the Data Synchronizer, right-click a synchronization, and select Validate

Synchronization.

In the Dimension Mapping, click .

To execute a synchronization: l

In the Data Synchronizer, right-click a synchronization, and select Execute

Synchronization.

In the Dimension Mapping, click

Select the Operator and type the Value.

You should select the operator and enter a value if the values from the source are on a different scale than the destination. You can select Multiply, Divide, Add, or Subtract and then enter a numeric value to apply with the operator. For example, if you select the operator

* (Multiply) and enter the value, 10, each data value sent to the destination will be multiplied by 10.

Select the data load option Mode.

Data Load Options for Planning and Essbase ASO and BSO applications are: l

Add—Adds the values in the loaded data. For example, consider that the source data for “Account A” has a value of 60, and the target data for “Account A” contains a value

288

Synchronizing Data

l l of 100. After the data synchronization with “Add” selected, the target application data for “Account A” displays a value of 160.

Subtract—Subtracts the values in the loaded data. For example, consider that the source data for “Account A” has a value of 60, and the target data for “Account A” contains a value of 100. After the data synchronization with “Subtract” selected, the target application data for “Account A” displays a value of 40.

Overwrite—Overwrites the data in the target application with the last loaded value from the source data. For example, consider that there are two rows in the source data for

“Account 1010.” The first row is the oldest and has a value of 500.00. The second row was loaded last and has a value of 1100. After the data synchronization, the data is overwritten with the last loaded value: 1100.

Note: In Essbase (ASO) synchronizations, the “Overwrite” load option differs in that it accumulates the duplicate records source data, and then overwrites the target application data.

Data Load Options for Financial Management applications are: l l l l

Merge—Merges the data in the target application with the most recent value from the source data and does not modify any subcubes. For example, consider that there are four rows in the source data for “Account 1000.” The first row is the oldest and has a value of 1000.00. The second and third rows also have values of 1000.00. The fourth row, which is the most recent, has a value of 2000. After the data synchronization, the data is merged with the most recent value: 2000.

Replace—Replaces the data with the most recent value and modifies the values in the subcubes. For example, consider that there are two rows in the source data for “Account

10.” The first row is the oldest and has a value of 5000.00. The second row has a value of 1000.00. After the data synchronization, the data is replaced with the most recent value: 1000.

Accumulate in Source—(Equivalent to “Accumulate in File” in Classic Financial

Management) Consider these scenarios when selecting Accumulate in Source in combination with the Merge and Replace options: m m m

Select Merge and Accumulate in Source—Adds the duplicate values in the source and the subcubes are not modified.

Select Merge and deselect Accumulate in Source—The most recent value is loaded in the source and the subcubes are not modified.

Select Replace and Accumulate in Source—Adds the duplicate values in the source and the subcubes are modified.

Select Replace and deselect Accumulate in Source—Loads the most recent value and the subcubes are modified.

Accumulate—Adds the values in the loaded data. For example, consider that there are two rows in the source data for “Account A.” The values are: 50.5 and 100. After the data synchronization, the value that displays in the target application for “Account A” is 150.5.

Working with the Data Synchronizer

289

Note:

If the synchronization uses an external source file, enter the URL for the source, or click Upload to use a file as the source.

Click OK.

Selecting or clearing “Accumulate in Source” has no affect on how values are loaded if you select “Accumulate”.

Troubleshooting Data Synchronizations

You can enable additional logging to help you troubleshoot problems with data synchronizations.

Caution!

Enabling debug tracing results in extra debug files being created and accessed. This affects data synchronization performance and uses extra hard disk space. You should only enable these options when troubleshooting problems. Make sure to disable these options when in production.

To enable additional logging:

Navigate to: %EPM_ORACLE_INSTANCE%\config\EPMA\DataSync.

For example,

C:\Oracle\Middleware\user_projects\epmsystem1\config\EPMA

\DataSync\

Using a text editor, open dme.properties.

Uncomment the following debug lines by removing leading #.

preTranslationProcessingClass=com.hyperion.awb.datasync.custom.FileBasedRowLogger preTranslationProcessingClass.outputFile=preTransOut.txt postTranslationProcessingClass=com.hyperion.awb.datasync.custom.FileBasedRowLogger postTranslationProcessingClass.outputFile=postTransOut.txt createDebugFiles=true debugSampleSize=1000

Enabling preTranslationProcessingClass

saves the data from the source before any mappings or transformations are applied in a temporary file. The file is named with a unique

ID appended as a suffix:

_preTransOut

. This is useful to track what data is returned by the source.

Enabling postTranslationProcessingClass

saves the data from the source after all mappings and transformations are applied in a temporary file. The file is named with a unique ID appended as a suffix:

_postTransOut

. This is useful to track what data is sent to the source and how metadata is mapped and transformed.

Enabling createDebugFiles

generates these log files every time a data synchronization is executed or validated:

SynRequest.xml

— traces each step in the data synchronization execution l

290

Synchronizing Data

ALEQuery.xml

— the query in ALE format to be executed by the source

The debugSampleSize

setting ensures that file size will not exceed the number of bytes set.

Save and close dme.properties.

Restart the Hyperion EPM Architect Data Synchronizer – Web Application service.

Execute the data synchronization.

The resulting log files are generated in the folder created for each data synchronization execution or validation job. If dme.log

is located in the standard Web Logic server folder it should have path to the temporary folder. Typically, the temporary folder is:

%EPM_ORACLE_INSTANCE%

\tmp\Oracle\Temp

For debug files that are created in a folder with a unique ID in the temporary folder, the files are created in the temporary folder with a unique ID appended as a suffix:

_preTransOut

and

_postTransOut

After you enable additional logging to resolve problems, you should disable the options when you return to your production environment.

To disable additional logging:

Using a text editor, open dme.properties.

Comment the following debug lines by adding leading #.

preTranslationProcessingClass=com.hyperion.awb.datasync.custom.

FileBasedRowLogger preTranslationProcessingClass.outputFile=preTransOut.txt postTranslationProcessingClass=com.hyperion.awb.datasync.custom.

FileBasedRowLogger postTranslationProcessingClass.outputFile=postTransOut.txt createDebugFiles=true debugSampleSize=1000

Save and close dme.properties.

Restart the Hyperion EPM Architect Data Synchronizer – Web Application service.

Troubleshooting Data Synchronizations

291

292

Synchronizing Data

P a r t I V

Job Management

In Job Management: l l

Managing Jobs

Using Task Automation

Job Management

293

294

Job Management

Managing Jobs

In This Chapter

Working with the Job Console........................................................................... 295

Navigating the Job Console ............................................................................. 297

Viewing Job Attachments................................................................................ 301

Deleting Jobs ............................................................................................. 303

Manually Time out Jobs ................................................................................. 304

Performance Management Architect Logs ............................................................. 304

Working with the Job Console

The Library Job Console is a central component that provides the infrastructure for handling jobs across many functional areas. A job is an asynchronous process that you submit to run behind the scenes in Performance Management Architect.

The Job Console enables you to view and manage jobs in one centralized location. Generally, there are two job categories: jobs and job status that need availability across sessions and jobs that are tied to a session.

The Job Console supports the following job types:

Job Type

Dimension Import

Job associated with...

importing dimensions into the Dimension Library

Consolidation Application Deployment deploying a Consolidation application

Planning Application Deployment deploying a Planning application

Analytics Application Deployment

Profitability Application Deployment deploying an Analytic Services application deploying a Profitability application

Data Synchronization

Compare

Property Query

Export executing data synchronizations comparison of applications property queries export of application

Working with the Job Console

295

Job Type

Query Member

Transaction Log Export

Transform Classic to EPM Architect

Application Migration

Application Validation

Detach Dimension

Share Local Dimension

Application Copy

Dimension Copy

Dimension Export

Job associated with...

session level jobs created when running member queries specifically from Oracle Hyperion

Calculation Manager (these queries can be very large) export of transaction logs transforming applications managed in Classic Planning, Financial Management, or Essbase migrating existing Hyperion applications validation of existing Hyperion applications changing a shared dimension to local in an application changing a local dimension to shared copying an application copying a dimension exporting a dimension

To open the Job Console, click Navigate, Administer, Library Job Console.

The Job Console is displayed.

Each job captures information during the life of a job, during the initial submitted time or job processing.

296

Managing Jobs

l l l

Navigating the Job Console

The Job Console shows Performance Management Architect jobs. You can select a job in the top pane and view summary information in the bottom pane. The bottom pane displays:

Summary—Information about the job

Started Time—Used for smaller strings m m m

Submitted Time—Used for large quantities of content

Last Updated Time—Last time the job was updated

User Name—User name that submitted the job m m m m

Process Name—Process name in which the job is running

Thread—Thread ID of the current job

Server—Server name where the job is running m

Detail—Job summary, including errors and warnings

Attachments—Each job can have multiple attachments to include additional information.

Each attachment can differ and be independent. For example, you can use input parameter files, output log files, or output result files. There are two types of attachments:

Plain Text—Used for smaller strings m m

File—Used for large quantities of content

Status—Displays the status and progress. Each job can have the following status: m m

Invalid—No job is running on the server

Scheduled Start—Queued but has not yet started

Scheduled Stop—Cancelled, but is still running m m m

Starting—Preparing to start

Running—Currently running

Paused

m m m m m m

Stopping—In the process of stopping

Stopped—Stopped at the user's request

Aborted—Aborted due to an error

Completed—Completed successfully

Completed With Errors—Completed, but with errors. (You should check the validation log.)

Not Responding

Note: You cannot change the status of a job.

Navigating the Job Console

297

Changing the Job Console View

To change the Job Console view:

To change the number of jobs per page, click Per Page and select the number of jobs, such as 100.

To sort by a column, click the column heading. For example, if you want to sort by name, click Name.

To scroll through pages of jobs, click and to scroll to the last page.

To scroll through previous pages, click or to go to the first page.

Tip: As you move through pages of jobs, you may want to refresh the Job Console to view

the latest job status. See “Refreshing the Job Console” on page 298 .

To go to a page, enter the page number, and then click .

Refreshing the Job Console

You can refresh the Job Console to view the latest status of jobs.

To refresh the number of jobs displayed, on the toolbar, click .

Creating Job Filters

You can create filters to see specific jobs in the Job Console.

To create a filter:

Perform one of these options: l l

Click Job Filter Options.

Right-click a job and then select Filter.

Click View, Filter.

The Jobs Filter dialog box is displayed.

298

Managing Jobs

You can filter jobs by these options: a. Self or Other User—Select Self to create a filter to view jobs submitted by your user name or select Other User and enter the user name. See

“Filtering Your Jobs” on page

300 and “Filtering Jobs for Other Users” on page 300 .

b. Job ID—Enter the Job ID.

c. Job Type—Select the job type to filter, such as Dimension Import.

d. Job Status—Select the status to filter, such as Completed.

e. Submitted Time From and To—Select a start date and end date to filter by a date range.

Note: There are certain actions that start hidden system jobs. Only users with the EPMA

Administrator role can view hidden system jobs. To view hidden jobs, select “Show

Hidden Jobs” in the Jobs Filter dialog box. For additional information on security roles, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System User and

Role Security Guide.

Select the Source Object.

The Source Object drop-down list displays all applications with an associated job. For example, if you want to see all jobs for the “NewBudget” application you can filter by the

Source Object: “NewBudget”.

Click OK.

Tip: To reset the filter to the default options, in the Jobs Filter dialog box, click Reset.

Navigating the Job Console

299

Filtering Your Jobs

You can filter the jobs you see in the Job Console to only your jobs. Filtering jobs helps in managing jobs, including deleting outdated jobs. For information on deleting jobs, see

“Deleting

Jobs” on page 303 .

To filter your jobs:

Select View, Filter.

If available, enter the Job ID.

Select the Job Type.

Optional: Select the Job Status, or Submitted Time. Then, click OK.

The Job Console displays only your jobs, according to the selections in the Jobs Filter dialog box.

Filtering Jobs for Other Users

You can filter jobs you see in the Job Console for another user.

To filter jobs for other users:

Select View, Filter.

The Jobs Filter dialog box enables you to filter by another user ID. When you select Other

User, you must type in the user name or login ID.

Enter the User Name.

If available, enter the Job ID.

Select the Job Type.

Optional: Select the Job Status, or Submitted Time. Then, click OK.

The Job Console displays jobs according to the selections in the Jobs Filter dialog box.

Security

The Job Console uses Performance Management Architect roles for submitting and displaying jobs.

Security for Submitting Jobs

Authenticated users can submit jobs for the job types described in the previous sections.

Security for Displaying Jobs

Users who submit jobs have full access to the jobs in the Job Console—to update and to read.

In addition, users who are part of other Performance Management Architect roles (Dimension

300

Managing Jobs

Editor, Application Creators, Create Integrations, Run Integrations) can also have access to jobs based on the following table.

Table 20

Job Type Security

Job Type

Dimension Import

Consolidation Application Deployment User, Financial Management Application Creator, Dimension Editor

Planning Application Deployment User, Planning Application Creator, Dimension Editor

Profitability Application Deployment

Analytics Application Deployment

Data Synchronization

User, Profitability Application Creator, Dimension Editor

User, Essbase Application Creator, Dimension Editor

User, Create Integrations, Run Integrations

Compare

Property Query

Export

Who can see:

User, Dimension Editor

Query Member

Transaction Log Export

Transform Classic to EPM Architect

Application Migration

Application Validation

User, Dimension Editor

User, Financial Management Application Creator, Planning Application Creator, Essbase

Application Creator

User, Financial Management Application Creator, Planning Application Creator, Essbase

Application Creator

User, Financial Management Application Creator, Planning Application Creator, Essbase

Application Creator

User, Financial Management Application Creator, Planning Application Creator, Essbase

Application Creator, Dimension Editor

User, Financial Management Application Creator, Planning Application Creator, Essbase

Application Creator

User, Financial Management Application Creator, Planning Application creator, Essbase

Application creator

Viewing Job Attachments

Each attachment type can be associated with the viewer type on the results of the job. For example, you can view an error log file generated from the import process using the Import

Error Log Viewer. If an attachment does not have a specific viewer implemented, by default you can view it as a text file.

Viewing Job Attachments

301

Viewing Import Results

To view import results, in the Job Console – Attachments area, click Import Results.

See

“Creating Import Profiles” on page 64

ImportErrorThreshold setting and increase the import error threshold. See

Appendix D,

“Configuration Settings in BPMA_Server_Config.xml.”

l l

Viewing Text Files

You can view the following jobs as text file attachments:

Data Synchronizations—Session log files created for the source, destination, and data synchronization.

A text file is created for each of these jobs:

Compare—A text file is attached to the job.

Deploy—A text file is attached to the job.

302

Managing Jobs

m m m

Transform Classic to EPM Architect and Application Upgrade—A text file is attached to the job

Export—A text file is attached to the job

Validation—A text file is attached to the job

To view a text file attachment, in the Job Console – Attachments area, click the log file link.

The following figure shows the log files in the Attachments area for a data synchronization.

Deleting Jobs

It is important to delete jobs, as it can be difficult to maintain large numbers of jobs in the database. Deleting jobs makes it easy to navigate the Job Console. Remember, you must have the appropriate user permissions to delete jobs.

To delete jobs:

In the Job Console, right-click a job and select Delete Jobs.

The Confirm Delete dialog box is displayed.

Click OK.

Deleting Jobs

303

Manually Time out Jobs

In some cases, a job continues to run and consume resources. You can force a job to time out so it does not continue to consume resources.

To force a job to time out:

In the Library Job Console, right-click the job(s) to force a time out.

Select Manually Timeout Jobs.

Click Yes.

l l l l l l

Performance Management Architect Logs

Performance Management Architect has the following log files: epma.log

—Lifecycle Management activity epma_err.log

—Information written by the Web server awb.log

—Information written by the Web server

DMEngine.log

—Data Synchronization Web application activity

Windows Event Viewer—Dimension Server activity

Transaction logs —Transactions (View transaction logs from the Dimension Library. See

“Viewing Transaction Logs” on page 112

For additional information and details on Oracle Enterprise Performance Management System and Performance Management Architect log files, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance

Management System Installation and Configuration Troubleshooting Guide.

304

Managing Jobs

Using Task Automation

In This Chapter

Overview .................................................................................................. 305

Prerequisites for Task Automation...................................................................... 306

Managing Taskflows ..................................................................................... 306

Viewing Taskflows ........................................................................................ 306

Creating Taskflows ...................................................................................... 307

Editing Taskflows ........................................................................................ 313

Deleting Taskflows ...................................................................................... 314

Copying Taskflows ....................................................................................... 314

Running Taskflows Manually for Testing ............................................................... 314

Controlling Access to Taskflows ........................................................................ 314

Scheduling Taskflows .................................................................................... 315

Viewing Taskflow Status ................................................................................. 316

Overview

Task Automation is a Web-based module that provides a method for linking a series of tasks into a taskflow. You can use task automation to automate tasks that you commonly perform using Performance Management Architect.

When you work with Performance Management Architect, you routinely perform tasks such as importing dimensions, data synchronizations, and redeploying applications. You can create and maintain taskflows to perform Performance Management Architect operations and schedule critical tasks to be run as required.

Performance Management Architect supports these taskflows: l l l l l

Data Synchronizations

Import dimensions from flat files

Import dimensions from interface tables

Consolidation Redeploy

Planning Redeploy

Analytic Services Redeploy (for Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) applications) l

Overview

305

l l l

Prerequisites for Task Automation

Consider these prerequisites for Task Automation:

You must install Shared Services. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance

Management System Installation and Configuration Guide.

You must register your application with Shared Services. Registration automatically occurs when you deploy an application in Performance Management Architect.

Assign one of the following Shared Services roles to users performing taskflow operations:

Manage Taskflows—Permits users to create and edit taskflows.

m m

Run Taskflows—Permits users to only run and view taskflows. Users with this role cannot create new taskflows or edit existing taskflows.

Note:

Both of these roles are global user roles. Users assigned these roles can either modify or run taskflows for any application and product. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise

Performance Management System User and Role Security Guide.

Managing Taskflows

A taskflow is a sequence of tasks that you can create in task automation. For example, you can create a taskflow to load, calculate, and consolidate data. From the Manage Taskflows option, you can create, edit, save, copy, and delete a taskflow, view a list of available taskflows, assign access to a taskflow, run a taskflow manually for testing, and schedule a taskflow to run automatically.

See these procedures: l l l l l l l l

“Viewing Taskflows” on page 306

“Creating Taskflows ” on page 307

“Editing Taskflows ” on page 313

“Deleting Taskflows ” on page 314

“Copying Taskflows ” on page 314

“Running Taskflows Manually for Testing” on page 314

“Controlling Access to Taskflows” on page 314

“Scheduling Taskflows” on page 315

“Viewing Taskflow Status” on page 316

Viewing Taskflows

You store and manage taskflows in Shared Services. The Taskflow Listing Summary shows the available taskflows by application, the user who created the taskflow, and a description.

306

Using Task Automation

To view taskflows , from Performance Management Architect, select Administration, Manage

Taskflows.

Note: When viewing tasks in a taskflow, users can only view those tasks to which they have access.

Creating Taskflows

You create a taskflow to link a series of tasks and specify the time to run them. When you create a taskflow, you assign it a name and description. Then you add task stages and links between tasks. Stages define specific tasks, such as data loads. Links specify how the system should proceed after completion of the step.

To create taskflows:

From the Taskflow Listing Summary, click New.

For Name, enter a taskflow name. You may want to prefix the taskflow name with EPMA, to easily recognize Performance Management Architect taskflows.

The name can contain up to 40 characters.

The Application text box displays the name of the current application.

For Description, enter a taskflow description.

Click Submit.

The taskflow editor is displayed, where you can add stages and links.

To continue creating the taskflow, see these topics: l l

“Performance Management Architect Actions” on page 307

“Adding Stages” on page 310

“Adding Links ” on page 312

l l l l l

Performance Management Architect Actions

Performance Management Architect supports these actions:

“Data Synchronization” on page 308

“Import Dimensions From Flat File” on page 308

“Import Dimensions from Interface Table” on page 308

“Redeployment” on page 309

Creating Taskflows

307

Data Synchronization

To create a data synchronization taskflow:

Select Processing, and select the application. For example, EPMA-Budget.

Select the action, Execute Data Synchronization.

Perform these actions: l

Synchronization Type—select URL, then click Edit. Choose the synchronization and click

Submit.

Optional: External Source File—if the synchronization uses an external source file for the source of the synchronization, type the location of the external source file.

The location must be a URL location in which your web server has access. For example, file://///blrl4983a/FlatFile/SimpleHFM.txt

Mode—select Scan or Load.

Scan—does not commit the data for the synchronization, instead, it tests the synchronization by running it without writing the new data.

Load—fully executes the synchronization.

Click Save.

Import Dimensions From Flat File

To create flat file import taskflows:

Select the application.

Select the action, Import Dimensions From Flat File.

Perform these actions:

Select Profile Name—select URL, click Edit, select the profile, and click Submit.

l l

Optional: Import Dimensions File—if the profile uses an external flat file, type the location in the text box.

The location must be a Universal Naming Convention (UNC) location in which your web server has access. For example,

\\server\file.dat

Click Save.

Import Dimensions from Interface Table

To create interface table import taskflows:

Select the application.

Select the action, Import Dimensions From Interface Area.

In Select Profile Name, select URL, click Edit, select the profile, and click Submit.

308

Using Task Automation

Click Save.

Redeployment

You can create taskflows for Consolidation, Planning, and Analytic Services redeployments.

Consolidation

To create consolidation redeploy taskflows:

Select the application.

Select the action, Consolidation Redeploy.

Perform these actions: l

Consolidation App—select URL, then click Edit. Choose the application and click

Submit.

Optional: Clear All Metadata and Data—select PICKLIST, then select True or False.

Optional: Check Referential Integrity—select PICKLIST, then select True or False.

Click Save.

Planning

To create planning redeploy taskflows:

Select the application.

Select Planning Redeploy.

Perform these actions: l l l

Planning App—select URL, then click Edit. Choose the application and click Submit.

Datasource—select TEXTBOX, then type the original Planning data source location.

(The database or Essbase cube that the application uses.)

Optional:

Create Outline—select PICKLIST, then select True or False m

Refresh Outline—select PICKLIST, then select True or False m m m

Create Security Filters—select PICKLIST, then select True or False

Shared Members Security Filters—select PICKLIST, then select True or False

Validate Security Filter Limit—select PICKLIST, then select True or False m

Note: You must assign security to members in Planning Dimension Editor on the Planning web. The Planning security options are described in the Oracle Hyperion Planning

Administrator's Guide.

Creating Taskflows

309

Click Save.

Analytic Services

To create Analytic Services redeploy taskflows:

Select the application.

Select the action, Analytic Services Redeploy.

Perform these actions:

Essbase App—select URL, then click Edit. Choose the application and click Submit.

l l

Optional: Clear All Data—select PICKLIST, then select True or False.

Click Save.

Adding Stages

A stage describes a step in a taskflow usually performed by one individual. Each stage has an action. These actions can have parameters in which values are supplied at runtime.

You define a stage using these three tabs: l l l

General: Defines the stage name, description and user ID of the user responsible for running the stage. The user can be an initiator, which is the owner of the first stage in the taskflow, or another user for the other stages.

Processing: Defines the action to be performed when the taskflow is run and any required parameters.

Starting Event: Defines the taskflow start time, and the scheduled times for the event to occur, based on the application server time, not the local user’s computer. This tab is displayed only for the first stage in the taskflow. It displays the scheduled event (taskflow start time), or is disabled (for the manual start of a taskflow executed by the Run Now option).

To add stages:

From the taskflow editor, click Add Stage.

A new stage is displayed in the left panel, and stage details are displayed in the right panel.

If stages exist in the taskflow, the new stage is created at the end of the taskflow.

Select General and enter this information: a. For Name, enter a stage name; for example, Data_Synchronization.

Note: Stage names cannot contain spaces. The name can contain up to 30 characters.

b. Optional: For Description, enter a taskflow description; for example, Perform synchronization daily.

310

Using Task Automation

c. From Run As, select UserName, and enter a username and password for the user who launches the taskflow.

Note: Stage 1 requires that you enter a username and password. When you create future stages, you can select to run as the Initiator, which tells the system to use the user

ID and password that was defined in Stage 1.

Select Processing and enter this information: a. From Application, select an application from which to run the task.

b. From Action, select an action to perform; for example, Data_Synchronization.

Note: See

“Shared Services Stage Actions and Parameters” on page 312

c. From Type for each parameter, select Picklist, Text Box, or URL for the Point of View, depending on the action, and enter values for the parameter.

For example, for the Data_Synchronization action, the Mode option contains a picklist from which you can select Merge, Accumulate, or Replace.

For the data file and log file names and paths, you must manually enter the information in a text box. The taskflow is executed from the server, so you must make sure that the file names and paths are valid and can be accessed from the server running the task.

Therefore, you should not enter a path such as c:\file.dat

that references your own hard drive. You must identify the computer name and share directory for the file using

Universal Naming Convention (UNC); for example,

\\HFMServer\share\path

\file.dat

Select Starting Event and enter this information: a. From Starting Event, select an event.

The Server Date information is displayed for informational purposes.

b. For Start Date, enter the date for the task to be run, or click the pop-up calendar and select a date.

c. From Start Time, select a time for the task to be run.

Note: This time is based on the application server, which is identified on the Server Date line.

d. For a recurring task, select Recurrence, and from Recurrence Pattern, select the task frequency.

e. Select an option for the task end date and time:

No End Date l l

End After occurrences, and enter the number of occurrences l

End Date, enter an end date and select an End Time.

Optional: To add a stage, click Add Stage and complete the stage information for General and

Processing

Creating Taskflows

311

Note: The Starting Event tab is available only for the first stage. However you can schedule taskflows independent of creating stages by using the Schedule Taskflow

functionality. See “Scheduling Taskflows” on page 315

Shared Services Stage Actions and Parameters

The following table lists available actions and parameters.

Table 21 Stage Actions and Parameters for Shared Services

Action Parameters

Email Action that enables email messages to be sent automatically to an e-mail address. Complete these parameters for the e-mail action: l l l

To: Type an email address for the recipient

Subject: Type a subject for the email

Message: Select a variable (by double-clicking a variable from the variables list) to display success or failure

Variables: Lists the available variables for the email action l

Execute Action that runs external programs from a command line. Complete these parameters for the execute action:

Command: Type a command to run an external program.

The external program can be a valid command line script (such as a “bat” script on Windows or a “sh” script on UNIX) and any valid program execution command. Make sure that your bat file does not resolve the path dynamically; if the files uses any variables to resolve the path, it will not work.

The command must include the full path to the executable. For example, to launch Internet Explorer, type:

\Program Files\Internet Explorer\IEXPLORE.EXE

Adding Links

A link is the point during the taskflow execution where the activity in one stage is completed and the control passes to another stage, which starts. A link can be unconditional, where the completion of one stage leads to the start of another, or conditional, where the sequence of operation depends on multiple link conditions.

A link specifies the action for the system to take next. Every stage needs a link. In general, most stages have two links: success and failure. For the success link, you can specify that if the first stage succeeds, the system should proceed to the second stage, called the Receiving stage. For the failure link, you specify the action to be performed if problems occur in the first stage.

For example, you can set a success link so that if the first stage of Data_Synchronization succeeds, the system proceeds to the Redeploying_Consolidation stage. You can set a failure link so that if failure occurs or any problems are encountered in the Data_Synchronization stage, the system proceeds to the Redeploying_Consolidation stage of End, which ends the process and terminates the taskflow.

The last stage in the taskflow must have a final link with “End” as the target to complete the taskflow.

312

Using Task Automation

You can specify variables for an event. For example, you can add a variable for a load data task such as Data_Synchronization_Result= =Success.

You must enter two equal signs (= =) after the variable, and place single quotation marks (“) around the condition. The value can be True or False.

To add links:

Click Add Link.

Select General and for Name, enter a link name.

The name can contain up to 30 characters.

For Description, enter a link description.

Sending Stage is displayed for informational purposes.

From Receiving Stage select a stage.

Select Condition tab if applicable, and from Variable, select a variable, for example,

Data_Synchronization_Result.

From Value, select Success or Failure.

Click Add.

Note: Ensure that the last stage in the taskflow has a link with an End target.

Tip: To delete a condition, click Delete.

Editing Taskflows

After you create a taskflow, you can edit the taskflow description, and create, edit, or delete taskflow variables. You can also add or delete a stage or a link.

To edit taskflows:

Select Administration, Manage Taskflows.

Select the taskflow to edit and click Edit.

In the taskflow editor, select an option: l l

To add a stage, click Add Stage. See

“Adding Stages” on page 310

To add a link, click Add Link. See “Adding Links ” on page 312

To delete a stage or link, click Delete.

Note: If you delete a stage, all links associated with it are also deleted.

To edit the taskflow description, click Properties.

Edit the taskflow and perform an action:

Editing Taskflows

313

l l

To save the edits, click Save.

To cancel the edits, click Cancel. The system returns you to the Taskflow Listing

Summary without saving your changes.

Deleting Taskflows

You can delete a taskflow that you no longer need.

To delete taskflows:

Select Administration, Manage Taskflows.

From the list of taskflows, select the taskflow to delete, and click Delete.

Copying Taskflows

After you define a taskflow for an application, you can copy it to a different application.

To copy taskflows:

Select Administration, Manage Taskflows.

Select the taskflow to copy and click Save As.

Enter a new name and description for the taskflow.

Click Submit.

Shared Services adds a copy of the taskflow with a new name to the Taskflow Listing

Summary.

Running Taskflows Manually for Testing

You can run a taskflow manually instead of waiting for it to start automatically. You might want to test a taskflow before the time that it is scheduled to run. This enables you to make adjustments to the taskflow before it runs.

To run taskflows manually:

Select Administration, Manage Taskflows.

From the list of taskflows, select the taskflow to run and click Run Now.

Controlling Access to Taskflows

In addition to role-based authorization using Shared Services Console, you can manage access permissions at the more granular taskflow level by using Access Control Lists (ACLs). Before you can assign permissions to taskflows, you must first ensure that the appropriate roles are

314

Using Task Automation

created using Shared Services Console. For example, create a Performance Management

Architect role with a descriptive name like “Manage Financials TF” (which provides the ability to manage all Financials taskflows), then choose the Manage Taskflows base role. Once the role is created using Oracle Hyperion Shared Services Console, you can assign access permissions to individual taskflows.

Shared Services provides these types of permissions for each taskflow: l

Manage

Execute l

To assign permissions to individual taskflows:

Select Administration, Manage Taskflows.

From the list of taskflows, select a taskflow and click Access Control.

Select the appropriate base roles for Manage Permission Role and Execute Permission Role.

For example, select the “Manage Financials TF” role for the Manage Permission Role and

“Execute Financials TF” for the Execute Permission Role.

Click Save.

Scheduling Taskflows

You can schedule a taskflow to run automatically without creating or editing a taskflow. Schedule

Taskflow enables you to define the taskflow start time and the scheduled times for the event to occur, based on the application server time, not the local user’s computer.

To schedule a taskflow:

Select Administration, Manage Taskflows.

From the list of taskflows, select a taskflow and click Schedule Taskflow.

Enter this information: a. From Starting Event, select Scheduled Event.

The Server Date information is displayed for informational purposes.

b. For Start Date, enter the date for the task to be run, or click the pop-up calendar and select a date.

c. From Start Time, select a time for the task to be run.

Note: This time is based on the application server, which is identified on the Server Date line.

d. For a recurring task, select Recurrence, and from Recurrence Pattern, select the task frequency.

e. Select an option for the task end date and time:

Scheduling Taskflows

315

l l l

Click Save.

No End Date

End After Occurrences, and enter the number of occurrences

End Date, enter an end date and select an End Time.

Viewing Taskflow Status

The Taskflow Status Summary enables you to check the status of taskflows, including taskflows that are active, completed, or stopped. You can view all taskflows, or you can filter the list of taskflows by status, application, or the date or range of dates on which the taskflow was initiated.

You can drill down on individual taskflows to view details of the taskflow in the Taskflow

Participant Summary. The Taskflow Participant Summary displays the status for each stage of the taskflow and the time it was completed. You can see the stages that were completed successfully and those that failed. This information can be used to troubleshoot the automation routine.

To view taskflow status:

Select Administration, View Taskflow Status.

Double-click a task ID to display its status.

To search for a taskflow, select the filter criteria, and click Search.

Table 22

Taskflow Status Summary Elements

Element Description

Status

Application

Taskflow

Initiated between

(optional)

Filter on these taskflow types: l l l

Active

Done

Stopped

All l

Application participating in the taskflow

Taskflow name

Enter or select by clicking the date or range of dates in which the taskflow was initiated

Click to display in the Taskflow Listing area a list of taskflows that meet the search criteria that you specify

316

Using Task Automation

Element

Taskflow Listing

Stop

Delete

Delete All

Page

Description

Displays taskflows that meet the search criteria that you specify, such as: l l l l l l

Application

Taskflow

Initiator

Started

(lists the latest taskflow first)

Status

Description l

Indicates data that is sortable. You may sort taskflows by Application, Taskflow, Initiator, Started, or by Status by clicking on the column header.

Stop an active taskflow instance.

Delete the selected taskflow instance.

Note: You must stop the taskflow before deleting it.

Delete all of the selected taskflow instances.

Display in the Taskflow Listing area the first page of taskflow instances that meet the specified search criteria.

Display in the Taskflow Listing area the previous page of taskflow instances that meet the specified search criteria.

Select a page to display in the Taskflow Listing area.

Display in the Taskflow Listing area the page you selected in the Page drop-down list box.

Display in the Taskflow Listing area the next page of taskflow instances that meet the specified search criteria.

Display in the Taskflow Listing area the last page of taskflow instances that meet the specified search criteria.

Refresh the taskflow instances listed in the Taskflow Listing area.

Refresh

From the Taskflow Status Summary, you can also stop an active taskflow, view a taskflow participant summary, or view taskflow participant details: l l

“Stopping Active Taskflows ” on page 317

“Viewing the Taskflow Participant Summary” on page 318

“Viewing the Taskflow Participant Details” on page 319

Stopping Active Taskflows

Active taskflows are taskflows that are in progress. You can stop taskflows that are not in progress.

For example, you can stop a taskflow that has errors and make adjustments to it.

Viewing Taskflow Status

317

To stop active taskflows:

Select Administration, View Taskflow Status.

From Status, select Active.

Optional: To filter the list, select search criteria for the taskflow, and click Search.

Select the taskflow to stop and click Stop.

Viewing the Taskflow Participant Summary

The Taskflow Participant Summary lists the participants in a taskflow and provides status information for each participant instance.

To view taskflow participant status:

Select Administration, View TaskflowStatus.

Select the search criteria for the taskflows, and click Search.

To view all of the taskflows in the Shared Services taskflow management system, select

(Status) All and click Search.

In the Taskflow Listing area, find the taskflow for which to view the participant summary and click the taskflow ID.

The Taskflow Participant Summary window is displayed.

Click Cancel to return to the Taskflow Status Summary window.

Table 23 Taskflow Participant Summary Window Elements

Element Description

Taskflow Summary Summary information for the selected taskflow (items appear in the order of completion): l l l l l l

Application

Taskflow

Initiator

Started

Status

Description l

Participant

Stage Name

Stage participant name. Participants are selectable. Click a participant to view details about a taskflow participant.

Stage name

318

Using Task Automation

Element

Status

Description

Stage status: l l l

Active

Done

Stopped

All l

Success Variable Outcome of the completed stage

Completed Date and time of stage completion

Viewing the Taskflow Participant Details

The Taskflow Participant Details window displays the details for a taskflow participant.

To view taskflow participant details:

Select Administration, View Taskflow Status.

Select the search criteria for the taskflows, and click Search.

To view all the taskflows in the Shared Services taskflow management system, select (Status)

All and click Search.

In Taskflow Listing, find the taskflow for which to view the participant summary and click the taskflow

ID.

Click a participant to view taskflow participant details.

Shared Services displays the Taskflow Participant Details window and sorts the participant events chronologically.

Click Cancel to return to Taskflow Participant Summary.

Viewing Taskflow Status

319

320

Using Task Automation

P a r t V

Product-Specific Properties,

Requirements, and Additional

Considerations

In Product-Specific Properties, Requirements, and Additional Considerations: l l l l l

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

Working with Planning Dimensions

Working with Profitability and Cost Management Properties

Working with Essbase Properties

Working with Statistical and System Properties

Product-Specific Properties, Requirements, and Additional Considerations

321

322

Product-Specific Properties, Requirements, and Additional Considerations

Working with Financial

Management Dimensions

In This Chapter

Account ................................................................................................... 324

Cell Text Label ............................................................................................ 330

Custom.................................................................................................... 330

Entity ...................................................................................................... 332

Scenario .................................................................................................. 334

Application................................................................................................ 336

Organization by Period................................................................................... 340

Consolidation Method ................................................................................... 341

Currency .................................................................................................. 343

System-Generated Accounts............................................................................ 345

Setting Up Intercompany Partners...................................................................... 346

Metadata Filtering Based on Security.................................................................. 348

Metadata Referential Integrity .......................................................................... 348

Dimension Naming Restrictions ........................................................................ 350

Using Consolidation Flat Files Created in 9.3.1....................................................... 350

Working with Financial Management 9.3.1 and Performance Management Architect ............ 350

In Financial Management, you must associate some dimensions with others because some properties refer to members of other dimensions. For example, the Security Class property of

the Account dimension points to a member of the Security Class dimension. See “Creating

Dimension Associations” on page 86

Dimension names cannot exceed 80 characters. For additional information, see

“Dimension

Naming Restrictions” on page 350

Table 24

Financial Management Associations

Dimension (Source) Property Name

Account Plug Account

Alias

<DimensionAliasName>TopMember

Security Class

Dimension (Target)

Account

Alias

Custom

Security Class

323

Dimension (Source)

Consolidation Method

Currency

Custom

Entity

ICP

Period

Scenario

Property Name

Alias

Security Class

Alias

Currency

Holding Company

ICP Top member

Security Class

Security As Partner

Alias

Security Class

Alias

Security Class

Default Frequency

Default Frequency For IC Transactions

Phased Submission Start Year

Alias

Value

View

Year

Account

The following table describes member properties of the Account dimension. The Property Label column shows the label displayed for the property in the Performance Management Architect

Property Grid. You can use the name, displayed in the Property Name column, to modify property values using the Performance Management Architect Batch Client. See the Oracle

Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management Batch Client User's Guide for additional information on running scripts.

Dimension (Target)

Alias

Security Class

Alias

Currency

Year

Alias

Entity

ICP

Security Class

Alias

Security Class

Alias

Security Class

View

324

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

Table 25 Member Properties of the Account Dimension

Property Label Value Description

Alias

Calc Attribute

Consolidation Account Type

Property Name

Member description (maximum of 80 characters)

To use the Alias property, you create an Alias dimension, define properties, and associate the Alias dimension with another dimension. For example, you can create an Alias dimension with the values English, French, and Italian and then associate the Alias dimension with the Account dimension.

Alias

Calculation description (maximum of 80 characters)

This information is displayed in data forms and data grids.

Note: When you define the value for this property at the parent level, all children automatically inherit the value.

CalcAttribute

One of these values: l l

ASSET

LIABILITY

REVENUE l l l l l l l l

Note: In Financial Management releases prior to 4.

1, this account type is named INCOME.

EXPENSE

FLOW

BALANCE

BALANCERECURRING

CURRENCYRATE

GROUPLABEL

DYNAMIC

Note: When you define the value for this property at the parent level, all children automatically inherit the value.

ConsolidationAccountType

<DimensionAliasName>TopMember

Default Parent

<DimensionAliasName>Aggregation

Top member of a Custom dimension that is valid for the account

The specified member and all of its descendants are valid for the account.

To enter a value for this property, you must associate the

Account and Custom dimensions.

<DimensionAliasName>TopMember

Default parent for the account. The default parent value is a derived value and you cannot enter a value.

DefaultParent

Whether aggregation is enabled for intersections of the

Account and Custom dimensions

This property is used for special totals, not summing.

Specify Y if the account can aggregate with Custom dimensions or N if it cannot.

Note: When you define the value for this property at the parent level, all children automatically inherit the value.

<DimensionAliasName>Aggregation

Account

325

Property Label

Enable Data Audit

ICP Top Member

Is Calculated

Is Consolidated

Is ICP

Value Description Property Name

Whether the scenario is audited and what can be audited l

Y to audit all accounts. Even accounts that have

Enable Data Audit set to False are audited.

N to disable auditing for all accounts l

EnableDataAudit

ICP top member for the account

The specified member and all of its descendants are valid for the account.

To enter a value for this property, you must associate the

Account and ICP dimensions.

ICPTopMember

Whether the account is calculated

Only base-level accounts can be calculated. You cannot enter values into base-level, calculated accounts. Specify

Y to calculate the account; otherwise, specify N.

Note: When you define the value for this property at the parent level, all children automatically inherit the value.

IsCalculated

Whether the account is consolidated to a parent account

Specify Y to consolidate to a parent account, or N not to consolidate to a parent account.

Note: When you define the value for this property at the parent level, all children automatically inherit the value.

IsConsolidated

Whether the account is an intercompany account l l l

Y if ICP transactions, including self-ICP transactions, are enabled for the account

N if ICP transactions are not enabled for the account

R if ICP transactions are enabled for the account, but the account cannot have ICP transactions with itself

IsICP

For an intercompany account, you must specify a plug account.

326

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

Property Label

Name

Number of Decimal Places

Plug Account

Security Class

Submission Group

User Defined 1, User Defined 2, User

Defined 3

Value Description Property Name

Name for the account (required)

Names can contain up to 80 characters, including spaces, and cannot start with a space or contain these characters: l l l l l l l l l l l

Ampersand ( & )

Asterisk ( * )

At sign ( @ )

Comma ( , )

Curly brackets ( { } )

Double quote ( “ )

Minus sign ( - )

Number sign ( # )

Period ( . )

Plus sign ( + )

Semicolon ( ; )

Slash mark ( / ) l

Name

For account values, the number of digits (0–9) to be displayed to the right of the decimal point (required)

Note: When you define the value for this property at the parent level, all children automatically inherit the value.

NumDecimalPlaces

Name of the account that is used for identifying discrepancies in intercompany transactions (required when the IsICP property for the account is selected)

To enter a value for this property, you must associate two

Account dimensions.

PlugAccount

Name of the security class that defines the users who can access the account data (can contain up to 80 characters)

To enter a value for this property, you must associate the

Account and Security Class dimensions.

SecurityClass

The Submission group (0 to 99).

If the submission group is set to zero (0), the account is not included in the review process.

Note: When you define the value for this property at the parent level, all children automatically inherit the value.

Default Value: 1

SubmissionGroup

Custom information for the account (maximum of 80 characters)

The User Defined1, User Defined2, and User Defined3 functions retrieve the text stored in this property.

UserDefined1

UserDefined2

UserDefined3

Account

327

Property Label

Uses Line Items

Value Description Property Name

Whether an account can have line items. Specify Y if the account uses line items or N if the account does not use line items.

Caution! If you change this property after line-item detail is entered, the stored line-item detail may no longer be valid for the account: l l

If the account accepted line items and now it cannot, the line-item detail stored in the database is no longer valid. Only the total is displayed.

If the account did not accept line items and now it can, only the total amount is displayed, but you can extract the total and load it as line-item detail data so that the total and the line-item detail information match.

UsesLineItems

Account Type Behavior

The following table describes how account types behave in the system. For example, ASSET accounts do not total across periods, and REVENUE accounts provide year-to-date totals. If you debit an ASSET account, the value that you enter is added to the account. If you credit an ASSET account, the value that you enter is subtracted from the account. All account types, except

GROUPLABEL, contain data.

Table 26

Account Type Behavior

Account-Type Behavior

Account Type

ASSET

LIABILITY

REVENUE

EXPENSE

FLOW

BALANCE

BALANCE RECURRING

CURRENCYRATE

GROUPLABEL

DYNAMIC

Yes

N/A

YTD Total

Sub

N/A

Add

Sub

N/A

Credit

Sub

Add

N/A

Sub

Add

N/A

Debit

Add

Sub

Default Translation

DefaultRateForBalance Accounts

DefaultRateForFlow Accounts

None

N/A

328

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

Different account types behave differently when consolidated into different types of parent accounts. For example ASSET account values are added into parent ASSET and EXPENSE accounts and subtracted from parent LIABILITY and REVENUE accounts.

Note: The account types across the top of the table are identified by the first one or two letters of the account type.

Table 27 Account Type Behaviors During Aggregation into Parent Accounts

Type

Account-Type Behavior Per Type of Parent Account

A L R E F B

ASSET Add Sub Sub Add Add Add

LIABILITY

REVENUE

EXPENSE

FLOW

BALANCE

Sub

Add

Sub

Add

Sub

Add

Sub

Add

BALANCE RECURRING

CURRENCYRATE

GROUPLABEL

DYNAMIC

Add

Note: In this table, No indicates that the account type is not aggregated into the parent account.

Example of how account types are aggregated into parent accounts:

In this example, Total Assets, an ASSET account, is the parent of Fixed Assets (an ASSET account) and Amortization (a LIABILITY account). When accounts are consolidated into the parent account, the Fixed Assets value of 100 is added, the Amortization value of 20 is subtracted, and the resulting value for Total Assets is 80.

Defining Dynamic Accounts

Dynamic accounts are dynamically calculated when their data is requested. Their values are not stored. The most common type of dynamic calculation is ratio calculation.

Account

329

To define dynamic accounts and calculations:

Set up an account that uses the Dynamic account type.

Only base accounts can be dynamic.

Note: The following account properties are ignored for dynamic accounts: Is Calculated, Is

Consolidated, Enable Custom1 Aggregation, Enable Custom2 Aggregation, Enable

Custom3 Aggregation, Enable Custom4 Aggregation, Uses Line Items.

In a rules file, create a Sub Dynamic () section.

In the rules file, define a calculation.

Cell Text Label

Cell text labels enable you to easily identify types of information when you view cell text. You can use cell text labels in data grids and data forms.

Table 28

Member Properties of Cell Text Labels

Property

Label

Value Description

Name

Property

Name

Name for the cell text label (required)

Names can contain up to 80 characters, including spaces, and cannot start with a space or contain these characters: l l l l l l l l l l l

Ampersand ( & )

Asterisk ( * )

At sign ( @ )

Comma ( , )

Curly brackets ( { } )

Double quote ( “ )

Minus sign ( - )

Number sign ( # )

Period ( . )

Plus sign ( + )

Semicolon ( ; )

Slash mark ( / ) l

Name

Custom

Custom dimensions are represented by the Generic dimension type in Performance

Management Architect. The Generic dimension property, Custom Dimension, maps the

Generic Performance Management Architect dimension to a Custom Consolidation dimension.

You can add any number of Custom Dimensions within a Financial Management Application

View.

330

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

Table 29 Member Properties of Custom Dimensions

Property Label Value Description

Alias

Aggregation

Weight

Default Parent

Is Calculated

Name

Property Name

Member description (maximum of 80 characters)

To use the Alias property, you create an Alias dimension, define properties, and associate the

Alias dimension with another dimension. For example, you can create an Alias dimension with the values English, French, and Italian and then associate the Alias dimension with the Custom dimension.

Alias

The aggregation weight for the Custom dimension can be any value (positive or negative), and fractions are allowed (for example, 1.5 is valid). The default values are 0 (no aggregation) and

1 (to aggregate). If the value is not 0 or 1, then the child member is aggregated to the parent using that multiplier.

For example, if you set the aggregation weight to .5, only 50 percent of the member's value is aggregated to the parent.

AggregationWeight

The default parent for the Custom member. The default parent value is a derived value and you cannot enter a value.

DefaultParent

Whether the base-level Custom account is calculated

Only base-level Custom accounts can be calculated. You cannot enter values into base-level, calculated Custom accounts. Specify Y to calculate the Custom account; otherwise, specify N.

Name for the Custom member (required)

Names can contain up to 80 characters, including spaces, and cannot start with a space or contain these characters: l l l l l l l l l l l l

Ampersand ( & )

Asterisk ( * )

At sign ( @ )

Comma ( , )

Curly brackets ( { } )

Double quote ( “ )

Minus sign ( - )

Number sign ( # )

Period ( . )

Plus sign ( + )

Semicolon ( ; )

Slash mark ( / )

Note: The name of a Custom1 dimension member cannot duplicate the name of a consolidation method.

IsCalculated

Name

Security Class

Submission

Group

Name of the security class that defines the users who can access the Custom dimension data

(can contain up to 80 characters)

To enter a value for this property, you must associate the Custom and Security Class dimensions.

SecurityClass

The Submission group (0 to 99).

The default, blank, defaults to 1. If the submission group is set to zero (0), the Custom member is not included in the review process.

SubmissionGroup

Custom

331

Property Label

Switch Sign For

Flow

Switch Type For

Flow

User Defined 1,

User Defined 2,

User Defined 3

Value Description

Specifies sign change (Debit or Credit) for FLOW accounts that use these rules: l l l l l

ASSET to LIABILITY

LIABILITY to ASSET

EXPENSE to REVENUE

REVENUE to EXPENSE

BALANCE to FLOW

FLOW to BALANCE l

Property Name

SwitchSignForFlow

Specify Y if the sign for the account is switched or N if the sign for the account is not switched.

Note: When you define the value for this property at the parent level, all children automatically inherit the value.

Specifies the account type change for FLOW accounts that use these rules: l l l l l

ASSET to EXPENSE

EXPENSE to ASSET

LIABILITY to REVENUE

REVENUE to LIABILITY

BALANCE to FLOW

FLOW to BALANCE l

SwitchTypeForFlow

Specify Y if the account type for the account is switched or N if the account type for the account is not switched.

Note: When you define the value for this property at the parent level, all children automatically inherit the value.

Custom information for the Custom member (maximum of 80 characters)

The User Defined 1, User Defined 2, and User Defined 3 functions retrieve the text stored in this property.

UserDefined1

UserDefined2

UserDefined3

Entity

Table 30

Member Properties of the Entity Dimension

Property Label Value Description

Alias

Allow

Adjustments

Property Name

Member description (maximum of 80 characters)

Entity dimension.

Alias

Specifies whether journal postings are permitted for this entity. Specify Y if journal postings are permitted for the entity or N if journal postings are not permitted for the entity.

AllowAdjs

332

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

Property Label Value Description Property Name

Allow

Adjustments From

Children

Specifies whether journal postings from children are permitted for the parent entity. Specify

Y if journal postings from children are permitted or N if journal postings from children are not permitted.

AllowAdjFromChildren

Currency Currency

Default Parent

Specifies the default currency for the entity. A value for this property is required.

To enter a value for this property, you must create an association between the Entity and

Currency dimensions.

Note: When you define the value for this property at the parent level, all children automatically inherit the value.

Specifies the default parent for the entity. The default parent value is a derived value and you cannot enter a value.

Holding Company Specifies the holding company for the entity. Can be the name of an entity or <blank>.

To enter a value for this property, you must create an association between two Entity dimensions.

Is ICP Specifies whether the entity is an intercompany entity. Specify Y if the entity is an intercompany entity or N if the entity is not an intercompany entity. If the entity is an intercompany entity, it is displayed in the POV in the ICP dimension under [ICP Entities].

Default Value: N

Name Name for the entity (required)

Names can contain up to 80 characters, including spaces, and cannot start with a space, cannot be the word ALL; and cannot use these characters: l l l l l l l l l l l

Ampersand ( & )

Asterisk ( * )

At sign ( @ )

Comma ( , )

Curly brackets ( { } )

Double quote ( “ )

Minus sign ( - )

Number sign ( # )

Period ( . )

Plus sign ( + )

Semicolon ( ; )

Slash mark ( / ) l

DefaultParent

HoldingCompany

IsICP

Name

Security As

Partner

Security Class

Specifies the name of a valid security class for the ICP entity. This property enables you to secure the entity in an ICP dimension.

To enter a value for this property, you must create an association between the Entity and

Security Class dimensions.

SecurityAsPartner

Name of the security class that defines the users who can access the entity data (can contain up to 80 characters)

To enter a value for this property, you must associate the Entity and Security Class dimensions.

SecurityClass

Entity

333

Property Label

User Defined 1,

User Defined 2,

User Defined 3

Value Description Property Name

Custom information for the entity (maximum of 80 characters)

The User Defined 1, User Defined 2, and User Defined 3 functions retrieve the text stored in this property.

UserDefined1

UserDefined2

UserDefined3

Scenario

Table 31 Scenario Dimension Properties

Property Label Value Description Property Name

Alias

Consolidate YTD Specifies the view for consolidation. A value for this property is required. Specify

Y for YTD or N for periodic.

Default

Frequency

Specifies the types of periods for which data input is valid for the scenario. A value for this property is required.

For example, a value of Monthly indicates that you can extract input data only in month-based periods, not in quarter-based or year-based periods.

To enter a value for this property, you must create an association between the

Scenario and View dimensions.

Default

Frequency For IC

Transactions

Specifies the default frequency for intercompany transactions. This property must be a valid frequency and can contain a maximum of 20 characters. The default for this property is <blank>.

To enter a value for this property, you must create an association between the

Scenario and View dimensions.

ConsolidateYTD

DefaultFrequency

DefFreqForICTrans

Default Parent

Member description (maximum of 80 characters)

Alias

Default View

Specifies the default parent for the scenario. The default parent value is a derived value and you cannot enter a value.

DefaultParent

Specifies the view to use when Scenario View is selected in the point-of-view bar.

A value for this property is required. Specify YTD or Periodic.

If you change the default view for a scenario and line-item detail has been entered, you should first extract the line-item detail and save it. Then delete the line-item detail from the scenario before changing the view. You must change the extracted line-item detail to match the new default view before loading it.

DefaultView

334

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

Property Label

Enable Data

Audit

Enable Process

Management

Value Description Property Name

Specifies whether the scenario is audited. This property for an account or a scenario determines what can be audited. Specify one of these values: l l

Y to automatically audit all accounts. Even accounts that have Enable Data

Audit set to False are audited.

O to audit only those accounts that have Enable Data Audit set to True

N to disable auditing for all accounts l

EnableDataAudit

Default Value: N

Specifies whether Process Management functionality is enabled. Specify one of these values: l l

Y to enable the Process Management option

N to disable the Process Management option

A to enable Process Management and e-mail alerting l

HfmEnableProcessManagement

Maximum Review

Level

Name

Default Value: N

Specifies the maximum Process Management review level for the scenario. Specify a review level from 1 to 10. A value for this property is required.

MaximumReviewLevel

Name for the scenario (required)

Names can contain up to 80 characters, including spaces, and cannot start with a space or contain these characters: l l l l l l l l l l l

Ampersand ( & )

Asterisk ( * )

At sign ( @ )

Comma ( , )

Curly brackets ( { } )

Double quote ( “ )

Minus sign ( - )

Number sign ( # )

Period ( . )

Plus sign ( + )

Semicolon ( ; )

Slash mark ( / ) l

Name

Phased

Submission Start

Year

Security Class

Specifies the start year. You can set the start year by deploying an application in

Performance Management Architect or by loading metadata in a classic Financial

Management application. This setting enables flexibility of setting a year of a scenario to start phased submission of process management.

PhasedSubStartYear

Name of the security class that defines the users who can access the scenario data

(can contain up to 80 characters)

To enter a value for this property, you must associate the Scenario and Security

Class dimensions.

SecurityClass

Scenario

335

Property Label

User Defined 1,

User Defined 2,

User Defined 3

Value Description Property Name

Custom information for the scenario (maximum of 80 characters)

The User Defined 1, User Defined 2, and User Defined 3 functions retrieve the text stored in this property.

UserDefined1

UserDefined2

UserDefined3

Uses Line Items Specifies whether the scenario can have line items. Specify Y if the scenario can accept line items or N if the scenario cannot accept line items.

Note: If you change this property after line-item detail is entered, the stored line item detail may no longer be valid for the scenario. The following behaviors occur: l l

If the scenario accepted line items and now it cannot, the line-item detail stored in the database is no longer valid. Only the total is displayed.

If the scenario did not accept line items and now it can, there is a total amount but no corresponding line-item detail information for the scenario. You can extract the total and then load it as line-item detail data so that the total matches the line-item detail information.

UsesLineItems

Zero View For

Adjustments

Zero View For

Non-adjustments

Specifies how to interpret missing, adjusted data values for the period. A value for this property is required. Specify YTD or Periodic.

Specifies how to interpret missing, unadjusted data values for the period. A value for this property is required. Specify YTD or Periodic.

ZeroViewForAdj

ZeroViewForNonAdj l l l l l l

Application

Application properties are the equivalent of the application settings section in the Classic

Financial Management metadata files. Application properties apply to an entire Financial

Management application and determine the following information for the application:

Is the organization dynamic, using organization by period?

Which dimensions are secured?

What default translation rates are used?

What is the ICP weight?

Are consolidation rules applied?

What is the default currency?

336

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

Table 32 Application Properties

Property Label

Consolidation Rules

Value Description Property Name

Specifies if consolidation rules are supported for the application. Specify one of these values: l l l

Y to use the rules written in the Consolidate() routine in a user-defined rule

R to derive the proportional value in the Value dimension. Note that the proportional data is not stored.

N to use the default consolidation and eliminations

ConsolidationRules

Default Currency

Default Rate For Balance

Accounts

Default Rate For Flow

Accounts

Default Value For Active

Enable Metadata Security

Filtering

Default Value: N

Specifies the default currency for the application.

A value for this property is required.

DefaultCurrency

Specifies the account that contains the translation rate to use for ASSET or LIABILITY accounts.

A value for this property is required.

DefaultRateForBalanceAccounts

Specifies the account that contains the translation rate to use for REVENUE or EXPENSE accounts.

A value for this property is required.

DefaultRateForFlowAccount

Specifies if entities in the application are active by default or inactive by default. Inactive entities are not consolidated to their parent.

A value for this property is required.

Specify 0 for inactive or 1 for active.

DefaultValueForActive

Specifies if users of an application see all dimension members or only the members to which they have access. The system can filter these dimensions: l l l l

Scenario

Entity

Intercompany Partner (ICP)

Account

Custom l

EnableMetadataSecurityFiltering

Specify Y to display only the dimension members to which the user has access or N to display all dimension members in the application.

The default value is N.

Application

337

Property Label

ICP Entities Aggregation

Weight

Maximum Cell Text Size

Maximum Document

Attachment Size

Maximum Number of

Document Attachments

Node Security

Org By Period Application

Security For Accounts

Value Description Property Name

Specifies the percentage of intercompany partner entity [ICP Entities] amounts that aggregate to the

[ICP Top] member of the ICP dimension.

The percentage is scaled to hundreds, with 1.0

equalling 100 percent. The value can be positive or negative.

A value for this property is required.

Default Value: 1

ICPEntitiesAggregationWeight

Specifies the maximum number of characters that can be used for cell text.

Valid values are -1 for no limit or a positive number up to 2,147,483,647.

Default Value: 1900

MaxCellTextSize

Specifies the maximum number of bytes for the size of document attachments.

Valid values are -1 for no limit or a positive number up to 2,147,483,647.

MaxDocAttachmentSize

Specifies the maximum number of document attachments per user.

Valid values are -1 for no limit or a positive number up to 2,147,483,647.

MaxNumDocAttachments

Specifies the type of security access for nodes.

Valid values are Parent or Entity.

Specify Entity to check node data based on security access for the entity and Parent to check node data based on security access for the parent.

A value for this property is required.

NodeSecurity

Specifies if new consolidation structures can coexist with past consolidation structures in the application.

Specify one of these values: l

Y to allow new and old organizational structures in the application

N to allow only active organizational structures l

OrgByPeriodApplication

Specifies if accounts in the application are protected by security.

Specify Y for security on accounts in the application or N for no security on accounts in the application.

SecurityForAccounts

338

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

Property Label

Security For

Security For Entities

Security For ICP

Security For Scenarios

Support Submission Phase for Account

Support Submission Phase for <DimensionAliasName>

Support Submission Phase for ICP

Use PVA For Balance

Accounts

Value Description Property Name

Specifies whether Custom dimensions in the application are protected by security. Specify Y for security on Custom dimensions in the application or N for no security on Custom dimensions in the application.

SecurityFor<DimensionAliasName>

Specifies whether entities in the application are protected by security. Specify Y for security on entities in the application or N for no security on entities in the application.

Specifies whether ICP members in the application are protected by security. Specify Y for security on

ICP members in the application or N for no security on ICP members in the application.

SecurityForEntities

SecurityForICP

Specifies whether scenarios in the application are protected by security. Specify Y for security on scenarios in the application or N for no security on scenarios in the application.

SecurityForScenarios

Specifies whether phased submissions in process management are supported for accounts in the application.

Valid values are True or False.

Default Value: False

SupportSubmissionPhaseForAccount

Specifies whether phased submissions in process management are supported for the Custom members in the application.

Valid values are True or False.

Default Value: False

SupportSubmissionPhaseFor<DimensionAliasName>

Specifies whether phased submissions in process management are supported for ICP members in the application.

Valid values are True or False.

Default Value: False

SupportSubmissionPhaseForICP

Specifies the default translation method for

BALANCE accounts.

Specify one of these values: l l

Y to use the periodic value (PVA) translation method

N to use the value at exchange rate (VAL) translation method

UsePVAForBalanceAccounts

Application

339

Property Label

Validation Account 2 to 9

FDM Application Name

Value Description Property Name

Use PVA For Flow Accounts Specifies the default translation method for FLOW accounts.

Specify one of these values: l l

Y to use the periodic value (PVA) translation method

N to use the value at exchange rate (VAL) translation method

Use Submission Phase

UsePVAForFlowAccounts

Specifies whether phased submissions in process management are used in the application.

Valid values are Y or N. Default is N.

UseSubmissionPhase

Validation Account Specifies the name of the account to use for validation. The account used for validation must be an existing account and must have a valid intersection with [ICPTop] in the Custom dimensions.

Validation accounts are used to ensure that the value equals zero before a process unit can be promoted to the next review level.

For example, Validation Account3 requires a valid account for Submission Phase4.

Name of the FDM application.

ValidationAccount

ValidationAccount2 to 9

FdmAppName

Organization by Period

Organizational structures can change for many reasons, including acquisitions, disposals, mergers, and reorganizations. The organization by period functionality enables the most recent consolidation structure to coexist with past structures in the same application.

To support organizational changes, Financial Management uses the Active system account to reflect the active or inactive consolidation status of a child into its parent. The Active account is an intercompany account that stores data at the parent level and uses the ICP dimension to store information about children. This account acts as a filter of the entity hierarchy.

For an ICP member that corresponds to a child of a parent, the Active account indicates to the system whether the child should be considered as an active consolidation member for the current year, scenario, and time period. Children that correspond to ICP members for which the Active account equals 0 are considered to be inactive children and are not consolidated. Children that correspond to ICP members for which the Active account equals 1 are considered to be active children and are consolidated. Active account values can be viewed or changed. Changes to active child data affect the parent, while changes to inactive child data do not affect the parent.

The Default Value For Active property controls the status of children for which the Active account is blank, so, every parent-child intersection does not need to be specified as active or inactive. By default, every child entity is active in relation to its parent unless otherwise specified.

340

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

Consolidation Method

Table 33 Consolidation Method Properties

Property Label Value Description

Alias

Control

Property Name

Member description (maximum of 80 characters)

To use the Alias property, you create an Alias dimension, define properties, and associate the

Alias dimension with another dimension. For example, you can create an Alias dimension with the values English, French, and Italian and then associate the Alias dimension with the

Consolidation Method dimension.

Alias

Specifies the threshold that corresponds to the type of control to be used by the calculation routine. Specify one of these values for this property: l l l

Blank

Limited

Full l

Control

Is Holding

Method

Name

Specifies if the consolidation method is used for the holding company.

Specify Y to use the method for the holding company or N to use a different method for the holding company.

IsHoldingMethod

Name for the consolidation method (required)

Names can contain up to 80 characters, including spaces, and cannot start with a space or contain these characters: l l l l l l l l l l l

Ampersand ( & )

Asterisk ( * )

At sign ( @ )

Comma ( , )

Curly brackets ( { } )

Double quote ( “ )

Minus sign ( - )

Number sign ( # )

Period ( . )

Plus sign ( + )

Semicolon ( ; )

Slash mark ( / ) l

Name

Percent Consol Specifies the consolidation percentage applied by the ownership calculation routine.

Specify one of these values: l l l

POWN

POWNMIN

PERCENTAGE

Note: If you select PERCENTAGE as the value, you must enter a value for the Percent

Consol Value property.

PercentConsol

Consolidation Method

341

Property Label Value Description

Percent Consol

Value

To Percent

Control

To Percent

Control

Compare

Used By Calc

Routine

Specifies the consolidation percentage value applied by the ownership calculation routine.

Note: This property is used by system only if PERCENTAGE is the value for the Percent Consol property.

Specify a value between 1 and 100.

Specifies the upper boundary of the range for percent control. Used for the ownership calculation routine.

Specify a value between 0 and 100.

Note: One of the method records must have a value of 100.

Property Name

PercentConsolValue

ToPercentControl

Specifies if the upper boundary of the range of percent control is included in the range. Used for the ownership calculation routine and the To Percent Control property. This property is optional if the Used By Calc Routine property is N.

Specify < or <= for this property.

Specifies if the method is used for the automatic ownership calculation routine.

Specify Y to use the method for ownership calculations or N not to use the method for ownership calculations.

ToPercentControlComp

UsedByCalcRoutine

Using Consolidation Methods

Consolidation methods are used during the consolidation and calculate ownership processes.

When you define consolidation methods in the metadata, the system automatically generates the [ConsolMethod] system list for the Custom1 dimension. The system list consists of all methods defined in the consolidation methods section of the metadata.

There are two ways to assign the consolidation method to an entity for use during consolidation.

You can assign the method manually through data load or data entry. You can also assign the method using the calculate ownership routine, which is based on the ultimate percent control assigned to the entity.

Assigning Consolidation Methods Manually

To enter consolidation method information manually, you can create a data grid with the following information:

POV: Scenario, Year, Period, View, Entity, Value, Account, C2, C3, C4

Scenario: Applicable scenario

Year: Applicable year

Period: Applicable period

Entity: A parent entity

Value: [None]

Account: [Method], a system generated account called Method

342

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

C2 [None]

C3: [None]

C4: [None]

Row: ICP entities (For parent entities, you can use the [ICP Entities] system list or the userdefined list of selected ICP entities.)

Column: Custom1 (You should use the [ConsolMethods] system-generated list.)

Method assignment information is stored in the account method of the data file of the parent entity. For each child of a parent, the system stores the consolidation method assignment in the

ICP dimension. The assigned method is used when the children are consolidated to the parent.

For an intersection of the grid, use 1 to indicate the method assignment to the ICP entity. For example, if a parent group has two children, A and B, and you assign the Global method to A and the Equity method to B, enter 1 in the intersection for the Global method and entity A, and

1 in the intersection for the Equity method and entity B.

Currency

Table 34

Member Properties in the Currency Dimension

Property Label Value Description

Alias

Display In ICT Specifies if currencies display in the drop-down list in the intercompany transactions module.

Specify Y to display currencies or N to not display currencies.

Property Name

Member description (maximum of 80 characters)

To use the Alias property, you create an Alias dimension, define properties, and associate the

Alias dimension with another dimension. For example, you can create an Alias dimension with the values English, French, and Italian and then associate the Alias dimension with the Currency dimension.

Alias

DisplayInICT

Currency

343

Property Label Value Description

Name

Scale

Name for the currency (required)

Names can contain up to 80 characters, including spaces, and cannot start with a space or contain these characters: l l l l l l l l l l l l

Ampersand ( & )

Asterisk ( * )

At sign ( @ )

Comma ( , )

Curly brackets ( { } )

Double quote ( “ )

Minus sign ( - )

Number sign ( # )

Period ( . )

Plus sign ( + )

Semicolon ( ; )

Slash mark ( / )

Specifies the unit in which amounts are displayed and stored for the currency by identifying where the decimal point is placed.

A value for this property is required.

Determines how the exchange rate must be entered. Specify one of these values for this property: l l l l l l l l l l

Blank = None

0 = Units

1 = Tens

2 = Hundreds

3 = Thousands

4 = Ten thousands

5 = Hundred thousands

6 = Millions

7 = Ten millions

8 = Hundred millions

9 = Billions l

Property Name

Name

Scale

Translation

Operator

Specifies the conversion calculation for intercompany transactions.

The default is blank.

Specify one of these values: l l

D to calculate the local currency by dividing the transaction currency by the rate

M to calculate the local currency by multiplying the transaction currency by the rate

<blank> to default the value to D l

TranslationOperator

The system member list [Currencies] is available for the Custom1 and Custom2 dimensions.

Currencies that you add to the application are added to the [Currencies] member list. The

344

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

[Currencies] list enables the entry of currency translation rates for pairs of currencies and provides a way of filtering out non-currency members.

System-Generated Accounts

When you create an application, system accounts for consolidation and ownership are automatically created for the application.

Note:

You can change only the description, security class, and decimal location for system accounts. All other properties for system accounts are predefined and cannot be modified.

Consolidation Accounts

The following system accounts are required for each parent in the Account dimension and are used in the consolidation process.

Note: All system accounts, except the Active account, that are used for consolidation are

BALANCE accounts. The Active account is a BALANCERECURRING account.

Table 35

System Accounts for Consolidation

System Account Value Description

Active

[PCON]

Consolidation status of a child into its parent. Yes if the child is consolidated into its parent. No if the child is not consolidated into its parent.

Percent consolidation. The percentage of the value of an entity that consolidates to the parent of the entity. Positive or negative numbers between -100 and 100, including 0. Default value is 100.

Note: For subsequent periods, derived as 0. Therefore, you must enter the percentage in all subsequent periods.

[POWN]

[DOWN]

[PCTRL]

Method

Consol1, Consol2,

Consol3

Percent ownership based on the shares of the entity that are owned by other entities. A positive number between 0 and 100. Default value is 100.

Percent of direct ownership. A positive number between 0 and 100. Default value is 100.

Percent control based on the voting shares of the entity that are owned by other entities. A positive number between

0 and 100. Default value is 100.

Consolidation method assigned to the entity. <None> or a selection from the list of available methods.

Consolidation methods. A number between 0 and 255.

Ownership Accounts

The following system accounts are used for ownership calculations.

System-Generated Accounts

345

Note: All system accounts that are used for ownership calculations are BALANCE accounts.

Table 36 System Accounts for Ownership

System Account Value Description

SharesOwned

VotingOwned

Total number of shares owned. Positive number or 0. Default is 0.

Note: Total shares owned must be less than or equal to the total shares outstanding.

Number of voting shares owned. Positive number or 0. Default value is 0.

Note: Total voting shares owned must be less than or equal to the total voting shares outstanding.

SharesOutstanding Total number of shares outstanding or the percentage of shares outstanding. Positive number or 0. Default value is

Note: Enter the number of shares outstanding, or enter shares outstanding as a percentage. Enter 100 for percentage.

VotingOutstanding Number of voting shares outstanding. A positive number or 0. Default value is 0.

Note: Enter the number of voting shares outstanding, or enter voting shares outstanding as a percentage. Enter

100 for percentage.

Shares%Owned Calculated by system.

Voting%Owned Calculated by system.

Setting Up Intercompany Partners

Intercompany transactions are managed across the Intercompany Partner (ICP) dimension. The

ICP dimension stores all intercompany balances that exist for an account. ICP is a reserved dimension used in combination with the Account dimension and Custom dimensions to track and eliminate intercompany transaction details.

To set up an application for intercompany transactions, you must perform these actions: l l

Indicate the accounts that perform intercompany transactions and indicate a plug account for each intercompany account (Is ICP and Plug Account properties in account metadata)

Indicate the entities that perform intercompany transactions (Is ICP property in entity metadata)

When you create intercompany transactions, each group must have at least one intercompany account and one plug account. You designate an account as intercompany by selecting the Is

ICP property for the account. When an account is designated as intercompany and intercompany transactions are entered, eliminating or reversing entries are generated in the [Elimination] value dimension member through the consolidation process.

A plug account is an account that, when eliminations are completed, stores the difference between two intercompany accounts. A plug account can be set up as an ICP account. For a plug account to be detailed by ICP, set the Is ICP property to Y or R so that the system writes eliminations to the corresponding ICP member. If you do not want a plug account to be detailed

346

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

by ICP, set the Is ICP property to N so that the system writes eliminations to [ICP None]. During consolidation, transactions between valid intercompany entities are eliminated.

Table 37 System-Generated ICP Elements

System-Generated ICP Element Value Description

[ICP Top]

[ICP None]

[ICP Entities]

Specifies the top intercompany member

Specifies that no intercompany member is used

Specifies the entities that are designated for intercompany transactions

Table 38 ICP Properties

Property Label Value Description Property Name

Alias

Default Parent

Name

Member description (maximum of 80 characters)

To use the Alias property, you create an Alias dimension, define properties, and associate the

Alias dimension with another dimension. For example, you can create an Alias dimension with the values English, French, and Italian and then associate the Alias dimension with the ICP dimension.

Alias

The default parent for the ICP. The default parent value is a derived value and you cannot enter a value.

DefaultParent

Name for the ICP (required)

Names are defined and cannot be changed.

Name

Security Class Name of the security class that defines the users who can access the ICP data (can contain up to 80 characters)

To enter a value for this property, you must associate the ICP and Security Class dimensions.

SecurityClass

Submission Group The Submission group (0 to 99).

The default, blank, defaults to 1. If the submission group is set to zero (0), the ICP is not included in the review process.

SubmissionGroup

Editing System-Generated Value Members

When you create an application, Value members are automatically created for the application.

Note: You can modify only the description for Value members. All other properties are predefined and cannot be modified.

After you load metadata, Financial Management automatically creates three Value dimension members for each currency in your application: CurrencyName, CurrencyName Adjs, and

CurrencyName Total, where CurrencyName is the currency label. For example, for a currency of USD, Financial Management creates the following Value dimension members: USD, USD

Adjs, and USD Total.

Setting Up Intercompany Partners

347

Metadata Filtering Based on Security

When you filter metadata based on security, users see only the elements of the Scenario, Entity,

ICP, Account, and Custom dimensions to which they have access. You set up metadata filtering at the application level by setting the EnableMetadataSecurityFiltering property to Y. For elements a user can view in a hierarchy, assign a security class and assign the user metadata access to the security class.

Users have implied access to the parents and ancestors of members to which they have access.

With implied access, users see ancestors and parents in a hierarchical tree structure but cannot access them. For example, in the following tree structure, the user has access to only Connecticut even though the parents (UnitedStates and Imbler) and the ancestors (Management and

Regional) are displayed in the tree.

Metadata Referential Integrity

To prevent a referential integrity problem from occurring in the application, Financial

Management verifies that metadata changes are valid to the application in its current state before accepting the changes.

When you load metadata, the system compares the metadata load file with the metadata elements in the application. All changes are recorded, and some changes are checked against existing data.

Modifications that cause referential integrity problems are not allowed.

Note: When you load metadata, make sure that the Check Integrity option is selected.

Metadata Property Changes That Affect Referential Integrity

The following table provides information about specific changes in metadata properties that require the system to check existing data in regard to the metadata file that you are loading. Only metadata properties that have an effect on referential integrity are listed in the table.

Table 39 Metadata Referential Integrity Checks

Dimension Metadata Property Change Condition That Prevents Metadata From Loading

Account Is Calculated (from N to Y) Checks to see if a journal or template exists for the account, and, if found, prevents the metadata from loading.

348

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

Dimension Metadata Property Change

Custom

Condition That Prevents Metadata From Loading

Is ICP (from Y to R)

Is ICP (from Y to N or from R to

Checks to see if a journal or template exists for the account and ICP=<Entity>, and, if found, prevents the metadata from loading.

Checks to see if a journal or template exists for the account and ICP <> [ICP None] (because the account is not an intercompany account and ICP members other than [ICP None] is invalid), and, if found, prevents the metadata from loading.

Uses Line Items (from Y to N or from N to Y)

Checks to see if regular data exists for the scenario and account, and, if found, prevents the metadata from loading.

Note: From Y to N, the system does not allow access to line-item detail.

Is Calculated (from N to Y)

Entity

Scenario

Currency

Allow Adjustments (from Y to

Allow Adjustments From

Children (from Y to N)

Is ICP (from Y to N)

Zero View For Adjustments

Uses Line Items

Checks to see if a journal or template exists for this Custom dimension, and, if found, prevents the metadata from loading.

Checks to see if a journal exists for <Entity Currency Adjs> or <Parent Currency Adjs>, and, if found, prevents the metadata from loading.

For Allow Adjustments, checks to see if a journal with <Entity Curr Adjs> or <Parent Currency

Adjs> exists for the entity, and, if found, prevents the metadata from loading.

For Allow Adjustments From Children, checks to see if a journal with [Parent Adjs] or

[Contribution Adjs] exists for the entity, and, if found, prevents the metadata from loading.

Checks to see if a journal in which the entity is used in the ICP dimension exists, and, if found, prevents the metadata from loading.

Checks to see if a journal exists for the scenario, and, if found, prevents the metadata from loading.

Checks to see if regular data exists for an account with this property enabled for the specified scenario, and, if found, prevents the metadata from loading.

Application Default Value For Active Checks to see if a journal or recurring template exists for [Parent Adjs] or [Contribution

Adjs], and, if found, prevents the metadata from loading.

The system also checks for invalid points of view between the load file and the metadata in the application. If a dimension member is not in the load file but exists in a journal in the application, the metadata load is prevented.

Metadata Log File Referential Integrity Errors

In the metadata log file, referential integrity errors are displayed under the following section:

Metadata referential integrity check started at

Each line in the referential integrity check section refers to a metadata integrity error in the load file. Errors found during the integrity check are displayed in the following format:

Journals::SINGLECA1 Scenario::Actual Year::2012

Value::[Contribution Adjs]

Period::January has 1 occurrences of

Changed::[SCENARIO::Actual::ZeroViewForAdj: Periodic -> YTD]

Metadata Referential Integrity

349

This example shows that the metadata integrity error occurs in the SINGLECA1 journal with the following point of view: Scenario Actual, Year 2012, Value [Contribution Adjs], Period

January. The error is that the ZeroViewForAdj property for the Actual scenario was changed from Periodic to YTD. This change is not allowed because a journal exists for the Actual scenario.

l l l

Dimension Naming Restrictions

When naming Consolidation dimensions, follow these rules:

Names can include up to 80 characters.

Names cannot start with an underscore, any whitespace character, or any non-alphanumeric character. After the first character, names can have any whitespace character, any nonalphanumeric character, and any alphanumeric character including the underscore.

Do not include these words in dimension names

ALL AND ASSIGN AVERAGE CALC CALCMBR

COPYFORWARD CROSSDIM CURMBRNAME

DIM DIMNAME DIV DYNAMIC EMPTYPARM EQ

EQOP EXCEPT EXP EXPERROR FLOAT

FUNCTION GE GEN

GENRANGE GROUP GT ID IDERROR

INTEGER LE LEVELRANGE LOOPBLOCK

LOOPPARMS LT MBR MBRNAME

MBRONLY MINUS MISSING MUL MULOP

NE NON NONINPUT NOT

OR PAREN PARENPARM PERCENT PLUS RELOP

SET SKIPBOTH SKIPMISSING SKIPNONE

SKIPZERO TO TOLOCALRATE TRAILMISSING

TRAILSUM UMINUS UPPER VARORXMBR

XMBRONLY $$UNIVERSE$$ #MISSING #MI l l

Using Consolidation Flat Files Created in 9.3.1

If you are using .ads flat files created in previous releases, you must make manual updates before using them in the current release. In your flat file, make these updates:

You must add

PhasedSubStartYear

to the scenario dimension in the .ads file

You must remove the

DefaultParent

from the .ads file

Working with Financial Management 9.3.1 and

Performance Management Architect

If you are using Financial Management 9.3.1 with the current release of Performance

Management Architect, you can use all of the features available in this release. Follow the standard process for upgrading Performance Management Architect, Oracle Hyperion

Enterprise Performance Management Workspace, and Shared Services. No additional steps are necessary.

350

Working with Financial Management Dimensions

Working with Planning

Dimensions

In This Chapter

Properties Applicable to All Planning Dimensions .................................................... 352

Properties Common to Multiple Planning Dimensions ............................................... 354

Account ................................................................................................... 357

Currency .................................................................................................. 361

Entity ...................................................................................................... 363

Period ..................................................................................................... 364

Scenario .................................................................................................. 365

Version .................................................................................................... 366

Year........................................................................................................ 367

Custom Dimensions ..................................................................................... 368

Planning Aliases.......................................................................................... 369

Planning Attributes....................................................................................... 369

Working with Planning 9.3.1 and Performance Management Architect ............................ 369

Considerations for Working with Public Sector Planning and Budgeting............................ 370

Considerations for Working with Essbase.............................................................. 370

Naming Restrictions for Applications (Essbase) ...................................................... 371

Naming Restrictions for Dimensions, Members, and Aliases ........................................ 372

Working with Planning Flat Files ....................................................................... 373

351

Properties Applicable to All Planning Dimensions

Property

Label

Description Property Name

Plan Name Up to eight characters.

There are six plan types available in Planning (across various applications): Plan1, Plan2,

Plan3, Workforce, Capital Asset, and HCP. However, the total number of plan types for a given application cannot exceed five.

Plan1, Plan2, and Plan3 are standard plan types that are available for all Planning applications.

Standard Planning applications can use these additional modules: Workforce and Capital

Asset.

Public Sector Planning and Budgeting applications can use one additional module: HCP.

Note: Public Sector Planning and Budgeting does not support Workforce Planning or

Capital Asset Planning, so if you use those modules, set them up as separate applications.

For Workforce Planning and Capital Asset Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Workforce

Planning Administrator's Guide and Oracle Hyperion Capital Asset Planning

Administrator's Guide. For Public Sector Planning and Budgeting, see the Oracle Hyperion

Public Sector Planning and Budgeting User's Guide.

Default Value: Plan1: True, Plan2: True, Plan3: True, Wrkforce: False, Capital Asset: False,

HCP: False

Plan1Name, Plan2Name,

Plan3Name,

PlanWrkforceName,

PlanCapexName,

PlanHCPName

Valid For Plan The standard Planning application has up to three plan types.

For Workforce Planning and Capital Asset Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Workforce

Planning Administrator's Guide and Oracle Hyperion Capital Asset Planning

Administrator's Guide.

An Essbase database is created for each plan type. As you create accounts, entities, and other dimensions, you associate them with plan types, so the database for each plan type contains only the dimensions, members, and data values relevant to that plan type.

This allows for optimal application design, size, and performance. You must set up at least one plan type. (The number of plan types depends on the needs of your organization.

) You cannot reduce the number of plan types or change the plan type names after you create the application.

Caution! Deselecting a plan type for dimension members after data is entered into applications may result in loss of data when applications are refreshed. For Account members, data is lost if the deselected plan type is the source plan type.

Plan types are inherited from parents to child members. If you select a different plan type for a parent member, all descendant members in that hierarchy are also updated. To set a different plan type for certain members, select them individually and set a different property.

Note: When you define the value for this property at the parent level, all descendants automatically inherit the value. If the value is overridden for a descendant member of the original parent, its own descendants inherit the new value.

This property value is a relationship value. If you make changes to this value, it is not automatically changed for the members in other hierarchies.

Default Value: Plan1: True, Plan2: True, Plan3: True, Wrkforce: False, Capital Asset: False

Date Format Set the date format as MM-DD-YYYY or DD-MM-YYYY.

Default Value: MM-DD-YYYY

AppValidForPlan1,

AppValidForPlan2,

AppValidForPlan3,

AppValidForWrkforce,

AppValidForCapex

DateFormat

352

Working with Planning Dimensions

Property

Label

Default

Currency

Multiple

Currencies

Base Time

Period

Weeks

Fiscal Start

Year

Fiscal Year

First Month

Default Alias

Table

Description Property Name

This is the default currency for the application and application entities.

Default Value: N/A

DefaultCurrency

Indicates that the application supports multiple currencies. Once specified, this cannot be changed. A Currency dimension is required. Multiple currency support is available for level 0 members, regardless of base currency.

Performance Management Architect does not create Currency dimensions automatically.

HSP_Rates is created during Planning application creation for multi-currency applications; it is not defined in Performance Management Architect. HSP_Rates is available in the Performance Settings dialog box to tune Planning application performance.

Default Value: True

MultiCurrency

Defines the bottom-level time period in the application to set how calendars roll up. Select the appropriate value for the Period dimension structure: l l

12 Months (months roll up into quarters, and quarters into years)

Quarters

Custom (such as weeks or days) l

BaseTimePeriod

Default Value: 12 months

Pattern for fiscal weeks in a month: Even, 445, 454, or 544. Sets how data entered into a summary time period spreads among base time periods.

If you select a weekly pattern other than Even, Planning treats quarterly values as if they were divided into 13 weeks, and distributes the weeks according to the selected pattern.

Weekly patterns are available only after selecting the base time period option 12 Months.

Default Value: Even

The fiscal start year for the application. Fiscal Start Year uses a four digit year format, such as 2008 or 2009. Do not change this setting after creating the application.

WeeksDistribution,

WeeksDistributionMember

AppStartYear

Default Value: N/A

The fiscal year start month for an application that has a Base Time Period set to 12

Months. For other Base Time Period types, this field is not relevant. Do not change the

Fiscal Year First Month for the application after it has been deployed.

Default Value: N/A

Required for each application. If other alias tables are not created, aliases are stored in the Default table (which cannot be deleted). You can create up to nine additional alias tables.

To create alias tables in Performance Management Architect, create a dimension of type

Alias, and create a child member named Default. This member is the default alias table required by Planning and Essbase. You can create additional alias tables by adding child members to the Alias dimension. Create dimension associations to associate the Alias dimension to the main or base dimension, such as Account, Entity, or a user-defined dimension. You can change the default alias table by selecting the Alias dimension and changing the Default Member property in the System category.

Default Value: default

StartMonth

DefaultAliasTable

Properties Applicable to All Planning Dimensions

353

Properties Common to Multiple Planning Dimensions

Property

Label

Description Property Name

Valid for Plan Plan1, Plan2, Plan 3, Workforce, Capital Asset, and HCP. (The Workforce, Capital Asset, and

HCP plan types pertain to separate modules. See the Oracle Hyperion Workforce Planning

Administrator's Guide, the Oracle Hyperion Capital Asset Planning Administrator's Guide, or the Oracle Hyperion Workforce Planning Administrator's Guide.)

Assign plan type access for members. Not assigning a plan type to a member prevents its children from accessing that plan type. For Custom dimensions, deselecting makes all dimension members invalid for the deselected plan type.

When moving members, if the new parent is valid for different plan types, members remain valid only for the plan types they have in common with the new parent.

Note: Public Sector Planning and Budgeting does not support Workforce Planning or Capital

Asset Planning, so if you use those modules, set them up as separate applications.

AppValidForPlan1,

AppValidForPlan2,

AppValidForPlan3,

AppValidForWrkforce,

AppValidForCapex,

AppValidForHCP

354

Working with Planning Dimensions

Property

Label

Description Property Name

Data Storage Determines how data is stored in the database and enables optimization of performance and disk usage: l l l l l l

StoreData: Stores data values of members. Do not set a parent member to Store if its children are set to Dynamic Calc; when users save and refresh data forms, the new total for the parent is not calculated.

NeverShare: Use for parent members that have only one child member aggregating to that parent, to apply security to the child member.

DynamicCalc: Use for members of dense dimensions or for data values that are being accessed concurrently by many users. In most cases, use for calculating members of sparse dimensions. Do not use for base-level members for which users enter data. Data values are not saved for Dynamic Calc members. Do not use for a parent member if data is entered for the member in target versions. Parent members set to Dynamic Calc are read-only in target versions. The Essbase limit is 100 children under a dynamic calc parent.

Caution! Changing the member storage to Dynamic Calc may result in loss of data, depending on how the data was derived. You may need to update outlines, calculations, or both to get the dynamically calculated value.

DynamicCalcAndStore: Calculates the data values of the member, then stores the values.

In most cases, you can optimize calculations and lower disk usage by using Dynamic Calc instead of Dynamic Calc and Store when calculating members of sparse dimensions with complex formulas or members that users retrieve frequently.

LabelOnly: Use for virtual members to aid navigation or minimize database space, not for data. Members can display values. In multi-currency applications, you cannot apply

LabelOnly data storage to the top members in these dimensions because this is where the exchange rates are stored: Entity, Versions, Currencies, and user-defined custom dimensions, which must use Never Share. Do not use for level 0 members. For data forms, do not use a label-only parent following its first child member.

ShareData: Allow members in the same dimension to share data values, enabling alternate rollup structures in the application. For shared members, you must set Data Storage to

Share Data. Otherwise, the shared member is not added when the application is deployed to Planning.

DataStorage

Two Pass

Calculation

UDA

This property value is a relationship value. If you make changes to this value, it is not automatically changed for the members in other hierarchies.

Default Value: NeverShare

Recalculate data values of members that are based on data values of the parent member or other members. Available for Account and Entity members with Dynamic Calc or Dynamic Calc and Store properties

Default Value: False

TwoPassCalc

Defines any UDA (user-defined attribute) associated with the member. To enter multiple UDAs for a member, place a comma between the UDA members. For additional information on UDAs, see the Oracle Essbase Database Administrator's Guide.

The default UDA members are

HSP_NOLINK

and

HSP_UDF

Default Value: N/A

UDA

Properties Common to Multiple Planning Dimensions

355

Property

Label

Member

Formula

Alias

Aggregation

Data Type

Description Property Name

An outline formula that is made up of a combination of operators, calculation functions, dimension and member names, and numeric constants to calculate values for individual members.

Default Value: N/A

BSOMemberFormula

Defines the alias table in which to store the alias name or an alternate member name. Use naming rules defined in

“Naming Restrictions for Dimensions, Members, and Aliases” on page

“Properties Applicable to All Planning Dimensions” on page 352 , such as:

Default Value: N/A

Alias

For Plan1, Plan2, Plan3, Workforce, Capital Asset or HCP, determine how children roll up into parents during consolidation: l l l l l l

+ (addition)

- (subtraction)

* (multiplication)

/ (division)

% (percent)

~ (ignore during consolidation)

Never (do not aggregate, regardless of hierarchy) l

Plan1Aggregation,

Plan2Aggregation,

Plan3Aggregation,

WrkforceAggregation,

CapexAggregation,

HCPAggregation

This property value is a relationship value. If you make changes to this value, it is not automatically changed for the members in other hierarchies.

Default Value: Plan1: +, Plan2: +, Plan3: +, Wrkforce: ~, Capital Asset: ~, HCP: ~

How values are stored and displayed: l l l l l l

Currency

Non Currency

Percentage

Smart List

Date

Text

Unspecified l

DataType

For accounts, if Data Type is set to any value except Currency, you must set Exchange Rate

Type to None.

Default Value: Unspecified

356

Working with Planning Dimensions

Property

Label

Description Property Name

Attribute Type Attribute values to associate with the selected member, of type Text, Boolean, Date, or Number.

For Planning, attribute values can only be assigned to a single level within a dimension.

Create attribute values for attributes assigned to dimension members. You can filter members by attribute values when creating data forms and reports.

You can assign attributes only to sparse dimensions. You cannot assign attributes to labelonly members. If you need to add an attribute to a dense dimension, you must change that dimension to sparse for all plan types. If you change a dimension from sparse to dense, all attributes and attribute values for the dimension are automatically deleted.

When you delete attribute members, all associated attribute values are also deleted. The values are removed from any members to which they had been assigned, and the attribute is removed from any dimensions to which it had been assigned.

Default Value: Text

Smart List

AttributeDataType

A unique name containing alphanumeric and underscore characters, and no special characters or spaces. For more information, see “Creating Smart Lists.”

Default Value: N/A

SmartList l l l l l l l l l

Account

In addition to the properties described in the table, Account dimension members use most of the common properties described in

Valid for Plan

Two Pass Calculation

Aggregation

UDA

Member Formula

Alias

Data Storage

Smart List

Data Type

Accounts specify information needed from budget planners. You can define calculations in the account structure. Account dimensions must have an association with Attribute and Alias dimensions in order to assign attribute values and aliases to members of the dimension. If accounts are valid for multiple plan types, specify the source plan type to determine which database stores the account value. For accounts with Dynamic Calc or Dynamic Calc and Store properties, you can use Two Pass Calculation to recalculate data values of members that are based on data values of the parent member or other members.

Account

357

Property

Label

Time

Balance

Skip Value

Expense

Reporting

Account

Type

Exchange

Rate Type

Description Property Name

Set the method for calculating the value of summary time periods: None, Flow, First, Balance, Average,

Fill, Weighted Average - Actual Actual, Weighted Average - Actual 365, Last.

Default Value: N/A

TimeBalance

If the time balance property is First, Balance, or Average, specify how database calculations treat zeros and missing values when calculating parent values: l l l

None: Zeros and #MISSING values are considered

Missing: Excludes #MISSING values

Zeroes: Excludes zero values

Missing and Zeroes: Excludes #MISSING and zero values l

SkipValue

Default Value: None

Set whether the account is treated as an expense for variance reporting: l

Expense: Actual value is subtracted from budgeted value

Non Expense: Budgeted value is subtracted from actual value l

VarianceReporting

Default Value: Non-Expense

Define account time balance (how values flow over time) and sign behavior for variance reporting:

Expense, Revenue, Asset, Liability, Equity, and Saved Assumption.

Default Value: Revenue if a new member is created at root level. Otherwise it inherits the value from the parent.

Set how numeric values are stored in Account members and used to calculate values. This setting determines which exchange rate is used during calculations to calculate reporting currency values.

For accounts with Currency data type, these options are valid for any time period: l l l

None

Average: Average exchange rate

Ending: Ending exchange rate

Historical: Exchange rate in effect at some point l

AccountType

ExchangeRateType

For accounts, if Data Type is set to any value except Currency, Exchange Rate Type must be set to

None.

Default Value: Average (or None if Data Type is not set to Currency)

358

Working with Planning Dimensions

Property

Label

Source Plan

Type

Description Property Name

If an account is used in multiple plan types, the plan type database that stores the account value.

When an Account member is moved, valid plan types are determined by what is common to the member and its new parents. If the new parent has a different source plan type, the source plan type of the member is set to the first new valid plan type of that member.

When you define the value for this property at the parent level, all descendants automatically inherit the value. If the value is overridden for a descendant member of the original parent, its own descendants inherit the new value. If the new parent of an Account member has another source plan type, the source plan type is set to the first new valid plan type of that member.

Default Value: Plan1

SourcePlanType

Valid Combinations of Account Types and Dependent

Properties

Account Type

Revenue

Time Balance Variance Reporting Purpose

Flow Non-Expense Source of income

Expense

Asset

Flow

Balance

Liability and Equity Balance

Expense

Non-Expense

Saved Assumption User-defined User-defined

Cost of doing business

Company resource

Residual interest or obligation to creditors

Centralized planning assumptions to ensure consistency across an application

Time Balance Property Examples

Time balance and variance reporting settings are system-defined.

Time Balance

Property

Flow

Description

Aggregate of values for a summary time period as the period total.

First

Balance

Average

Fill

Example

Beginning value in a summary time period as the period total.

Ending value in a summary time period as the period total.

Average

The value for the parent time period is filled into its descendents. If a child value changes, the default aggregation logic applies up to its parent.

Jan = 10, Feb =15, Mar = 20, Q1 =

Jan = 10, Feb = 15, Mar = 20, Q1

= 10

Jan = 10, Feb = 15, Mar = 20, Q1

= 20

Jan = 10, Feb = 15, Mar = 20, Q1

= 15

Jan = 20, Feb = 20, Mar = 20, Q1

= 20

Account

359

Time Balance

Property

Description

Weighted

Average -

Actual_Actual

Weighted

Average -

Actual_365

Weighted daily average, based on the actual number of days in a year. Accounts for leap year, in which February has 29 days. In the example, the average for Q1 is calculated: (1) Multiply each value in Q1 by the number of days in the month,

(2) Sum these values, (3) Divide the total by the number of days in Q1. Assuming it is a leap year, the result is calculated: (10 * 31 + 15 * 29 + 20 * 31) / 91 =

Example

Jan = 10, Feb = 15, Mar = 20, Q1

= 5

A weighted daily average, based on 365 days in a year, assuming that February has 28 days. Does not account for leap years. In the example, the average for Q1 is calculated: (1) Multiply each value in Q1 by the number of days in the month,

(2) Sum these values, (3) Divide the total by the number of days in Q1. Assuming it is not a leap year, the result is calculated: (10 * 31 + 15 * 28 + 20 * 31) / 90

= 15

Jan = 10, Feb = 15, Mar = 20, Q1

= 15

You can use the Weighted Average - Actual_Actual and Weighted Average - Actual_365 properties only with standard monthly calendars that roll up to four quarters. For information on how Planning calculates and spreads data, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning User's Guide.

Note: For Planning application deployments: If Time Balance is set to Last, the property is sent to Planning as Balance; If Time Balance is set to None, the property is sent to Planning as

Flow.

Examples of Account Calculation for Zeros and Missing Values

These examples assume that Time Balance is set to First.

Skip Option Example

None

Missing

Zeros

Missing and

Zeros

Jan = 0, Feb = 20, Mar = 25, Q1 = 0

The value of the first child (Jan) is 0, and zero values are considered when calculating the parent value.

Jan = #MISSING, Feb = 20, Mar = 25, Q1 = 20

The value of the first child (Jan) is #MISSING, and #MISSING values are not considered when calculating parent values, so Q1 = second child (Feb), or 20.

Jan = 0, Feb = 20, Mar = 25, Q1 = 20

The value of the first child (Jan) is 0, and zero values are not considered when calculating parent values, so Q1 = second child (Feb), or 20.

Jan = 0, Feb = #MISSING, Mar = 25, Q1 = 25

The value of the first child (Jan) is zero, and second child (Feb) is #MISSING. Because #MISSING and zero values are not considered when calculating parent values, Q1 = third child (Mar), or 25.

360

Working with Planning Dimensions

l l l l l l l l l l

Currency

In addition to the properties described in the table, Currency dimension members use most of the common properties described in

“Properties Applicable to All Planning Dimensions” on page 352 , such as:

Valid for Plan

Two Pass Calculation

UDA

Member Formula

Alias

Data Storage

Smart List

Data Type

Attribute Values

Apply Security

You can plan, forecast, and analyze financial information in multiple currencies. You can set: l l l l

Which currencies are used by applications for reporting

How currencies display in reports and data forms

How currencies are translated into other currencies

Whether a third currency is used (triangulation currency)

When currency conversions occur l

For information on managing exchange rates, currency conversion, and exchange rate tables, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide.

Property Label

Thousands

Separator

Description l l l l l

None: 1000

Comma: 1,000

Dot: 1.000

Space: 1 000

Currency Setting: Setting for the currency

Decimal Separator

Default Value: Comma l l l

Dot: 1.00

Comma: 1,00

Currency Setting: Setting for the currency

Default Value: Dot

Property Name

ThousandSep

DecimalSep

Currency

361

Property Label

Negative Sign

Negative Color

Scale

Currency Code

Symbol

Triangulation

Currency

Description l l l l

Prefixed Minus: -1000

Suffixed Minus: 1000-

Parentheses: (1000)

Currency Setting: Setting for the currency

Default Value: Prefixed Minus l l l

Black: Negative numbers in black

Red: Negative numbers in red

Currency Setting: Setting for the currency

Property Name

NegativeSign

NegativeColor

Default Value: Red

Scaling determines the display of values in whole numbers, tens, hundreds, thousands, millions, and so on. Set how to enter and display the currency. For example, 3 yen represents

3000 yen if scaling is set to Thousands.

l l l l l l l l l

Whole

Tens

Hundreds

Thousands

TThousands

HThousands

Millions

TMillions

HMillions

Billions l

Scale

Default Value: Whole

Market-established abbreviation for the currency name, or custom currency code that you create.

Default Value: N/A

CurrencyCode

Market-established currency symbol for the currency name, for example,

for US Dollars.

Default Value: N/A

Symbol

Interim currency for currency conversion. If you modify a triangulation currency, you must re-enter exchange rates for the triangulation currency property and refresh the application to transfer and store the exchange rates. You cannot select the default currency as a triangulation currency.

Default Value: N/A

TriangulationCurrency

362

Working with Planning Dimensions

Property Label Description

Reporting Currency Currency used to prepare financial statements. Converted reporting currency values are stored and read-only for all users.

Default Value: N/A

Property Name

ReptCurrency l l l l l l l l l

Entity

In addition to the properties described in the table, Entity dimension members use most of the common properties described in

“Properties Applicable to All Planning Dimensions” on page

352 , such as:

Valid for Plan

Aggregation

UDA

Member Formula

Alias

Data Storage

Smart List

Data Type

Attribute Values

You can create Entity members for groups that submit plans for approval, such as regions, countries, and departments. Data forms support multiple currencies per entity, enabling data entry for multiple currencies and reporting against one currency. You can set the currency for entered values, which are converted to other currencies with defined exchange rates.

The Entity dimension requires an association with the Currency dimension in order to enter a value for Base Currency. For multi-currency applications, the Currency dimension must be associated with the base entity dimension. Entity dimensions require an association with

Attribute and Alias dimensions to be able to assign attribute values and aliases to members of the dimension. You can activate associations for applications in the Shared Library by rightclicking the name and selecting Activate all Associations.

Typically, Entity members prepare different plans. When defining Entity members, specify plan types for which they are valid. Because data forms are associated with plan types, you can control which entity members can enter data for each plan type.

Entity

363

Property

Label

Currency

Description

Enter the three-letter currency code, for example, USD (for US dollars).

For multi-currency applications, specify the base currency for each Entity member.

Not applicable for aggregate storage outlines.

Default Value: Application's default currency

Property

Name

Currency l l l l l l l l l

Period

In addition to the properties described in the table, Period dimension members use most of the common properties described in

“Properties Applicable to All Planning Dimensions” on page

352 , such as:

Valid for Plan

Aggregation

UDA

Member Formula

Alias

Data Storage

Smart List

Data Type

Attribute Values

Use the Period dimension to view and change the yearly rollup structure. You can specify base time periods and the number of weeks.

After the calendar is created, you cannot change the base time period. An application can have up to 500 time periods. Actual limits are defined by a combination of calendar years and time periods. The number of time periods and years also depends on whether your application uses multiple currencies. These practical limits are recommended: 400 time periods per year and 27 years, or 360 time periods per year and 30 years.

You can add and change summary time periods or the BegBalance member, including updating the name, description, alias, starting period, and ending period. You cannot skip or change the order of base time periods. The range cannot extend beyond the current fiscal year. To enforce a balanced hierarchy for 12 Month and Quarterly base Time Periods, all base members must be the same number of levels from the root.

For a successful first deployment, Planning applications must include the required members,

BegBalance and YearTotal, and you must not rename these members prior to the first deployment. (YearTotal is the summary time period that aggregates Quarters or Weeks for

364

Working with Planning Dimensions

custom time periods.) After the first deployment, however, you can rename the BegBalnace and

YearTotal members in the Application Library.

Note: If renaming the BegBalance and YearTotal members caused the first deployment to fail, rename them “BegBalance” and “YearTotal”, redeploy the application, and then rename these members again with unique names in the Application Library.

Property Label Description

Use Beginning Balance Whether to use the BegBalance time period.

Default Value: N/A

Period Type The type of Period: Base Time Period, Summary Time Period, Year Time Period, or Alternate

Time Period.

Property Name

UseBegBalance

PeriodType l l

Considerations for Alternate Hierarchies in Period

Dimensions

When using alternate hierarchies, note these considerations:

The Period type Alternate Time Period must be set on all alternate hierarchy members.

The parent for an alternate hierarchy member can be either the root member of the Period dimension (such as Period) or another alternate hierarchy member.

l l l l l l l l

Scenario

In addition to the properties described in the table, Scenario dimension members use most of the common properties described in

“Properties Applicable to All Planning Dimensions” on page 352 , such as:

Valid for Plan

Aggregation

UDA

Member Formula

Alias

Data Storage

Smart List

Data Type

You can create Scenario dimensions to group data. Each Scenario contains data for accounts and other dimensions of each entity. After users enter Entity and Version data, they can submit or promote the data to other users for review and approval. The intersection of Entity, Scenario,

Scenario

365

and Version is called a planning unit. Planning tracks planning unit status through the review process. Scenarios can cover different time spans. The Scenario dimension requires an association with Period and Year dimensions to enter start and end time period values.

Use scenarios to: l l

Apply different planning methods.

Create forecasts and budgets.

Store historical actuals.

Property Label

Enable Process

Management

Start Year, End Year, Start

Period, End Period

Use Beginning Balance

Exchange Rate Table

Description Property Name

Whether the Scenario is enabled for process management. This allows managing a planning unit that contains this member.

Default Value: True

EnableProcessManagement

A range of years and time periods for which the Scenario is valid. When users access data forms, they can enter into that scenario only years and periods within the range. You can modify the time range of scenarios.

Default Value: N/A

StartYear, EndYear,

StartPeriod, EndPeriod

Whether to use the BegBalance time period.

Default Value: N/A

UseBegBalance

Only for multi-currency applications. Assign an exchange rate table to the scenario.

Default Value: N/A

ExchangeRateTable

You can specify access permissions for Scenario members to determine whether groups or users can view or modify data. For information about setting access permissions for Planning, see the

Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide.

When you delete a Scenario, all planning units that use the Scenario (including data) are deleted.

You cannot delete a Scenario that is used in a planning unit that is started or assigned to an axis

(row or column) on a data form. You must first remove references to the Scenario from data forms and assign a different Scenario.

l l l l l

Version

In addition to the properties described in the table, Version dimension members use most of the common properties described in

“Properties Applicable to All Planning Dimensions” on page 352 , such as:

Valid for Plan

Aggregation

UDA

Member Formula

Alias

366

Working with Planning Dimensions

l l l

Data Storage

Smart List

Data Type

Use the Version dimension to: l l l

Provide multiple iterations of a plan, such as preliminary and final

Model possible outcomes based on assumptions such as best case and worst case

Control plan data, such as internal and external

Facilitate target setting l

Versions are independent of Scenarios. You can change Version names and access permissions.

The application must have at least one Version. For information on setting access permissions, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide.

Table 40 Version Properties

Property Label Description

Enable Process

Management

Version Type

Select whether the Version is enabled for process management. This allows for managing a planning unit that contains this Version member. Not available for target versions.

Default Value: N/A

Property Name

EnableProcessManagement

Target: Users enter data for members at any level, and use business rules to distribute values from parent members to descendants.

Use target versions to set high-level targets for plans. Planners working with bottomup versions can reference targets when entering plan data.

Target versions use top-down budgeting. Workflow tasks are not allowed, and children of target members must be blank (for example, #MISSING) to enable data input at the top level. Target members must be set to Store (Dynamic Calc overrides data input with the sum of children).

Bottom Up: Users enter data into bottom-level members. Parent-level members are read-only. Values for parent members are aggregated from bottom level members.

Default Value: Bottom Up

VersionType l l l l l

Year

Year dimension members use most of the common properties described in “Properties

Applicable to All Planning Dimensions” on page 352

, such as:

Valid for Plan

UDA

Member Formula

Alias

Data Storage

Year

367

l l l

Smart List

Data Type

Attribute Values

Use the Year dimension to add years to the calendar. Year dimension names must start with FY, followed by a two-digit year, such as FY08. Fiscal Start Year is based on the first Year member in the Year dimension structure. You cannot modify the Fiscal Start Year of an application after it is deployed. However, you can add years on to the end of the initial year range identified.

The first year member in the Year dimension and Fiscal Start Year property must describe the same year. For example, if the Fiscal Start Year is 2008, the first year in the Year dimension must be FY08. If there is a discrepancy between the years, such as 2008 and FY07, an error displays and the application cannot be deployed.

You can add, change, or assign aliases to years. You cannot reduce the number of calendar years unless you create a new database.Performance Management Architect adds No Year as a system member, as the first member in the Year dimension. In Performance Management Architect,

No Year is saved as the first member in the Year dimension, but it is saved as the last year in the

Planning repository.

l l l l l l l l l

Custom Dimensions

In addition to the properties described in the table, Account dimension members use most of the common properties described in

“Properties Applicable to All Planning Dimensions” on page 352 , such as:

Valid for Plan

Two Pass Calculation

Aggregation

UDA

Member Formula

Alias

Data Storage

Smart List

Data Type

Use the Apply Security property to apply security to the custom dimension. Custom dimensions

must follow the naming conventions in “Naming Restrictions for Dimensions, Members, and

Aliases” on page 372

. Ensure that dimension names and aliases are unique. They can contain up to 80 characters, including spaces. Descriptions have up to 255 characters.

368

Working with Planning Dimensions

Planning Aliases

Aliases are alternate names, descriptions, languages, or other items that help define dimensions.

You can assign aliases to accounts, currencies, entities, scenarios, periods, versions, years, and user-defined dimension members.

If a base dimension, such as Entity, has an active association with the Alias dimension, and an entity member has an alias defined for the selected alias table, the alias is displayed in the Alias field in the Planning category. When applications are deployed to Planning, child members of the Alias dimension become Alias Tables, and must include a member named Default. Alias

names must follow naming requirements described in “Naming Restrictions for Dimensions,

Members, and Aliases” on page 372

Planning Attributes

You can use attributes to facilitate grouping, selecting, or calculating data by creating hierarchies and assigning aliases. Attribute names must be unique, and must follow the naming conventions

in “Naming Restrictions for Dimensions, Members, and Aliases” on page 372

. Attribute data type can include Text, Boolean, Date, Numeric. For detailed information about attributes and attribute values, see the Oracle Essbase Database Administrator's Guide.

You can assign attributes only to sparse dimensions. When sparse dimensions are changed to dense, all attributes and attribute values for the dimension are automatically deleted. You cannot assign attributes to label-only members. Dimensions such as Entity and Product must be associated with Attribute and Alias dimensions to enable assigning attribute values and aliases.

Before upgrading Classic Planning applications to Performance Management Architect, you must remove any spaces in the names of attribute dimensions.

If you change or delete attributes, you must update and validate business rules, reports, and data forms. When you delete attributes, all associated attribute values are deleted and removed from custom dimension members to which they are assigned. When using Import Profiles to load attribute values, you must create attribute dimensions before loading. Note, before upgrading applications, you must remove spaces in attribute dimension names.

Working with Planning 9.3.1 and Performance

Management Architect

If you are using Planning 9.3.1 with the current release of Performance Management Architect, you can use most of the current Performance Management Architect features. However, some features are not available with Planning 9.3.1, such as creating data sources and using the new attribute types, Boolean, Date, and Number. For compatibility information, see the Oracle

Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation Start Here guide.

Planning Aliases

369

Considerations for Working with Public Sector Planning and Budgeting

For Planning applications enabled for Public Sector Planning and Budgeting, the Performance

Management Architect dimension aliases Employee, Position, and Budget Item must retain their predefined names when the application is validated, deployed, or transformed from Classic

Planning to Performance Management Architect. For more information, see the Oracle Hyperion

Public Sector Planning and Budgeting User’s Guide.

Considerations for Working with Essbase

Creating and refreshing on the Planning Manage Database page affects data in the Essbase database. When you click Create, data is erased and Planning plan types are rebuilt. When you click Refresh, data might be replaced. For important information, see the Oracle Hyperion

Planning Administrator's Guide.

If you transform an application created in Classic application administration to Performance

Management Architect, you cannot return to working with that application in Classic application administration. Modifying Essbase outlines directly through Oracle Essbase

Administration Services is not supported.

When you refresh Planning applications, the Essbase database makes these changes: l l

If a member does not exist in the Planning relational database, the member and its properties, attributes, and User-Defined Attributes (UDAs) are not retained in Essbase on Refresh.

Planning first retrieves member properties from any existing member in Essbase, then sets and overrides any member property definable in Planning.

This behavior is different from prior releases, where the refresh process was incremental and retained modifications made directly to the outline in Essbase, even where those members, attributes, and UDAs did not exist in Planning.

The

HSP_UDF

UDA preserves member formulas defined outside of Performance Management

Architect. Unassigning them throughPerformance Management Architect refresh does not unassign the UDAs from members in the Essbase outline. If a member with the

HSP_UDF

UDA is added directly in Essbase, refreshing the database preserves any formula on this member in

Essbase, and does not generate a formula placeholder (;) on members that are level zero and dynamic calc. Other UDAs, such as custom UDAs and the

HSP_NOLINK

UDA, are retained only if defined in Performance Management Architect or in Planning (for Classic applications).

Because member formula support is available in Performance Management Architect and

Planning (for Classic applications) there is less need for the

HSP_UDF

UDA. Every effort should be made to define UDAs in Performance Management Architect or in Planning (for Classic applications).

The

@XREF

function looks up a data value from another database to calculate a value from the current database. You can add the

HSP_NOLINK

UDA to members to prevent the

@XREF

function from being created on all plan types that are not the source plan type selected for that member.

370

Working with Planning Dimensions

For more information on UDAs and functions, see the Oracle Essbase Database Administrator’s

Guide.

It is not necessary to modify Essbase outlines directly for the most commonly used Essbase member properties. Performance Management Architect and Planning support Dynamic Time

Series in the Period dimension, alternate hierarchy in the Period dimension, hierarchies in

Scenario and Version dimensions, and hierarchy and aliases for attribute dimensions.

Use these guidelines for working in Essbase while logged on as a supervisor or application administrator: l l l l l

Do not change dense/sparse dimension settings or the order of dimensions in Essbase.

You can use any attribute dimension type, including text, Boolean, numeric, and date.

Do not use Link Reporting Objects (LRO).

Do not change the Time Balance default settings. The defaults are Ending for Balance and

None for Flow.

Do not change the Variance Reporting settings. These are preset for all account types except

Saved Assumptions. For Saved Assumptions account types, Expense and Non-Expense are valid settings.

Back up the database before refreshing.

Naming Restrictions for Applications (Essbase)

For detailed information on creating Essbase applications and databases, see the Essbase product documentation.

When naming Planning or Essbase reporting applications, follow these rules: l l l

For non-Unicode mode applications and databases, use no more than 8 characters; for

Unicode-mode applications and databases, use no more than 30 characters.

Do not use spaces.

Do not use these special characters: m m m asterisks backslashes brackets colons m m m m m m commas equal signs greater than signs less than signs periods plus signs m

Naming Restrictions for Applications (Essbase)

371

l l m m m m question marks quotation marks (double and single) semicolons slashes m m tabs vertical bars

For Planning application names in relational database environments, do not use extended characters (except for underscores).

For aggregate storage databases, do not use DEFAULT, LOG, METADATA, or TEMP as application names.

Enter names in the preferred case. Application names are created exactly as entered.

l l l l l

Naming Restrictions for Dimensions, Members, and

Aliases

When naming dimensions, members, and aliases, follow these rules:

For non-Unicode mode dimensions, members, or aliases, use no more than 80 single byte characters. For Unicode-mode dimensions, members, or aliases, use no more than 80 characters (multi-byte characters are counted as a single character).

Distinguish between upper and lower case only if case sensitivity is enabled.

Do not use HTML tags in member names, dimension names, aliases, and descriptions.

Do not use quotation marks, brackets, back slashes, or tabs. Brackets are permitted but not recommended in block storage outlines. They cause errors when converting to aggregate storage outlines.

To begin dimension or member names, do not use these characters: m m m m m m m m m m at signs backslashes brackets commas dashes, hyphens, or minus signs equal signs less than signs parentheses periods plus signs quotation marks m

372

Working with Planning Dimensions

l l l l m underscores m vertical bars

Do not place spaces at the beginning or end of names. Essbase ignores such spaces.

Do not use forward slashes in member names.

For time periods in custom calendars, do not use spaces in prefixes.

Do not use these words as names of dimensions, members, or aliases: m m

Calculation script commands, operators, and keywords; for a list of commands, see the

Essbase product documentation.

Report Writer commands; for a list of commands, see the Oracle Essbase Technical

Reference.

m m m

Function names and function arguments.

Names of other dimensions and members (unless the member is shared), and generation names, level names, and aliases in the database.

Reserved words: for a list of the reserved words for Financial Management, Profitability and Cost Management, Essbase, and Planning, see these guides:

Oracle Hyperion Financial Management Administrator's Guide

o o o

Oracle Hyperion Profitability and Cost Management Administrator's Guide

Oracle Essbase Technical Reference

Oracle Hyperion Planning Administrator's Guide

ALL AND ASSIGN AVERAGE CALC CALCMBR

COPYFORWARD CROSSDIM CURMBRNAME

DIM DIMNAME DIV DYNAMIC EMPTYPARM

EQ EQOP EXCEPT EXP EXPERROR FLOAT

FUNCTION GE GEN

GENRANGE GROUP GT ID IDERROR

INTEGER LE LEVELRANGE LOOPBLOCK

LOOPPARMS LT MBR MBRNAME

MBRONLY MINUS MISSING MUL

MULOP NE NON NONINPUT NOT

OR PAREN PARENPARM PERCENT PLUS

RELOP SET SKIPBOTH SKIPMISSING

SKIPNONE SKIPZERO TO TOLOCALRATE

TRAILMISSING TRAILSUM UMINUS UPPER

VARORXMBR XMBRONLY $$UNIVERSE$$

#MISSING #MI m

If Dynamic Time Series is enabled, do not use History, Year, Season, Period, Quarter,

Month, Week, or Day.

Working with Planning Flat Files

You can create .ads flat files to import metadata into Performance Management Architect as

described in “Creating Flat Files” on page 47

. When loading metadata for Planning applications, keep in mind that you cannot load exchange rates into Performance Management Architect. For

Planning applications, you can use regular or simple flat files, as shown in the examples in the following sections.

Sample Planning Flat Files (Regular)

This example shows a regular flat file that can be used for Planning.

Working with Planning Flat Files

373

!FILE_FORMAT=ADS

!VERSION=1.0

!Section=Dimensions

DimValidForCapex

Colors|Attribute|Colors||||||||||||||||

Account|Account|Account|NeverShare|Dense|Dense|Dense|Dense||0|0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

Currency|Currency|Currency|NeverShare|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse||0|0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

Entity|Entity|Entity|NeverShare|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse||0|0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

NewCustomDimension|Generic|NewCustomDimension|NeverShare|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse||0|

0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

Period|Period|Period|NeverShare|Dense|Dense|Dense|Dense||0|0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

Scenario|Scenario|Scenario|NeverShare|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse||0|0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

Version|Version|Version|NeverShare|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse||0|0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

Year|Year|Year|NeverShare|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse||0|0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

Alias|Alias|Alias||||||||||||||||

!Section=DimensionAssociations

'BaseDimension|Property|TargetDimension

Colors|Alias|Alias

Account|Alias|Alias

Currency|Alias|Alias

Currency|TriangulationCurrency|Currency

Entity|Alias|Alias

Entity|Currency|Currency

Entity|Colors|Colors

NewCustomDimension|Alias|Alias

Period|Alias|Alias

Scenario|Alias|Alias

Scenario|StartPeriod|Period

Scenario|EndPeriod|Period

Scenario|StartYear|Year

Scenario|EndYear|Year

Version|Alias|Alias

Year|Alias|Alias smartLists|Alias|Alias

!Members=Colors

'Name blue green purple

!Hierarchies=Colors

'Parent|Child|DataStorage

#root|blue|

#root|green|

#root|purple|

!Members=Account

TwoPassCalc|SkipValue|Description|BSOMemberFormula

100|Currency|Plan1|Revenue|NonExpense|Flow||||||

374

Working with Planning Dimensions

!Hierarchies=Account

MemberValidForPlan3|MemberValidForWorkforce|MemberValidForCapex|Plan1Aggregation|

Plan2Aggregation|Plan3Aggregation|WorkforceAggregation

#root|100|NeverShare|Average|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

!PropertyArray=Account

'Property|Name|Key|Value

Alias|100|Aliases_Table_1|Aliases_Table_1 100

Alias|100|Aliases_Table_2|Aliases_Table_2 100

Alias|100|Aliases_Table_3|Aliases_Table_3 100

Alias|100|Aliases_Table_4|Aliases_Table_4 100

Alias|100|Default|Alias_100

!Members=Currency

Local|Unspecified|null|Whole|None|Dot||Black|N|||||Local currency

USD|Unspecified|$|Whole|None|Dot||Black|Y|||||United States of America dollar

DEM|Unspecified|DM|Whole|None|Dot||Black|Y|||||Germany deutsche mark

EUR|Unspecified|€|Whole|None|Dot||Black|Y|||||European Union Euro

FRF|Unspecified|F|Whole|None|Dot||Black|Y|EUR||||France franc

IEP|Unspecified|IR£|Whole|None|Dot||Black|Y|||||Ireland punt

!Hierarchies=Currency

MemberValidForWorkforce|MemberValidForCapex

#root|Local|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|USD|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|DEM|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|EUR|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|FRF|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|IEP|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

!PropertyArray=Currency

'Property|Name|Key|Value

Alias|DEM|Default|Alias_DEM

Alias|FRF|Default|Alias_FRF

!Members=Entity

ParentMMM|Unspecified|USD||||

Mem_3|Unspecified|USD||||

Mem_2|Unspecified|USD||||

Mem_1|Unspecified|USD||||

ParentMMM_Shared|Unspecified|USD||||

Canada|Unspecified|USD||||

United States|Unspecified|USD|||blue|

Oregon|Unspecified|USD||||

California|Unspecified|USD||||

San Francisco|Unspecified|USD||||

Washington|Unspecified|USD||||

East|Unspecified|USD||||

NY|Unspecified|USD||||

West|Unspecified|USD||||

CA|Unspecified|USD||||

WA|Unspecified|USD||||

Working with Planning Flat Files

375

NJ|Unspecified|USD||||

!Hierarchies=Entity

MemberValidForWorkforce|MemberValidForCapex|Plan1Aggregation|Plan2Aggregation|

Plan3Aggregation|WorkforceAggregation

#root|ParentMMM|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

ParentMMM|Mem_3|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

ParentMMM|Mem_2|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

ParentMMM|Mem_1|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

#root|ParentMMM_Shared|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

ParentMMM_Shared|Mem_3|ShareData|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

ParentMMM_Shared|Mem_2|ShareData|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

ParentMMM_Shared|Mem_1|ShareData|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

#root|Canada|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

#root|United States|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

United States|Oregon|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

United States|California|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

California|San Francisco|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

United States|Washington|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

#root|East|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

East|NY|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

#root|West|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

West|CA|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

West|WA|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

West|NJ|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+

!PropertyArray=Entity

'Property|Name|Key|Value

Alias|Canada|Default|Alias_Canada

Alias|United States|Default|Alias_United States

Alias|Oregon|Default|Alias_Oregon

Alias|California|Default|Alias_California

Alias|San Francisco|Default|Alias_San Francisco

Alias|Washington|Default|Alias_Washington

!Members=NewCustomDimension

'Name|DataType|SmartList|UDA|Description

One|Unspecified|||

!Hierarchies=NewCustomDimension

MemberValidForWorkforce|MemberValidForCapex|Plan1Aggregation|Plan2Aggregation|

Plan3Aggregation|WorkforceAggregation

#root|One|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|

!PropertyArray=NewCustomDimension

'Property|Name|Key|Value

Alias|One|Default|Alias_One

!Members=Period

'Name|DataType|SmartList|UDA|Description

BegBalance|Unspecified|||

YearTotal|Unspecified|||

Q1|Unspecified|||

Jan|Unspecified|||

Feb|Unspecified|||

376

Working with Planning Dimensions

Mar|Unspecified|||

Q2|Unspecified|||

Apr|Unspecified|||

May|Unspecified|||

Jun|Unspecified|||

Q3|Unspecified|||

Jul|Unspecified|||

Aug|Unspecified|||

Sep|Unspecified|||

Q4|Unspecified|||

Oct|Unspecified|||

Nov|Unspecified|||

Dec|Unspecified|||

!Hierarchies=Period

MemberValidForWorkforce|MemberValidForCapex|PeriodType

#root|BegBalance|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Base Time Period

#root|YearTotal|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Year Time Period

YearTotal|Q1|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Summary Time Period

Q1|Jan|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Base Time Period

Q1|Feb|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Base Time Period

Q1|Mar|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Base Time Period

YearTotal|Q2|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Summary Time Period

Q2|Apr|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Base Time Period

Q2|May|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Base Time Period

Q2|Jun|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Base Time Period

YearTotal|Q3|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Summary Time Period

Q3|Jul|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Base Time Period

Q3|Aug|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Base Time Period

Q3|Sep|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Base Time Period

YearTotal|Q4|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Summary Time Period

Q4|Oct|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Base Time Period

Q4|Nov|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Base Time Period

Q4|Dec|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|N|Base Time Period

!PropertyArray=Period

'Property|Name|Key|Value

Alias|Aug|Default|Alias_Aug_New

!Members=Scenario

EnableProcessManagement|SmartList|ExchangeRateTable|UDA|Description

Current|Unspecified|FY06|FY09|Jan|Dec|N|Y||||

A_Scenario|Unspecified|FY06|FY06|Jan|Jan|N|Y||A_FXRate||

B,_Scenario|Unspecified|FY06|FY06|Jan|Dec|N|Y||A_FXRate||

!Hierarchies=Scenario

MemberValidForWorkforce|MemberValidForCapex

#root|Current|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|A_Scenario|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|B,_Scenario|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

!PropertyArray=Scenario

'Property|Name|Key|Value

Alias|A_Scenario|Default|Alias_A_Scenario

Working with Planning Flat Files

377

Alias|B,_Scenario|Default|Alias_B,_Scenario

!Members=Version

BU Version_1|Unspecified|BottomUp|Y|||

A_Version|Unspecified|BottomUp|Y|||

B,_Version|Unspecified|BottomUp|Y|||

C,_Version|Unspecified|Target|N|||

D_Version|Unspecified|Target|N|||

!Hierarchies=Version

MemberValidForWorkforce|MemberValidForCapex

#root|BU Version_1|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|A_Version|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|B,_Version|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|C,_Version|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|D_Version|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

!PropertyArray=Version

'Property|Name|Key|Value

Alias|A_Version|Default|Alias_A_Version

Alias|B,_Version|Default|Alias_B,_Version

Alias|C,_Version|Default|Alias_C,_Version

Alias|D_Version|Default|Alias_D_Version

!Members=Year

'Name|DataType|SmartList|UDA|Description

FY06|Unspecified|||

FY07|Unspecified|||

FY08|Unspecified|||

FY09|Unspecified|||

FY10|Unspecified|||

FY11|Unspecified|||

!Hierarchies=Year

MemberValidForWorkforce|MemberValidForCapex

#root|FY06|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|FY07|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|FY08|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|FY09|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|FY10|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

#root|FY11|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N|

!PropertyArray=Year

'Property|Name|Key|Value

Alias|FY06|Default|Alias_FY06

!Members=Alias

'Name

Aliases_Table_1

Aliases_Table_2

Aliases_Table_3

Aliases_Table_4

Default

378

Working with Planning Dimensions

!Hierarchies=Alias

'Parent|Child

#root|Aliases_Table_1

#root|Aliases_Table_2

#root|Aliases_Table_3

#root|Aliases_Table_4

#root|Default

Sample Planning Flat Files (Simple)

This example shows a simple flat file that can be used for Planning. With simple flat files, the

Members and Property Array sections are not included, and the information from those sections is moved to the Hierarchies section.

!FILE_FORMAT=ADS

!VERSION=1.0

!Section=Dimensions

DimValidForCapex

Colors|Attribute|Colors||||||||||||||||

Account|Account|Account|NeverShare|Dense|Dense|Dense|Dense||0|0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

Currency|Currency|Currency|NeverShare|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse||0|0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

Entity|Entity|Entity|NeverShare|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse||0|0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

NewCustomDimension|Generic|NewCustomDimension|NeverShare|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse||0|

0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

Period|Period|Period|NeverShare|Dense|Dense|Dense|Dense||0|0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

Scenario|Scenario|Scenario|NeverShare|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse||0|0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

Version|Version|Version|NeverShare|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse||0|0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

Year|Year|Year|NeverShare|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse|Sparse||0|0|0|0||Y|Y|Y|N|

Alias|Alias|Alias||||||||||||||||

!Section=DimensionAssociations

'BaseDimension|Property|TargetDimension

Colors|Alias|Alias

Account|Alias|Alias

Currency|Alias|Alias

Currency|TriangulationCurrency|Currency

Entity|Alias|Alias

Entity|Currency|Currency

Entity|Colors|Colors

NewCustomDimension|Alias|Alias

Period|Alias|Alias

Scenario|Alias|Alias

Scenario|StartPeriod|Period

Scenario|EndPeriod|Period

Scenario|StartYear|Year

Scenario|EndYear|Year

Version|Alias|Alias

Year|Alias|Alias smartLists|Alias|Alias

!Hierarchies=Colors

'Parent|Child|DataStorage

Working with Planning Flat Files

379

#root|blue|

#root|green|

#root|purple|

!Hierarchies=Account

MemberValidForWorkforce|MemberValidForCapex|Plan1Aggregation|Plan2Aggregation|

Alias=Aliases_Table_3|Alias=Aliases_Table_4

#root|100|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Currency|Plan1|Revenue|Average|NonExpense|

Flow|||||||Alias_100|Aliases_Table_1 100|Aliases_Table_2 100|Aliases_Table_3 100|

Aliases_Table_4 100

!Hierarchies=Currency

SmartList|UDA|Description|Alias=Default

#root|Local|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified|null|Whole|None|Dot|Prefixed Minus|Black|

N|||||Local currency|

#root|USD|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified|$|Whole|None|Dot|Prefixed Minus|Black|Y|||||

United States of America dollar|

#root|DEM|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified|DM|Whole|None|Dot|Prefixed Minus|Black|Y|||||

Germany deutsche mark|Alias_DEM

#root|EUR|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified|€|Whole|None|Dot|Prefixed Minus|Black|Y|||||

European Union Euro|

#root|FRF|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified|F|Whole|None|Dot|Prefixed Minus|Black|Y|EUR||||

France franc|Alias_FRF

#root|IEP|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified|IR£|Whole|None|Dot|Prefixed Minus|Black|Y|||||

Ireland punt|

!Hierarchies=Entity

MemberValidForWorkforce|MemberValidForCapex|Plan1Aggregation|Plan2Aggregation|

Description|Alias=Default

#root|ParentMMM|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Unspecified|USD|||||

ParentMMM|Mem_3|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Unspecified|USD|||||

ParentMMM|Mem_2|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Unspecified|USD|||||

ParentMMM|Mem_1|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Unspecified|USD|||||

#root|ParentMMM_Shared|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Unspecified|USD|||||

ParentMMM_Shared|Mem_3|ShareData|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Unspecified|USD|||||

ParentMMM_Shared|Mem_2|ShareData|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Unspecified|USD|||||

ParentMMM_Shared|Mem_1|ShareData|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Unspecified|USD|||||

#root|Canada|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Unspecified|USD|||||Alias_Canada

#root|United States|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Unspecified|USD|||blue||Alias_United

States

United States|Oregon|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Unspecified|USD|||||Alias_Oregon

United States|California|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Unspecified|USD|||||

Alias_California

California|San Francisco|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Unspecified|USD|||||Alias_San

Francisco

United States|Washington|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+|+|Unspecified|USD|||||

Alias_Washington

380

Working with Planning Dimensions

!Hierarchies=NewCustomDimension

MemberValidForWorkforce|MemberValidForCapex|Plan1Aggregation|Plan2Aggregation|

#root|One|NeverShare|Y|Y|Y|N||+|+|+||Unspecified||||Alias_One

!Hierarchies=Period

PeriodType|Alias=Default

#root|BegBalance|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Base Time Period|

#root|YearTotal|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Year Time Period|

YearTotal|Q1|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Summary Time Period|

Q1|Jan|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Base Time Period|

Q1|Feb|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Base Time Period|

Q1|Mar|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Base Time Period|

YearTotal|Q2|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Summary Time Period|

Q2|Apr|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Base Time Period|

Q2|May|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Base Time Period|

Q2|Jun|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Base Time Period|

YearTotal|Q3|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Summary Time Period|

Q3|Jul|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Base Time Period|

Q3|Aug|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Base Time Period|Alias_Aug_New

Q3|Sep|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Base Time Period|

YearTotal|Q4|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Summary Time Period|

Q4|Oct|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Summary Time Period|

Q4|Nov|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Summary Time Period|

Q4|Dec|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Summary Time Period|

!Hierarchies=Scenario

Description|Alias=Default

#root|Current|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified|FY06|FY09|Jan|Dec|N|Y|||||

#root|A_Scenario|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified|FY06|FY06|Jan|Dec|N|Y||A_FXRate|||

Alias_A_Scenario

#root|B,_Scenario|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified|FY06|FY06|Jan|Dec|N|Y||A_FXRate|||

Alias_B,_Scenario

!Hierarchies=Version

MemberValidForWorkforce|MemberValidForCapex|DataType|VersionType|

EnableProcessManagement|SmartList|UDA|Description|Alias=Default

#root|BU Version_1|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified|BottomUp|Y||||

#root|A_Version|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified|BottomUp|Y||||Alias_A_Version

#root|B,_Version|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified|BottomUp|Y||||Alias_B,_Version

#root|C,_Version|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified|Target|N||||Alias_C,_Version

#root|D_Version|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified|Target|N||||Alias_D_Version

!Hierarchies=Year

Alias=Default

#root|FY06|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||Alias_FY06

#root|FY07|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||

Working with Planning Flat Files

381

#root|FY08|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||

#root|FY09|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||

#root|FY10|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||

#root|FY11|StoreData|Y|Y|Y|N||Unspecified||||

!Hierarchies=Alias

'Parent|Child

#root|Aliases_Table_1

#root|Aliases_Table_2

#root|Aliases_Table_3

#root|Aliases_Table_4

#root|Default

382

Working with Planning Dimensions

Working with Profitability and

Cost Management Properties

In This Chapter

Dimension and Member Properties .................................................................... 383

l l l

Dimension and Member Properties

The properties for Profitability and Cost Management dimensions and members are displayed

in alphabetical order in Table 41 , which displays the following information:

The Property Label, which provides a more readable display name for the property. If applicable, the associated database type is appended to the name (ASO or BSO). If no database type is specified, the property applies to both types.

A Description of each property

The Property Name, which provides a unique identifier for the property that is used when updating data in the import and batch client.

You can modify any property that presents a drop-down list or data entry text box when you select the property in the Dimension Library.

Note: For information on Essbase properties, refer to

“Dimension and Member Properties” on page 394

Table 41

Profitability and Cost Management Dimension and Member Properties

Property Label

Alias

Description Property Name

Enter the alias for the selected dimension or member. The alias is the dimension name that displays in a deployed application.

l l

To assign or change the default alias name for the current dimension or member, click the existing alias name and enter the new one. Follow the proper naming rules. All databases have an alias table named Default.

To assign or change an alias name for the current dimension or member, click the existing alias name next to the alias table and enter the new name. Follow the proper naming rules.

Alias

Dimension and Member Properties

383

Property Label Description

Application

Type

Attributes

Displays the type of Profitability and Cost Management application: l l

General - Standard Profitability application

Detail - Detailed Profitability application

Enter the characteristics of a dimension member.

For example, the Product dimension members may have several attributes, such as a size and flavor.

See “Dimension and Member Properties” on page 394

for more detailed descriptions.

Attribute Type

Property Name

Attributes

Associate an attribute type with the selected member. Create attribute values for attributes assigned to dimension members that you can use to query on and to filter members.

Attribute types are: l l l

Text

Boolean

Date

Numeric l

AttributeDataType

Comment

Consolidation

For example, the attribute type for “Caffeinated” would be Boolean; data values would be True or False.

Enter a comment for the dimension or member. Comments can contain up to 255 characters. By default, this text box displays the current comment, if one exists.

You cannot assign a comment to an attribute dimension or member.

Note: For Unicode-enabled databases, a maximum of 80 characters is allowed.

Comment

Member consolidation properties determine how children roll up into their parents.

If the current member is not a dimension or an attribute, select the consolidation operator to assign to the member: l l l l l l l l

+ (addition) - Default

- (subtraction)

* (multiplication)

/ (division)

% (percent)

~ (ignore during consolidation)

^ (never consolidate)

NotUsed

Note: There are some restrictions with use of consolidation operators in aggregate storage outlines. Refer to the Oracle Essbase Database Administrator’s Guide for additional information.

Consolidation

384

Working with Profitability and Cost Management Properties

Property Label Description

Data

Storage(ASO)

Data

Storage(BSO)

Dimension

Formula(ASO)

Select the ASO storage options for dimensions and members: l l l l

StoreData—Data is stored with the dimension.

ShareData—Data associated with this member can be shared. The ShareData property applies to the member only. The Dimension Root Member cannot be shared.

NeverShare—Data associated with this dimension cannot be shared, even if there is an implied share relationship, such as with a parent with one child. In this case, the data is duplicated in the parent and child.

Note: This option does not apply to stored hierarchies in aggregate storage outlines.

LabelOnly—No data is associated with this dimension.

Select the BSO storage options for dimensions and members: l l l l l l

StoreData—Data is stored with the dimension.

ShareData—Data associated with this member can be shared. The ShareData property applies to the member only. The Dimension Root Member cannot be shared.

LabelOnly—No data is associated with this dimension.

DynamicCalcAndStore—Data associated with this dimension is not calculated until requested by a user. Once calculated, the data is stored.

DynamicCalc—Data associated with this dimension is not calculated until requested by a user. The data is not stored but is discarded after the request is completed.

Property Name l l

ASODimensionDataStorage

(for dimension root member)

ASOMemberDataStorage (for dimension members) l l

BSODimensionDataStorage

(for dimension root member)

BSOMemberDataStorage (for dimension members)

Double-click the cell and then click the Selector button to open the Memo Editor.

Enter the formula, and then click OK.

Use the appropriate ASO MDX syntax.

ASODimensionFormula (for dimension root member)

Dimension

Formula(BSO)

Dimension

Solve Order

Double-click the cell and then click the Selector button to open the Memo Editor.

Enter the formula, and then click OK.

Use the appropriate BSO CALCULATOR syntax.

Enter the numeric value in the solution sequence for selected dimensions. For example, if this dimension is to be solved second, enter “2.”

BSODimensionFormula (for dimension root member)

DimensionSolveOrder

Dimension and Member Properties

385

Property Label Description

Dimension Sort

Order

Dimension

Storage Type

Enter a numeric value that indicates where the dimension should be placed in the

Essbase outline that is generated by Profitability and Cost Management.

For example, if this dimension is to be the second in the Essbase outline, enter

“2.”

Dimension Sort Order must be set for every dimension in the model, except Alias and UDA dimensions.

The dimension sort order must be sequential, unique and greater than or equal to

Set the sort order as follows: l l l l

Measures dimension is set to 1, by default.

AllocationType dimension is set to 2, by default.

POV and business dimensions must be set to 3 or higher.

Attribute dimensions must always be sorted as the last dimensions.

For example, if you have four attribute dimensions in a sequence of 12 dimensions, the attribute dimensions must be set as 9, 10, 11, and 12.

The Dimension Storage Type property applies only to Block Storage (BSO) databases in Essbase. Select the type of storage required for the dimension: l

Dense

Sparse l

Property Name

DimensionSortOrder

DimensionStorageType

Hierarchy Type

(Dimensions

Only)

Hierarchy Type

(Members Only)

Level Usage for

Aggregation

The Hierarchy Type property applies only to Aggregate Storage (ASO) databases in Essbase. The Reporting database is generated by Profitability and Cost

Management.

Set the type of hierarchy for the dimension: l

Select “STORED” for any dimension members that use the following consolidation symbols: m

+ADDITION

~ IGNORE m l

Note: The no-consolidation or IGNORE (~) operator can only be used in a STORED hierarchy if the member's parent is set to LABEL_ONLY

Select “DYNAMIC” for dimension members that use any consolidation symbol, including ADDITION and IGNORE, or if the dimension member contains a formula.

Select “ENABLED” to support alternate hierarchies l

DimensionHierarchyType

HierarchyType Set the type of hierarchy for the member: l l

Stored (For first Gen2 child)

Dynamic (For Second Gen2 child onwards. The Second Gen2 member can host the alternate hierarchies)

None (Do Not Use) l

Displayed for PrimaryLevelWeightingDim on the Property Grid.

386

Working with Profitability and Cost Management Properties

Property Label Description

Member

Formula(ASO)

Double-click the cell and click the Selector button to open the Memo Editor. Enter the formula, then click OK.

Use the appropriate ASO MDX syntax.

Property Name

ASOMemberFormula

Member

Formula(BSO)

Double-click the cell and then click the Selector button to open the Memo Editor.

Enter the formula, and then click OK.

Use the appropriate BSO CALCULATOR syntax.

BSOMemberFormula

MemberSolveOrder Member Solve

Order

(Members Only)

Enter a numeric value to represent the priority with which Essbase calculates the formulas. For example, if this member is to be solved second, enter “2.”

This property applies to ASO databases only.

Members that have a solve order of 0 inherit the solve order of their dimension.

Members with the same solve order are evaluated in the order in which their dimensions appear in the database outline, unless otherwise specified by the dimension sort order property.

Members with no solve order are evaluated after members with a solve order.

POV Dimension Click the checkbox to set this dimension as a POV dimension for the selected model.

POV Display

Order

If there are multiple POV dimensions, enter the numeric value (such as 1, 2, 3, and so on) to set the display order for each POV dimension.

IsPOVDimension

POVDisplayOrder

Primary Level

Weighting

Restricts the levels which can be selected by the view selection engine during aggregation operations. These settings only apply to Essbase (ASO) applications.

Select one of the following options: l l l l l l

Default – The view selection engine is free to decide which levels to pick. This is the initial value for new hierarchies.

AllLevels – The view selection engine considers all levels of the hierarchy for aggregation.

NoAggregation – The view selection engine cannot select any levels for aggregation.

TopLevelOnly – The view selection engine considers only the highest level of the dimension for aggregation.

BottomaTop – The view selection engine considers only the highest level and the lowest level of the dimension for aggregation.

BottomLevelOnly – The view selection engine considers only the bottom level of the dimension for aggregation.

PrimaryLevelWeighting

Two Pass

Calculation

(Dimensions

Only)

Two Pass

Calculation

(Members Only)

For BSO databases only, select the check box to calculate a dimension on the second pass through the outline.

TwoPassCalc

(for dimension root member)

For BSO databases only, select the check box to calculate a member on the second pass through the outline.

TwoPassCalc

Dimension and Member Properties

387

Property Label Description

UDA

Unicode

Enter the UDA name for the selected member.

A UDA dimension must exist in Performance Management Architect, and be associated to the base to which the UDA is being added. See “Viewing Dimension

Associations”.

You can enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters.

Note: For Unicode-enabled databases, a maximum of 80 characters is allowed.

Select Unicode to set the application to Unicode mode. Unicode-mode applications support multiple character sets.

Property Name

UDA

Unicode

388

Working with Profitability and Cost Management Properties

Working with Essbase Properties

In This Chapter

Application Properties ................................................................................... 389

Dimension and Member Properties .................................................................... 394

Application Properties

Use Performance Management Architect to create Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) applications, providing reporting based on the dimensionality of Essbase as well as other applications, such as Planning or Profitability and Cost Management.

The following table describes Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) application properties in alphabetical order. Unless noted, properties apply to both application types. The Label column contains the labels for each property displayed in the Performance Management Architect

Property Grid. Use the name displayed in the Property Name column to modify property values using the Performance Management Architect Batch Client. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise

Performance Management Batch Client User's Guide.

Note:

Essbase (ASO) is also referred to as Enterprise Analytics. Essbase (BSO) is also referred to as Essbase Analytics.

Table 42 Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) Application Properties

Label

Allow

Duplicates in

Outline

Description Property Name

Select to allow duplicate member names in an outline.

By default, Essbase outlines require that member names are unique. If you want to allow duplicate member names in an existing unique outline, you can select this option to convert the application to allow duplicate members.

Once an application is converted, it cannot be changed back to unique.

By default, all dimensions in a duplicate member name application allow duplicate member names. You can clear the “Allow Duplicates in Dimension” option for one or more dimensions in a duplicate member name outline to require unique member names in the dimension.

Default Value: False

AllowDuplicatesInOutline

Application Properties

389

Label

Attribute

Calculations

Avg Name

Attribute

Calculations

Boolean False

Name

Attribute

Calculations

Boolean True

Name

Attribute

Calculations

Count Name

Attribute

Calculations

Date Name

Description Property Name

To avoid duplicating names in an outline, you may need to change the name of the Attribute Calculations dimension or its members.

If desired, specify a new name for the Attribute Calculations dimension or a new name for any of the members. The names specified are used in reports and spreadsheets. The function of the member is not affected by the member name. For example, the second member of the dimension counts, regardless of what the name is.

Optional: Specify a new name for the Attribute Calculations Avg member.

Note: This option only applies to Essbase (BSO) applications.

Default Value: Avg

Optional: Enter the name for all False members of Boolean attribute dimensions; for example, all members with a False value might be named

No.

Default Value: False

AttributeCalculationsAvgName

AttributeCalculationsBooleanFalseName

Optional: Enter the name for all True members of Boolean attribute dimensions; for example, all members with a True value might be named Yes.

Default Value: True

AttributeCalculationsBooleanTrueName

Optional: Specify a new name for the Attribute Calculations Count member.

Note: This option only applies to Essbase (BSO) applications.

Default Value: Count

Select the format for names of members of date attribute dimensions: l

Month First (mm-dd-yyyy)

Day First (dd-mm-yyyy) l

AttributeCalculationsCountName

AttributeCalculationsDateName

Attribute

Calculations

Dimension

Name

Attribute

Calculations

Max Name

Attribute

Calculations

Min Name

Default Value: MonthFirst

Optional: Specify a new name for the Attribute Calculations dimension.

Default Value: Attribute Calculations

Optional: Specify a new name for the Attribute Calculations Max member.

Note: This option only applies to Essbase (BSO) applications.

Default Value: Max

Optional: Specify a new name for the Attribute Calculations Min member.

Note: This option only applies to Essbase (BSO) applications.

Default Value: Min

AttributeCalculationsDimensionName

AttributeCalculationsMaxName

AttributeCalculationsMinName

390

Working with Essbase Properties

Label

Attribute

Calculations

Range Name

Description Property Name

Specify whether the attribute value is the top or bottom value of a numeric range. For example, if Tops of Ranges is selected, with attributes named

1000, 100000, and 1000000, the ranges are 0-1000, 1001-100000, and

100001-1000000.

Select one of the following options: l

Bottoms of ranges

Tops of ranges l

AttributeCalculationsRangeName

Attribute

Calculations

Sum Name

Default Value: Tops of Ranges

Optional: Specify a new name for the Attribute Calculations dimension.

Default Value: Sum

AttributeCalculationsSumName

Auto Configure Indicates whether or not Essbase automatically determines whether dimensions have a dense or sparse data configuration.

l l

True: Essbase automatically sets each dimension as dense or sparse.

You cannot manually change the dimension storage type.

False: The dense or sparse data configuration can be manually changed.

Note: This setting only applies to Essbase (BSO) applications.

Default Value: False

Note: In some cases, if you make changes to the “Auto Configure” property in Performance Management Architect it does not overwrite in Essbase. If you set the “Dimension Storage Type” property in Essbase applications, you must set the "Auto configure" property value to False before you deploy or redeploy the application to Essbase.

AutoConfigure

Case Sensitive Indicates whether or not members are treated as case sensitive.

If the check box is selected: l l

Member names are case-sensitive; for example, Product is different from product. Members whose names differ only by case are treated as separate members in all member comparison and search operations.

This is the default.

If the check box is cleared:

Member names are case-insensitive.

CaseSensitive

Comment

Conversion

Method

Default Value: True

Optional: Type a descriptive comment for this application.

Comment

Select the conversion method to be used during the conversion calculation: l l

Multiply: Multiplies local data values in the main database by exchange rates in the currency database.

Divide (the default): Divides local data values in the main database by exchange rates in the currency database.

Note: This setting only applies to Essbase (BSO) applications.

ConversionMethod

Application Properties

391

Label

Currency

Database

Name

Date Format

Description Property Name

Select a currency database to link to for currency conversion calculations. If no currency database is linked to the current database, the currency database is None.

Note: This setting only applies to Essbase (BSO) applications.

Type the name of the multidimensional database to be created when this application is deployed.

CurrencyDatabase

DatabaseName

Select a date format: l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l mon dd yyyy month dd yyyy mm/dd/yy mm/dd/yyyy yy.mm.dd

dd/mm/yy dd.mm.yy

dd-mm-yy dd month yy dd mon yy month dd, yy mon dd, yy mm-dd-yy yy/mm/dd yymmdd dd Month yyyy dd mon yyyy yyyy-mm-dd yyyy/mm/dd

Long Format

Short Format l

DateFormat

Date measures enable members to be associated with date-type values. The ability to process dates in the measures dimension can be useful for types of analysis that are difficult to represent using the Time dimension.

Select the Typed Measure Enabled property for an application, then select a date format, and add a measure defined as type Date.

The date values are stored internally as numeric values, although you deploy them to Essbase as formatted date strings. When queried, date measures are displayed according to the selected date format.

For more information on date format and date measures, see the Oracle

Essbase Database Administrator's Guide.

392

Working with Essbase Properties

Label

Prefix/Suffix

Format

Prefix/Suffix

Separator

Prefix/Suffix

Value

Typed

Measure

Enabled

Unicode

Description Property Name

Select the source of the value that Essbase attaches to the names of members of Boolean, date, and numeric attribute dimensions: l l l l l

None: Uses the complete member name with no prefix or suffix attached; for example, 6000000.

Dimension: Attaches the name of the attribute dimension as prefix or suffix to the complete member name; for example, Population_

6000000.

Parent: Attaches the name of the immediate parent as prefix or suffix to the complete member name; for example, Small_6000000.

Grandparent: Attaches the name of the grandparent as prefix or suffix to the complete member name; for example, Population_6000000.

Ancestors: Attaches the name of all higher-level generations as the prefix or suffix to the complete member name; for example, Population_Small_

6000000.

PrefixSuffixFormat

Default Value: None

Separator: Select one of the following separators to insert between the prefix or suffix and the attribute member name: l l

_ Underscore: For example, Population_Small_6000000.

| Pipe: For example, Population|Small|6000000.

^ Caret: For example, Population^Small^6000000.

PrefixSuffixSeparator

Default Value: _ (underscore)

Select prefix or suffix.

l l

Prefix: Attaches the specified prefix before the names of members of

Boolean, date, and numeric attribute dimensions; for example,

Population_6000000. Prefix is the default value.

Suffix: Attaches the specified suffix after the names of members of

Boolean, date, and numeric attribute dimensions; for example,

6000000_Population.

PrefixSuffixValue

Default Value: Prefix

Select to enable the application for typed measures.

In addition to numeric values, measures can also be associated with text- or date-typed values.

See the Oracle Essbase Database Administrator's Guide and Oracle Essbase

Administration Services Online Help for more information on typed measures.

TypedMeasureEnabled

Select this check box to migrate an application to Unicode mode.

Caution! Once an application has been deployed, the Unicode mode setting cannot be undone. See the Oracle Essbase Database Administrator's

Guide for information on migrating applications to Unicode Mode.

Default Value: False

Unicode

Application Properties

393

Dimension and Member Properties

This table describes the dimension and member properties for Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) dimensions and members. Unless noted properties apply to both types of dimensions and members.

Table 43

Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO) Dimension and Member Properties

Label Description Name

Alias Enter the alias in the text box.

Displays all alias tables defined for the database and all aliases defined for the current member.

l l

Default: To assign or change the default alias name for the current dimension or member, click the existing alias name and enter the new one. Follow the proper naming rules. All databases have an alias table named Default.

A list of alias tables: To assign or change an alias name for the current dimension or member, click the existing alias name next to the alias table and enter the new name. Follow the proper naming rules.

Alias

Allow

Duplicates In

Dimension

In an outline that allows duplicate member names, select one of the following options to specify member name uniqueness at a granular level: l l true: Duplicate member names are allowed in the dimension.

false: Unique member names are required within the dimension. This is the default for duplicate member name outlines.

Note: This setting does not apply to outlines that require unique member names.

AllowDuplicatesInDimension

Attribute Type Associate an attribute type with the selected member. Create attribute values for attributes assigned to dimension members that you can use to query on and to filter members.

Attribute types are: l l l

Text

Boolean

Date

Numeric l

AttributeType

Comment

Compression

For example, the attribute type for “Caffeinated” would be Boolean; data values would be True or False.

Enter a comment for the dimension or member. Comments can contain up to 255 characters. By default, this text box displays the current comment, if one exists.

You cannot assign a comment to an attribute dimension or member.

Comment

Create the selected dimension as the compression dimension. Oracle recommends optimizing aggregate storage databases by compressing the accounts dimension.

l l

When selected, data is grouped in the dimension as (key, mulitple values).

When not selected, data is stored as (key, single value), (key, single value).

Note: This setting only applies to Essbase (ASO) applications.

Compression

394

Working with Essbase Properties

Label Description Name

Consolidation Member consolidation properties determine how children roll up into their parents. If the current member is not a dimension or an attribute, select the consolidation operator to assign to the member: l l l l l l l

+ (addition):

- (subtraction)

* (multiplication)

/ (division)

% (percent)

~ (ignore during consolidation)

^ (never consolidate)

NotUsed l

Consolidation

Currency

Conversion

Currency

Working with Statistical and

System Properties

In This Chapter

Statistical Properties..................................................................................... 403

Dimension System Properties .......................................................................... 404

Member System Properties ............................................................................. 404

There are statistical and system properties that apply to dimension members regardless of the category selected. Access properties by as follows: l l

Select Administer, then Dimension Library.

Select the dimension or member.

In the property grid to the right, select the type (e.g. system) from Category.

Statistical Properties

Table 44 Statistical Properties for Dimensions and Members

Label Description

Child Count

Descendant Count

Sibling Count

Reference Count

Hidden Member

Number of children

Number of descendants

Number of siblings

Number of parents

Used for internal purposes only

Name

ChildCount

DescendantCount

SiblingCount

ReferenceCount

MemberHidden

Statistical Properties

403

Dimension System Properties

Table 45 Statistical Properties for Dimensions

Label Description Name

Dimension Type The kind of data a dimension gathers, such as text or numeric, that enables the use of predefined functionality. For example, dimensions tagged as time have a predefined calendar functionality.

Default Member Class Used for internal purposes only

DimensionClass

Default Member Class

Dimension State

Dimension Name

The dimension state: Local or Shared

Name of the dimension

Dimension Description Summary of the data the dimension gathers or represents

Display Properties

Default Member

Dimension Alias

Dimension Owner

Dimension Readers

Used for internal purposes only

The top-most member

Name displayed for dimensions in deployed applications

Users or groups who can modify and delete dimensions. For information about specifying permissions, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management

System User and Role Security Guide.

Users and groups who can view dimensions. For information about specifying permissions, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System

User and Role Security Guide.

Dimension State

DimensionName

DimensionDescription

DisplayProperties

DefaultMember

DimensionAlias

DimensionOwner

DimensionReaders

Dimension Writers

Source Dimension

IsCloned

Users and group who can modify dimensions. For information about specifying permissions see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System

User and Role Security Guide.

DimensionWriters

The source dimension from which current dimension is copied or synchronized from.

SourceDimensionName

Used for internal purposes only IsCloned

Member System Properties

Table 46

System Properties for Members

Label Description

Member Class Used for internal purposes only.

Parent

Parent Description

Display String

Name of the owning dimension or higher member

Summary of the data gathered or represented by the parent

Used for internal purposes only

404

Working with Statistical and System Properties

Name

MemberClass

Parent

ParentDescription

DisplayByString

Property Considerations when

Upgrading to 11.1.2.1

In This Appendix

Property Differences from Earlier Releases ............................................................ 405

Considerations when Comparing Applications to Deployed Applications .......................... 408

New Properties Added to Performance Management Architect Since Release 9.3.3 ............. 409

This appendix provides information about property changes and new validations that were introduced in Performance Management Architect Release 11.1.2.1. It includes default property changes and new validations to show a comparison from the following releases to Release

11.1.2.1: l l

Release 9.3.3

Release 11.1.1.3

Release 11.1.2

If you receive validation errors after upgrading, you may need to make manual updates. See

Appendix B, “Application Validations.”

Property Differences from Earlier Releases

New releases of Performance Management Architect may introduce changes to existing member and dimension properties. For example, default values for properties may have changed based on business requirements or property types may have changed. This table describes the differences in properties from earlier releases of Performance Management Architect.

Table 47

Property Differences from Earlier Performance Management Architect Releases

Property Name

AttributeCalculationSumName

CapexAggregation

Old Value

<blank>

~ (ignore)

New Value

Sum

+ (add)

Impact

No changes required.

Update required.

For all members in Capital

Asset Planning plan types:

Manually reset the value to

Applicable

Application

Types

Applicable

Versions

Essbase ASO 9.3.x

Planning 9.3.x

11.1.1.x

11.1.2.x

Property Differences from Earlier Releases

405

Property Name

DataStorage

DataStorageDuplicate

DimensionHierarchyType

DimensionSortOrder

DimensionStorageType

ExchangeRateType

GridMissingLabelType

MaximumReviewLevel

MaxDocAttachmentSize

Old Value

NeverShare

Store Date

<blank>

New Value

StoreData

Stored

Impact

Update required.

Manually reset the value to

NeverShare

Applicable

Application

Types

Planning,

Essbase ASO,

Essbase BSO

Applicable

Versions

9.3.x

11.1.1.x

11.1.2.x

Typographical correction.

No changes required.

The default value should be set to Stored unless multiple hierarchies are enabled.

Changes are required if multiple hierarchies are enabled and the value is set to Stored.

Essbase ASO 9.3.x

11.1.1.x

11.1.2.x

Essbase ASO,

Profitability

9.3.x

11.1.1.x

0 9

<blank>

None

Data from

Setting

<blank>

Sparse

Average

Dropdown

-1

This property should be set using the Performance

Setting. See “Modifying

Performance Settings” on page 175

For Essbase applications, new validations force you to use unique and sequential settings. If these properties are not set correctly for existing applications the new validations will fail and you will need to use the

Performance Settings screen to set the properties accordingly.

Profitability,

Essbase ASO,

Essbase BSO

9.3.x

11.1.1.x

11.1.2.x

Essbase BSO 9.3.x

No changes are required.

This property is defaulted during dimension initialization.

Update required.

Manually reset the value to

None

Planning 9.3.x

Update required.

Manually reset the value to

Data from Setting

No changes required.

Planning

Consolidation

9.3.x

406

Property Considerations when Upgrading to 11.1.2.1

Property Name

MaxNumDocAttachments

MemberValidForCapex

MemberValidForCapexAggregation

MemberValidForWorkforce

NegativeColor

Scale

ThousandSeparator

VarianceReporting

WeeksDistributionMember

WorkforceAggregation

Old Value

<blank>

FALSE

Red

<blank>

Comma

Non-

Expense

EVEN

~ (ignore)

New Value

-1

TRUE

Impact

No changes required.

Update required.

Manually reset the value to

False

Update required.

Manually reset the value to

False

Applicable

Application

Types

Applicable

Versions

Consolidation 9.3.x

Planning

9.3.x

11.1.1.x

11.1.2.x

9.3.x

11.1.1.x

11.1.2.x

TRUE

Black

Whole

None

Update required.

Manually reset the value to

False

Update required.

Manually reset the value to

Red

No changes required.

Update required.

Manually reset the value to

Comma

NonExpense Typographical correction.

No changes required.

True The property type has changed from a drop-down list to a boolean. The upgrade process maps the old drop-down list values to a True or False value. In most cases no manual changes are required.

Planning

+ (add) Update required.

Manually reset the value to

for any Public Sector

Planning and Budgeting or

Workforce Planning plan types.

Planning

9.3.x

11.1.1.x

11.1.2.x

9.3.x

11.1.1.x

11.1.2.x

Consolidation 9.3.x

11.1.1.x

11.1.2.x

Planning 9.3.x

11.1.1.x

11.1.2.x

9.3.x

11.1.1.x

11.1.2.x

Property Differences from Earlier Releases

407

l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Considerations when Comparing Applications to

Deployed Applications

You should ignore these property differences when comparing an application to a deployed application:

Aggregation for Capex: If the application and member are not valid for the Capex plan type

Aggregation for Workforce: If the application and member are not valid for the Workforce plan type

Weeks Distribution: The Weeks Distribution property has been changed from a drop-down list to a boolean in 11.1.1.x. The upgrade process migrates the value, however, the difference is shown when you compare the applications.

Exchange Rate Type: If the new value is

None

and the value is read-only, then it is correct according to the restrictions placed on this property. An empty old value could cause differences to appear.

Skip Value: If the new value is

None

and the value is read-only then it is correct according to the restrictions placed on this property. An empty old value could cause differences to appear.

Currency: This property may appear as ID=USD versus USD in the deployed application.

You can ignore this difference.

Default Parent: This property may show differences. This may be empty in the deployed application but correctly displays the primary parent.

Maximum Document Attachment Size: This value can be blank in previous releases. A blank value is equivalent to

-1

. Although this was corrected in 11.1.1.x, this can display a difference for applications upgraded from 9.3.3.

Maximum Number of Document Attachments: This value could be blank in previous releases. A blank is equivalent to

-1

. It has been corrected in 11.1.1.x. This may show as a difference for applications upgraded from 9.3.3.

Default Member: This property may show differences. It can be empty in the current state and 0 in the deployed state.

Type: This property may show differences. This may be empty in the deployed application and

Numeric

for the current application. This new property was introduced in 11.1.2.0 to handle text types. The default value is

Numeric

and is correct.

Format String: This property may show differences.

Use For Mapping: This property may show a difference in Currency dimensions in an ASO cube. Currency dimensions are not supported in Essbase ASO and this difference should not be an issue.

Hierarchy Type: This property may show a difference in Essbase ASO applications for top level members when multiple hierarchies are not enabled. The new value can be

Disabled

and read-only. This is correct behavior and can be ignored.

408

Property Considerations when Upgrading to 11.1.2.1

New Properties Added to Performance Management

Architect Since Release 9.3.3

Use the table below to review new properties added to Performance Management Architect since

Release 9.3.3.

Table 48 New Properties Added Since Release 9.3.3

Property Name Essbase

ASO

Essbase

BSO

ASOMemberFormula

ASOMemberFormulaDuplicate

AttributeDataType

X X

AttributeType

AutoGenId

BSOMemberFormula

BSOMemberFormulaDuplicate

CapexDeployed

Compression

Currency

CurrencyCategoryDuplicate

CurrencyConversionDuplicate

DateFormat

Description

DimensionDescription

DimensionSortOrder

DimTwoPassCalc

DisplayOption

DTSEnabled

DTSGeneration

EssbaseDateFormat X

Consolidation Planning Profitability 9.3.

3.x

11.1.

2.x

New Properties Added to Performance Management Architect Since Release 9.3.3

409

Property Name

FiscalYearStartDate

FlowMetric

FlowMetricDuplicate

FormatString

FormatStringDuplicate

HierarchyTypeDuplicate

Increment

IsCurrencyPartition

ItemValue

LevelUsageOfAggregation

LevelUsageOfAggregationDuplicate

MissingLabel

NamedGeneration

NamedLevel

OutOfRangeName

PeriodType

PhasedSubStartYear

PlanningAppType

PrimaryLevelWeightingDim

(Displayed in the Property Grid as

Level Usage for Aggregation)

PSBWorkforceModel

SecondaryLevelWeightingDim

SharedServicesInstanceID

SmartList

SmartListEntryLabel

SmartListLabel

StartValue

Type

Essbase

ASO

Essbase

BSO

Consolidation Planning Profitability 9.3.

3.x

11.1.

2.x

X X

410

Property Considerations when Upgrading to 11.1.2.1

Property Name

TypedMeasureEnabled

WorkforceDeployed

Essbase

ASO

Essbase

BSO

Consolidation Planning Profitability 9.3.

3.x

11.1.

2.x

New Properties Added to Performance Management Architect Since Release 9.3.3

411

412

Property Considerations when Upgrading to 11.1.2.1

Application Validations

If you receive validation errors after upgrading to Release 11.1.2.1, you must make these manual fixes:

Validation Error

Dimension cannot have a negative, zero, or empty sort order value:

Dimension

'Dimension Name'.

Fix

If the sort order is not available or not set correctly in the previous state it is shown as a validation error. Users should correct the sort order in the Performance Settings. See

“Modifying Performance Settings” on page 175 .

DataStorage at dimension level may be set to blank in previous versions.

In most cases Essbase defaults to StoreData or LabelOnly. Users should manually select the appropriate Data

Storage property value for the dimension.

The following tables describe the validations performed by Performance Management Architect for each application type.

Table 49

Consolidation Validations

Validation

Level

Validations

Dimension

Application l l l l l l l l l

Verify that there are no UDA dimensions in the application, since UDA dimensions are not supported in Consolidation applications.

Determine if there are any dimensions that use an invalid dimension class in the application

Verify that period dimensions are local

Verify that the dimension instance does not have more than the maximum allowed levels of dimensional depth

Verify that the dimension supports shared members

Verify that the dimension supports non-unique members

Verify that the dimension has required associations

Validate the custom dimension ID

Check for static dimensions l l l l

Verify that all required dimensions are included in the application

Validate the allowed number of dimension instances of a dimension class that have been added to the application

Enforce application naming rules

Check for invalid characters

413

Validation

Level

Member

Validations l l

Verify that there is a valid account type for the member

Verify that there is a valid default member property

Table 50

Planning Validations

Validation

Level

Validations

Dimension l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Attribute dimensions can only be associated with sparse dimensions.

Allowed values for Boolean members are either True or False

Level-0 date members should conform to the date format property set in application settings

Level-0 numeric members should be a valid number

View dimension types are not supported in Planning applications

Empty Attribute dimensions of type Boolean, Date, or Numeric cannot be associated with a base dimension

A base dimension can be associated with only one Boolean Attribute dimension

The Year, Currency, and Alias dimension have limited dimension depth

The Year, Currency, and Alias dimensions do not have shared members

Dimensions do not support non-unique members within the dimension

Each Alias dimension has a Default alias member

Dimension plan types selected must be the same as or a subset of the plan types selected for the application

The Alias dimension does not have a disallowed name

There is no duplication of Alias in Alias table

For all members of the Version dimension, the Enable Process Management property is not set to True if the Version

Type property is set to Target

Member names and aliases are unique

Period and Year Validations: l l l l l l l l l

Year members must be sequential

The first year member must be the Fiscal Start Year for the current application

Each level under the Year Total member in the Period tree must have the same number of children

The number of leaf members under the Year Total member is correct for the base time period of this application

The maximum number of periods is 500

The maximum number of Year members has not been exceeded

There are no more than 100 years in Year dimensions

The first year in Year dimensions has the correct format

For deployed applications, year is not added to the beginning of a range

The Period dimension member depth is based on Period Type l

414

Application Validations

Validation

Level

Application

Validations

Member l l l l l l l

No dimension associations exist within the application

The application has the minimum required dimensions as described in

“Creating Planning Applications” on page 164

The Scenario, Year, Period, Entity, Account, and Alias dimensions do not have more instances than specified in the application

Check that all required dimensions are present based on selected plan types at the application level

Verify that the Account Type property contains only valid values for Planning

Enforce rules on the application name. The application name can include a maximum of 8 characters and cannot be

“Planning.”

Verify that the PerfOrder property (for example, RatesPlan1PerfOrder) has a unique value for plan types l l l l l l l l l

Source Plan Type value is not valid for the member

Expense Reporting value for this member is not valid

Time Balance can only be set to Last in Essbase applications

Plan types for a member are the same as or a subset of its parent. For top level members, the parent plan types are the dimension plan types

A valid DTS is used based on Period Type selected

Check all members of all dimensions of a particular dimension class have a non-null value for a particular property, and that the property value is one of the allowed values

Check Exchange Rate type property value based on Data Type Property

Check Two Pass Calculation property based on DataStorage Property

If more than one member uses an Attribute property, those members are required to be at the same level in their respective hierarchies

Member name validations: l l l l l l l l

Smart List member names cannot have special characters or blank spaces

Year member names must be of the format FY10

No leading or trailing white space is allowed in member names

Must be between 1 and 80 characters

Cannot contain special characters or reserved words

Cannot start with special characters

Cannot be reserved words

Cannot match dimension names

If Attribute Type is Boolean, the allowed values for member names are either True or False.

Note: These requirements are specific to Planning applications that use the Plan1, Plan2, or

Plan3 plan type. For Planning modules that use other plan types, the requirements may differ. For information on Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting, see the Oracle Hyperion Public Sector Planning and Budgeting User's Guide. For information on Oracle Hyperion Workforce Planning and Oracle Hyperion Capital Asset Planning, see the Oracle Hyperion Workforce Planning Administrator's Guide and Oracle Hyperion

Capital Asset Planning Administrator's Guide.

415

Table 51 Profitability Validations

Validation

Level

Validations

Dimension

Application l l l l l l

Root members of Business dimensions must have the ASO and BSO data storage set to LabelOnly.

Dimension Sort Order is set for all dimensions in the model, excluding Alias and UDA dimensions, and satisfies the following conditions:

A dimension sort order must be set for every dimension in the model, except Alias and UDA dimensions.

m m m m m

Note: The Alias and UDA dimensions are ignored for Dimension Sort Order.

The dimension sort order must be sequential.

Measures dimension is set to 1, by default.

AllocationType dimension is set to 2 by default for Standard Profitability applications only. This dimension does not apply for Detailed Profitability applications.

POV and business dimensions are set to 3 or higher.

Attribute dimensions are sorted as the last dimensions.

For example, if you have four attribute dimensions in a sequence of 12 dimensions, the attribute dimensions must be set as 9, 10, 11, and 12.

Duplicate members do not exist in the same dimension.

POV dimensions must have at least one member.

Attribute dimensions can only be associated with sparse dimensions.

Attribute dimensions must satisfy the following conditions: m m

Only a Level-0 member from the attribute dimension may be assigned as an attribute.

Attributes may be assigned only to members at the same level in the base dimension.

Attribute dimensions can only be associated with sparse dimensions.

m l l l l l l l l

The name of the application is 7 characters or fewer, and cannot contain special characters.

At least one dimension must be set to POV type. Up to 4 dimensions may be marked as POV dimensions. Only one occurrence of each POV dimension class is allowed.

At least one business dimension must be defined

At least one Measures dimension must be defined

At least one AllocationType dimension must be defined for Standard Profitability applications. This dimension type does not apply for Detailed Profitability applications.

There is only one dimension of type “Account”

There is only one dimension of type “Entity”

Application names do not contain Essbase special characters and reserved words

416

Application Validations

Validation

Level

Member

Validations l l l l l l l

Allow only ASO and BSO data storage to be defined

No shared members are allowed in the first Gen 2 member

A Shared Member must always appear after its corresponding Base Member in the outline order.

NoMember

must be set as the last generation 2 member for all business dimensions, and must be set to Ignore (~) in the Property Grid.

Note: This requirement does not apply to POV, Measures, AllocationType, Alias, UDA or Attribute dimensions.

Shared members must reside in a Dynamic hierarchy, using one of the following methods: m m

The Gen 1 member is

HierarchyType=dynamic

The Gen 1 member is

HierarchyType=HierarchiesEnabled

, and the Gen 2 ancestor of the shared member is

HierarchyType=dynamic

Ensure no duplicate member names or aliases exist for any members within the dimension

Member names do not include Essbase special characters and reserved words

Table 52 Common Essbase ASO and BSO Validations

Validation

Level

Validations

Dimension

Application l l l l l

Attribute dimensions can only be associated with only one other base dimension.

Verify that the Dimension Sort Order is sequential, does not have duplicates and the Attribute dimensions are at the end

Verify that all smart lists are referenced.

Verify that smart list dimensions are not empty.

Generation names and level names must be unique in an outline (application). Names cannot be the same as other generation or level names. In addition, names cannot be the same as a member, dimension, Alias property value, or dimension alias property value.

l l l l l l l l l

Minimum number of dimensions is 1.

Verify that the database name is not empty.

Duplicates across the dimensions of the following types are not allowed: Time, Account, Generic, Currency and Country.

The application name can contain up to 8 characters (non-Unicode) or 30 characters (Unicode) if the Supports Unicode property is enabled.

Application names cannot contain the following characters: space * \ [ ] : , = < > . + ? " ; ' / \t |

The application description cannot exceed 79 characters.

Dimension names, member names, Alias values, and Alias members cannot exceed 80 characters and cannot contain: m m

Quotes ("), brackets [ ], or tabs

Spaces at beginning or end m

The first character of: @ \ { } , - = < ( ) . + ' _ | .

The Database Name property cannot be null.

Verify that if the application level TypedMeasureEnabled=false, then Account members cannot have their Type properties set to Text or Date.

417

Validation

Level

Member

Validations l l l l l l l l

The Time Balance property for all Account dimension members can only have values of None, First, Average, or Last.

Primary members must be present before shared instances.

Verify if an Essbase dimension has the AllowDuplicatesInDimension property set to false and yet contains non-unique members. If a non-unique member is found, an error is logged.

Verify that all member names and aliases are unique in application or in dimension (per properties set in the outline).

If AllowDuplicatesInOutline is set to false

all member names must be unique. Alias values must be unique within the alias table and cannot conflict with any of the member names. Alias values can be same as the member name.

If AllowDuplicatesInOutline is set to true

uniqueness is checked within the context of dimension. If non-unique members are required in the dimension, the dimension level property AllowDuplicatesInDimension should be set to true.

If a shared member has its DataStorage set to ShareData, then its primary reference member must have its DataStorage set to StoreData.

If a dimension with an attribute association is set to "Label Only," a warning is displayed indicating that all attribute associations will be dropped.

Verify that none of the Smart List members have duplicate values.

Verify that Smart List values are only allowed on base (leaf) members.

Table 53

Essbase (BSO) Validations

Validation

Level

Validations

Dimension

Application l l l

Verify that the dimension is not set to allow duplicates and non-unique members.

Verify that the Data Storage property set at the dimension level is LabelOnly, NeverShare, or StoreData for dimensions of the following types: Time, Account, and Attribute.

Verify that at least one dimension in the cube is set to Dense.

l l

Ensures that only one (the maximum number allowed) of the following dimensions types are in the application: Time,

Period, Account, Currency, Entity, and Country.

Ensures that the Skip property is set when the Time Balance is set for an Account dimension.

Member l l l l l

Top members cannot be shared members.

Shared instances of members cannot exist without the primary members.

Base/level 0 members cannot have the Data Storage value of LabelOnly for dimensions of the following types: Time,

Account, Generic, Currency, Country, and Attribute.

Verify that if an Essbase dimension has the AllowDuplicatesInOutline and AllowDuplicatesInDimension property set to false

and yet contains non-unique members. If a non-unique member is found, an error is logged.

Verifies that the Data Storage property is set to DynamicCalc, DynamicCalcAndStore, LabelOnly, NeverShare,

ShareData, or StoreData for members of the following dimensions: Time, Account, Generic, and Attribute.

Note: For Essbase (ASO) and Essbase (BSO), the majority of validations are performed at deployment.

418

Application Validations

Table 54 Essbase (ASO) Validations

Validation

Level

Validations

Dimension

Application

Member l l l

If “Multiple Hierarchy” is enabled for a dimension, the Data Storage property must be LabelOnly.

The Data Storage property at the dimension level can be LabelOnly, NeverShare, or StoreData for dimensions of the following types: Time and Account.

Attribute dimensions cannot have shared members.

Verifies that there is only one Time or Account dimension.

l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Top members cannot be shared members.

The primary occurrence of each shared member also exists in the application.

Duplicates across dimensions are controlled by a flag at the application level. There is also a flag at the dimension level that indicates that duplicates in the dimension are allowed. If duplicates are not allowed at the application level, then duplicates are not allowed at the dimension level.

Issue a warning if hierarchy depth is more than 10 levels.

If “Multiple Hierarchy” is enabled, member formulas are supported for Dynamic Hierarchy members, and Dynamic dimensions.

Stored hierarchy dimensions cannot have shared members. Stored hierarchies within a multiple hierarchies dimension can have shared members, except that the first hierarchy in a dimension where multiple hierarchies are enabled cannot contain a shared member. A shared member cannot be in the same Stored hierarchy as it's primary member. A stored hierarchy can only have one copy of a shared member.

A stored hierarchy can contain a shared instance of a dynamic hierarchy member only if the dynamic hierarchy member is a level-0 member without a formula.

The first hierarchy in a multiple hierarchies enabled dimension must be a stored hierarchy.

A shared member may not be found before the primary instance of the member. If any are found, an error message is logged for each.

The Data Storage property can only be LabelOnly, NeverShare, ShareData, StoreData for members of the following dimensions: Time, Account, and Generic.

Attribute members can only have the Data Storage property set to DynamicCalc.

Base/level 0 members cannot have the Data Storage value of LabelOnly for the following dimension types: Time,

Account, Generic, and Attribute.

Check to see if the consolidation operation in stored hierarchies is always set to add(+). If the DataStorage property is LabelOnly then ignore(~) is allowed.

Formulas are valid only in dynamic hierarchies

LabelOnly members in stored hierarchies should have label only ancestors.

Note: Essbase also requires all members at the same level to be LabelOnly.

419

420

Application Validations

Member Query Functions Used by the Data Synchronizer

In This Appendix

Using Member Query Functions ........................................................................ 421

Using Member Query Functions

Subtopics

l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Special Considerations

The Performance Management Architect Data Synchronizer supports these member query functions: l l l l l

Parent() — Returns the member one level above the

member-name

in the same branch. See

“Parent” on page 424 .

Children() — Returns the members one level below the specified parent. See “Children” on page 424 .

Ancestors() — Returns the members at all levels above the specified member in the same branch. See

“Ancestors” on page 425 .

Descendants() — Returns the members all levels below the specified parent. See

“Descendants” on page 426 .

Siblings() — Returns the members with the same parent on the same level as the

membername

parameter. See

“Siblings” on page 426 .

Using Member Query Functions

421

l l l

Member() — Returns the specified member. See

“Member” on page 427 .

Match() — Returns the members that match a specified pattern. See

“Match” on page

428 .

Level0() — Returns the members at the bottom of the hierarchy that do not have children.

See

“Level0” on page 430

l l l l l

Note:

Financial Management does not support the Level0 function.

IParent() — Returns the member one level above the

member-name

in the same branch

including parent. See “Parent” on page 424 .

IChildren() — Returns the members including the specified parent. See “Children” on page

424 .

IAncestors() — Returns the members at all levels above the specified member in the same

branch including specified ancestor. See “Ancestors” on page 425

IDescendants() — Returns the members all levels including the specified parent. See

“Descendants” on page 426 .

ISiblings() — Returns the members with the same parent on the same level as the

membername

parameter including specified sibling. See

“Siblings” on page 426 .

Performance Management Architect uses these technologies to retrieve and load data for Essbase and Planning:

Load Data

Planning, Essbase BSO, and Essbase ASO use Essbase Java API methods on

IESSCube object, namely, begindataload, sendString, and endDataLoad.

Retrieve Data

Planning and Essbase BSO use calculation scripts.

Essbase ASO uses report scripts.

l l l l l

Special Considerations

Keep in mind these considerations:

Financial Management does not support the Level0() function.

After you select a member in the Pick Member dialog box, you can manually enter the

Match(), AllMembers(), BottomOfHierarchy(), and TopOfHierarchy() functions in the

Create Filter dialog box.

Profitability and Cost Management uses the same syntax and code as Essbase BSO.

When the source is Oracle Hyperion Planning, Essbase BSO, Essbase ASO, or Oracle

Hyperion Profitability and Cost Management, follow standard Essbase qualification conventions if any of the arguments to a filter is a duplicate. In addition, if any of the argument passed to any of the function is a duplicate then you must qualify the member as required by Essbase.

In Essbase ASO applications, the function Siblings() functions the same as ISiblings().

422

Member Query Functions Used by the Data Synchronizer

You can manually enter the following functions: IParent, IChildren, IAncestors,

IDescendants, and ISiblings in the Create Filter dialog box using the following syntax: function-name(member-name).

Syntax

To use multiple functions, use a semi-colon to separate each function. For example:

Children(Q1); Children (Q2); ISiblings(Jan);

Quotes are not allowed in function syntax. For example:

Siblings ("operating expenses global", Account, true) returns an error at extraction in the data synchronization log

The correct syntax is:

Siblings (operating expenses global, Account, true)

Some of the strings in the following code examples display on two or more text lines. However, strings must be defined on only one line in your code.

Examples

All of the examples are based on the following Year dimension:

Using Member Query Functions

423

Parent

Subtopics

Returns the member one level above the

member-name

in the same branch.

Syntax

Parent (member-name)

IParent (member-name)

Note: We highly recommend that you use IParent since it is inclusive.

Parameter Description

member-name

The member name for the dimension.

Examples

Parent(Jun) returns Q2

IParent (Jun) returns Jun, Q2

Children

Subtopics

Returns the members one level below the specified parent, which is the

member-name

Syntax

Children (member-name)

IChildren (member-name)

Note: We highly recommend that you use IChildren since it is inclusive.

424

Member Query Functions Used by the Data Synchronizer

Parameter Description

member-name

The member name for the dimension.

Example

IChildren (Q1) returns Q1, Jan, Feb, Mar

Ancestors

Subtopics

Returns the members at all levels above the specified member in the same branch.

Syntax

Ancestors (member-name)

IAncestors (member-name)

Note: We highly recommend that you use IAncestors since it is inclusive.

Parameter Description

member-name

The member name for the dimension.

Examples

Ancestors (Jan) returns Q1

IAncestors (Jan) returns Q1, Jan

Using Member Query Functions

425

Descendants

Subtopics

Returns the members at all levels below the specified parent, which is the

member-name

Syntax

Descendants (member-name)

IDescendants (member-name)

Note: We highly recommend that you use IDescendants since it is inclusive.

Parameter Description

member-name

The member name for the dimension.

Examples

Descendants (Year) returns Q1, Jan, Feb, Mar

IDescendants (Year) returns Year, Q1, Jan, Feb, Mar

Siblings

Subtopics

Returns the members with the same parent on the same level as the

member-name

parameter.

Syntax

Siblings (member-name)

ISiblings (member-name)

Note: We highly recommend that you use ISiblings since it is inclusive.

426

Member Query Functions Used by the Data Synchronizer

Parameter Description

member-name

The member name for the dimension.

Examples

Siblings (Jan) returns Jan, Feb, Mar

ISiblings (Jan) returns Jan, Feb, Mar

Note: For Oracle Essbase ASO applications, the inclusive parameter is invalid and returns the member as well as members with the same parent on the same level as the

membername

parameter. Therefore, Siblings and ISiblings function the same.

Member

Subtopics

Returns the member with the name that is provided as a character string.

Syntax

Member (member-name)

Parameter Description

member-name

The member name for the dimension.

Example

Member (Q1, Year) returns Q1

Using Member Query Functions

427

Match

Subtopics

Returns the members that match a specified pattern.

Syntax

Match (pattern) where

pattern

is text string. You can use any of the following wildcard characters

? - Matches one occurrence of any character

* - Matches zero or more characters. You can use the * at the end of string only.

Examples

Match (Q?) returns Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4

Match(J*) returns Jan

Match(*) returns all members

Match(F?b) returns Feb

AllMembers

Subtopics

Returns all members in the hierarchy.

Note: AllMembers() is supported in Financial Management applications only.

Syntax

AllMembers (hierarchy)

428

Member Query Functions Used by the Data Synchronizer

where

hierarchy

is the hierarchy of the dimension.

Example

AllMembers (Year) returns all members of the Year dimension

BottomOfHierarchy

Subtopics

Returns the members that do not have children in a dimension.

Note:

BottomOfHierarchy() is supported in Financial Management applications only.

Syntax

BottomOfHierarchy (hierarchy) where

hierarchy

is the hierarchy of the dimension.

Examples

BottomOfHierarchy () returns Jan, Feb. Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Q3, Q4

BottomOfHierarchy (Q1) returns Jan, Feb, Mar

Note: Level0 and BottomOfHierachy functions result in the same behavior. If you enter Level0,

Performance Management Architect automatically converts the function to

BottomOfHierarchy.

TopOfHierarchy

Subtopics

Returns the members at the top of the hierarchy that have no parent members.

Using Member Query Functions

429

Syntax

TopOfHierarchy (hierarchy) where

hierarchy

is the hierarchy of the dimension.

Example

TopOfHierarchy (Q1) returns Year

Level0

Subtopics

Returns the members at the bottom of the hierarchy that do not have children.

Note:

Oracle Hyperion Financial Management does not support the Level0 function.

Syntax

Level0 (hierarchy) where

hierarchy

is the hierarchy of the dimension.

Example

Level0 (Qtr1) returns Jan, Feb, Mar

430

Member Query Functions Used by the Data Synchronizer

Configuration Settings in

BPMA_Server_Config.xml

The

BPMA_Server_Config.xml

file has two main elements, DimensionServer and log4net.

The DimensionServer section contains settings that are specific to internal workings of the

Dimension Server and other related components. The log4net section contains settings that are used by the log4net module, which is used to log warnings, errors, and so on. You can find the

BPMA_Server_Config.xml

file in:

<EPM_ORACLE_INSTANCE>\products\Foundation

\BPMA\AppServer\DimensionServer\ServerEngine\bin

. The following is an excerpt of the

BPMA_Config_Server.xml

file:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" ?>

<Data_Access_Layer>

<UseWindowsAuthentication>false</UseWindowsAuthentication>

</Data_Access_Layer>

<ClassPath>%EPM_ORACLE_HOME%\products\Foundation\BPMA\AppServer\DimensionServer

\ServerEngine\bin\awbutil.jar;%EPM_ORACLE_HOME%\products\Foundation\BPMA\AppServer

\DimensionServer\ServerEngine\bin\CASSecurity.jar;%EPM_ORACLE_HOME%\common\jlib\11.1.2.

0\epm_j2se.jar;</ClassPath>

Note: Some descriptions in the following table indicate a default value, which are automatically prepopulated when you install Performance Management Architect. Do not leave settings blank unless noted.

The following table shows the parameter, description, and default setting for settings in

BPMA_Server_Config.xml

Parameter

DimensionServer

Description

Contains settings specific to internal workings of the Dimension Server and other related components, such as Session Manager.

Default Setting

431

Parameter

Data_Access_Layer

EPMATempFilePath

SessionManager

JavaMinHeap

Description

Contains values that are used to create a connection to a database if the connection details cannot be retrieved from Shared Services.

All Performance Management Architect components connect to the Performance

Management Architect database using the same settings. The following settings are in the Data_

Access_Layer: l l l l

ConnectRetries—The number of times that a connection to the database will be attempted before an exception (error) is thrown

ConnectRetryTimeout—The number of seconds between each database connection retry.

CommandTimeout—The number of seconds that will elapse after sending a query to the database before a database error is reported.

The default value is 900 which is 900 seconds or 15 minutes.

UseWindowsAuthentication—For SQL Server databases only. If set to True, this setting uses

Windows authentication. If set to False, SQL

Server authentication is used.

The directory where the following Oracle Hyperion

EPM Architect temporary files are stored.

l l

OutputExportDocuments

is set to False

(default), the final export results are written to:

FinishedDeploymentDocument.xml

in the folder set in the

EPMATempFilePath

OutputExportDocuments

is set to True, the final export results are written to:

FinishedDeploymentDocument.xml

in the folder set in

ExportXSLPath

Default Setting

The default location is:

<EPM_ORACLE_

INSTANCE>\tmp\EPMA

Contains values that are used by the Session

Manager service to connect to Shared Services through the NetJNIBridge Service. Oracle Hyperion

Shared Services is used by the Session Manager to retrieve user authentication, group, role, rights information, database connection information, and so on.

Located in the SessionManager section. This setting stores the minimum value for the JVM heap memory at initiation. The maximum value that you can define is 256m.

16m

432

Configuration Settings in BPMA_Server_Config.xml

Parameter

JavaMaxHeap

EnableNestedGroups

NetJNIBridgePort

NetJNIBridgeHost

Description Default Setting

Located in the SessionManager section. This setting stores the maximum value for the JVM heap memory at initiation. The maximum value that you can define is 1024m.

512m

Set to True to indicate that when group memberships are requested for a particular user, any nested groups are returned along with top-level groups. Set this to False to indicate that when group memberships are requested for a particular user, only top-level groups are returned (no nested groups are included).

True

Port number used by the NetJNIBridge service to communicate with the SessionManager service.

Name of the physical machine where the

NetJNIBridge service is running. The name can be localhost if NetJNIBridge is running on the same machine as the Dimension Server.

5255

5251

300

Port Port number that the EPMA Server listens on.

DimensionServerStartupTimeout The number of seconds to wait for an instance of the dimension server to start before throwing an exception.

ExportCompressionThreshold

ExportXSLPath

The maximum number of bytes in size for an exported application before the export is compressed.

The path to the .XSL files that are used to format application exports.

102400

OutputExportDocuments

ProductMetadataPath

CustomMetadataPath

Validations

Application

Enables or disables the creation of files in the file system during an application export (which is part of deployment).

By default, it is disabled and set to False. To enable it, set the value to True.

False

The path to the .XML files that define the product metadata. This is used by the Dimension Server to load property definitions, and so on.

(Deprecated)

Contains values that are used to control validations. Contains the following settings:

Application, MaxReportedErrors,

MaxReportedWarnings, and DefaultMessages.

Contains values to are used to control application validations.

433

Parameter

MaxDeploymentHistoryEntries

MaxReportedErrors

MaxReportedWarnings

DefaultMessages

AutoCleanupTemporary

ApplicationsStartTime

AutoCleanupTemporary

ApplicationsMinimumAge

PurgeBaselineStartTime

ImportErrorThreshold

ExcludedMemberLimit

Description

Limits the number of members returned by the

EnumExcludedMembers() API call.

Default Setting

Add this setting to override the maximum number of application deployment history entries. The value entered must be greater than 1.

The maximum number of errors that will be recorded when an application is validated.

The maximum number of warnings that are recorded when an application is validated.

5000

The maximum number of combined errors and warnings that are reported to the user when an application is validated.

Control how the server automatically cleans up temporary applications.

Temporary applications are used by the

Application Creation Wizard, and if a temporary application is not properly cleaned up, it might never get removed.

By default, the server automatically removes any applications marked as "temporary," at 4:00:00

(4 am).

Note: The time is in local time, military format.

For example, the format for 2:30 p.m. is entered as 14:30:00.

You can adjust the time by modifying the

AutoCleanupTemporaryApplicationsStartTime setting. By default, applications that are older than

24 hours are included for cleanup. The minimum age of an application can be modified by setting the

AutoCleanupTemporaryApplicationsMinimumAge value in number of minutes.

Sets the time when the automatic purging of baselines that are no longer needed begins. By default, it is at 3:00 a.m. local time (entered as

3:00:00).

Note: The time is in local time, military format.

For example, the format for 2:30 p.m. is entered as 14:30:00.

AutoCleanupTemporaryApplicationsStartTime default is 4:00:00.

AutoCleanupTemporaryApplicationsMinimumAge default is 1440.

3:00:00

Maximum number of combined errors and warnings that can occur before a running import shuts down.

Default value: 1000

Minimum value: 0

No maximum value defined

Default value: 5000

Minimum value: 0

Maximum value: 5000

434

Configuration Settings in BPMA_Server_Config.xml

Parameter log4net

Description

Contains settings used by the log4net module to log errors, debug information, and so on.

Caution! Do not change values in this section unless specifically directed by Oracle Customer

Support.

Default Setting

435

436

Configuration Settings in BPMA_Server_Config.xml

Glossary

See bang character.

#MISSING See missing data.

access permissions A set of operations that a user can perform on a resource.

accessor Input and output data specifications for datamining algorithms.

account blocking The process by which accounts accept input data in the consolidated file. Blocked accounts do not receive their value through the additive consolidation process.

account eliminations Accounts which have their values set to zero in the consolidated file during consolidation.

account type A property that determines how an account's value flows over time and its sign behavior. Account type options can include expense, income, asset, liability, and equity.

accountability map A visual, hierarchical representation of the responsibility, reporting, and dependency structure of the accountability teams (also known as critical business areas) in an organization.

active service than to Hold.

A service whose Run Type is set to Start rather active-active high availability system A system in which all the available members can service requests, and no member is idle. An active-active system generally provides more scalability options than an active-passive system. Contrast with active-passive high availability system.

active-passive high availability system A system with active members, which are always servicing requests, and passive members that are activated only when an active member fails. Contrast with active-active high availability system.

activity-level authorization Defines user access to applications and the types of activities they can perform on applications, independent of the data that will be operated on.

ad hoc report An online analytical query that an end user creates dynamically.

adapter Software that enables a program to integrate with data and metadata from target and source systems.

adaptive states permission.

Interactive Reporting Web Client level of adjustment See journal entry.

Advanced Relational Access The integration of a relational database with an Essbase multidimensional database so that all data remains in the relational database and is mapped to summary-level data in the Essbase database.

agent An Essbase server process that starts and stops applications and databases, manages connections from users, and handles user-access security. The agent is referred to as ESSBASE.EXE.

aggregate cell A cell comprising several cells. For example, a data cell that uses Children(Year) expands to four cells containing Quarter 1, Quarter 2, Quarter 3, and Quarter 4 data.

aggregate function A type of function, such as sum or calculation of an average, that summarizes or performs analysis on data.

aggregate limit A limit placed on an aggregated request line item or aggregated metatopic item.

Glossary

437

aggregate storage database The database storage model designed to support large-scale, sparsely distributed data which is categorized into many, potentially large dimensions. Upper level members and formulas are dynamically calculated, and selected data values are aggregated and stored, typically with improvements in overall aggregation time.

aggregate view A collection of aggregate cells based on the levels of the members within each dimension. To reduce calculation time, values are pre-aggregated and stored as aggregate views. Retrievals start from aggregate view totals and add up from there.

aggregation The process of rolling up and storing values in an aggregate storage database; the stored result of the aggregation process.

aggregation script In aggregate storage databases only, a file that defines a selection of aggregate views to be built into an aggregation.

alias table members.

A table that contains alternate names for alternate hierarchy A hierarchy of shared members. An alternate hierarchy is based upon an existing hierarchy in a database outline, but has alternate levels in the dimension.

An alternate hierarchy allows the same data to be seen from different points of view.

ancestor A branch member that has members below it. For example, the members Qtr2 and 2006 are ancestors of the member April.

appender A Log4j term for destination.

application 1) A software program designed to run a specific task or group of tasks such as a spreadsheet program or database management system; 2) A related set of dimensions and dimension members that are used to meet a specific set of analytical requirements, reporting requirements, or both.

application administrator A person responsible for setting up, configuring, maintaining, and controlling an application.

Has all application privileges and data access permissions.

application currency application.

The default reporting currency for the

Application Migration Utility A command-line utility for migrating applications and artifacts.

application server cluster A loosely joined group of application servers running simultaneously, working together for reliability and scalability, and appearing to users as one application server instance. See also vertical application cluster and horizontal application cluster.

area A predefined set of members and values that makes up a partition.

arithmetic data load A data load that performs operations on values in the database, such as adding 10 to each value.

artifact An individual application or repository item; for example, scripts, forms, rules files, Interactive Reporting documents, and financial reports. Also known as an object.

assemblies Installation files for EPM System products or components.

asset account An account type that stores values that represent a company's assets.

assignment The association of a source and destination in the allocation model that controls the direction of allocated costs or revenue flow.

asymmetric topology An Oracle Fusion Middleware Disaster

Recovery configuration that is different across tiers on the production site and standby site. For example, an asymmetric topology can include a standby site with fewer hosts and instances than the production site.

attribute A characteristic of a dimension member. For example, Employee dimension members may have attributes of Name, Age, or Address. Product dimension members can have several attributes, such as a size and flavor.

attribute association A relationship in a database outline whereby a member in an attribute dimension describes a characteristic of a member of its base dimension. For example, if product 100-10 has a grape flavor, the product

100-10 has the Flavor attribute association of grape. Thus, the 100-10 member of the Product dimension is associated with the Grape member of the Flavor attribute dimension.

438

Glossary

Attribute Calculations dimension A system-defined dimension that performs these calculation operations on groups of members: Sum, Count, Avg, Min, and Max. This dimension is calculated dynamically and is not visible in the database outline. For example, using the Avg member, you can calculate the average sales value for Red products in New

York in January.

attribute dimension A type of dimension that enables analysis based on the attributes or qualities of dimension members.

attribute reporting A reporting process based on the attributes of the base dimension members. See also base dimension.

attribute type A text, numeric, Boolean, date, or linkedattribute type that enables different functions for grouping, selecting, or calculating data. For example, because the

Ounces attribute dimension has the type numeric, the number of ounces specified as the attribute of each product can be used to calculate the profit per ounce for that product.

authentication Verification of identity as a security measure.

Authentication is typically based on a user name and password. Passwords and digital signatures are forms of authentication.

authentication service A core service that manages one authentication system.

auto-reversing journal A journal for entering adjustments that you want to reverse in the next period.

automated stage A stage that does not require human intervention; for example, a data load.

axis 1) A straight line that passes through a graphic used for measurement and categorization; 2) A report aspect used to arrange and relate multidimensional data, such as filters, pages, rows, and columns. For example, for a data query in

Simple Basic, an axis can define columns for values for Qtr1,

Qtr2, Qtr3, and Qtr4. Row data would be retrieved with totals in the following hierarchy: Market, Product.

backup A duplicate copy of an application instance.

balance account An account type that stores unsigned values that relate to a particular time.

balanced journal total credits.

A journal in which the total debits equal the bang character (!) A character that terminates a series of report commands and requests information from the database. A report script must be terminated with a bang character; several bang characters can be used within a report script.

base currency The currency in which daily business transactions are performed.

base dimension A standard dimension that is associated with one or more attribute dimensions. For example, assuming products have flavors, the Product dimension is the base dimension for the Flavors attribute dimension.

base entity An entity at the bottom of the organization structure that does not own other entities.

batch calculation Any calculation on a database that is done in batch; for example, a calculation script or a full database calculation. Dynamic calculations are not considered to be batch calculations.

batch file An operating system file that can call multiple

ESSCMD scripts and run multiple sessions of ESSCMD. On

Windows-based systems, batch files have BAT file extensions. On UNIX, batch files are written as a shell script.

Batch Loader An FDM component that enables the processing of multiple files.

batch POV A collection of all dimensions on the user POV of every report and book in the batch. While scheduling the batch, you can set the members selected on the batch POV.

batch processing mode A method of using ESSCMD to write a batch or script file that can be used to automate routine server maintenance and diagnostic tasks. ESSCMD script files can execute multiple commands and can be run from the operating system command line or from within operating system batch files. Batch files can be used to call multiple ESSCMD scripts or run multiple instances of

ESSCMD.

block The primary storage unit which is a multidimensional array representing the cells of all dense dimensions.

block storage database The Essbase database storage model categorizing and storing data based on the sparsity of data values defined in sparse dimensions. Data values are stored in blocks, which exist only for sparse dimension members for which there are values.

Glossary

439

Blocked Account An account that you do not want calculated in the consolidated file because you want to enter it manually.

book 1) In Financial Reporting, a container that holds a group of similar documents. Books may specify dimension sections or dimension changes; 2) In Data Relationship

Management, a collection of exports that can be run together as a group. Export results can be combined together or output separately.

book POV The dimension members for which a book is run.

bookmark A link to a reporting document or a Web site, displayed on a personal page of a user. The types of bookmarks are My Bookmarks and image bookmarks.

bounding rectangle The required perimeter that encapsulates the Interactive Reporting document content when embedding Interactive Reporting document sections in a personal page, specified in pixels for height and width or row per page.

broadcast message A simple text message sent by an administrator to a user who is logged on to a Planning application. The message details information such as system availability, notification of application refresh, or application backups.

build method A method used to modify database outlines.

Choice of a build method is based on the format of data in data source files.

business process A set of activities that collectively accomplish a business objective.

business rules Logical expressions or formulas that are created within an application to produce a desired set of resulting values.

cache A buffer in memory that holds data temporarily.

calc script A set of commands that define how a database is consolidated or aggregated. A calculation script may also contain commands that specify allocation and other calculation rules separate from the consolidation process.

Calculated Accounts Accounts with formulas that you cannot alter. These formulas are fixed to maintain the accounting integrity of the model that you are building. For example, the formula for Net Income, a Calculated Account, is modeled into Strategic Finance and cannot be changed in historical or forecast periods.

calculated member in MaxL DML A member designed for analytical purposes and defined in the optional WITH section of a MaxL DML query.

Calculation Manager A module of Enterprise Performance

Management Architecture (EPMA) that Planning and

Financial Management users can use to design, validate, and administrate business rules in a graphical environment. c calculation status A consolidation status that indicates that some values or formula calculations have changed. You must reconsolidate to get the correct values for the affected entity.

calendar User-defined time periods and their relationship to each other. Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 comprise a calendar or fiscal year.

cascade The process of creating multiple reports for a subset of member values.

Catalog pane An area that displays a list of elements available to the active section. If Query is the active section, a list of database tables is displayed. If Pivot is the active section, a list of results columns is displayed. If Dashboard is the active section, a list of embeddable sections, graphic tools, and control tools are displayed.

categories Groupings by which data is organized. For example, Month.

cause and effect map A map that depicts how the elements that form your corporate strategy relate and how they work together to meet your organization's strategic goals. A Cause and Effect map tab is automatically created for each Strategy map.

CDF See custom-defined function.

CDM See custom-defined macro.

cell 1) The data value at the intersection of dimensions in a multidimensional database; the intersection of a row and a column in a worksheet; 2) A logical group of nodes belonging to one administrative domain.

cell note A text annotation for a cell in an Essbase database.

Cell notes are a type of LRO.

CHANGED status Consolidation status that indicates data for an entity has changed.

chart template A template that defines the metrics to display in Workspace charts.

440

Glossary

child A member with a parent above it in the database outline.

choice list A list of members that a report designer can specify for each dimension when defining the report's point of view. A user who wants to change the point of view for a dimension that uses a choice list can select only the members specified in that defined member list or those members that meet the criteria defined in the function for the dynamic list.

clean block A data block in which the database is fully calculated, if a calculation script calculates all dimensions at once, or if the SET CLEARUPDATESTATUS command is used in a calculation script.

cluster An array of servers or databases that behave as a single resource which share task loads and provide failover support; eliminates one server or database as a single point of failure in a system.

cluster interconnect A private link used by a hardware cluster for heartbeat information, to detect node failure.

cluster services Software that manages cluster member operations as a system. With cluster services, you can define a set of resources and services to monitor through a heartbeat mechanism between cluster members and to move these resources and services to a different cluster member as efficiently and transparently as possible.

clustered bar charts Charts in which categories are viewed side-by-side; used only with vertical bar charts.

code page A mapping of bit combinations to a set of text characters. Different code pages support different sets of characters. Each computer contains a code page setting for the character set requirements of the language of the computer user. In the context of this document, code pages map characters to bit combinations for non-Unicode encodings. See also encoding.

column In Data Relationship Management, a field of data associated with an import source or the results of a query, compare, validation, or export.

committed access An Essbase Kernel Isolation Level setting that affects how Essbase handles transactions. Under committed access, concurrent transactions hold long-term write locks and yield predictable results.

computed item A virtual column (as opposed to a column that is physically stored in the database or cube) that can be calculated by the database during a query, or by Interactive

Reporting Studio in the Results section. Computed items are calculations of data based on functions, data items, and operators provided in the dialog box and can be included in reports or reused to calculate other data.

connection file

(.oce)

See Interactive Reporting connection file consolidated file (Parent) A file into which all of the business unit files are consolidated; contains the definition of the consolidation.

consolidation The process of aggregating data from dependent entities to parent entities. For example, if the dimension Year consists of the members Qtr1, Qtr2, Qtr3, and Qtr4, its consolidation is Year.

consolidation file (*.cns) A graphical interface that enables you to add, delete, or move Strategic Finance files in the consolidation process using either a Chart or Tree view. It also enables you to define and modify the consolidation.

consolidation rule The rule that is executed during the consolidation of the node of the hierarchy. This rule can contain customer-specific formulas appropriate for the correct consolidation of parent balances. Elimination processing can be controlled within these rules.

content file.

Information stored in the repository for any type of content browser A component that eanbles users to browse and select content to be placed on a Workspace Page.

context variable A variable that is defined for a particular task flow to identify the context of the taskflow instance.

contribution The value added to a parent from a child entity.

Each child has a contribution to its parent.

controls groups Groupings used in FDM to maintain and organize certification and assessment information, especially helpful for meeting Sarbanes-Oxley requirements.

conversion rate See exchange rate.

cookie site.

A segment of data placed on your computer by a Web

Glossary

441

correlated subqueries Subqueries that are evaluated once for every row in the parent query; created by joining a topic item in the subquery with a topic in the parent query.

critical business area (CBA) An individual or a group organized into a division, region, plant, cost center, profit center, project team, or process; also called accountability team or business area.

critical success factor (CSF) A capability that must be established and sustained to achieve a strategic objective; owned by a strategic objective or a critical process and is a parent to one or more actions.

crosstab reporting Reporting that categorizes and summarizes data in table format. The table cells contain summaries of the data that fit within the intersecting categories. For example, a crosstab report of product sales information could show size attributes, such as Small and

Large, as column headings and color attributes, such as Blue and Yellow, as row headings. The cell in the table where

Large and Blue intersect could contain the total sales of all

Blue products that are sized Large.

cube A block of data that contains three or more dimensions. An Essbase database is a cube.

cube deployment In Essbase Studio, the process of setting load options for a model to build an outline and load data into an Essbase application and database.

cube schema In Essbase Studio, the metadata elements, such as measures and hierarchies, representing the logical model of a cube.

currency conversion A process that converts currency values in a database from one currency into another. For example, to convert one U. S. dollar into the European euro, the exchange rate (for example, 0.923702) is multiplied by the dollar (1* 0.923702). After conversion, the European euro amount is .92.

Currency Overrides A feature allowing the selected input method for any input period to be overridden to enable input of that period's value as Default Currency/Items. To override the input method, enter a pound sign (#) before or after the number.

currency partition A dimension type that separates local currency members from a base currency, as defined in an application. Identifies currency types, such as Actual,

Budget, and Forecast.

custom calendar Any calendar created by an administrator.

custom dimension A dimension created and defined by users.

Channel, product, department, project, or region could be custom dimensions.

custom property A property of a dimension or dimension member that is created by a user.

custom report A complex report from the Design Report module, composed of any combination of components.

custom-defined function (CDF) Essbase calculation functions developed in Java and added to the standard Essbase calculation scripting language using MaxL. See also customdefined macro.

custom-defined macro (CDM) Essbase macros written with

Essbase calculator functions and special macro functions.

Custom-defined macros use an internal Essbase macro language that enables the combination of calculation functions and they operate on multiple input parameters.

Index

Symbols

#MISSING data, 360

specifying settings for,

representing with Smart Lists, 112

#missing data

#Missing Data Form Label option,

111

#Missing Drop Down Label option,

112

Numbers

4-4-5 weekly pattern,

445 and 544 weekly patterns, considerations for

redeploying, 242

5-4-4 weekly pattern,

impact of deleting members, 243

A

access permissions

access permissions, assigning for Planning, 85

access permissions, defining for Scenario,

Account dimension,

Account dimension type,

description,

Account members

Account types,

plan types, 357

Account properties consolidation,

324

Planning,

and expense reporting, 358 described, 358

Account types

summary of, 359

AccountType

behavior, 328

active account, 345

Actual_365 weighted average time balance,

Actual_Actual weighted average time balance,

Aggregate Storage option applications

Aggregation for plan types, 356

Aggregation Weight, 331

Alias,

Alias dimension

setting up,

Alias dimension type description,

Alias dimensions, 180 ,

alias tables creating in Planning,

default for Planning,

selecting for Planning,

aliases naming conventions,

Planning,

Profitability and Cost Management requirements,

microcosting, 190

selecting, 356

using to deploy dimensions,

AllMembers member query function,

428

AllocationType dimension,

Allow Adjustments From Children, 333

AllocationType dimension type description,

Allow Adjustments, 332

Analytic Services considerations for,

370

Ancestors member query function, 425

application consolidation requirements,

158

application library viewing data flow,

228

application members

Index

461

filtering, application membership

viewing,

216

application properties consolidation,

accessing from data flow, 230

Planning,

352

applications

about, 155

adding dimensions,

161 ,

171

adding dimensions manually, 184

195

changing the dimension order, 175

compare results,

226

comparing, 225

creating consolidation, 157

creating Planning,

creating profitability,

179 ,

189

data sources, 255

data type evaluation order, 177

defining base time period, 173

defining currencies,

168

defining monthly distribution spread, 173 defining the calendar range, 173

dense and sparse dimensions,

deploying for Planning, 242

deploying,

230

deploying consolidation,

236

excluding members,

filtering members,

managing,

modifying Planning,

naming rules,

optimizing performance, 175

performance, 177

plan type performance settings, 175

prerequisites,

redeploying,

removing dimensions,

Profitability and Cost Management requirements,

setting up plan types, 167

microcosting, 190

validating, 230

231

viewing application membership, 216

viewing dimension associations, 213

working with members,

Performance Management Architect, 25

architecture

asset account behavior,

loading in flat files, 81

associations assigned when upgrading Planning,

dimension,

213

associations, removed when deleting Planning

members, 137

attachments viewing job attachments,

301

Attribute dimension

Attribute dimension type description,

Attribute dimensions,

attribute values excluding,

loading,

369

Planning,

Average time balance property, 359

Auto Create Local Dimensions,

166

B

backing up

before refreshing, 370

balance account behavior,

balance recurring account behavior, 328

Balance property, 359

base time period, 353

defining, 173

spreading data,

batch client

about, 24

BegBalance member. See Beginning Balance time period

Beginning Balance time period and Scenario,

editing, 365

required for deployment,

blank applications, creating, 166

Block Storage option applications

bottom-up versions,

BottomOfHierarchy member query function, 429

462

Index

Business dimension

Business dimensions, 180

C

Calc Attribute, 325

calendar range, defining,

calendars

adding years to, 368

changing the current year or time period,

364 practical limits, 364

creating summary time periods,

requirements for redeploying,

characters, reserved, 371

setting up,

364

cell text label properties consolidation,

330

Children member query function, 424

clearing interface tables,

CloseInputValueBlock variable,

compare results excluding members,

comparing

Consol1...3 account,

Consolidate YTD,

consolidation application requirements,

158

Consolidation Account Type,

325

consolidation accounts active account,

Consol1...3 account, 345

DOWN account,

345 method account, 345

PCON account, 345

PCTRL account,

POWN account,

Consolidation Method,

341

Consolidation Method dimension type description,

Consolidation Rules,

Control, 341

copying dimensions, 88

Country dimension type,

creating import profiles, 64

description,

creating applications

D

consolidation,

Planning,

D-T-D, Day-to-date,

creating dimension associations,

creating dimensions,

creating import files

dimension library, 47

creating members, 127

creating shared members, 128

creation

about, 21

CrossRef(accountName) function, 149

CrossRef(accountName, prefix) function,

conversions with, 168 defining in an applications, 168 multiple, 168

currencies

reporting,

currency,

name,

reporting,

requirements for redeploying,

triangulating,

362

Currency Code,

362

Currency dimension type,

currency for Entity members, 364

description,

currency properties consolidation,

Planning,

Currency Symbol,

custom dimensions

excluding,

naming,

custom properties consolidation,

330

Planning,

custom time periods, Planning,

Custom Top Member, 325

CYTD(memberName) function,

CYTD(memberName, calTpIndexName, fiscalTpIndexName) function,

Index

463

data distribution over time,

impact of deleting members, 243

data flow editing synchronizations,

230 executing synchronizations, 230

focal application,

validating synchronizations, 230

viewing, 228

viewing synchronizations,

data forms, impact of deleting members, 243

data sources

configuring the Essbase server, 256

creating and editing,

deleting, 257

entering information,

managing,

starting the Data Source wizard, 255

selecting, 256

supporting Unicode, 256

viewing details, 257

Data Storage shared members use ShareData,

using to optimize performance, 355

data synchronization

adding and editing filter criteria, 276

applications, 262

assigning default members,

changing the data synchronizer view, 286

copying reusable filters, 275

creating mapping tables,

280 ,

283

creating reusable filters,

271

creating taskflows,

308

creating using interface tables, 267

data interface tables, 265

defining the interface area, 266

deleting, 287

deleting reusable filters, 276

destination dimension rule syntax,

281

duplicating, 287 editing, 287

editing from data flow,

230

editing mapping tables,

executing from data flow, 230

editing reusable filters,

274

executing,

288

external files, 267

filters,

286

inserting reusable filters,

mapping, 279

mapping dimensions, 269

274

mapping tables,

multiple currency applications, 264

member query functions,

421

navigating the data synchronizer, 285

removing reusable filters, 275

saving,

source dimension rule syntax,

280

understanding,

261

validating, 288

validating from data flow,

230

viewing in data flow,

working with the data synchronizer, 285

Decimal Separator, 361

Default Alias Table

defining, 353

requirements for deploying,

Default Currency,

337 ,

requirements for redeploying,

Default Frequency,

Default Frequency For IC Transactions,

default members assigning for data synchronizations,

Default Parent, 325 ,

Default Rate For Balance Accounts,

Default Rate For Flow Accounts,

Default Value For Active, 337

Default View, 334

defining

Consolidation Method, 341

deleted members checking Show Usage in Planning,

checking usage before deploying,

, 243

deleting

jobs, 303

deleting dimension associations

dimension library, 87

deleting dimensions,

deleting import profiles,

deleting members

dimension library, 136

dense dimensions, 81

and performance,

changing to sparse, 369

464

Index

deploying

BegBalance required for,

checking Show Usage, 233 ,

243 deleting members, implications of, 243

Essbase (ASO) applications, 239

Essbase (BSO) applications, 239

Essbase BSO applications, 239

excluding members,

full, not partial dimension update,

232

Planning considerations,

required dimensions,

Scenario required for Planning,

shared members, with ShareData, 133

troubleshooting, 232 ,

, 368

Version required for Planning,

Year required for Planning, 368

YearTotal required for,

viewing dimension associations, 87

deployment

about, 21

Descendants member query function,

426

dimension removing in applications,

213

Dimension Alias, in System Properties,

dimension associations

creating, 86

deleting, 87 viewing, 87

213

Dimension Library

associations, 81

new Planning dimensions,

dimension library

dimension order changing,

Dimension Sort Order property,

dimension types

AllocationType,

Attribute,

attribute,

business,

Consolidation Method, 46

defined,

ICP,

Measures,

POV,

POV dimensions,

POV Display Order, 187 ,

Smart List,

View,

Dimension(dimtag) function,

Profitability and Cost Management, 180

dimensions

microcosting, 190

Account, 357

adding to applications, 161 ,

171

adding to applications manually,

184

, 195

associations, 81

copying,

copying into folders, 92

creating, 78

deleting, 95 ,

deploying, considerations for, 232

dense,

Entity, 363

excluding,

88 named generations, modifying, 88

flat files, specifying associations,

hierarchies,

managing in dimension library,

MeasuresDetailed ,

192

named generations, deleting,

named generations, working with,

named levels, deleting,

90 named levels, modifying, 90

named levels, working with,

naming conventions,

naming conventions for Planning, 85

organizing,

Planning-specific information, 351

Index

465

predefined,

relationship to members, 81

requirements for redeploying,

243

sparse,

statistical properties,

403

system properties, 404

user-defined,

Display In ICT, 343

display order

POV dimensions,

187 ,

199

Display Order option for Smart Lists,

111

distribution of data over time periods,

133 renaming Year and Period, 133

DOWN account, 345

down arrows in data cells,

109

DTS members predefined,

Dynamic Calc and Dynamic Calc and Store options,

Dynamic Time Series (DTS),

E

editing mapping tables,

editing import profiles, 74

Enable Custom Aggregation,

325

Enable Data Audit,

326

, 335

Enable for Process Management, 366 ,

Enable Metadata Security Filtering,

Enable Process Management,

335

End Period, 366

End Year, 366

Entity dimension, 363

Entity dimension type,

description,

Entity members and plan types,

354

currency, 364

Entity properties consolidation,

for formula expressions, 150

for Planning, 363

equity Account type summary,

error messages

redeployment, 242

Essbase

Essbase (ASO) applications

deployment requirements, 239

239 deployment requirements, 239

Essbase (BSO) deploying,

239

redeploying,

244

Essbase (BSO) applications deployment guidelines,

examples

Fiscal Year First Month and Fiscal Start Year options,

174

exchange rate tables, defining for Scenarios,

exchange rates, types for Account members,

excluded members checking Show Usage in Planning,

data synchronizations, 288

excluding members

in compare results, 228

executing

data synchronizations from data flow, 230

expense account behavior,

expense Account type summary,

and variance reporting, 358

expense account type

Expense Reporting option, 358

Expense setting,

FDM Application Name, 340

expressions. See formula expressions

F

limitations,

201

deployment guidelines,

239

fill time balance property, 359

filtering

adding and editing criteria for, 276

copying a reusable dimension filter,

275

deleting reusable dimension filters,

276

dimensions in data synchronizations, 271

274 ,

275

editing reusable filter dimensions, 274

members,

First Fiscal Year option, 174

filters creating in the job console,

298

466

Index

other user jobs in the job console,

300

synchronizations, 286

your jobs in the job console,

300

First time balance property, 359

Fiscal First Year

described, 368

fiscal start month, requirements for redeploying, 242

Fiscal Start Year,

format for,

fiscal start year, setting up,

Fiscal Year First Month option, 174

Fiscal Year First Month and Fiscal Start Year options,

174

Fiscal Year First Month property, 165

Fiscal Year Start Date option,

flat file import creating taskflows,

308

flow

viewing data, 228

flow account behavior,

Flow time balance property,

focal application changing,

folders adding dimensions,

copying dimensions,

formula expressions,

error messages for,

prerequisites for using,

syntax for,

using in member formulas,

using Smart Lists in, 150

functions. See formula expressions

member query, 421

G

Generic dimension type description,

getCalendarTPIndex() function, 149 getFiscalTPIndex() function, 149

I

H

H-T-D, History-to-date,

hierarchies section

Holding Company,

HSP_NOLINK,

IChildren member query function,

424

ICP, 346

ICP dimension type description,

ICP Entities Aggregation Weight, 338

ICP members

system generated, 346

ICP Top Member,

326

import files

creating, 47

Dimension Associations section, 50

Dimensions section,

Hierarchies section, 52

Members section,

Property Array section, 54

import profiles

creating, 64

deleting, 75

editing, 74

importing dimensions,

managing,

viewing, 75

Import Profiles, and Planning, 81

import results,

302

instances, working with,

intercompany partners, setting up, 346

interface area

defining, 266

interface data source

configuring, 57

deleting, 59

editing, 58

interface table import creating taskflows,

interface tables

Index

467

deleting, 59

editing, 58

overview, 56

system tables,

IParent member query function, 424

Is Consolidated,

Is Holding Method,

Is ICP,

entities,

J

job

attachments, 301

deleting, 303

types, 295

job console

changing the view, 298 creating filters, 298

deleting jobs,

refreshing,

security,

300 security for displaying jobs, 300 security for submitting jobs, 300

viewing job attachments,

301

working with, 295

jobs managing,

295

L

Label Only option,

labels

leap year, accounting for,

Level0 member query function, 430

liability account behavior, 328

liability Account type summary,

M-T-D, Month-to-date, 133

Lifecycle Management,

limitations

Essbase,

201

loading dimensions, using flat files,

M

management application,

managing

jobs, 295

managing import profiles,

mapping

about, 279

creating tables,

280

deleting, 287

dimensions for synchronizations, 269

tables,

mapping tables

Match member query function,

428

Maximum Cell Text Size, 338

Maximum Document Attachment Size,

Maximum Number of Document Attachments,

Maximum Review Level, 335

Measures dimension, 180

Measures dimension type description,

MeasuresDetailed dimension,

192

Member - member query function,

427

member formulas

Planning,

using formula expressions in,

viewing results of validation, 147

working with, 146

member query functions, 421

members

aggregation properties, 356

assigning default,

considerations for refreshing, 370

deleting, 136 ,

deleting, implications of, 243

excluding,

excluding in applications,

153

naming conventions,

of the Entity dimension, 354

Planning-specific information, 351

removing,

136

system properties, 404

468

Index

working with shared members, membership

Performance Management Architect, 34 ,

viewing application, 216

132

menus

35 ,

metadata

considerations for refreshing, 370

metadata integrity, 348

method account,

microcosting dimension types, 190

missing data in Account calculations, 360

modifying applications

Planning,

171

modules

Performance Management Architect, 22

monthly distribution patterns,

multiple currencies, 168

242 ,

multiple UDAs for a single member, 355

Number of Fiscal Years option,

174

NumberOfPeriodsInYear variable, 148

NumberOfYears variable,

OpenInputValueBlock variable, 148

O

optimizing performance,

Org By Period Application,

organization by period, 340

orphan members, 136

outline, considerations for updating,

370

ownership accounts

SharesOutstanding account, 346

SharesOwned account, 346

VotingOutstanding account, 346

VotingOwned account, 346

N

Name,

named generations

creating, 88 deleting, 88

modifying,

named levels

creating, 90 deleting, 90

modifying,

naming conventions, for Planning,

naming restrictions

applications, 371

dimensions, members, and aliases,

Performance Management Architect, 32

navigating

job console, 297

navigation

Negative Color,

362

Negative Sign, 362

Never aggregation property, 356

Never Share option, 355

No Year member, described, 368

Node Security, 338

non-expense Account types,

Non-Expense setting,

Number Of Decimal Place, 327

P

P-T-D, Period-to-date, renaming Period member,

Parent member query function,

PCON account,

Percent Consol,

Percent Consol Value,

percent consolidation, 345 percent control, 345 percent direct ownership, 345

percent ownership,

performance changing dimension order,

optimizing in applications,

plan type settings,

Planning-specific information, 351

setting data type evaluation order,

177

Performance Management Architect

about, 21

Period dimension,

364

Period dimension type description,

Period(periodName) function,

Period, changing,

Period-to-date, renaming Period, 133

permissions, assigning for Planning,

Phased Submission Start Year, 335

Plan Name, 352

Index

469

plan types

Entity members,

Planning,

requirements for redeploying,

setting, 352

setting up in applications,

167

Plan1, Plan2, and Plan3 plan types, described,

352

Planning access permissions,

Account Type, 358

Account type combinations,

aggregation properties, 356

Accounts, 357

adding dimension members with Import Profiles,

alias tables,

alias tables, default, 353

application properties,

352

application requirements,

165

applications, deploying, 242

attribute values,

base time period,

BegBalance member,

default alias table, 353

defining plan types,

167

deleting members, implications of, 243

deployment considerations,

dimensions,

Entity properties, 363

examples of Account calculation,

exchange rate tables,

Exchange Rate Type,

Expense Reporting option,

Fiscal Start Year, 232 ,

fiscal start year and month,

member formulas,

members, deleting, 137

members, excluding,

modifying application settings, 171

multiple currencies,

naming conventions,

plan name,

predefined dimensions,

165

, 168 ,

process management, enabling for,

, 367

properties for,

354

redeployment considerations,

selecting dimensions, 168

reporting currency, 363

Scenario, 366

shared members, setting Data Storage to ShareData,

shared members, working with,

132

Source Plan Type,

sparse and dense dimension, 81

specifying the default currency, 168

target and bottom-up versions,

time balance property examples, 359

Two Pass Calc,

UDAs,

YearTotal member,

planning units, impact of deleting members, 243

Plug Account, 327

POV

POV dimension,

187 ,

199

POV Display Order, 187 ,

199

POV dimension, 180

POWN account, 345

predefined dimensions requirements for deploying,

165 ,

168

PreviousCalendarYear option, 175

requirements for redeploying,

243

prerequisites

applications, 157

previous releases compatibility,

350

process

creating applications, 26

process management, using with Planning, 366

deployment validation, 237

Profitability and Cost Management

redeployment validation, 246

properties

470

Index

Aggregation Weight,

Allow Adjustments,

base time period,

Calc Attribute,

consolidation

Account,

custom,

Entity,

Scenario,

Consolidation Account Type, 325

consolidation properties currency,

343

Consolidation Rules, 337

Control,

341

currency, 333

347

Allow Adjustments From Children,

333

Custom Top Member,

325

Default Alias Table, 353

Default Currency, 337

Default Frequency For IC Transactions, 334

Default Frequency, 334

Default Parent,

Default Rate For Balance Accounts, 337

Default Rate For Flow Accounts, 337

Default Value For Active,

Default View,

Enable Custom Aggregation, 325

Display In ICT,

343

effect of changing dimension from sparse to dense,

369

Enable Data Audit, 326 ,

335

Enable Metadata Security Filtering, 337

Enable Process Management, 335

FDM Application Name,

340

Holding Company, 333

ICP Entities Aggregation Weight,

Is Calculated,

Is Holding Method, 341

Is ICP, 326 ,

333

Maximum Cell Text Size,

Maximum Document Attachment Size, 338

Maximum Number of Document Attachments,

Number Of Decimal Places, 327

Maximum Review Level,

335

Multiple Currencies, 353

name,

Node Security,

Org By Period Application, 338

Percent Consol, 341

Percent Consol Value, 342

Phased Submission Start Year,

Plan Name,

Planning,

Plug Account,

Security As Partner, 333

Security For Accounts, 338

Security For Custom, 339

Security For Entities, 339

Security For ICP, 339

Security For Scenarios, 339

Start Month,

Submission Group,

Support Submission Phase for Account,

Support Submission Phase for Custom,

Support Submission Phase for ICP, 339

Switch Sign For Flow, 332

Switch Type For Flow, 332

system,

To Percent Control,

To Percent Control Compare, 342

Translation Operator, 344

Use PVA For Balance Accounts, 339

Use PVA For Flow Accounts, 340

Used By Calc Routine, 342

User Defined 1...3, 327

User Defined1...3,

Uses Line Items,

Validation Account,

Zero View For Adjustments,

Zero View For Non-adjustments,

Q-T-D, Quarter-to-date, 133

Index

471

property values, effect of changing dimension from

sparse to dense, 369

source dimension used in data synchronizations,

280

Q

R

range of time periods, setting, 364

redeploying

applications, 241

checking Show Usage, 233 ,

243

currency issues,

Essbase (ASO) applications, 244

Essbase (BSO) applications, 244

Essbase BSO applications, 244

Planning considerations,

Scenario considerations, 366

troubleshooting, 242 ,

Year dimension considerations,

referential integrity, 348

redeployment creating taskflows,

309

Profitability,

246

refreshing

job console, 298

refreshing databases considerations for,

370

removing members,

136

reporting currencies,

363

requirements

Aggregate Storage option applications,

202

Block Storage option applications,

202

Essbase (ASO) applications, 202

Essbase (BSO) applications, 202

reserved characters,

371

results

viewing import, 302

revenue account behavior, 328

revenue Account type summary,

Performance Management Architect, 27

roles

rule syntax destination dimension used in data

synchronizations, 281

S

S-T-D, Season-to-date, 133

SameCalendarYear option,

Performance Management Architect, 63

sample tables

saved assumptions,

Scale,

scaling,

Scenario

access permissions, defining, 366 deleting, 366

deployment, required for,

process management, enabling for,

time periods, defining,

Scenario dimension type description,

Scenario properties consolidation,

Scenario properties, for Planning, 366

Scenarios

exchange rate tables, defining, 366

security, 27

for displaying jobs,

300

for submitting jobs,

300 in job console, 300

Security As Partner,

Security Class,

Security Class dimension type description,

Security For Accounts,

Security For Custom,

Security For Entities,

Security For ICP,

Security For Scenarios,

setting up Alias dimensions, 82

Set Base Member, not using in Planning,

132

setting up, 346

setting up ICP, 346

Share Data, setting for shared members, 355

Share option,

setting Data Storage to ShareData, 133

shared members

creating, 128

working with, 132

472

Index

Shared Services taskflows viewing participant details, viewing participant status,

ShareData

319

318

deployment with,

133 setting for shared members, 133

SharesOutstanding account,

SharesOwned account,

Siblings member query function,

426

single currency, redeploying,

Skip options,

Skip Value setting,

naming considerations, 110

Smart List dimension type description,

Smart Lists

and data entry, 109

representing #missing, 112

setting properties, 111

using in formula expressions,

working with, 109

Source Plan Type, 359

source plan type, and accounts,

sparse dimensions, 81

and performance,

effect of changing to dense,

369

spreading data, 173

Start Month, 353

requirements for deploying,

requirements for redeploying,

Start Period,

Start Year,

requirements for redeploying,

statistical properties, 403

Store Data option,

Support Submission Phase for Account, 339

Submission Group, 327 ,

331 ,

347

summary time periods changing the range,

364 creating, 364

Support Submission Phase for Custom, 339

Support Submission Phase for ICP,

Switch Sign For Flow,

Switch Type For Flow,

synchronizations creating mapping tables,

280 ,

283

saving,

synchronizing data, 261

system accounts active account,

Consol1...3 account, 345

DOWN account,

345 method account, 345

PCON account, 345

PCTRL account,

POWN account,

SharesOutstanding account, 346

SharesOwned account, 346

VotingOutstanding account, 346

VotingOwned account, 346

system properties dimensions,

404

members,

404

System Properties, using Dimension Alias, 81

T

tables

mapping, 278

target versions, description,

task automation

prerequisites,

taskflows

copying,

creating data synchronization, 308

creating flat file imports,

308 creating interface table imports, 308

creating redeployment, 309

creating stages,

managing,

running manually,

Thousands Separator, 361

time balance calculations, 360

Time Balance property,

time balance property examples,

Time dimension type,

Index

473

description,

time periods changing,

defining for Scenario,

practical limit, 364

time periods dimension, about,

364

To Percent Control, 342

To Percent Control Compare,

Performance Management Architect, 33

toolbars

Workspace, 33

TopOfHierarchy member query function,

429

Translation Operator,

344

triangulation, 362

triangulation currency, consequence of deleting, 243

troubleshooting deploying for Planning, 232

troubleshooting redeploying for Planning, 242

Two Pass Calc, 357

Two Pass Calculation option,

types of dimensions,

U

UDAs

HSP_UDF,

Planning,

Unicode Mode option, 256

Use Beginning Balance,

, 366

Use PVA For Balance Accounts,

Use PVA For Flow Accounts,

340

Used By Calc Routine,

User Defined1...3, 327 ,

, 334 ,

Uses Line Items, 328 ,

variance reporting and Account type, 359

Value dimension type value members

editing, 347

system generated, 346

variance reporting, 358

Version

bottom-up, 367 required for Planning deployment, 367 target, 367

Version dimension type description,

Version Type, 367

Versions process management, enabling for,

filtering synchronizations, 286

view

View dimension type description,

viewing data flow,

228

viewing application membership

dimension library, 88

viewing dimension associations

dimension library, 87

viewing import profiles, 75

VotingOutstanding account,

VotingOwned account,

W

Profitability, description,

237

, 246

W-T-D, Week-to-date, 133

weekly distribution patterns,

Weeks ,

weeks, requirements for redeploying, 242

Weighted Average time balance properties,

data synchronizations, 288

V

Valid for plan setting

and Account members, 357

and Entity members, 354

validating

applications, 230

231

data synchronizations from data flow, 230

Validation Account, 340

validation conditions

Y

Y-T-D, Year-to-date, renaming Year member,

Year requirements for deploying,

Year dimension,

Year dimension type description,

Year dimension, described,

474

Index

Year-to-date, renaming Year,

adding to calendar, 368 changing current, 368

years

maximum, 364

No Year member, described,

practical limit, 364

requirements for redeploying,

YearTotal member

editing, 365

required for deployment,

Zero View For Adjustments, 336

Z

Zero View For Non-adjustments, 336

zeros in Account calculations,